LISTA STORAGE SOLUTIONS FOR MOTORSPORT

CALL US NOW OR SEND AN E-MAIL

BENEFITS

01908 222333 info.uk@lista.com www

+ Proven expertise Many years of experience equipping all areas of Motorsport

+ Customisation Define your exact requirements

+ Completely universal From a single mobile cabinet to full facility fit out

+ Modular design Universal modular system

+ Top industrial quality 10 Year guarantee

.com

.lista

Motorsport 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 - Rally 434 UK

CHAPTER 13 RALLY

This Chapter must be read in conjunction with Chapters 1 – 9 and 11 .

The following Appendices comprise this Chapter: App.1 App.2 App.3 App.4 App.5 App.6 App.7 App.8 App.9 App.10 App.11A App.11B App.11C App.12 App.13 App.14 App.15 App.16 App.17 App.18 App.19 App.20 App.21 App.22 App.23 App.24

Regulations applying to all Rallies including Public Relations and Sound Testing Duties and Responsibilities of Clerks of the Course for All Types of Rally Specific Regulations for Road Events Road Events – Routes and Sections Road Events – Controls and Timing Including Results Exemption of Permit Events Road Scheduled Time Events Target Timed Special Stage Event Penalties Competitors Regulations including Licensing Competitors Specific Regulations for Special Stage Rallies Specific Regulations for Special Stage Rallies Specific Regulations for Single Venue Stage Rallies and Rally Time Trials Specific Regulations for Targa Rallies Special Stage Routes and Sections Special Stage Controls, Timing and Penalties Schedule Timed Special Stage Event Penalties Technical Regulations - Road, Endurance and Historic Road Rally Cars Technical Regulations - Special Stage Rally Cars Technical Regulations - Historic Special Stage Rally Cars Servicing and Organised Assistance PR Requirements Charts Medical and Safety Cover Specific Regulations for Junior Rally Driver Championships Specific Regulations for Special Stage Practice / Training Events Rally Drawings Class Requirements

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 - Rally 435

CHAPTER 13 RALLY Appendix 1 - Regulations Applying to All Rallies including Public Relations and Sound Testing

1. General

1.1. This Appendix must be read in conjunction with all applicable Appendices to this Chapter and Chapters 3 and 5 and 7 .

1.2. Any Competition traversing a Public Highway in England Wales or Scotland is subject to the provisions of the Motor Vehicles ( Competitions and Trials) Regulations . Applications to run such events must be made to the Competition Authorisation Office ( CAO ) at the ASN or in the case of Scotland to the Royal Scottish Automobile Club . Details of the authorisation procedure are available from either organisation.

1.3. The ASN Permit must be obtained for all Events before they are run.

1.4. The ASN Permit applications must be made in accordance with Chapter 3 prior to the CAO Authorisation being granted.

1.5. The Permit and the CAO Authorisation (where applicable) numbers must be shown in all Final Instructions .

1.6. The Permit itself is validated only when authorisation has been granted.

1.7. Clubs must not allow a new Organiser to organise any Event without there being strict checks by experienced people concerning compliance with these Regulations .

1.8. Organisers of Interclub and higher status Events must have sufficient previous organisation experience.

1.9. The ASN will appoint a Safety Delegate to all Multi- Venue Stage Rallies and any other Stage Rally including Rally Time Trials and Rally Demonstration Events where the ASN deems it appropriate to do so.

1.10. The use of the public forest estates managed by Natural Resources Wales (‘NRW’), Forestry and Land Scotland (‘FLS’) and Forestry England (‘FE’) must have been approved by the ASN . Permission must be applied for by an annually specified date prior to the Forestry year (which runs 1 January - 31 December).

1.11. No contact should be made with NRW , FLS or FE respectively before receiving approval from the ASN or its appointed Forestry Liaison Officer or Rally4Wales .

1.12. Specifically in the case of Rally if a Championship Round is cancelled or changes its date due to reasons of Force Majeure then the Championship Organisers may arrange for an alternative Event or date for an Event to be included in the Championship calendar. Subject to the overriding authority of the ASN only one such change to that Championship is permitted and is subject to prior ASN approval and will only be permitted if less than 15% of the Competitors registered for the Championship object in writing to the change.

1.13. Any Organising Club or Promotor who proposes to establish a new Stage Rally or Targa Road Rally , or Rally Championship , must complete an Expression of Interest form and submit this to the ASN Head of Rallying in advance for ratification. No promotion must take place prior to ratification by the ASN .

2. National Courses

2.1. The selection of any route for a Competition is subject to ASN approval. When requesting approval a detailed itinerary must be submitted giving the exact distances to be covered.

2.2. Where appropriate The Motor Vehicles ( Competitions and Trials) Regulations must be complied with in all respects.

3. International Courses

3.1. When the projected route of an Event traverses the territory of other ASNs the Organisers (through the UK ASN ) must obtain the consent of all ASNs through whose territories the route may pass.

3.2. The selection of roads to be used and a detailed itinerary with expected speeds and distances must be approved by the ASN concerned.

3.3. The ASN may impose specific restrictions on the number or character of events that traverse any foreign territory.

4. Other Events

4.1. Certain Events also qualify for a Permit or Exemption Certificate ( Chapter 3 ) provided they meet the ASN Regulations for organising Rallies .

5. Upgrading of Events

5.1. For a Rally to be considered for upgrading from Clubman to Interclub status of a similar format it must be observed as a Clubman Event and have a minimum of 25 starters unless special ASN dispensation has previously been agreed in writing.

5.2. For upgrading to National Stage Rally there must have been a minimum Entry of 50 as an Interclub Event of a similar format to that proposed for two consecutive years preceding first time application. Thereafter the minimum Entry must not be less than 50 in one of two consecutive years.

5.3. Upgrading to an International Stage Rally will be at the discretion of the ASN .

6. Public Relations

6.1. Public Relations work must be undertaken by Organisers on all Events using the Public Highway in accordance with the current legislation and as follows:

Consult with the Route Liaison Officers before starting PR work . If the RLO requires additional PR work in sensitive areas this must be undertaken.

Be diplomatic positive and clear about the legal aspects of route authorisation.

If the Event is run in England or Wales do not intimate that it is authorised by the Police.

Avoid asking for ‘authorisation’ or ‘permission’ from house-holders – it invites unnecessary difficulties.

All PR work must be by responsible members of the Organising Club or of a Local Club .

The work should be completed to allow enough time to undertake a re-route should this prove necessary.

All PR letters must be checked by the RLO and must indicate who is the Organiser (with a contact address including email and phone number) the date of the Event in which direction it is travelling and the approximate time of passing.

h. Special consideration should be given to householders with pets or livestock.

6.2. Where an Organiser is intending to publish a guide to the route or specific locations for spectators to see the Event ensure that:

Householders within 500m of any specifically advised location have been effectively PR ’d without difficulty and these areas are marshalled.

b. The information issued contains warnings of locations that spectators must avoid (blackspots, sensitive areas etc). c.

Ensure that each PR crew prepares reports on each visit and these are available to the Clerk of the Course and the Stewards on the day of the Event and to the RLO on request.

Special note must be made about problem areas for the benefit of future Events and these reports must be passed on to RLOs .

6.3. Contact should be made with local Police before and immediately after all Events . 6.4. Rallies with Special Stages including Single Venue Stage Rallies must comply with Appendix 19 Charts 1 and 2 .

7. Noise Testing

7.1. Before the start of a Competition all Competitors ’ cars and those Officials ’ cars that are expected to follow a substantial part of the route must pass a sound test.

7.2. This test must be conducted by an Environmental Scrutineer using a sound meter as prescribed in the Technical Regulations at Chapters 5 and 7 ..

7.3. Any Vehicle reading over 98dB(A) in this test will be prohibited from starting (except in Special Stage Rallies where a level of 100dB(A) is permitted) unless the Official Documents specify lower levels.

7.4. All measurements refer to the 0.5m test in Chapter 7 . Wherever practical the 2.0m test should be used for Road and Targa Road Rallies .

7.5. For Vehicles of Periods A to D there is a waiver from the requirement to use a sound meter on daytime Events but Driving Standards Observers for sound must be appointed.

7.6. The Organisers must make arrangements for a suitable testing site to be available and ensure that adequate personnel are appointed.

7.7. A further sound test of the same Vehicles must be made on any road sections and these should be manned by a Driving Standards Observer and / or Judge of Fact appointed and named in the Official Documents and qualified to carry out their duties by experience.

7.8. The DSO have the authority to stop any Vehicle until it complies with relevant sound regulations.

8. Instructions to Competitors 8.1. In addition to the requirement of Chapter 3 the Official Documents for the Event must clearly state:

The type of Rally ( Road / Navigational / Stage etc) that is being organised and if there will be Standard Sections , Special Stages , Regularity Sections or other types of Special Test .

b. When details of the route or any test or stage will be issued. c. Any maps required (including their scale and issue reference and any modification of App.10 Art.7.42 ). d.

In any dispute concerning mileages these shall be calculated according to 1:50000 OS maps (or equivalent local maps).

Any modification of the Event Regulations in relation to Pace Notes , Subjective Route Notes or other means of giving Competitors advice relating to the traversing of a Special Stage . ( App.10 Art.7.42 )

f. The type of timing to be used. g. A reminder of which sub-sections of the Technical Regulations apply. h. Whether or not Vehicles are required to be taxed and insured for use on the public highway. i.

Whether servicing is permitted and if so then the manner in which Service Vehicles must be identified by Official Service Plates affixed to the Service Vehicle .

Any information which is required in relation to checks established by the Organisers to observe maintenance of a set speed and / or time schedule and / or route.

8.2. No oral instruction to Competitors during an Event will be valid if this affects the route the time schedule or the layout or performance of a Stage or test.

8.3. Any instruction concerning these aspects must be displayed as an Official notice at least 30 minutes before the first Vehicle is due to start or issued in writing to each Competitor who must acknowledge receipt in writing. The instruction and acknowledgment are Official Documents .

9. Documentation 9.1. All documentation issued by the Organisers is deemed an Official Document under the NCR and the

Route Card , Road Book or Time Card must specify the following:

a. A description of each section ( Standard , Neutral , Transport Regularity etc). b.

The time allowed to traverse the route between each time Control and all the information necessary to enable Competitors to comply with it.

c. What information the Organisers require to be recorded and the locations ( Controls – see App.13 ) at which these records will be made except as provided for in Art.8.1.j. above

d. Which Checks will be manned by Officials except checks established in accordance with Art.8.1.j.. above

e. Which portions of the route will be timed to less than one minute. f. Any ‘out of bounds’ areas to be respected. g.

The areas where the Organisers require Competitors to observe special driving restrictions (ie Quiet Zones ).

h. The order in which Controls and Checks must be visited.

CHAPTER 13 RALLY Appendix 2 - Duties and Responsibilities of Clerks of the Course for All Types of Rally

1. General

1.1. This Appendix must be read in conjunction with all applicable Appendices to this Chapter and Chapters 2 and 3 and 5.

1.2. In addition to organisational responsibilities the Clerk is the first Judicial body at an Event and accordingly is obliged to exercise that responsibility including the provisions of Chapter 2. This responsibility may be delegated to a Deputy Clerk .

2. PART A – All Rallies

2.1. In addition to the duties detailed in Chapter 5 the Clerk of the Course should ensure compliance with the following:

The organisation and Regulations for the Event must meet the requirements of the relevant Statutory Instruments.

Reasonable precautions must be taken in the selection of route, time of day, control of spectators and any other relevant factors to avoid inconvenience to the general public.

The Organisers must familiarise themselves with the medical and ambulance facilities along the route.

d. Effective Public Relations work must be carried out in accordance with App.1 Art.6.1–6.4 . e.

In farming areas Event details must be sent to the appropriate County Secretary of the National Farmers’ Union and any similar National bodies.

The appointed CAO Route Liaison Officer ( RLO ) for each of the Counties and National Parks through which the route passes must be consulted about the draft route at least three months before the Event date and before submission to the CAO . This is particularly important when special public relations work in sensitive areas is required.

The Route Liaison Officer must also be consulted as above in respect of Single Venue Stage Rallies and all other Rallies whether using the Public Highway or not.

2.2. The RLO may:

a. Request the sight of all paperwork relating to the Event including PR sheets. b.

Request the CAO where applicable to suspend authorisation or the ASN to suspend the Permit until the route or the effectiveness of the PR work in his area has been confirmed.

c. Require the Clerk of the Course to order re-routes as appropriate to avoid areas of special concern. d.

Exercise discretionary judgement on where competitive sections may be run and their length and withhold agreement to the route if not satisfied with any aspect of the organisational standards or route planning.

Require the Clerk of the Course to order additional technical restrictions on Vehicles as appropriate in their area with the approval of the ASN .

2.3. Private property of any description must not be used without written permission from the landowner or authorised agent.

2.4. The necessary permission from Highway Authorities must be obtained in respect of all Footpaths , Bridleways and Restricted Byways that are used or crossed and any conditions laid down must be adhered to. These locations must be adequately marshalled by Officials who are well briefed and properly identified. One Official must be appointed for each such section to ensure that the Event is seen not

to inconvenience unduly members of the public. The Official must have a good working knowledge of the Rights of Use applying to the Section . Alternative routes for other Rights of Way users must be signposted. Warning Notices in accordance with Chapter 3 as appropriate and the Safety Code should be on display in all such areas.

2.5. Appropriate sanitation must be available throughout the route of the Event the locations of which must be communicated within Event documents. Particular consideration must be given to locations prior to Special Stages and at Service Areas and Rest Halts . Local authority guidance is especially relevant in respect of the provision for Spectators. Further guidance is given in the Stage Rally Safety Requirements .

2.6. No person may drive more than 200 miles continuously without relief and there must be a prescribed rest period of at least one hour for each Driver at intervals of not more than 200 miles.

2.7. Any Event that runs for more than 14 hours must unless previously agreed by the ASN have a rest halt of at least two hours.

2.8. Wherever Competitors are on a Public Highway they must be controlled by a pre-determined speed schedule unless they are allowed to complete the Event in their own time. This schedule must not require or encourage Drivers to exceed any statutory limits where imposed or be considered dangerous or unreasonable in relation to prevailing traffic conditions and the nature of the route.

2.9. No time or speed schedule must be imposed which requires or encourages Competitors while using a highway open to the public to achieve an average speed between any two points that exceeds the following limits:

30mph for Vehicles in the case of all highways other than motorways. For sections run on minor roads under 4m wide during daylight hours (07.00 to 22.00 hrs) the average speed may not be greater than 20mph unless agreed by the RLO .

b. 60mph for cars in the case of motorways. c. 25mph in the case of any Vehicle subject to a speed limit (such as vans). d. 20mph for Vehicles on neutral sections (except on M A or B class roads). 2.10. There must be no bonus for exceeding the specified average.

2.11. Competitors must be given in advance by Official Document (s) all the information necessary to enable them to calculate the speed that they are being asked to average ( App.5 ).

2.12. The Organisers may establish a check at any point for the purpose of observing maintenance of a set speed and/or time schedule and/or route provided that Competitors are advised of these checks in the Official Documents and are given all the necessary information to enable compliance.

2.13. Where Competitors are going onto a highway from private ground every practicable precaution should be taken to avoid depositing mud or soil on the highway.

2.14. The use of gated roads should be avoided if practicable but if Competitors are to traverse a gated road then adequate arrangements must be made to ensure that all gateways are manned by Marshals who must ensure that no Competitor is required to open a gate and that all gates are closed after the Competition .

2.15. Occupiers of land adjacent to the road must be advised before the Competition .

2.16. Except when used as Special Stages the use of single-track roads should be avoided if practicable during daylight but if Competitors are to traverse such roads the speed set must be lowered as appropriate.

2.17. Those sections of an Event involving difficult navigation by means of map references or a detailed route card must be scheduled so that no Competitor is traversing minor roads during the busy morning or evening hours unless the required average speed is not more than 20mph.

2.18. Controls must be sited at places where there is adequate room for Officials ’ and Competitors ’ Vehicles to stop without affecting non-Rally traffic.

2.19. Controls must be sited at least 500m from occupied houses except where written approval has been obtained from the occupants.

2.20. All Controls must be clearly identified at the roadside ( App.5 ).

2.21. Controls at which Competitors are required to stop for the purposes of recording a time and which are on the public highway must not be less than two miles from any similar control.

2.22. Competitors must be provided with all necessary regulatory information at or before their starting time.

2.23. Competitors must be started on the road sections of a Rally at intervals of one minute and will leave the start in numerical order unless the Official Documents specify a longer time interval or a different order. Road sections prior to a Stage must be a minimum of five minutes regardless of distance.

2.24. Events must provide additional road timing when utilising media interviews at Stage ends. A figure of one additional minute is recommended.

2.25. On Road Rallies reverse seeding is not permitted.

2.26. After a Rally has started the Organisers must not accept any claim from Competitors concerning either Force Majeure or baulking. Nonetheless the Clerk of the Course has the judicial discretion to disqualify any Competitor proven to have unreasonably baulked another ( Art.4.39 below).

2.27. Wherever possible the Event route should be checked for damage immediately before and after the Event .

2.28. The Safety Delegate , Stewards and Observers (as appropriate to the Event ) must be supplied with a complete marked map of the route before the date of the Event and must also be supplied with a set of all instructions and route cards that are issued to Competitors and Officials as soon as they are available.

2.29. Competition Licences should be signed proving that the holders completed the Event without adverse report. Signatures may be obtained by both the Driver and the Navigator or Co- Driver .

2.30. The Chief Timekeeper appointed for the Event is responsible for issuing timing equipment and ensuring that the Marshals are competent to use it.

2.31. The Chief Timekeeper must be able to deal with operational problems affecting timing equipment.

2.32. Any section of an Event that is timed to less than one minute must be timed by certified equipment digital clocks to ASN specification R(O/I)R or E/B recording clocks printing to seconds or automatic apparatus.

2.33. All official clocks or watches must be set to GMT / BST time.

2.34. Any official timepiece timing to the minute that is not within 15 seconds of GMT / BST time or any official timepiece timing to the second that is not within five seconds of GMT / BST time will be disregarded.

2.35. If competing Vehicles or service Vehicles are required to carry any identification markings the name of the Organising Clubs must be incorporated except in Single Venue Rallies confined wholly to private property.

2.36. All Official bulletins, Permits and authorisations, times and results (unless issued in accordance with Chapter 3 ) must be published on an Official Notice Board whose location has been notified to Competitors in the Official Documents for the Event ( Chapter 5 ).

2.37. At Events where there are Classes for designated groups or categories of Vehicle suitable arrangements to undertake eligibility checks should be available before the Competition or at its conclusion.

2.38. Any Event with a Class or Classes exclusively for historic Vehicles as defined in the NCR ( Historic Special Stage Rallies ) must appoint a Historic Grade Eligibility Scrutineer . Events with a Class or Classes exclusively for historic Vehicles as defined ( Historic Road Rally Cars ) may be required to appoint a Historic Grade Eligibility Scrutineer at the discretion of the ASN .

2.39. All modified / Competition Vehicles used as Course / Safety Cars on Special Stage and Targa Road Rallies must comply with the relevant Technical and Safety Regulations .

2.40. Technical and Safety Regulation checks may be carried out both before and during an Event .

2.41. The Chief Scrutineer must be available throughout the Event to ensure that the Technical Regulations are complied with.

2.42. When the ASN Safety and Medical Radio frequencies (81.575 and 81.5375MHz FM) are to be used

they must be operated in accordance with Ofcom and ASN licensing requirements (see Art.69.b. below). Operational Guidelines for the use of the ASN Safety and Medical Radio frequencies are issued to all Radio Licence Holders and the Radio Marshals Handbook is published on the ASN website.

3. PART B – Road Events Additional Duties and Responsibilities of the Clerk of the Course are as follows:

3.1. Enforce the obligations of Entrants under the NCR ( Chapter 6 ). 3.2. Ensure the relevant obligations of Organisers under the NCR ( Chapter 3 ). 3.3. Judges of Fact may be appointed to adjudicate on:

a. Failure to stop at Stop or Give Way junction. b. Failure to comply with the requirements of a Test . c. False starts on tests or standard sections. d. Unauthorised use of auxiliary lights. e. Unauthorised possession of recorded notes, radio equipment or intercom ( App.3 ). f. Unauthorised servicing. g. Excessive Noise . h. Violation of out of bounds areas.

3.4. Regional Associations must be advised by Event Organisers at least two months before all Road Rallies including Navigation and Historic Road Rallies take place within their area.

3.5. Regional Associations may appoint a Driving Standards Observer as an Event Official ( Chapter 5 ). 3.6. All other Events may appoint their own Driving Standards Observers ( Chapter 5 ). 3.7. Driving Standards Observers will adjudicate on:

Excessive Vehicle Noise including exhaust induction and transmission sources (observed during the Event ).

b. Excessive speed. c. Driving in a manner likely to bring motor sport into disrepute. d. Compliance with special restrictions e.g. Quiet Zones .

3.8. Any Competitor driving at an excessive speed or recklessly or in a manner likely to bring motor sport into disrepute or convicted of any driving offence committed during an Event may be Disqualified .

3.9. Checks operated by Judges of Fact or DSOs need not be manned for the whole period during which Competitors may report and may operate on a random basis.

3.10. The Official in charge of any control or check may mark or withhold a Competitor ’s Route Card or Time Card if a Vehicle has suffered damage to its exhaust system.

3.11. All Timekeepers will be Judges concerning time recorded.

3.12. For Road Rally Events (as defined by Permit ) and all Events including Special Tests the Chief Scrutineer must be appointed from the list of ASN Technical Officials (NAT).

4. PART C – Special Stage Rallies Additional Duties and Responsibilities of the Clerk of the Course are as follows:

4.1. For all Special Stage Rallies the Clerk of the Course must be licensed by the ASN ( Chapter 5 ). 4.2. Applicants for accreditation as Stage Rally Clerk of the Course will only be considered if appointed by an

Organising Club entitled to run such Events .

4.3. All other motor sporting users of Venues to be used as Special Stages must be notified of arrangements for using the Venue .

4.4. Competitors must be seeded numerically in order of anticipated performance with the first Competitor having the best performance potential unless ASN has given prior approval to the contrary.

4.5. The Chief Scrutineer must be appointed from the list of ASN Technical Officials .

4.6. Ensure that a Safety Plan is produced in accordance with the ASN Stage Rally Safety Requirements and that all Officials involved in the running of the Event are aware of the plan and where appropriate have received training.

4.7. A Stage Commander should be appointed for every Stage with the responsibility for ensuring that the Stage complies with the regulations and that an adequate number of Marshals are appointed.

4.8. Marshal locations should be selected so as not to place them in areas where they may be exposed to significant risk.

4.9. In allocating individual Marshals to specific locations care should be taken to ensure that less experienced Marshals are accompanied by experienced colleagues.

4.10. An Event Safety Officer must be appointed who is experienced in the current operation of Special Stages and who understands the potential of Rally Vehicles in differing weather conditions.

4.11. The Event Safety Officer must be assisted by a Spectator Safety Officer who is responsible for specific arrangements to accommodate spectators in suitable areas, to prevent access to other areas and to make suitable access facilities for spectators’ use.

4.12. The Spectator Safety Officer shall ensure that:

There should be a copy of the Safety Code on display at all entrances where the public are likely to enter.

All and any publication giving Event information online or in print whether published for spectators or Officials must include a copy of the Safety Code .

4.13. The Event Safety Officer is responsible for ensuring that there are effective arrangements to supplement the general marshalling strength organised by the Stage Commander as follows:

There must be pre-determined arrangements available to every Stage Commander for summoning appropriate emergency services via rendezvous points if necessary to the scene of an incident.

At each Stage unless the complete route is visible from the Start or Finish areas there must be provision of an effective radio communications network operated through a nominated Controller under the direction of the Clerk of the Course linking Officials at Start , Finish and intermediate points with Rescue and Medical Services . The frequency must be secure from misuse and be either the ASN Safety Frequency or a privately licensed frequency to Ofcom Regulations . The Controller must be experienced in the use of radios and in controlling a network and must ensure the disciplined use of the radios. Where the ASN Safety Frequency is used the Radio Controller must hold a valid ASN Radio Controllers Licence . Notes on radio procedure are available from ASN .

4.14. Written instructions on the operation of Stages prepared in accordance with the ASN Stage Rally Safety Requirements must be made available to all Officials and Marshals . These must clearly establish:

That the number of Vehicles to be sent through any Stage before the Competition shall be in accordance with the ASN Stage Rally Safety Requirements .

The crew of each Safety Car must have specific duties based on the current ASN Safety Car Roles and Responsibilities. On all Multi Venue Rallies at least two Vehicles of the Safety Car train must complete the entire route

4.15. No Stage must start until the ASN Safety Delegate or subsequent designated Safety Car crew where

applicable has confirmed that it is ready for Competitors and that the Marshals have all spectators on the Stage under their control and direction ( App.20 ).

4.16. There must be no movement of any Vehicle or of the Rescue services once the Stage has opened without the specific approval of the Stage Commander and then only after suspending the Stage and being satisfied that it is cleared of competing Vehicles .

4.17. On any Special Stage where extreme circumstances make it necessary to neutralise the Competition e.g. where spectator safety is compromised or to authorise the movement of non-competing or Rescue Vehicles the system of Red Signals must be in place. These should be located at mid Stage Rescue points all locations where a Rescue / emergency Vehicle may re-enter the Stage following a shortcut and at each mandatory Radio Point ( App.12 ). Red Signals will be displayed at all mandatory Radio Points preceding the incident only on the specific instruction of the Clerk of the Course or Stage Commander .

4.18. Red Signals must be prominently displayed (held out steady not waved) by a designated Marshal who MUST wear a Marshals ’ tabard.

4.19. Red Signals shall measure a minimum of 60cm x 70cm. 4.20. Competitors who have been shown a Red Signal will be given a notional time for the Stage . 4.21. The time of the deployment of the Red Signals will be recorded and notified to the Clerk of the Course . 4.22. No Signal other than a Red Signal may be deployed at any point along the route of the Special Stage . 4.23. Under no circumstances will any Vehicle be allowed to drive in the reverse direction of the Stage . 4.24. Detailed emergency procedures and equipment which must be made available by the Event Safety Officer .

4.25. The priorities in dealing with an incident are to deal first with those who are injured (whether Competitor , Official or spectator) by removing them in a suitable Vehicle if it appears prudent to do so and then to deal with the Vehicles if they constitute a hazard to the continued running of the Stage or to property.

4.26. No Competitor will be permitted a re-run of a Special Stage ( App.10 ).

4.27. The system of ensuring that Competitors are positively monitored and checked through a Stage must be clearly stated in both the Event Safety Plan . For this purpose Organisers may either use numbered Stage Time Cards or note the previous Competitor ’s Competition Number with the next Competitor to leave the Start .

4.28. All non-competing Vehicles must be parked in an appropriate place at least 30m from a road used as a Special Stage between a point before the Start control and a point 100m beyond the Finish stop control.

4.29. Any non-competing Vehicle required solely for purposes of safety may be parked at any place designated appropriate by the Stage Commander and / or Event Safety Officer .

4.30. Any road that may form an escape between the start and stop Controls must be kept clear and unobstructed for a distance of at least 100m bearing in mind the potential approaching speed of Competitors .

4.31. The location of any competing Vehicle that fails to complete the stage must be reported to the Stage Commander .

4.32. The information required by the Clerk of the Course to consider Art.4.34 –4.38 below must be available if the Stage is interrupted or stopped for any period of time.

4.33. Reasonable precautions must be taken to protect private property situated adjacent to any Stage against damage.

4.34. Should the normal running of a Special Stage be stopped after the passage of one or more Competitors for any reasons whatsoever and it proves impossible to allow other Competitors to cover the Stage competitively the Clerk of the Course may give to each crew which has not been able to cover the Stage in the normal manner a notional time corresponding to the slowest time set up to the moment of interruption.

4.35. If it appears that the slowest time represents a complete anomaly the next slowest time may be retained (and so on until the 5th slowest time).

4.36. However no crew that is totally or partially responsible for stopping a Stage may benefit from this measure. If they finish the Stage they will be given the time that they actually set even if this is greater than the time awarded to other crews.

4.37. In the case of an Event being permitted to seed Competitors in reverse order of anticipated performance the Clerk of the Course may give Competitors a notional time corresponding to the fastest time set at the moment of interruption or apply the next fastest time (up to the 5th fastest time) if the fastest time represents a complete anomaly.

4.38. If the normal running of a Special Stage is red Signalled prior to any Competitors completing that Stage competitively and where circumstances allow the stage to be re-started, the Clerk of the Course may give to each crew which has not been able to cover the Stage in the normal manner a notional time corresponding to the time set by the first following Competitor who completes the stage competitively after the interruption, however if this time represents a complete anomaly, the next Competitor ’s time may be retained (and so on until the 5th recorded time following Stage re-start).

4.39. The Clerk of the Course has discretionary powers to impose a penalty in accordance with App.8 (gg) or App.14 (gg) on any Competitor who causes or is part of a serious blockage on a Special Stage whether intentionally or otherwise if their actions prevent any other Competitor from completing the Stage competitively. The Clerk can also impose further penalty under Chapter 2 as appropriate.

4.40. Judges of Fact may be appointed to adjudicate on:

a. Failure to comply with the Medical Requirements specified in Chapter 6 ( App.2 ). b.

Failure of Competitors to comply with Specific Regulations c. Failure to comply with the prescribed route requirements at App.10 Art.7.27–7.35. d. False starts on Special Stages . e. Unauthorised use of auxiliary lights.

f. Unauthorised possession of pace notes or radio equipment ( App.10 Arts.7.1–7.3 and App.10 Art.7.42-7.44 ).

g. Unauthorised servicing. h. Unauthorised smoking. i. Excessive Vehicle Noise (observed during the Event ). j. Violation of out of bounds areas. k. Violation of the regulations regarding crash helmets seat belts or flame-retardant overalls.

4.41. Driving Standards Observers may be appointed to adjudicate on:

a. Excessive Vehicle Noise (observed during the Event ). b. Excessive speed. c. Driving in a manner likely to bring motor sport into disrepute.

4.42. Checks operated by Judges of Fact or DSOs need not be manned for the whole period during which Competitors may report and so may operate on a random basis.

4.43. Organisers should include in their Official Documents the following notice to Competitors : Judges of Fact and / or DSOs will be appointed to report on noise levels. Excessive noise will include instantaneous occurrence of noise such as but not exclusively that produced by backfiring caused by anti-lag systems. The penalty for excessive noise may go as far as Disqualification .

4.44. Any Competitor driving at an excessive speed or recklessly or in a manner likely to bring motor sport into disrepute or who is convicted of any driving offence committed during the Event may be Disqualified .

4.45. The Official in charge of any Control or Check may mark or withhold a Competitor ’s Road Book or Time Card if the Vehicle concerned has suffered damage to its exhaust system.

4.46. The Clerk of the Course can appoint Officials empowered to search Competitors and their Vehicles for Unauthorised Pace Notes .

4.47. There should be two such Officials one male to check male Competitors and one female to check female Competitors .

4.48. An Organiser may permit the supply of subjective route notes. This must be stated in the Official Documents and the subjective route notes must be prepared by a ASN registered supplier.

CHAPTER 13 RALLY Appendix 3 - Specific Regulations for Road Events

1. General

1.1. This Appendix must be read in conjunction with all applicable Appendices and in particular App. 1 and App.9.

1.2. The following definitions and regulations apply.

2. Road Rally

2.1. A Rally in which Competition on the Public Highway does not qualify for an alternative category and in which marking for maintaining a time schedule forms a substantial part of the Competition .

3. Historic Road Rally

3.1. As Road Rally but participation is limited to Vehicles complying with the appropriate Technical Regulations for Historic Category 1, 2, 3 and 4 Road Rally Vehicles App.15 and 17 . Must comply with the following:

a. PR work in accordance with App.1 Arts.6 must be carried out.

b. Classes must be based on the ability of Competitors (masters, experts, non-experts and novices). and/or by age and cubic capacity of the vehicles entered. c.

Written ASN approval must be obtained for any Special Tests . Detailed diagrams and written explanations of their format and finishing procedures must be submitted. These tests must be designed so that no Competitor can be expected to exceed an average speed of 30mph. No benefit should accrue to any Competitor who exceeds 30mph. Test finishes must be arranged in such a way that there can be no possibility of any Competitor completing a test whilst a previous Competitor blocks the Finish area.

4. Navigational Rally

4.1. A Rally designed to test the navigational skill of the crew. Navigational Rallies must additionally comply with the following:

Classes must be based on the ability of Competitors : for example, masters, experts, non-experts and novices.

b. Must not include any Vehicle Classes whether by capacity or by group. c.

Except for Novice Crews (as defined in the Official Documents ) only the following information may be issued to a Competitor before their due start time:

Rejoin Points

Main Time Controls

ii.

Blackspots and

iii.

iv.

the location of the Finish .

Information in a sealed opaque envelope is not considered issued until the envelope is opened.

Except for Novice Crews (as defined in the Official Documents ) no more than 15% of the Time Controls may be issued to Competitors as Rejoin Points .

f. Rejoin Points may only be located at the end of Neutral Sections . g.

Vehicles must comply with the Technical Regulations in respect of silencing and permitted Noise levels including mandatory fitment of induction filter elements ( App.15 Art.12.2 ).

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 3 - Specific Regulations for Road Events 448

h. Vehicles must comply with the Electrical Systems provisions of the Technical Regulations ( App.15 Art.5 ).

i. Vehicles must comply with the Miscellaneous provisions of the Technical Regulations ( App.15 Art.6 ).

5. Veteran Rally (or Run) 5.1. A Rally or Run restricted to Vehicles built before 1st January 1919.

6. Vintage Rally (or Run)

6.1. A Rally complying with one of the above categories and restricted to Vehicles built in Periods A to D (Non- Rally ). The category must be indicated in the title of the Event (i.e Vintage Twelve Car ). Must comply with the following:

Subject to compliance with the below 7.b. and c. Economy , Navigational or Vintage Rallies will be required to carry out Public Relations work in accordance with App.1 Arts.23 – 26 .

Penalties for both early or late arrival must be imposed at all controls. These penalties must be at least as great for early arrival as late arrival.

Other than for Regularity Sections and Special Tests they must not have any section times to less than one minute.

7. Economy Rally

7.1. Designed to assess the fuel economy of Competitors ’ Vehicles and in which the overall results are based on the relative fuel consumption of the Vehicles . Must comply with the following:

Penalties for both early or late arrival must be imposed at all controls. These penalties must be at least as great for early arrival as late arrival.

Other than for Regularity Sections and Special Tests must not have any Section timed to less than one minute.

Subject to compliance with the above Economy Navigational or Vintage Rallies will be required to carry out Public Relations work in accordance with App.1 Arts.6 .

8. Twelve Car Rally

8.1. A Rally that complies with one of the above categories and which falls within the provisions of automatic authorisation under the Motor Vehicles ( Competitions and Trials ) Regulations (where applicable). The category must be indicated in the title of the Event (i.e Economy Twelve Car Rally ). Must comply with the following and Twelve Car Rallies that do not meet these requirements are not not permitted:

Must be run according to the requirements of an Economy , Navigational or Vintage Rally and be described in this way in the Official Documents .

b. Any section defined as a Standard Section may not be timed to less than one minute ( App.4 Art.4.1 ). c.

Must not form part of any Championship other than one restricted to bona fide members of the Organising Club .

d. A Route Liaison Officer ( RLO ) must be consulted. e.

If the RLO requires additional PR work in sensitive areas this must be completed to the RLO satisfaction.

Must not be scheduled to run between 18.00 hours on a Saturday and 07.00 hours on a Sunday unless written permission has been given by the RLO and advised to the ASN .

g. Should normally be run mid-week and in the early evening.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 3 - Specific Regulations for Road Events 449

9. Navigational Scatter Event

9.1. A Navigational Event where there is no Competition on the Public Highway and which falls within the provisions of automatic authorisation under the Motor Vehicles ( Competition and Trials ) Regulations (where applicable). Must comply with the following:

a. Public Relations work must be carried out according to App.1 Arts.6 b.

The Official Documents should clearly define the nature of the Event and specify all Navigational equipment required.

c. An estimate of the mileage likely to be covered must be included in the Official Documents . d. The points to be visited must be placed so that there is no single obvious route. e.

Competitors should have a completely random choice concerning order of visit and must not be required to visit more than 75% of the points listed.

They must be planned in such a way that the Competitors have ample time to attempt to visit the required number of points. The majority of the points should not be readily accessible without leaving the Vehicle . The Vehicle should be an incidental means of transport between the various points.

There should be no element of timing on the Public Highway although Competitors may be required to finish by a specified time.

10. Targa Road Rally

10.1. A schedule timed Rally where the principal Competition comprises the Competitor ’s performance on Special Tests where the marking for maintaining a time schedule forms a part of the Competition . Must comply with the following:

Not include and Standard Sections Regularity Sections may be included

a. b.

c. Classes must be based on the ability of Competitors (masters, experts, non-experts, and novices) and may be sub-divided by Vehicle cubic capacity and / or age.

d. Special Tests must comply with the Special Tests provisions of App.4 Arts.8 to this Chapter . 11. Endurance Road Rally

11.1. A Road Rally where a substantial proportion of the Competition takes place on the Public Highway timed to the minute and which shall also include Special Tests on private property which may be timed to the second.

12. All Events

12.1. Road Safety Events and any other form of Event that use the Public Highway must comply with the following:

a. Must not include any Special Stages . b.

Except for Road , Historic Road , Enduro , Targa and Navigation Rallies they must not include any Special Tests .

Competitors must not carry any form of Intercom (ie any method of voice amplification) or any radio transmitting device. Exceptionally mobile telephones are Permitted if the Official Documents specifically allow them. Failure to conform will be penalised by Disqualification from the Event .

d. No regular assistance organised in advance may be used by Competitors in Rallies defined in Arts.2 above inclusive except when Permitted in the Official Documents for Vintage or Veteran Events .

e. No assistance may be expected from the Organisers .

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 3 - Specific Regulations for Road Events 450

Competitors are responsible for ensuring that they are supplied with fuel, oil, water etc. even though the Organisers may advise where these supplies may be obtained.

A Vehicle may not be moved other than by its own power except:

By a ferry.

By outside means for a minimum distance necessary to extricate it from difficulty.

ii.

By gravity.

iii.

iv.

By its crew.

Competitors are strongly recommended to carry a First Aid Kit , high visibility vests or jackets and a torch.

The use of in car cameras is forbidden. Breach of this Regulation will result in Disqualification from the Event .

Organisers must not sanction encourage or facilitate the filming of Events taking part on the Public Highway .

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 3 - Specific Regulations for Road Events 451

CHAPTER 13 RALLY Appendix 4 - Road Events – Routes and Sections

1. General 1.1. This Appendix must be read in conjunction with all applicable Appendices.

2. Routes 2.1. A Road Rally Route is the Route provided by the Organisers and conforming with the NCR .

2.2. The only route information that may be given out before the Competitors ’ due start time will be information regarding Quiet Zones , Black Spots , Rejoin Points and Neutral Sections . Exceptionally for Road , Targa or Historic Road Rallies , and only if the Official Documents Permit , other route information may be given in advance for those parts of the route that take place between the hours of 07.00 and 22.00.

2.3. The location of all Stop and Give Way junctions along the route must be issued to Competitors along with clear instructions as how they must treat them ( Art.2.5 below).

2.4. Organisers must identify any other junction at which Competitors are required to stop.

2.5. Competitors must stop before entering any road protected by a Stop junction or a Give Way junction where any part of the Event is held between 22.00 and 07.00 hrs. Failure to comply will be penalised by Disqualification from the Event .

2.6. Exceptionally and only with the specific permission of the RLO , Give Way signs in Quiet Zones may be negotiated according to the Highway Code . All such junctions must be advised to Competitors in advance.

2.7. Only 1:50,000 scale OS maps may be used. 2.8. The only information that can be added to the OS map as sold is:

Highlighting numbers, words and legends printed on the map within the confines of the outer printed grid numbers.

Highlighting and repeating grid lines and numbers and marking adjacent map numbers outside the of the outer printed grid numbers.

c. Information provided by the Organisers of the Event .

2.9. The onus of following the correct route rests with the Competitor who must visit Controls and Checks in the order set out in the Time Card or Route Card unless otherwise specified.

2.10. Any Control ( App.5 ) is deemed to extend for 50m around the actual point at which Officials are making their records unless clearly visible signs are displayed to define a different area.

2.11. The direction of approach to a Control or Check will be specified by the route information. Approaching a manned control from any other direction or visiting a Control or Check more than once will involve a Penalty ( App.7A, App.7B and App.8 ).

2.12. No private road must be used by Competitors unless specific permission to do so has been given by the Organisers .

2.13. Quiet Zones :

Any Quiet Zone in a Standard or Regularity Section must be monitored by a Driving Standards Observer.

b. The end of a Quiet Zone must be indicated by an end of QZ Board .

3. Sections

3.1. The following terminology and restrictions apply to all Road Rally Sections and no other title or description will be valid.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 4 - Routes and Sections 452

3.2. No Section will have a Flying Finish Time Control .

3.3. No Section will have any award for Competitors who equal or improve upon the Section time schedule or record the fastest times or least penalties on any Section .

3.4. At the start of any Section or Special Test held in whole or in part on private property the Organisers must provide a Medium Spill Kit .

4. Standard Sections

4.1. A Standard Section may not use the same stretch of road more than once nor include any intermediate Time Controls . Where a Standard Section is timed to the second it must not:

Pass through any area that has more than 20 occupied dwellings within 300m radius of the route unless written agreement is given by all the householders within that area and the ASN has given its permission.

Join or cross any A-class road except where there is a manned control at which Competitors must stop at the junction.

c. Start on or use an A-class road for more than 200m continuously. d.

Start the first car before 23.59hrs and the last car including any lateness must finish 1⁄2 hour before sunrise.

Include any area or point where Competitors are required to observe special restrictions as to their driving behaviour except for observing signs warning of natural hazards. Quiet Zones or other restrictions are specifically forbidden.

4.2. Organisers may erect signs warning of natural hazards but they must be removed after the Events .

4.3. Standard Sections must not include any road with a 30 or 40mph limit without the express permission of the RLO .

4.4. Standard Sections must not require Competitors to average more than 30mph.

4.5. If timed to less than a minute then Standard Sections must not include more than 250m of private property other than Footpaths and Bridleways and Restricted Byways for which approval has been granted by the landowner and the Highway Authority where appropriate.

5. Neutral Sections 5.1. A Neutral Section must be used to take Competitors through a PR-sensitive or densely populated area.

5.2. Must be completed by Competitors without the use of auxiliary lighting except as permitted by law in conditions of poor visibility. Organisers must remind Competitors of this requirement in their Official Documents .

5.3. Neutral Sections must not:

a. Be timed to less than one minute. b. Permit Competitors to make up time on the public road. c. Have any lateness Penalty applied except for Maximum Lateness . d. Have an average speed of more than 20mph except on M, A or B class roads.

6. Regularity Sections 6.1. The locations of the Start and Finish of Regularity Sections must be given to Competitors in advance.

6.2. Each Regularity Section must contain at least one Intermediate Time Control the location of which must not be given to Competitors in advance.

6.3. Competitors must be advised in writing before entering such a section whether they are required to stop at Intermediate Time Controls which should be identified by a control board.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 4 - Routes and Sections 453

6.4. Adherence to the time schedule in a Regularity Section will be assessed by comparing the time of arrival at any Intermediate Time Control or the Finish Time Control with the time of arrival at the immediate preceding Time Control . Timing whether or not the Vehicle is required to stop will be at the moment of the Vehicle entering the relevant Time Control area.

6.5. Penalties must be specified in the Official Documents and must be imposed for stopping within sight of but outside the control area of any Intermediate Time Control and the Finish Time Control .

6.6. Competitors should not be required to maintain an average speed in excess of 30mph. 6.7. May only be included in the following rallies as defined by Permit :

Historic Road Endurance Road Targa Road Navigation Veteran Vintage g. Economy .

a. b. c. d. e. f.

6.8. Consistency Tests may only be run under a Historic Road Rally Permit and at a Venue with a current ASN Track Licence . Written ASN approval must be obtained before the Events for all Consistency Tests by submitting detailed diagrams and written explanations of their format and finishing procedures.

7. Transport Sections

7.1. A Transport Section is used to transport Competitors between other types of section where the route is not PR sensitive or densely populated.

7.2. These Sections must not be timed to less than one minute nor less than four miles in length and must not have any lateness penalty applied other than for maximum lateness.

7.3. They must comply with App. 5 Art.10.18 and breach of this Regulation will be penalised in accordance with App. 7A (l), or App. 7B (l) for Historic Road Rally Events.

7.4. If using roads where a 30mph or 40mph limit is in force then a lower average speed must be imposed depending on the proportion of restricted roads in the Section .

8. Special Tests

8.1. Written ASN approval for any Special Tests must be obtained before the Events by submitting detailed diagrams including all roads on the test venue, distances between manoeuvres, overhead images of the land being used, written details of the terrain being used and WhatThreeWords locations for the Test Start and Test Finish in addition to explanations of their format and finishing procedures before the Event .

8.2. These tests must be designed so that no Competitor can be expected to exceed an average speed of 30mph or 40mph for Endurance Road Rallies .

8.3. No benefit must accrue to any Competitor who exceeds this speed.

8.4. Test finishes must be arranged so that there can be no possibility of a Competitor completing a test whilst a previous Competitor blocks the Finish .

8.5. Flying Finishes are not permitted. Stop lines must be clearly defined on route instructions and with stop boards on the test. The board must have minimum dimensions of 76cm x 61cm.

8.6. Vehicles must comply with the relevant Technical Regulations appropriate to the type and or class of Vehicle ( App. 15 ).

8.7. Passengers may not be carried in the rear seats of open Vehicles .

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 4 - Routes and Sections 454

8.8. Rallies with Special Tests may not permit Vehicles of commercial type such as vans / pickups.

8.9. Tests must be designed and laid out to ensure Vehicles are not able to be driven towards each other. See the Club Toolkit for further guidance on this.

8.10. For all Events utilising Special Tests , fire extinguishers (minimum 5kg total capacity in units of not less than 2kg) must be available at each Test finish.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 4 - Routes and Sections 455

CHAPTER 13 RALLY Appendix 5 - Road Events - Controls and Timing Including Results

1. General 1.1. This Appendix must be read in conjunction with all applicable Appendices.

2. Controls Documentation

2.1. All documentation issued by the Organisers have the same force as the Official Documents . Along with the requirements of Chapter 3 Art.21 the Route Card or Time Card must specify the following:

a. A description of each section ( Standard, Neutral, Transport, Regularity etc). b.

The time allowed to traverse the route between each time Control and all the information necessary to enable Competitors to comply with the average speed limits applicable to the entire Route including those provided by the Official Documents .

What information the Organisers require to be recorded by Competitors and the location of Controls (but not Route Check recorded by Competitors and the location of Controls (but not Route Checks ) at which these records will be made.

The location of check points established by the Organisers to observe Competitor maintenance of a set speed and / or time schedule and / or Route will not be disclosed but Competitors must be notified in the Official Documents of the fact of such check points being deployed so as to enable compliance.

e. Which checks will be manned by Officials except checks established in accordance with c. above. f. Which portions of the route will be timed to less than one minute. g. Any ‘out of bounds’ areas to be respected. h.

The areas where the Organisers require Competitors to observe special driving restrictions (ie Quiet Zones ).

i. The order in which Controls and Checks must be visited.

2.2. Controls checks and test sites must open at least 15 minutes before the due time of arrival of the first Vehicle and close 30 minutes after the due time of arrival of the last Vehicle unless the Official Documents specify otherwise.

2.3. The Official Documents will specify what penalties will be applied for stopping within sight of any Control and for early or late arrival at any Control on a Regularity Section .

2.4. Timing related penalties are provided at App.7 for Road Scheduled Time Events and at App.8 for Road Target Timed Events . Organisers acting through the relevant Judicial body may also apply penalties pursuant to Chapters 2 -5 of the NCR .

2.5. If at any Control or Check due to be operated by Officials the Officials are not present during the whole period when the Competitors may report then all performances at that point will be ignored in compiling the results except where the Check Control is operated by an appointed Judge of Fact or DSO when Check Control may be operated on a random basis.

2.6. All performances will be ignored if a Control or Check is not sited at the location specified in Official Documents.

2.7. The onus of ensuring that all the information required is clearly and legibly recorded at the appropriate time and place rests with the Competitor .

2.8. Should any entry on a Time Card not be legible or not appear authentic it can be considered not to have been made.

2.9. Organisers must refer to Marshals ’ check sheets in case of doubt.

2.10. If there is a discrepancy between the time allowance shown by the Organisers on a Time Card and that shown on any other document then the Time Card value will be taken to be correct unless previously amended in an official bulletin.

2.11. It is an offence for any Competitor to continue in an Event until the information required to achieve conformity with the Event time / speed schedule is provided by the Organisers in Official Documents .

3. Types of Control or Check 3.1. Route Check

a. An unmanned Check to prove a Competitor ’s adherence to the correct route. b.

Proof of passage will entail the Competitor recording the symbols from a Code Board that is to be placed facing oncoming Rally Vehicles or at parallel to the road when afforded line of sight of more than 50 metres.

The Code Board will be not less than 315 sq cm and will show not more than five black numbers or letters (or a combination of both up to a maximum of seven) and be the right way up on a contrasting background.

The size of the letters and numbers will be not less than 7.63cm with a minimum of 1.27cm stroke width.

3.2. Passage Control

a. A manned Control established to prove a Competitor ’s adherence to the correct route. b. It cannot be located less than 500m from any other manned Control . c.

The only information permitted to be recorded is the Marshal's signature or stamp and the authentication of the records held by the Competitor .

3.3. Time Control

A manned Control established to record the time of a Competitor who must come to a stop for the purpose.

b. It can additionally record the direction of approach and departure of the Competitor . c.

The only other information permitted to be recorded by the Marshal is the authentication of the records held by the Competitor .

These records to be valid must be signed by the Marshal with the Competitor not being required to make any entry on the Time Card .

3.4. Main Time Control

Organisers may designate certain Time Controls ( Art.5 above ) such as Start Controls and Restart Controls as Main Time Controls ( MTCs ).

Competitors failing to visit or reporting outside their Maximum Lateness at MTCs will be considered to have retired.

c. Early or late arrival or departure will be penalised in accordance with App.7.e or f. d. An example of all Official Boards must be on display at documentation for the Event .

3.5. Stop / Go Control

A manned Control where Competitors are required to stop in line with at least a pair of course markers. Crews must not be held they should stop and then be immediately ‘released’ by the Marshal when safe to do so.

4. Timing

4.1. All Sections must be timed according to the requirements of Scheduled Time by watches that read to correct GMT / BST time of day.

5. Definitions for Scheduled Timing

5.1. Standard Time is the time of day a notional Competitor number zero would be due at any Control or Check .

5.2. Scheduled Time is the actual time of day each Competitor is required to be at any specific point.

5.3. Scheduled Time can be calculated for any point by taking a Competitor ’s Competition Number multiplying by the time interval between Competitors at the start and adding the result to the standard time at that point.

5.4. Delay Allowance is an allowance free of Penalty granted to specific Competitors following a delay under the instructions of an authorised Official of the Event . Any Delay Allowance must be recorded in writing on the Competitor ’s Time Card by that Official .

5.5. Due Time is the time a Competitor is due at any Control or Check inclusive of any previous lateness. 5.6. Penalised Time is the difference between Due Time and an earlier or later arrival time.

5.7. Penalty Free Lateness allows a Competitor late at one Control to be an equivalent amount late at a succeeding Control without incurring further Penalty .

5.8. Outside Total Lateness (OTL) is the point where a Competitor is considered not to have visited a Control or Check being more than 30 minutes past the Scheduled Time (including any Delay Allowance ) unless the Official Documents specify a different period.

5.9. The time of arrival at or departure from a Control other than intermediate and final Controls of Regularity Sections (where App.4 Art.6 apply ) will be the time at which the Time Card is presented by the Competitor concerned providing all crew members and Vehicles are within the Control area.

5.10. Exceptions to Art.10.9 above are:

In the Event of a competing Vehicle obstructing other Competitors through being halted or unduly slowed down near a Control the Officials may instruct the Driver to proceed and may then record the time as the time when this instruction is given.

In the Event of a Competitor presenting a Time Card to Officials at a time when the Vehicle is outside the Control area the Officials have discretion as to whether or not to make a record on the Time Card .

5.11. The onus of presenting the Time Card rests with the Competitor .

5.12. The time of reporting at Controls will be recorded to the preceding whole minute when penalties are imposed per minute (for example nine minutes 59 seconds will be recorded as nine minutes.)

5.13. When a Penalty is imposed for timekeeping error of less than one minute the time will be recorded to the preceding second.

5.14. Where a Control at the end of a Section timed to the second also forms the start of a Section timed to the minute the time of departure will be considered as being the same as arrival but ignoring any seconds.

5.15. The Organisers can require any Competitor who is late to reduce their lateness by either foregoing or reducing any period of time provided for remaining at a Control or official halt.

5.16. Competitors may themselves reduce lateness without Penalty in the following ways providing the Section is not defined as Neutral and unless either forbidden to do so by the Official Documents or if by so doing they commit a breach of Art.10.18 below:

By reporting at any Control following one at which a penalty was applied for lateness at any time not earlier than Scheduled Time .

b. By missing a Control or Controls . The Competitor will be penalised in accordance with App.7 (a) or (b) for every Control missed. On rejoining the route at a Control at the end of Standard Section the Competitor will be permitted to restart without further Penalty at any time between their original Scheduled Time and their Maximum Permitted Lateness in relation to their original Scheduled Time . If the rejoining Control is at the end of a Neutral Section and the Competitor has missed the Control at the beginning of a Neutral Section they will only be permitted to restart without further Penalty at their official corrected time based on the time of arrival at the last Control visited within Maximum Lateness .

5.17. If the need arises for an Organiser to extend Maximum Permitted Lateness this can only be done at a point on the route at which Competitors are required to report to avoid Disqualification . Maximum Permitted Lateness can then only be extended for the following part of the route and cannot be applied retrospectively for earlier Sections .

These provisions are subject to standard condition 4 of the Motor Vehicles ( Competitions and Trials ) Regulations where applicable.

5.18. No Penalty Free Lateness or official delay allowance that has been either reduced or foregone as permitted by Art.10.15 above can be reclaimed by this does not exclude fresh claims based on new circumstances.

5.19. A Competitor found to have traversed a distance greater than four miles between two consecutive time Controls in less than three-quarters of the time specified by the official time schedule will be penalised in accordance with App.7 (l). In calculating the penalty any fraction of minute will be ignored. The 3⁄4 rule does not apply to sections of less than 8 minutes scheduled duration.

This Regulation does not preclude the Organisers providing specific sections for time recovery. For example:

• In a nine-minute section a Penalty is imposed if a Competitor completes a Section in less than six minutes.

• In a 10-minute section – seven minutes.

• In an 11-minute section – eight minutes.

• In a 12-minute section – nine minutes.

5.20. Times will be recorded to whole minutes unless the Official Documents state otherwise.

a. Any portions of the Event to be timed to seconds will be clearly indicated in the Route or Time Cards . b. Any timing to less than one minute will be recorded on equipment as detailed in App.2 Arts.2.30–2.34 .

5.21. Competitors will be timed by the official timepieces in the charge of Officials unless the Official Documents state that watches carried by the Competitors can be used.

5.22. If Competitor ’s own watches are used they must be of a size and type to enable the dial to be read clearly and must be sealed.

a. The requirements for sealing watches must be stated in the Official Documents . b. The Organisers may reject any watch that cannot be satisfactorily sealed or read. c.

If any sealed watch varies from Official Time by more than one minute the Competitor concerned will be timed by official clocks from then on unless the Official Documents make provision for the replacement or re-setting of the watch concerned.

6. Results

6.1. To be classified as a finisher the Competitor must report to all Main Time Controls and unless otherwise stated in the Official Documents at least two-thirds of the Controls listed in the Route Card or Time Card .

6.2. The Competitor must report to the final Control if that is not an MTC and within the Maximum Lateness specified and with the same crew in the same Vehicle in which that crew started.

6.3. Competitors at the conclusion of their Competition must sign a declaration to the effect that they have not been involved in any incident that may have caused damage to persons or property or alternatively give details of any such incident. Non-compliance will be penalised by Disqualification and must be reported to the ASN for further disciplinary action.

6.4. Competitors who retire will be required to submit a form to the Event Secretary within 72 hours of the Event . Failure to return a form may result in a fine of up to the relevant maximum permitted under the NCR .

6.5. For the purposes of considering Disqualification , Vehicle damage will be considered as being any tear or indentation exceeding 50mm in depth occurring to the external surfaces of the coachwork or its accessories (excluding windscreens windows lamps and bumpers) above the horizontal plane at the wheel centre.

6.6. Competitors will start with zero fails and/or marks. Classification will be made from Competitors who have incurred the least number of fails.

Competitors who have incurred an equal number of fails will be classified by reference to total marks lost.

In the Event of a tie the Competitor who has completed the greater portion of the Competition from the Start including Tests (if any) without Penalty (or if both incurred Penalty at the same point then with the lesser Penalty ) will be judged the winner unless another method of resolving ties is specified in the Official Documents .

CHAPTER 13 RALLY Appendix 6 - Exemption of Permit Events

1. General 1.1. This Appendix must be read in conjunction with all applicable Appendices. 1.2. This Appendix applies to all of:

Road Safety Events and Treasure Hunts and Veteran Car Rallies (or Runs ) and d. Economy Runs . 2. Road Safety Events

a. b. c.

2.1. Must comply with the following:

They must not have a route which exceeds 150 miles on the Public Highway except in special circumstances.

The marking system on the road section must only be in respect of observance of the law or the Highway Code .

They must not have any timing on the road sections other than that necessary to determine the duration of the Competition .

d. If any Tests of driving ability are included they must not exceed 100m in length. e.

If timed Tests are included the speed of the Vehicles must not be the sole determining factor and at least an equal number of untimed Tests must also be included.

All tests whether timed or untimed must include an element of maneuvering skill or judgement on the part of the Driver in addition to testing the capabilities of the Vehicle .

The title of the Event must clearly indicate its connection with road safety.

Treasure Hunts

3.1.

Must comply with the following:

No merit must attach to being the first to arrive at the Finish or at any other point.

Competitors must not be required to arrive at any point other than the Finish at or by a specific time.

Where an overall time limit is set for the Event it must be possible to win without exceeding an average speed of 10mph from Start to Finish .

Competitors must not be required to travel more than 100 miles on a highway or to perform any task or solve any problem that is likely to inconvenience or offend anyone not taking part in the Event .

4. Veteran Car Rallies (or Runs) 4.1. These must comply with the following:

If they are run in accordance with b. and d. below it will be exempt from the PR requirements of App.19 and Public Relations work need only be undertaken by prominent advertising in the area of the route.

They must allow Competitors to set their own average speeds subject to a maximum average of 24mph between Start and Finish (or Rest Halt ).

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 6 - Exemption of Permit Events 461

They must have no intermediate timing points between the Start and Finish (or Rest Halt ) and must have only passage controls along their route.

d. Competitors ’ route instructions should be given in the form of descriptive notes only.

5. Economy Runs

5.1. If held on or using private land Economy Runs must obtain ASN prior written permission before any public announcement is made.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 6 - Exemption of Permit Events 462

CHAPTER 13 RALLY Appendix 7A - Road Scheduled Time Events

Penalties 1. Summary of Penalties to be Applied on Scheduled Timed Events

1.1. Performance will be assessed in one of the methods listed, either by time Penalty or by the ‘fails’ system. The Official Documents must specify which system is to be used.

1.2. *These penalties may be increased by the Official Documents; they may not be reduced. 1.3. **The penalty may be increased if stated in the Official Documents.

Time Fails

(a) Not reporting or reporting OTL at a Main Time Control Retired *(b) Not reporting or reporting OTL at any other Time Control 30 minutes 1 Fail

15 minutes 1 Fail

*(c) Not complying with the Route Card including visiting a Control more than once

5 minutes 1 Fail

*(d) Not reporting at Passage Control or providing proof of visiting a Route Check

*(e) Arrival before scheduled time at the end of a Standard Section 2 minutes per minute

*(f) Arrival after due time at the end of a Standard Section 1 minute per minute *(g) Arrival before due time at the end of a Neutral Section 30 minutes 1 Fail

**(h) Arrival before due time at an Intermediate Control or Finish Control of a Regularity Section

Actual time early

Actual time late

*( j ) Arrival after due time at an intermediate control or finish control of a Regularity Section . Exceptionally at a single intermediate or finish control of a Regularity Section held between 07.00 and 22.00hrs this penalty may be reduced.

30 minutes 1 Fail

*(k) Breach of any statutory requirement concerning the use of a motor vehicle

30 minutes 1 Fail

(l) Contravention of App.5 Art.10.18 *First Offence

Disqualified

Second Offence

(m)

Excessive speed or driving likely to bring motor sport into disrepute

Disqualified

Excessive Noise

(n)

Disqualified

Receiving assistance contrary to App.3 Art.12.1.d

(o)

Disqualified

(p) Breach of App.3 Art.12.1 (intercoms); App.15 Art.6.6 (Registration Plates)

(q) Breach of App.4 Arts.2.5–2.8 inclusive; App.5 Arts.11.2 and11.3 ; App.9 Arts.4

Disqualified

1.4. The items in italics may not be varied by the Rally Organisers .

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 7A - Road Scheduled Time Events 463

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 7A - Road Scheduled Time Events 464

CHAPTER 13 RALLY Appendix 7B - Road Scheduled Time Events

Penalties 1. Summary of Penalties to be Applied on Scheduled Timed Historic Road Rally Events

1.1. Performance will be assessed in one of the methods listed, either by time Penalty or by the ‘fails’ system. The Official Documents must specify which system is to be used. They may be varied between period categories ( App.15 Art. 9.2 ).

1.2. *These penalties may be increased by the Official Documents. 1.3. **The penalty may be increased if stated in the Official Documents. 1.4. The items in italics may not be varied by the Rally Organisers .

Time Fails

**(a) Not reporting or reporting OTL at a Main Time Control 15 minutes *(b) Not reporting or reporting OTL at any other Time Control 1 minute 1 Fail

*(c) Not complying with the Route Card including visiting a Control more than once

1 minute 1 Fail

*(d) Not reporting at Passage Control or providing proof of visiting a Route Check

1 minute 1 Fail

*(e) Arrival before scheduled time at the end of a Standard Section 1 minute per minute

15 seconds per minute

*(f) Arrival after due time at the end of a Standard Section . If a standard section is held totally on private land the final control can be timed to the second

*(g) Arrival before due time at the end of a Neutral Section 30 minutes 1 Fail

Actual time early

**(h) Arrival before due time at an Intermediate Control or Finish Control of a Regularity Section

Actual time late

*( j ) Arrival after due time at an intermediate control or finish control of a Regularity Section . This may be capped at 1 minute. Exceptionally at a single intermediate or finish control of a Regularity Section on each leg this penalty may be reduced. *(k) Breach of any statutory requirement concerning the use of a motor vehicle

30 minutes 1 Fail

(l) Contravention of App.5 Art.10.18 *First Offence

Disqualified

Second Offence

Excessive speed or driving likely to bring motor sport into disrepute

(m)

Disqualified

Excessive sound

(n)

Disqualified

Receiving assistance contrary to App.3 Art.12.1.d

(o)

(p) Breach of App.3 Art.12.1 (intercoms); App.15 Art.6.6 (Registration Plates)

Disqualified

(q) Breach of App.4 Arts.2.5–2.8 inclusive; App.5 Arts.11.2 and11.4 ; App.9 Arts.4

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 7B - Road Scheduled Time Events 465

Penalties left to the discretion of the Clerk of the Course which may go as far as Disqualification .

Failure to follow the instructions of an Official .

Further breaches of (k).

Breaches of Regulations referred to in Chapter 2.

Any other breach of the NCR may be penalised by the Clerk of the Course in accordance with Ch.2 App.2 Art.2.1

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 7B - Road Scheduled Time Events 466

CHAPTER 13 RALLY Appendix 8 - Target Timed Special Stage Event Penalties

Penalties

1. Summary of Penalties to be Applied on Target Timed Events 1.1. Competitors will start with zero penalties.

1.2. *The Supplementary Regulations must state positively whether the Penalty for lateness is to be applied. If not stated any such lateness will be penalty-free.

1.3. Performance will be assessed as follows:

Retired

(a) (i)

Not reporting or reporting OTL at a Control ; Multi-Venue Stage Rallies Or Not completing or missing a Stage

15 Minutes plus stage maximum per stage 30 minutes per stage or MTC /TC

(ii)

Single Venue Stage Rallies (inc Rally Timed Trials )

(b) Not complying with a requirement of the Road Book 10 minutes (c) Not performing a Stage correctly Stage maximum (d) Not attempting or being ready to attempt a stage when instructed to do so

1st Offence - 10 minutes 2nd Offence - Disqualification

(e) Making a false start at a Special Stage 1st Offence – 10 seconds (plus actual false start time) 2nd Offence – 1 minute 3rd Offence – 3 minutes Further Offences – at the Clerk of the Course ’ discretion

Every second taken to complete a Special Stage where timing is to the preceding whole second

(f) (i)

1 second

(f) (ii) Every second and 10th of a second taken to complete a Special Stage where timing is to the preceding whole 10th of a second

1 second and 10th of a second

1 minute

(g) For each minute under target time on a road Section or in a service area

*(h) Only if specifically mentioned in the Official Documents , for each minute over target time on a road Section or for each minute over Target Time in a service area

10 seconds

(j) For each minute before or after due time at Main Time Control (out)

10 seconds

10 minutes

(k) Breach of any statutory requirement concerning the use of a motor vehicle

(l) Excessive speed or driving likely to bring motor sport into disrepute

10 minutes

(m) Excessive Noise 10 minutes (n) Receiving assistance contrary to App.18 Arts.1.4 –1.14 Disqualification & reported to the

ASN (o) Breach of App.18 Art. 1.3, Art .1.7 and Art.1.8. 10 minutes (p) Breach of Regulations : App.9 Arts.4, App.5 Art.11.3, App.10 Art.7.1–7.2, Arts.7.5 –7.9, Arts.7.21 –7.32 , App.13 Art.14.4

Disqualification

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 8 - Target Timed Special Stage Events Penalties 467

(q) Unauthorised use or possession of Pace Notes ( App.10 Art.7.42 ) or unauthorised presence on a Stage ( App.9 Art.1.7 )

Disqualification & reported to the ASN

(r) Failure to comply with App.10 Art.7.22–7.32 Disqualification & reported to the

ASN (s) Breach of Regulations : App.2 Art. 4.17 or App.10 Art.7.30 Disqualification

(t) Breach of Regulation : App.18 Art.1.9 Disqualification & reported to the ASN

(u) Breach of Regulation : App.16 Art.7.11 5 minutes

2. Penalties left to the discretion of the Clerk of the Course which may go as far as disqualification ( Chapter 5 Part A App.5 Art.2).

(aa) Failure to follow the instructions of an official. (bb) Further breaches of (b), (c), (d), (e), (k), (l), (m) or (n). (cc) Repeated misbehaviour of service crew. (dd) Reporting late for Scrutineering. (ee) Misuse of SOS and/or OK boards. (ff) Unauthorised testing or practicing ( App.12 Art.3.27 ). (gg) Causing an obstruction ( App.2 Art.4.39 ) (hh) Breaches of Regulations detailed in Chapter 2. (ii) Failure to comply with control check-in procedures.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 8 - Target Timed Special Stage Events Penalties 468

CHAPTER 13 RALLY Appendix 9 - Competitors Regulations including Licensing

1. General

1.1. This Appendix must be read in conjunction with all Applicable Appendices and NCR Chapters 1 and 2 and 6 to 9 and 24.

1.2. Competing Vehicles must comply with the appropriate Technical Regulations at Chapter 7 and Apps.15 – 17 of this Chapter.

1.3. Commercial Vehicles are not permitted in rallies except in accordance with Chapter 7 and where the time schedule is set to a lower average speed of 25mph compliant with MV(C&T)R.

1.4. Competitors and Vehicles must report for the Start and for scrutineering at the times stated in the Official Documents or risk being disqualified or forfeiting their starting position.

1.5. At Event Sign-On , Entrants , Drivers and Co-Driver or Navigators must produce for approval their Competition Licence and / or Club Membership Card and the name and address of their insurers covering any part of the Event on the Public Highway and an Entrants Licence .

1.6. Competitors on Historic Road Rallies must also present the DVLA registration document of their Vehicle as proof of its period authenticity. If the registration document is not sufficient verification then written authorisation from the ASN (or an ASN / FIA identity form) must be presented.

1.7. Any Competition Licence holder who Permits the unauthorised presence at any time of any Vehicle on a known or former Special Stage or on private property including land owned or managed by any of the Defence Infrastructure Organisation or Natural Resources Wales or Forestry and Land Scotland or the Forestry England or DAERA Forest Service NI will be Disqualified from any related Event and referred to the ASN National Court .

2. Necessary Licences 2.1. A Competitor must hold a current valid RTA licence appropriate to their vehicle on an Event .

2.2. Both Driver and Co-Driver or Navigator must hold and produce a valid Competition Licence for those rallies specified in the ASN Chart of Minimum Acceptable Licences as requiring a Competition Licence .

2.3. Exceptionally and for Clubmans Historic Road Rallies only Competitors who are not eligible to apply for an ASN Competition Licence may obtain an Historic Regularity Competitors Permit which use and validity is limited solely to that Rally .

2.4. Competitors must hold and produce a valid Club Membership Card for all Events of Interclub status or less.

2.5. If the Entrant is neither the Driver , Co-Driver or Navigator then they must hold and produce a valid Entrant ’s Licence (See ASN Chart of Minimum Acceptable Entrant ’s Licences ).

2.6. To upgrade a Competition Licence refer to Chapter 6 or the notes accompanying the Licence application form.

2.7. All new Drivers Competition Licences holders are limited to Vehicles in Classes 4 to 16 and H1(a) to H14 for a minimum of 4 Events . On completion of 4 Events , evidence must be provided to the BARS instructor who will then advise the ASN if the Competitor is able to avail of Classes 1 to 3, H15 and H16. Evidence is considered to be a signature from the Clerk of the Course or results from the 4 completed Events .

a. The BARS Instructor will advise the Competitor if it is required to complete further Events . b.

If the Competitor disputes the requirement to complete further Events , they must contact the ASN Rally department by writing to rally@motorsportuk.org .

Competitors who have existing experience within a different discipline, or experience within the Rally

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 9 - Competitors Regulations including Licensing 469

discipline that is deemed acceptable by the BARS Instructor, may be granted permission to compete in all classes, at the time of undertaking their BARS test.

3. Minimum Ages

3.1. Drivers must be at least 17 years old and hold a full RTA Licence for all Rallies .

3.2. Navigators (non-Drivers) on Rallies without Special Stages must be at least 12 years old and must be 16 years old on rallies with Special Stages .

3.3. Subject to Art.3.4 below no person under 16 years of age may be carried in a competing Vehicle during a Rally with Special Stages .

3.4. Exceptionally for Single Venue Stage Rallies taking place on a Venue that is currently or was previously a licensed Race or Speed or Kart Circuit or any airfield type Venue (disused or not) the minimum age for the Navigator is 14 years of age.

4. The Crew 4.1. Those people occupying any Vehicle will be collectively referred to as its crew. 4.2. Each Vehicle must carry at least one Passenger (as Navigator or Co-Driver ) as well as the Driver .

4.3. Except in accordance with official approval or instructions the persons carried at the start must not be varied during the Event .

4.4. Only the nominated Driver and Co-Driver listed on the Official entry form can drive during a Competition unless the Official Documents specify otherwise.

4.5. No-one is allowed to travel in a competing Vehicle other than in an appropriate seat correctly fitted.

4.6. No competing Vehicle can carry more than one physically disabled person and whose participation must be authorised pursuant to Chapter 6 .

5. Competition Numbers

5.1. Any means of identification fixed to a competing Vehicle for the Competition must be removed when the Competitor retires or is Disqualified from or completes the Event .

5.2. On Road Rallies the rally plates (if required by the Organisers ) must be displayed at the front or rear of the Vehicle and on or just below the rear nearside window.

5.3. For Endurance Road and Targa Road Rallies rally plates must be displayed at the front or rear of the Vehicle and 2 x numbers for each rear side window which shall be 15cm high with a stroke width of at least 15mm coloured orange or yellow and may be reflective. These numbers shall be in place at the top of the rear side windows (or equivalent space on two-seater Vehicles ).

5.4. On Special Stage Rallies the Organisers will specify in the Official Documents how Competitors must display their allocated Competition Number as follows:

a. In accordance with Chapter 7 together with, b.

Competition Numbers for each rear side window (or equivalent area on smaller Vehicles ) which shall be 200mm high with a stroke width of at least 25mm and a minimum separation of not less than 25mm and coloured yellow or orange and which may be reflective.

Further in the bottom of the rear screen (or equivalent space on two-seater cars) the Competition Number shall be displayed black numbers on a 180mm x 180mm white background. This number must be visible from the rear of the Vehicle at eye level but must not impede the rear view via the rear view mirror. Where a National Event follows an International Status Event they may use the International style numbering.

5.5. The numbers must be in position before the Vehicle is presented for scrutineering and will be subject to approval as to the position and legibility and size.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 9 - Competitors Regulations including Licensing 470

5.6. The Timekeepers may decline to record the time of any Vehicle whose Competition numbers are not readily apparent.

5.7. On Multi-Venue Stage Rallies rally plates must be displayed at the front and rear of the Vehicle . 5.8. On Single Venue Stage Rallies front and rear plates are at the Organisers discretion.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 9 - Competitors Regulations including Licensing 471

CHAPTER 13 RALLY Appendix 10 - Competitors Specific Regulations for Special Stage Rallies

1. General 1.1. This Appendix must be read in conjunction with all applicable Appendices of this Chapter. 1.2. This Appendix covers the following defined categories of Event .

2. Special Stage Rally 2.1. A Rally containing Special Stages joined by linking sections that may use the Public Highway .

3. Special Stage

3.1. A section of a Rally on roads or land for which the Event has exclusive access or on public roads closed by Government legislation specifically permitting closure for motor sporting purposes where the marking for maintaining a time schedule forms a part of the Competition .

4. Single Venue Stage Rally 4.1. A Special Stage Rally which uses parts of stages more than four times during any day of the Event .

5. Historic Special Stage Rally

5.1. As Art.2 and 4 above but participation is limited to Vehicles complying with the appropriate Technical Regulations for Historic or Post-Historic Special Stage Rally Vehicles .

6. Rally Time Trial 6.1. A Single Venue Stage Rally run over a Stage not greater than 4 miles in length

7. Applicable to All Special Stage Rallies

7.1. Competitors and associated service vehicles and personnel may only fit or use radio transceiving equipment and frequencies that are licensed according to Regulations issued by Ofcom.

7.2. Competitors and associated service vehicles and personnel must not use or carry any radio transmitting device that operates on or interferes with the ASN licensed Frequencies.

7.3. Contravention of Arts. 7.1 and 7.2 above will be penalised by Disqualification

7.4. Competitors must present at scrutineering a valid ASN Competition Car Log Book / Vehicle Passport obtainable from ASN Scrutineers by appointment.

7.5. In conjunction with scrutiny of the Vehicle Drivers ’ and Co- Drivers ’ crash helmets, FHR Devices and overalls must be produced for approval.

7.6. All crew members must wear a crash helmet bearing an ASN approval sticker and a safety belt throughout any Special Stage .

7.7. The crew must wear flame-resistant overalls homologated to FIA 8856-2000 FIA 8856-2018 or FIA 1986 Standard and balaclavas to FIA 8856-2000 or FIA 8856-2018 Standard . Competitors are also strongly advised to wear flame-resistant shoes, gloves, socks and underwear. Plastic shoes (such as trainers) should be avoided. Attention is drawn to Chapter 9 in relation to Competitor PPE .

7.8. The crew must wear FIA approved FHR Devices fitted in accordance with Chapter 9 . 7.9. Competitors are strongly recommended to carry a First Aid Kit .

7.10. Competitors must carry an A4-size white board with a red SOS on one side and black OK on the other (letters to be a minimum of 12cm high with a minimum stroke width of 1.5cm) with means to secure the board on display for oncoming Competitors .

7.11. In the case of an incident where urgent medical attention is required the red SOS sign must be displayed as quickly as possible to alert following Vehicles and aid any aircraft attempting to assist. Where present the crew must operate the SOS function on the Tracking Console .

7.12. Any crew that sees a red SOS sign displayed on a Vehicle or sees a major accident where both crew members are inside the Vehicle but not displaying the SOS sign must immediately and without exception stop to give assistance. Where present the crew must operate the SOS function on the Tracking Console in their own Vehicle and that of the crashed Vehicle where accessible.

7.13. All following Vehicles must also stop and the second Vehicle arriving at the scene must inform the next radio point.

7.14. Subsequent Vehicles must leave a clear route for emergency vehicles. 7.15. The Clerk of the Course may award a discretionary time to any Competitor delayed in such circumstances.

7.16. Any crew which is able to but fails to comply with Arts.7.11–7.15 above may be Disqualified following a Judicial Hearing and reported to the ASN in accordance with but pursuant to the Judicial procedures provided by Chapter 2 .

7.17. In the case of an incident where medical intervention is not required the OK sign must be clearly shown to following Vehicles and to any aircraft attempting to assist. If the crew leave the vehicle the OK sign must be left clearly visible to other Competitors . Where present the crew must operate the OK function button on the Tracking Console .

7.18. The Emergency Red Warning Triangle must be placed at least 100m down the stage appropriate to the approaching speed of following Competitors to provide a visible advanced warning.

7.19. Any crew failing to comply with Art.7.17 above may be Disqualified following a Judicial Hearing and reported to the ASN in accordance with but pursuant to the Judicial procedures provided by Chapter 2 .

7.20. Competitors who misuse the SOS or OK signs will be penalised in accordance with but pursuant to the Judicial procedures provided by Chapter 2 . and may be reported to the ASN for further action.

7.21. Where a Tracking System is being used, a Competitor encountering a hazard other than described in Art. 7.12 above must operate the Hazard function on the Tracking Console and await further instructions from Officials .

7.22. Competitors who misuse the Hazard function may be Disqualified following a Judicial Hearing pursuant to Chapter 2 . and reported to the ASN for further action.

7.23. A ‘hazard’ is defined as any situation or incident on a Special Stage which is considered to be creating a safety issue that affects the safe passage of Competitors through that Stage .

7.24. Competitors must conform to the Medical Requirements specified in Chapter 6.

7.25. All Competitors must comply with any instructions in the Road Book concerning stopping at road junctions and failure to comply will be penalised as provided at App.8.b. or App.14.c.

7.26. Crew members must not smoke during any stage.

7.27. During a Special Stage the prescribed route must be followed and all direction signs displayed are mandatory.

7.28. Competitors overshooting the Stop line at the end of any stage are forbidden to reverse back to the Control .

7.29. Competitors are forbidden to traverse any part of a Special Stage in the opposite direction to Rally traffic.

7.30. Competitors must not voluntarily leave the prescribed route of a Special Stage without the express permission of the Stage Commander .

7.31. On passing a Red Signal displayed by a Marshal wearing a Marshals ’ tabard the crew MUST immediately and significantly reduce speed as well as being prepared to stop at any time.

7.32. At no time must a Competitor overtake any safety vehicle encountered on the Special Stage route. The

crew must then follow the instructions of any Marshals and / or stage safety personnel and maintain a reduced non-competitive speed until leaving the Special Stage . Failure to comply with this rule may result in Disqualification following a Judicial Hearing and reported to the ASN in accordance with but pursuant to the Judicial procedures provided by Chapter 2.

7.33. Competitors must not continue until advised to do so by an Official . 7.34. Competitors may only attempt a Special Stage once. 7.35. Re-runs are not Permitted .

7.36. When manual timing is to be used for a Special Stage and following the Stage Start Marshal ’s instruction that the Competitor is next to start the starting procedure is as follows:

The Marshal should give a loud verbal indication of 30 seconds 15 seconds 10 seconds and 5 seconds to go and then count down orally each second 5-4-3-2-1-GO.

Upon the signal GO a visual starting signal must be given which will normally be the raising of a flag from the bonnet (not the windscreen). Any other visual Signal to be used must be described in the Event Official Documents .

7.37. When automatic timing is used the Official Documents must detail the precise method which will be in operation with a clear description of the countdown method and the Signal to GO .

7.38. Making a false start will be penalised as per App.8 Art.e or App.14 Art.f.

7.39. If an automatic method of recording a false start is to be used the false start detector should be placed between 30cm and 40cm in front of the actual Start Line and the method of use and implementation must be described in the Event Official Documents . The timing system must be capable of recording the time that the car passes through the false start detector. These times must be made available to the Organisers with any Competitors recording a false start reported to the Clerk of the Course will be penalised as per App.8 Art.e or App.14 Art.f.

7.40. Stages where Competitors are required to start at intervals of less than one minute may dispense with the 30 seconds to go advance warning and this revised procedure must be advised in the Official Documents .

7.41. Any crew refusing to start a Special Stage at the time and in the position allocated will be penalised as per App.8 Art.e or App.8 Art.d which may be extended as far as Disqualification on the discretion of the Clerk of the Course in accordance with but pursuant to the Judicial procedures provided by Chapter 2. whether the Special Stage is run or not.

7.42. Unless specifically allowed by the Official Documents the use of or possession of Pace Notes or any other means of giving a Competitor advice relating to the traversing of a Special Stage on a Multi-Venue Stage Rally that has not been provided by the Organisers is forbidden. Minor annotations to supplied Subjective Route Notes are permitted but must not be rewritten into any other format. Contravention will be penalised in accordance with App.14 Art.r or App.8 Art.r .

7.43. On any Single Venue Stage Rally taking place on a Venue that is currently or was previously a licensed Race Speed or Kart Circuit or any airfield type Venue (disused or not) the use provision or possession of such information is prohibited and cannot be varied by the Official Documents except that:

This does not however preclude a crew from recording or annotating information during an Event on the route instructions issued by the Organisers for use later on in the same Event and

Neither does it preclude the use of Ordnance Survey maps of 1:25000 or 1:50000 scale along with others that are specified in the Official Documents as being necessary to complete the route but the only supplementary information that may be shown on the maps is information given by the Organisers (including route details).

7.44. Contravention of Art.7.42 above will be penalised in accordance with App.14 Art.r or App.8 Art.r .

CHAPTER 13 RALLY Appendix 11 Part A - Specific Regulations for Special Stage Rallies

1. General

1.1. This Appendix must be read in conjunction with all applicable Appendices of this Chapter in particular Appendix 1 and 2 and the ASN Stage Rally Safety Requirements as published on the ASN website www. motorsportuk.org of which all provisions are mandatory in the Organisation of Special Stage Rallies.

1.2. This Appendix 11 comprising 11A and 11B for Single Venue Stage Rallies and Rally Time Trials covers the following defined categories of Event .

2. Special Stage Rally 2.1. A Rally containing Special Stages joined by linking sections that may use the Public Highway.

3. Special Stage

4. Single Venue Stage Rally 4.1. A Special Stage Rally which uses parts of stages more than four times during any day of the Event.

5. Historic Special Stage Rally

5.1. As above Arts.2 and 4 but participation is limited to Vehicles complying with the appropriate Technical Regulations for Historic or Post-Historic Special Stage Rally Vehicles .

5.2. Historic Vehicles in each of Categories 1, 2, 3 and 4 must compete in separate Classes with separate Class results and awards to give a clear distinction between the periods of Vehicles. Refer to Appendix 17 of this Chapter for the recommended classes.

6. Rally Time Trial 6.1. A Single Venue Stage Rally run over a Stage not greater than 4 miles in length.

7. Applicable Appendices 7.1. Appendix 12 applies in respect of Special Stage Routes and Sections. 7.2. Appendix 13 applies in respect of Special Stage Controls and Timing and Penalties.

7.3. Appendix 14 applies in respect of Scheduled Time Special Stage Event Penalties and Chapter 2 (Judicial).

7.4. Appendix 8 applies in respect of Target Timed Special Stage Event Penalties and Chapter 2 (Judicial). 7.5. Appendix 16 applies in respect of Special Stage Rally Cars. 7.6. Appendix 17 applies in respect of Technical Regulations for Historic Special Stage Rally Cars. 7.7. Appendix 18 applies in respect of Servicing and Organised Assistance. 7.8. Appendix 20 applies in respect of medical and safety cover. 7.9. Appendix 23 applies in respect of Drawings.

7.10. Chapter 2 applies generally in respect of Judicial and Disciplinary matters including Protests and Appeals.

7.11. Chapters 3 to 5 inclusive and 7 to 9 inclusive apply to the extent applicable to this Discipline. 7.12. Fees and Fines are provided in Chapter 1 App.2. 7.13. Definitions are also provided in Chapter 1 App.1.

CHAPTER 13 RALLY Appendix 11 Part B - Specific Regulations for Single Venue Stage Rallies and Rally Time Trials

1. General

1.1. This Appendix must be read in conjunction with all applicable Appendices of this Chapter in particular Appendix 1 and 2 and the ASN Stage Rally Safety Requirements as published on the ASN website www.motorsportuk.org of which all provisions are mandatory in the Organisation of Special Stage Rallies.

1.2. This Appendix 11B makes specific provisions for Single Venue Stage Rallies and Rally Time Trials.

2. Single Venue Stage Rallies 2.1. The Official Documents must state whether the Public Highway is being used or not. 2.2. No Stage route may be used more than twice.

2.3. For a Stage route to be recognised as different it must vary by at least 20% of the Stage route if run in the same direction or be reversed.

2.4. No part of a Stage may be used in any one direction more than 12 times during the Event . 2.5. A Co-Driver who has signed on must be carried in each competing Vehicle . 2.6. No practising is permitted.

2.7. Pace Notes or any other means of giving Competitors advice relating to traversing any Stage are prohibited except as provided by this Appendix 11B on a Single Venue Stage Rally taking place on a Venue that is currently or was previously a Race or Speed or Kart Circuit Licensed by the ASN or on any airfield type Venue whether in current use as an airfield or not.

2.8. By exception to Art.2.7 above a crew is permitted during an Event to record or to annotate information on route instructions issued by the Organisers but solely for use later in the same Event .

2.9. By exception to Art.2.7 above but subject to Art.2.10 below Competitors are permitted to use Ordnance Survey maps of either 1:25000 or 1:50000 scale along with others that are specified in the Official Documents as being necessary to complete the Course .

2.10. The only supplementary information that may be shown on the maps referred to at Art.2.9 above is information given to Competitors in an Official Document by the Organisers including route details.

2.11. Any breach of Art.2.7 - Art.2.10 above shall result in Disqualification from the Event pursuant to the Judicial Procedures of Chapter 2 and referral to the ASN for consideration of further disciplinary action.

2.12. The Organisers must obtain written permission from the ASN in respect of any activity other than the Competition proposed to be held at the Event Venue to ensure that adequate insurance cover is provided.

2.13. PR work must be undertaken in accordance with App.19 of this Chapter irrespective of whether the Public Highway is to be used as part of any Event .

2.14. Fire Extinguishers must be available in any area defined as a Service Area and any area in which competing Vehicles are assembled awaiting their attempt at a Stage and at stop lines.

2.15. At Venues where spectators are encouraged to attend there must be a resident Spectator Safety Car equipped with a PA system and a radio on the frequency to be used on the Event .

3. Rally Time Trials

3.1. A Rally Time Trial is a Single Venue Special Stage Rally and must be run in accordance with the NCR as to Competitor eligibility and safety eligibility and Stage Rally Safety Requirements .

3.2. All Vehicles must comply with the Technical Regulations of Appendices 15, 16 and 17 as applicable.

3.3. The following specific provisions apply:

No Passengers can be carried during either Practice or competitive runs UNLESS authorised by the ASN when a higher Permit Fee will be payable due to insurance considerations.

b. The Course must not exceed a distance of 4 miles. c. The Clerk of the Course may authorise re-runs. d.

Results need not be based on cumulative times but may be based on selective aggregate times (i.e best 2 of 3 runs) or be purely on the best time achieved.

e. The starting procedure must comply with that of a Stage but an arrival control is not required. 3.4. Rally Time Trials are not valid for upgrading a Stage Rally Competition Licence .

CHAPTER 13 RALLY Appendix 11 Part C - Specific Regulations for Targa Road Rallies

1. General 1.1. Targa Road Rallies must comply with the following;

To be classified as a finisher a Competitor must report to all Main Time Controls and, unless otherwise stated in the Event Documents , attempt at least 75% of the tests listed in the Route Card or Time Card .

b. Not include any Standard Sections . c. Regularity Sections may be included. d. Classes to be set by Organisers .

e. No regular assistance organised in advance may be used by Competitors in Rallies defined in App.3 Arts.2–10 inclusive, except when permitted in the Event Official Documents for Targa Road Rallies taking place at a Single Venue .

2. Vehicles - General Regulations

2.1. Competitors are required to carry a First Aid Kit , high visibility vests or jackets, OK/SOS board, Spill Kit , warning triangle and for Events run during the hours of darkness a torch. It is recommended that all Competitors carry a fire extinguisher that is positioned and secured appropriately.

2.2. The use of in car cameras, is forbidden on any public road sections. Organisers may not sanction, encourage or facilitate the filming of Events taking part on the Public Highway . The use of in car cameras (fitting must be specifically approved by a Scrutineer ) is allowed where Official Documents expressly permit this. A copy of any recording must be provided to the ASN if requested.

2.3. The Vehicle must be currently registered and taxed as a Private Car and comply with all statutory regulations as to the Construction and Use Regulations (especially regarding brakes, lighting, tyres, warning devices, rear view mirrors, silencers, speedometers, wings and windscreens). In this section the term MODEL refers to all variants of the same family of cars. In addition to complying with Chapter 7 all Vehicle competing in Road Rallies must comply with the appropriate part of the following: Body . Vehicles of commercial type, such as vans / pickups ( Ch.7 App.2 Art.22.6 ) are not permitted.

2.4. Be currently registered and taxed as a private car, unless specific Event regulations relax the requirement for taxation, by virtue of the entire Event taking place wholly on private property.

2.5. All major internal trim as fitted to the body type by its original manufacturer when offering it for sale must be retained. Major internal trim includes headlining, inside door panels (which may be replaced with representative material) for all doors and / or rear side panels alongside the rear seat (for a 2 door car), carpets and rear seats. It does not include parcel shelves, boot carpet or boot side trims.

2.6. Front seats may be improved or replaced. 2.7. The trim including the door cards and rear seat may be cut to allow the fitting of a safety cage.

2.8. If equipped with a non-standard fuel tank it must be separated from the Driver / Passenger compartment by a protective bulkhead of non-flammable material preventing the passage of fluid or flame.

2.9. Full harness seat belts may be fitted. 2.10. Guards may be fitted beneath the Vehicle to provide protection from damage.

3. Engines and Transmissions 3.1. Vehicle engines must have:

a. A maximum of four cylinders.

A maximum of two carburettor chokes (two single or one double).

A maximum of one camshaft per bank of cylinders.

Engines with more than one camshaft per bank of cylinders may be used providing that:

3.2.

any replacement engine comprises a block and cylinder head from the same engine family.

they were originally fitted with fuel injection, and;

c. that fuel injection system complete with the inlet manifold and throttle body is retained unmodified except as permitted in Art.2.3.c.

3.3. It is permitted to make the following modifications to affect installation;

a. alternative engine mountings, sump pan and exhaust manifolds are permitted; b. it is permitted to relocate ancillaries such as alternators and steering pumps. c. it is permitted to change the orientation of the otherwise unmodified inlet manifold.

3.4. For petrol engines under 1500cc and diesel engines under 2000cc actual capacity, forced induction is permitted providing that the complete original induction system is retained unmodified and other than the replacement of the air filter element.

3.5. Fuel injection may be fitted where it was standard equipment by the manufacturer for that engine type and where the original plenum chamber and throttle body is retained for that engine type.

3.6. A standard Wankel unit will be considered as three cylinders – twin Wankel units are prohibited.

3.7. Engines must comply with the silencing levels Ch.5 App.8, Ch.7 App.8 Art.2 and App.1 Art.7 of this Chapter and have induction air filter elements fitted that ensure the Vehicle complies with noise regulations Ch.7 App.8 Art.2.

3.8. The only type of manual transmission permitted is an H shift pattern. The gear lever must remain the only means of changing gear unless an alternative method was originally fitted by the Vehicle manufacturer as standard. Automatic transmissions are permitted provided that they are in their original configuration as fitted by the manufacturer to that specific Vehicle model.

3.9. The number and location of the driven wheels must remain as original to the model of car.

4. Wheels and Tyres

4.1. Wheels and tyre sizes are free but must fit within the standard unmodified wheel arch. A maximum of six tyres can be used by a crew during an Event unless the Official Documents state otherwise.

4.2. Vehicles must be fitted with tyres that are always legal for use on the Public Highway . 4.3. Tyres must comply with Ch.8 App.4 Art.3.1.

4.4. Vehicles must have all spare wheels securely fastened in position and must not be fitted with spiked or studded tyres or any non-skid attachments, other than chains if permitted by Official Documents .

5. Electrical Systems

5.1. Vehicles must have a maximum of four forward facing beams, as well as side and indicator lights, unless further restrictions are specified in Official Documents . Where more than four beams are fitted as standard, only four may be used and the remainder must be rendered unusable for the duration of the Event .

5.2. Light pods are not permitted. 5.3. A headlamp must provide the main beam and dipped beam functions.

5.4. An auxiliary lamp provides a beam other than that provided by the headlamp. With the exception of Vehicles built before 31st December 1946 the maximum width of the lamp body of any auxiliary lamp must not exceed 222mm.

5.5. A headlamp may consist of a single reflector with a dual filament bulb, or separate reflectors each with single filament bulbs providing the functions of main beam and dipped beam separately. This will be considered as equivalent to a single dual filament headlamp unit. Lamp units comprising two reflectors where one is fitted with a dual filament bulb will be considered as a combined headlamp and auxiliary lamp. In this instance therefore no additional auxiliary lamps may be fitted.

5.6. Auxiliary lamps unless fitted as standard equipment using gas discharge or LED technology are not permitted and gas discharge or LED headlamp units may not be retro fitted.

5.7. Auxiliary lights must not be used in neutral sections except in poor visibility as permitted by law.

5.8. Where more than four beams are fitted as standard, only four may be used and the remainder must be rendered unusable for the duration of the Event .

5.9. Vehicles must have all lights fitted and used according to motor Vehicle lighting regulations. 5.10. External navigational or Marshal lights are not permitted.

5.11. For Events taking place wholly between half an hour before sunrise and half an hour after sunset App.15 Art.2.3 , Art.5.1, Art.5.2 and Art.5.10 do not apply. App.15 Art.6.1 is relaxed to permit advertising not exceeding 1250 sq cm in total. Also, it is permitted to fit a sunstrip of no more than 90mm deep which may display the manufacturer ’s make or model, or the name of the Event , or a recognised Motor Club , or a registered national charity, provided that this does not affect the Driver ’s view.

6. Miscellaneous

6.1. Vehicles may not use racing style numbers, nor have any advertising except for Event sponsor decals which must be incorporated within the Rally plate.

6.2. They should be equipped with an effective method of stopping fuel supply, operable by the Driver when normally seated (the ignition switch would normally cover this requirement) and must use Permitted Fuel as defined in Ch.1 App.1 ( Nomenclature and Definitions ).

6.3. Brakes are free but must comply with Construction and Use Regulations . A hydraulic handbrake is permitted where a functioning mechanical system is also present.

6.4. Vehicles must display registration plates in compliance with the current Road Vehicles (Display of Registration Marks) Regulations .

CHAPTER 13 RALLY Appendix 12 - Special Stage Routes and Sections

1. General 1.1. This Appendix must be read in conjunction with all applicable Appendices of this Chapter.

2. Documentation 2.1. The Road Book or Time Card must indicate:

a. The description of each Section ( Road Section , Special Stage , Service Area , Regroup etc). b.

The time allowed to traverse the route between each Time Control and all the information necessary to enable Competitors to comply with their speed obligations.

What information the Organisers require to be recorded and the places at which these records will be made except for those manned randomly including by Judges of Fact and DSOs .

Which checks will be manned by Officials except for checks established by Judges of Fact and DSOs .

e. Which portions of the Route will be timed to less than one minute. f. Any ‘out of bounds’ areas to be respected. g. The position of any junction at which the Competitor is required to stop.

h. The areas where Competitors are required to observe special restrictions as to driving behaviour (i.e. Quiet Zones etc).

i. The order in which controls and checks must be visited.

3. Route

3.1. The onus of following the correct route rests with the Competitor who must visit Controls and Checks in the order set out in the Road Book unless otherwise specified.

3.2. No private road must be used by Competitors unless specific permission to do so is given in the Road Book .

3.3. A Control or Check shall be considered to extend for 50m around the actual point at which Officials are making their records unless clearly visible signs are displayed to define a different area.

3.4. If the direction of approach to, or departure from, a control or check is specified, then any non-compliance with the requirement or passing the control or check when travelling in other than the specified direction or visiting the Control or Check more than once, may involve a Penalty .

3.5. Officials will be on duty at all Controls .

3.6. If at any control the Officials are not present during the whole period when a Competitor can report then all performances at that point will be ignored in compiling the results except for any penalty applied relating to excessive Noise or speed / driving standards.

3.7. All performances will also be ignored if a Control or Check is not sited at the location specified in the Official Documents .

3.8. The onus of ensuring that all the information required is clearly and legibly recorded at the appropriate time and place rests with the Competitor .

3.9. If any entry on a Time Card is not legible or appears not authentic it may be considered not to have been made. Organisers may refer to Marshals ’ check sheets in case of doubt.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 12 - Special Stage Routes and Sections 482

3.10. If there is a discrepancy between the time allowance shown by the Organisers on the Time Cards and that shown on any other document the Time Card will be taken to be correct unless previously amended in an official bulletin.

3.11. It is not permitted to define the route of a Special Stage by grid references or any other method requiring Competitors to choose their own route.

3.12. Any Flying Finish should be located at a point where Vehicles can be expected to be travelling slowly because of a preceding bend or hazard.

3.13. The Flying Finish line must be at least 200m before the stop line which must be at least 100m before any Public Highway . Bad weather slippery conditions and the potential speed of Vehicles crossing the Flying Finish line may require these distances to be extended.

3.14. The area between the Flying Finish and the stop line should so far as practical be free from bends sharp or deceptive corners or hazards such as gates etc. This area is prohibited to spectators.

3.15. Officials must be clearly identifiable and wherever possible:

a. Be placed in sight of all signs and arrows and at prohibited areas. b. Be placed where the public are expected to arrive to watch the stage. c. Have some pre-arranged system for warning spectators of the approach of Vehicles . d. Be under the control of a Sector Marshal if appropriate.

3.16. Where a Special Stage forms a continuous circuit Competitors must not be required to complete more than two laps.

3.17. Organisers must allow at least 100m separation from the start of the stage before Competitors join other Vehicles already on the Stage ( Arts.4.2 - 4.5 ).

3.18. On any Stage Rally which is not run under a Single Venue Stage Rally Permit the maximum number of competitive passes in any one direction over any Stage or any part of a Stage is limited to four.

3.19. Stage timing throughout an Event will be to the preceding second if manual timing is to be used.

3.20. Automatic timing can be to the preceding 1/10th of a second but only if the intention to do so is stated in the Official Documents .

3.21. The timing of any Section must be recorded in a way that Competitors can verify its correctness. This must prohibit the ‘setting back’ of the section finish watch.

3.22. The only timing that can be considered is from the Standing Start to the Flying Finish line. 3.23. No Competitor may gain an advantage by exceeding the specified average speed. 3.24. The time based on this average shall be referred to as the Stage Bogey Time .

3.25. Competitors must not be started from any stage start at intervals of less than one minute unless in accordance with the following procedures:

3.26. Authorisation for Stage Starts of between 30 seconds and one minute interval must be obtained in writing from the ASN and will only be considered when the following information has been submitted:

a. The individual Stage name and number and location. b. The length of the Stage . c. The type of surface (forest tarmac etc). d. The average width of the road. e. Diagram(s) of the Venue showing Stage routes and safety provisions. f. The number of times Competitors are attempting the stage.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 12 - Special Stage Routes and Sections 483

If the Competitors are attempting the stage more than once the time interval between their first and second run and the possibility of catching previous Competitors .

Whether Competitors attempting their second run will be interposed with those still attempting their first.

Whether the Stage has a split route and if so then how far this is into the stage. On unsealed surfaces the stage must not consist of more than 2.5 miles of common route.

j. Whether extreme weather (eg heavy rain dust etc) will adversely affect a fair Competition . k.

Competitors have been seeded by performance without dispensation in accordance with these Regulations .

l. Suitable timing arrangements have been made at the Finish Line .

3.27. No practising or testing is Permitted on any Special Stage before any Event unless specifically authorised in writing by the ASN .

3.28. Any access to any part of a stage whether from a car park or through entrances must be protected by warning notices as specified in and is subject to the requirements of Chapter 3 .

3.29. There must be a copy of the Safety Code on display at all entrances where the public are likely to enter.

3.30. When an admission charge is made for public attendance or where significant numbers of the public are expected to attend suitable arrangements must be made by the Organisers for dealing with the first-aid requirements of spectators.

3.31. Where the nature of the venue is such that it is either impractical to apply such precautions or access by the public cannot reasonably be controlled then only a car park charge may be levied. ASN approval is not required when imposing this charge.

3.32. On Events where there is a published programme or where information is published which gives details of the location of Special Stages a copy of the Safety Code for the guidance of spectators must be included.

3.33. Means of access onto the stage must be closed by barriers and signs sufficient to prevent any noncompeting vehicle gaining access. Warning notices as detailed in Chapter 3 must be displayed.

3.34. It should also be impossible for anyone on foot to get on to any stage through normal access roads or tracks without complying with all of the following:

Being aware of it Having been seen by an Official Having seen a warning notice d. Having seen the Safety Code .

a. b. c.

Types of Section 3.35. The following terminology and restrictions apply to all stage rally sections. No other title or description is valid:

Road Section 3.36. Any section of the route of a Special Stage Rally (excluding control and service areas) whether on the

Public Highway or not which links Special Stages .

3.37. When on the Public Highway these sections must comply with the average speed requirements of App.2.

3.38. Competitors must not use any auxiliary lights in road sections except in conditions of reduced visibility as permitted by law. Any forward-facing lights additional to the headlight system sidelights and indicators are deemed to be auxiliary lights.

Special Stage 3.39. A section of a Rally on roads or land for which the Event has exclusive access or on public roads closed by Government legislation specifically Permitting closure for motor sporting purposes where the marking

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 12 - Special Stage Routes and Sections 484

for maintaining a time schedule forms a part of the Competition .

Special Stages

3.40. Unless approved in writing by the ASN Special Stages must not include any checks or controls or other requirements that might require or encourage Competitors to stop during the stage. Applications shall be made in accordance with Art.3.26 above.

3.41. Special Stages must be over a distance of not less than half a mile and no stage may exceed 20 miles in length without written permission from the ASN .

3.42. If the stage is wholly on a sealed surface no Competitor should be able to achieve an average speed of more than 75mph. Subject to Art.3.44 the average speed may be increased to 80mph.

3.43. If the stage is run partly or wholly on unsealed surfaces no Competitor should be able to achieve an average speed of more than 70mph. Subject to Art.3.44 the average speed may be increased to 75mph.

3.44. Clerks of the Course and Event Safety Officers must attend a webinar hosted by the ASN (and provide evidence of attendance if requested) prior to receiving permission to utilise the increased average speeds specified above.

3.45. Special Stages must not use any sections of a Venue in opposite directions at the same time unless there is at least a 15m separation between the two routes with a continuous barrier to prevent a car crossing. Crossroads used twice must preserve this separation.

3.46. The barrier must consist of one or more of the following:

a. b. tyres permanently joined in threes straw or silage bales, wrapped or unwrapped c. earthbanks or similar immovable objects. 3.47. Motorway cones or blocking tapes are not suitable for the purposes of Art.3.45 and Art.3.46 above.

3.48. Special Stages must not use any currently or previously licensed Race Speed or Kart Circuit nor any airfield (disused or not) unless the ASN has specifically approved in writing the stage layouts and safety precautions. Applications must be made in accordance with Art.3.26 above .

3.49. These Stages must not be routed closer than 75m to any parked aircraft unless there is a solid physical barrier at the edge of the course protecting the aircraft and a gap of 45m from the barrier to the aircraft.

3.50. At the start of every Special Stage the Organisers must provide a Medium Spill Kit .

4. Arrows and Signs

4.1. The correct route should be indicated to Competitors by arrows and signs and by physical blockage of all but the correct road. These indications shall wherever possible be consistent with Appendix 23 Drawing 5 and with the following:

Arrowing must be reduced to a minimum and placed only at junctions. Really acute bends or hazards where a drastic reduction in speed is required should be marked by a caution or bend sign. Arrows must not be used to define chicanes. A chevron board Appendix 23 Drawing 4 showing the entry to the chicane must be placed in the full view of Competitors . This board must have minimum dimensions of 76cm x 61cm.

Arrows should be placed approximately 1.2m from the ground. Wherever possible arrows shall be of Day-Glo red or orange and must be easily visible to Competitors . To avoid confusion multiple signs on one post should be avoided.

c. Advance warning signs for junctions must be placed 100m (+ or - 10m where visibility is reduced) before the junction. d.

Two arrows should be visible on any junction fixed to form a ‘gate’ through which Competitors will pass. Arrows may be angled to show the severity of the junction indicated by one of four basic

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 12 - Special Stage Routes and Sections 485

positions vertical horizontal raised or lowered by 45°. An example of the method used must be shown to Competitors before the Event . e.

A wrong direction must be indicated by a standard No Entry sign (a red disc with a white bar) and all but the correct road must be visibly blocked by appropriate means except as provided for in Art. 4.1.f below . Alternatively but only on closed road stages the No Entry Sign may be replaced by a Chevron Board and tape as shown in Appendix 23 Drawing 6 .

In the case of wholly tarmac stages that are run on public roads closed for the purpose under Government legislation the preceding regulations apply to all road junctions. It is not mandatory to block off private driveways unless through the layout of the stage the Organisers consider that they would constitute a hazard for Competitors . In these circumstances they must be blocked off with tape and at least a No Entry board displayed and notified as in Art.4.1.g below.

Along with the arrows and signs displayed on the Special Stage each Competitor must be issued with a Tulip diagram of each stage showing location or hazard numbers or letters and indicating the intermediate mileages between junctions and danger spots or hazards and the direction to be taken.

For stages on airfield-type venues it is permissible to substitute a detailed sketch diagram. This diagram must be approved by the ASN before the Event . This approval will constitute automatic permission to dispense with Tulip diagrams.

The warning signs for each location or hazard detailed in the sketch map or Tulip diagram must display the corresponding location or hazard number or letter.

j. Hazards should be indicated by a single exclamation sign between 50m/100m before the hazard.

4.2. If a section of road is used twice on stages where the route divides or where two roads merge the junction itself should be clearly marked by a white board at least 76cm x 61cm illustrating the junction and the figures on this board must be at least 15cm high.

4.3. The junction must be preceded by a similar diagrammatic sign in advance of Motorway type Countdown Boards with diagonal bands positioned approximately 100m and 200m before the junction.

4.4. Judges of Fact should be placed at any split junction to note and report for penalty any Competitor overshooting and reversing back against the route of Rally traffic.

4.5. Where stage routes merge on a lapping stage then the angle between the two roads (prior to the common route) must be no more than 45° to each other and on joining run separately but in parallel for at least 100m before merging and Signs should be shown to Competitors . These signs must have a minimum size of 76cm x 61cm ( App.23 Drawing 7 ).

4.6. In respect of Art.4.5 above at the point of merge Competitors furthest into stage will have priority and all Competitors must merge in such a way that it does not constitute a danger or hinder other drivers.

4.7. Radio Point signs complying with Appendix 23 Drawing number 8 must be displayed at and before all Mandatory Radio Points detailed in the Road Book as issued to Competitors other than at those locations signed in accordance with Art.4.5 above.

5. Chicanes 5.1. Applicable to Multi Venue Stage Rally events only;

5.2. Chicanes must be constructed with a minimum of 4 elements ( Art.5.3 below ) which must maintain a distance of 10m between the outer edge of each element in accordance with App.23 Drawing number 5 ..

5.3. Subject to Art.5.3 below below Chicanes must be constructed with rectangular or round bales which can be wrapped but must not be tied together with a protective sleeve ( App.23 Drawing 4 ).

5.4. Where Organisers require Chicanes of alternative design and construction methods to those in Art. 5.1 and Art.6.1 , due to the limitations of the proposed location or requirement to change the course of the Vehicle , these will be considered by means of email application to the ASN with the following information;

Location

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 12 - Special Stage Routes and Sections 486

Proposed number of elements Proposed construction methods Reason for application

b. c. d.

5.5. All Chicanes must utilise countdown boards that are blue in colour positioned at 200m and 100m in advance of the Chicane as outlined in App.23 Drawing 4.

5.6. It is acceptable to position Chicanes on roads narrower than 4.26m in width but as with all road widths it is important that Chicanes are to be positioned in a way that does not force the competing Vehicle off the road in order to enter or exit. Their design must meet the above construction requirements.

5.7. It is recommended that there are no poles, trees, pillars or other hazards at the entry and exit point of the Chicane . If such hazards are positioned at the entry or exit of the Chicane there is to be additional protection added using bales.

6. Bus Stop Chicanes

6.1. ‘ Bus Stop ’ type Chicanes made of a minimum of one element are to follow the proposed construction methods outlined above. Additionally, it is recommended that there are no poles, trees, pillars or other hazards at the entry or exit point of the Chicane . If these features are positioned at the entry or exit of the Chicane there is to be additional protection added using bales.

7. Recce

7.1. Prior to reconnaissance, Chicanes must be marked on the road using semi-permanent paint that is easily visible in wet weather conditions (white to be the preferred colour). Events are to use a stencil that mirrors the size of the element where safe to do so. A board 100m prior to the location, and / or a sign identifying the first element and the side of the road of entry should also be in position.

8. Approval Process – Closed Road Multi Venue Events only

8.1. Safety Delegate must be provided with Stage Set-up Notes including all Chicane details at least 2 months prior to the Event preferably accompanied by a high quality video indicating the exact location to confirm proposed positioning and construction of Chicanes (subject to Art.5.3 ).

8.2. Where changes to Chicanes are proposed following the presentation of Chicane details to the Safety Delegate the Organisers must provide a further high-quality video to the Safety Delegate for their review and approval prior to their arrival on Events .

8.3. On approval of the Safety Delegate the proposed Chicanes can then be approved by the ASN Head of Rallying .

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 12 - Special Stage Routes and Sections 487

CHAPTER 13 RALLY Appendix 13 - Special Stage Controls, Timing and Penalties

1. General 1.1. This Appendix must be read in conjunction with all applicable Appendices in this Chapter.

2. Documentation 2.1. The Road Book or Time Card must indicate:

a. The description of each Section ( Road Section , Special Stage , Service Area , Regroup etc). b.

The time allowed to traverse the route between each Time Control and all the information necessary to enable Competitors to comply with their speed obligations.

What information the Organisers require to be recorded and the places at which these records will be made except for those manned randomly including by Judges of Fact and DSOs .

Which checks will be manned by Officials except for checks established by Judges of Fact and DSOs .

e. Which portions of the Route will be timed to less than one minute. f. Any ‘out of bounds’ areas to be respected. g. The position of any junction at which the Competitor is required to stop.

h. The areas where Competitors are required to observe special restrictions as to driving behaviour (i.e. Quiet Zones etc).

i. The order in which Controls and checks must be visited.

3. Controls

3.1. Controls will open 15 minutes before the due time of arrival of the first Vehicle and close on the direction of the Clerk of the Course considering the due time of arrival of the last competing Vehicle .

3.2. The Official Documents may specify a different opening period.

3.3. The time of arrival at or departure from a Control will be the time at which the Time Card is presented by the Competitor concerned providing all crew members and Vehicle are within the Control area.

3.4. At all Controls the Time Card is to be completed manually by a Marshal . 3.5. Control Procedures:

a. The check-in procedure begins at the moment the car enters the time Control area. b.

The actual timing and entry of the time on the Time Card may only be carried out if the two crew members and the Vehicle are within the Control area. Between entering the Control area and the Control the crew is forbidden to stop for any reason or to drive at an abnormally slow speed.

The check-in time shall correspond to the exact moment at which one of the crew members hands the Time Card to the appropriate Marshal who will enter on the card the actual time at which the card was handed in and nothing else.

d. The target check-in time is the responsibility of the Crew alone who may consult the official clock. e.

The Crew will incur a penalty for early arrival if the Vehicle enters the Control area before the minute preceding the target check in minute. The crew will not incur any penalty for lateness if the act of handing the card to the appropriate marshal takes place during the target check-in minute.

(Example: A Vehicle has left the previous stage finish at 11.04.40 on a section for which the target time is nine minutes. It is therefore due at the next time Control at 11.13. It arrives at the yellow

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 13 - Special Stage Controls, Timing and Penalties 488

advance Control board at 11.08 stopping before the yellow board. The Vehicle is permitted to enter the Control area at any time after 11.12.00. The Time Card may be handed in at any time between 11.13.00 and 11.13.59 and a time of 11.13 will be recorded.) g.

If it is found that a Crew has not observed the rules for the check-in procedure the Marshal at the Control must make this the subject of a written report to be sent to the Clerk of the Course for consideration of the application of penalties.

3.6. The time of reporting at Controls will be recorded to the preceding whole minute when penalties are imposed per minute (for example 09 minutes 59 seconds will be recorded as 09 minutes).

3.7. Where a Control at the end of a section timed to the second (or to the second and part thereof) also forms the start of a section timed to the minute the time of departure will be considered as being the same as arrival but ignoring any seconds or parts thereof.

3.8. Competitors must not leave the Special Stage Arrival Control unless ready to start a Special Stage . 3.9. Exceptions to Art.3.5 above are:

In the event of a competing Vehicle obstructing other Competitors through being halted or unduly slowed down near a Control the Officials may instruct the Driver to proceed and may then record the time as the time when this instruction is given.

In the event of a Competitor presenting a Time Card to Officials at a time when the Vehicle is outside the Control area the Officials have discretion as to whether or not to make a record on the Time Card .

At the end of a Rally or of any day of a Rally Competitors are allowed to check in in advance of their due time. This must be specifically authorised by the Rally Organisers in the Official Documents or an official bulletin. Competitors arriving early must have their due time entered on the Time Card ; those arriving later than their due time must have their actual time of arrival entered.

4. Main Controls

4.1. Are situated at the Start and Finish of a Rally immediately before and after any Rest Halt and at any other specified point. At a Main Control after a Rest Halt Competitors will (unless the Official Documents specify otherwise) restart at one minute intervals:

In number order or In the order of their arrival at the Main Control preceding the Rest Halt or In the order of their arrival at some other preceding Control or d. In the order of General Classification at a specified point if interim results are available.

a. b. c.

The method used must be specified in an Official Instruction. Each Competitor must be given a due starting time from any Main Control (Out) and any difference between this time and their actual starting time will be counted towards cumulative lateness and a Time Penalty applied (unless the Official Documents specify otherwise).

5. Regrouping Controls

5.1. The Road Book will specify these Controls where Competitors not Disqualified by having more than the Maximum Permitted Lateness at the Control will start the next section with zero lateness.

6. Special Stage Arrival Control

6.1. At this Time Control a Marshal enters a Competitor ’s time of arrival and the provisional starting time for a Special Stage which must be a minimum of three minutes after the arrival time in order to allow the crew to prepare for the stage.

6.2. The area between the Special Stage Arrival Control and the Stage Start is Parc Fermé .

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 13 - Special Stage Controls, Timing and Penalties 489

6.3. At the Special Stage Start the Marshal will enter the actual Start time which will normally correspond with the provisional Start time. The Start will then be given in accordance with the standard start procedure deployed by the Organisers on the Event .

7. Special Stage Finish Control

7.1. Competitors will receive their Special Stage Finish Times in hours minutes and seconds at the Special Stage Finish Control . This time in hours and minutes will be the start time for the next section.

8. Timing 8.1. All Special Stage Rallies may use either Target Timing or Scheduled Timing .

8.2. An ASN or Regional Association approved Rally Timekeeper must be appointed as a Chief Timekeeper for all Stage Rallies that use manual timing.

8.3. Stage Rallies intending to use any form of automatic timing must appoint an ASN-approved Rally Timekeeper of National Rally or higher grade who holds a Certificate of Competence issued by the manufacturer of the equipment to be used.

8.4. Times will be recorded to whole minutes on all sections except Special Stages which will be timed to the nearest preceding whole second unless the Official Documents specify that timing will be to the nearest preceding 1/10th of a second. Penalties will be applied in accordance with App.8(f) or App.14(g) as applicable.

8.5. All Timekeepers will be Judges of Fact in respect of time recorded.

9. Target Timing 9.1. Definitions for Target Timing

Target Time is the time specified to cover the distance between two consecutive Controls . A Competitor can calculate Due Time of Arrival at any Time Control by adding the Target Time for the section to the actual time of departure from the preceding Time Control . Each period of time shall be treated individually and no penalties incurred will apply to any subsequent section. However lateness taken over Target Time on Road Sections and Special Stages is cumulative and cannot be reduced.

Bogey Time is the time specified for a Competitor to complete a Special Stage without incurring penalty.

Stage Maximum Time is the maximum time penalty that can be applied on a Special Stage and will be the Target Time for the stage. It must be specified on the Time Card .

Cumulative Lateness is the sum of times in excess of Target Time taken over each section and once lost cannot be regained.

Maximum Permitted Lateness is the amount of Cumulative Lateness which if exceeded from the previous Main Control will result in a Competitor being deemed to have retired. This will be 30 minutes unless the Official Documents specify a different period which may not be less than 15 minutes for rallies where part of the itinerary uses public roads open to the public.

Penalty-free Cumulative Lateness . The Official Documents must specify the amount of Cumulative Lateness if any is allowed free of penalty before a Competitor will be penalised.

Dead Time is the authorised time between booking in at the end of one Target-timed section and the commencement of the next section. The time must be spent entirely within a Control zone. Dead time will have no effect on penalties or Cumulative Lateness incurred elsewhere.

Delay Allowance is a penalty-free allowance granted to specific Competitors following a delay under the instructions of an authorised Official . It has the effect of extending the Target Time for those Competitors on that Section only. Such delay allowance must be recorded in writing on a Competitor ’s Time Card by the Official .

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 13 - Special Stage Controls, Timing and Penalties 490

10. Scheduled Timing 10.1. Definitions for Scheduled Timing

Standard Time is the time of day a notional Competitor number zero would be due at any Control or check.

b. Scheduled Time is the actual time of day each Competitor is required to be at any specific point. c.

Scheduled Time can be calculated for any point by taking a Competitor ’s Competition Number multiplying by the time interval between Competitors at the start and adding the result to the standard time at that point.

Delay Allowance is an allowance free of penalty granted to specific Competitors following a delay under the instructions of an authorised Official of the Event .

e. Any Delay Allowance must be recorded in writing on the Competitor ’s Time Card by that Official . f. Due Time is the time a Competitor is due at any Control or check inclusive of any previous lateness. g. Penalised Time is the difference between Due Time and an earlier or later arrival time. h.

Penalty Free Lateness allows a Competitor late at one Control to be an equivalent amount late at a succeeding Control without incurring further penalty.

Outside Total Lateness ( OTL ) is the point where a Competitor is considered not to have visited a Control or check being more than 30 minutes past the Scheduled Time (including any delay allowance) unless the Official Documents specify a different period which may not be less than 15 minutes for rallies where part of the itinerary traverses public roads open to the public.

10.2. The Organisers can require any Competitor who is late to reduce their lateness by either foregoing or reducing any period of time provided for remaining at a Control or official halt.

10.3. Competitors may themselves reduce lateness without penalty in the following ways unless either forbidden to do so by the Official Documents or if by so doing they commit a breach of Art.10.5 below:

By reporting at any Control following one at which a penalty was applied for lateness at any time not earlier than Scheduled Time .

b. By missing a Control or Controls . The Competitor will be penalised in accordance with App. 14 (a) or (b) for every Control missed. On rejoining the route at a Control at the end of Road Section the Competitor will be permitted to restart without further penalty at any time between their original Scheduled Time and their Maximum Permitted Lateness in relation to their original Scheduled Time . c.

If the need arises for an Organiser to extend Maximum Permitted Lateness this can only be done at a point on the route at which Competitors are required to report to avoid Disqualification . Maximum Permitted Lateness can then only be extended for the following part of the route and cannot be applied retrospectively for earlier sections.

These provisions are subject to Standard Condition 4 of the Motor Vehicles ( Competitions and Trials ) Regulations where applicable.

10.4. No Penalty Free Lateness or official delay allowance that has been either reduced or foregone as permitted by Art. 25 above can be reclaimed but this does not exclude fresh claims based on new circumstances.

10.5. A Competitor found to have traversed a distance greater than four miles between two consecutive time Controls in less than three-quarters of the time [‘the ¾ Rule’] specified by the official time schedule will be penalised by the addition of 30 minutes for the first offence and Disqualification for a second offence (see App. 14 ). In calculating the penalty any fraction of minute will be ignored. The 3⁄4 rule does not apply to sections of less than 8 minutes scheduled duration.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 13 - Special Stage Controls, Timing and Penalties 491

This Regulation does not preclude the Organisers providing specific sections for time recovery for example:

In a nine minute section a penalty is imposed if a Competitor completes a section in less than six minutes.

b. In a 10 minute section – seven minutes. c. In an 11 minute section – eight minutes. d. In a 12 minute section – nine minutes. 10.6. Times will be recorded to whole minutes unless the Official Documents state otherwise.

10.7. Any timing to less than one minute will be recorded on equipment under the Control of the Chief Timekeeper .

10.8. Competitors will be timed by the official timepieces in the charge of Officials unless the Official Documents state that watches carried by the Competitors can be used.

10.9. The definitions of the following terms are as provided at Art.9 above .

Bogey Time Stage Maximum Time

a. b.

10.10. The definitions of the following terms are provided at Arts. 4 –7 above .

Main Time Controls Regrouping Controls Special Stage Arrival Control

a. b. c.

d. Special Stage Finish Control .

11. Penalties

11.1. Competitors will receive penalties on Special Stages as follows:

a. b. c.

Under Bogey : Penalty = Bogey Time Over Bogey but under Stage Maximum time: Penalty = Actual time taken Over Stage Maximum : Penalty = Stage Maximum Time

11.2. Organisers may require any Competitor who is late to reduce their lateness by either foregoing or reducing any period of time provided for remaining at a Control or official halt.

11.3. If the need arises for an Organiser to extend Maximum Permitted Lateness this can only be done at a point on the route at which Competitors are required to report to avoid Disqualification . Maximum Permitted Lateness can then only be extended for the following part of the route and cannot be applied retrospectively for the earlier sections. These provisions are subject to Standard Condition 4 of the Motor Vehicles ( Competitions and Trials ) Regulations where they apply.

11.4. No Penalty-Free Lateness or official delay allowance that has been either reduced or foregone as permitted by these Regulations may be reclaimed but this does not exclude fresh claims based on new circumstances.

12. Target Timed Penalty Schedule 12.1. See Appendix 8.

13. Scheduled Time Penalty Schedule 13.1. See Appendix 14 .

13.2. For the avoidance of doubt the application of penalties under this Appendix does not preclude the application of penalties for breach of NCR pursuant to Chapter 2.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 13 - Special Stage Controls, Timing and Penalties 492

14. Results

14.1. To be classified as a finisher, a Competitor must report to all controls listed in the Road Book except as provided for in App.8(a) where two-thirds of the stage must have been completed and report to the final control within the maximum lateness specified, with the Vehicle in which they started.

14.2. Penalties and the results are established by adding together the times taken during the Special Stages and the time penalties incurred on the road sections, together with all other penalties expressed in time. The Competitor with the lowest total will be the winner, and so on.

14.3. If there is a tie, the Competitor who accomplished the best time for the first Special Stage will be judged the winner. If this is not sufficient to resolve the tie, the times of the second, third, fourth, etc, Special Stages will be taken into consideration, unless the Official Documents specify another method of resolving ties. This regulation can be applied at any time during the Rally .

14.4. Competitors at the conclusion of their Competition must sign a declaration form confirming they have not been involved in any incident that may have caused damage to persons or property, or alternatively give details of any such incident. Failure to comply will be penalised in accordance with App.8 and 14 and may be reported to the ASN for further disciplinary action.

14.5. Competitors who retire will be required to submit this form to the Event Secretary within 72 hours of the Event . Failure to return the form may be penalised by a fine of up to £100.

14.6. There must be no awards for Competitors who equal or improve upon the time schedules for any sections, nor for the fastest times or fewest penalties on any sections.

15. Rejoining the Rally (Rejoin Point)

15.1. Competitors may only rejoin the rally after missing a Control or Special Stage where permitted by the Official Documents .

15.2. Having missed a Control or Special Stage a Competitor may only rejoin the Rally in their seeded position. Where no such provision is made in the Rally’s schedule to provide a restart list the Competitor may only rejoin at a designated rejoining point as specified in the Official Documents , within but not ahead of 15 places of their original seeded position.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 13 - Special Stage Controls, Timing and Penalties 493

CHAPTER 13 RALLY Appendix 14 - Schedule Timed Special Stage Event Penalties

1. Penalties SUMMARY OF PENALTIES TO BE APPLIED ON SCHEDULED TIMED SPECIAL STAGE RALLIES

Performance will be assessed by one of the methods listed, either by time penalty or by the ‘fails’ system. The Official Documents must specify which system is to be used.

●

*These penalties may be increased by the Official Documents ; they may not be reduced.

●

**The penalty may be increased if stated in the Official Documents. The items in italics may not be varied by the Rally Organisers.

●

Fails

Time (a) Not reporting or reporting OTL at a Main Time Control Retired

*(b) Not reporting or reporting OTL at any other Time Control 30 minutes 1 Fail *(c) Not complying with a requirement of the Road Book 10 minutes 1 Fail

(d) Not performing a Stage correctly Stage Maximum (e) Not attempting or being ready to attempt a stage when instructed to do so

1st Offence - 10 minutes

2nd Offence - Disqualification

(f) Making a false start at a Special Stage 1st Offence – 10 seconds (plus actual false start time)

2nd Offence – 1 minute 3rd Offence – 3 minutes

Further Offences – at the Clerk of the Course’ discretion 1 second

(g) (i) Every second taken to complete a Special Stage where timing is to the preceding whole second (g) (ii) Every second and 10th of a second taken to complete a Special Stage where timing is to the preceding whole 10th of a second (h) For each minute under target time on a road Section or in a service area

1 second and 10th of a second

1 minute

(i) Only if specifically mentioned in the Official Documents , for each minute after due time on a road Section or for each minute over due time in a service area

10 seconds

(j) For each minute before or after due time at Main

10 second

Time Control (out) (k) Breach of any statutory requirement concerning the use of a motor vehicle (l) Contravention of App.5 Art.10.18 *First Offence

10 minutes 1 fail

30 minutes 1 fail

*Second Offence

Disqualification

10 minutes 1 fail

(m) Excessive speed or driving likely to bring motor sport into disrepute

(n) Excessive sound 10 minutes 1 fail (o) Receiving assistance contrary to App.18 Arts.1.4–1.14 Disqualification

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 14 - Schedule Timed Special Stage Event Penalties 494

(p) Breach of App.18 Art.1.3, Arts.1.7 –1.8 10 minutes (q) Breach of App.9 Arts.4 , App.13 Art.14.4 , App.10 Art.7.1, App.10 Art.7.2, App.10 Art.7.5, App.10 Arts.7.24 and 7.26, App.10 Art.7.27 (r) Unauthorised use or possession of Pace Notes ( App.10 Arts.7.42 or unauthorised presence on a Stage ( App.9 Art.1.7 )

Disqualification

Disqualification and reported to the ASN

(s) Failure to comply with App.10 Arts.7.10–7.23 Disqualification and reported to the ASN

(t) Breach of Regulations App.2 Arts.4.17–4.22 or App.10 Art.7.30

Disqualification

(u) Breach of Regulation App.18 Art.1.9 Disqualification and reported to the ASN

(v) Breach of Regulation App 16 Art 7.11 5 minutes

2. Penalties left to the discretion of the Clerk of the Course which may go as far as Disqualification (aa) Failure to follow the instructions of an official. (bb) Further breaches of (b), (c), (d), (e), (k), (l), (m) or (n). (cc) Repeated misbehaviour of service crew. (dd) Reporting late for Scrutineering. (ee) Misuse of SOS and/or OK boards. (ff) Unauthorised testing or practicing. (gg) Causing an obstruction. (hh) Breaches of Regulations detailed in Chapter 2. (ii) Failure to comply with control check-in procedures.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 14 - Schedule Timed Special Stage Event Penalties 495

CHAPTER 13 RALLY Appendix 15 - Technical Regulations - Road, Endurance and Historic Road Rally Cars

1. General

1.1. The Vehicle must be currently registered and taxed as a Private Car and comply with all statutory regulations as to the Construction and Use regulations (especially regarding brakes lighting tyres warning devices rear view mirrors silencers speedometers wings and windscreens).

1.2. In this section the term MODEL refers to all variants of the same family of cars. In addition to complying with Chapter 7 ( Competitors Vehicles and Vehicle Safety Equipment ) and to the extent relevant Chapter 8 (Fuel and Tyres and Testing ). All Vehicles competing in Road Rallies must comply with the appropriate part of the following:

2. Body

2.1. Bodywork must represent the manufacturer ’s original profile and may include any optional extras available directly from the manufacturer.

2.2. Bumpers must be fitted. 2.3. Paintwork must be one colour or manufacturer ’s original colour scheme. No primer is to be visible.

2.4. Vehicles must not have wheel arch extensions unless fitted by the manufacturer as a standard item to the body shape.

2.6. Front seats may be improved or replaced. 2.7. The trim including the rear seat may be cut to allow the fitting of a safety cage.

2.9. Full harness seat belts may be fitted. 2.10. Guards may be fitted beneath the vehicle to provide protection from damage.

3. Engines and Transmissions 3.1. Vehicle engines must have:

a. A maximum of four cylinders. b. A maximum of two carburettor chokes (two single or one double). c. A maximum of one camshaft per bank of cylinders.

3.2. Engines with more than one camshaft per bank of cylinders may be used providing that:

a. Any replacement engine comprises a block and cylinder head from the same engine family. b. c. they were originally fitted with fuel injection and

that the fuel injection system complete with inlet manifold and throttle body is retained unmodified except as permitted in Art.3.3.c below.

3.3. In respect of Art.3.2 above it is permitted to make the following modifications to effect installation: a. Alternative engine mountings, sump pan and exhaust manifolds. b. Relocation of ancillaries such as alternators and steering pumps. c. To change the orientation of the otherwise unmodified inlet manifold.

3.4. For diesel and petrol engines under 1500cc actual capacity forced induction is permitted providing that the complete original induction system is retained unmodified other than the replacement of the air filter element.

3.5. Fuel injection may be fitted where it was standard equipment by the manufacturer for that engine type and where the original plenum chamber and throttle body is retained for that engine type.

3.6. A standard Wankel unit will be considered as three cylinders. Twin Wankel units are prohibited.

3.7. Engines must comply with the silencing Noise levels and have induction air filter elements fitted that ensure the vehicle complies with noise regulations.

3.8. Only H shift pattern manual transmissions are permitted. The gear lever must remain the only means of changing gear unless an alternative method was originally fitted by the vehicle manufacturer as standard. Automatic transmissions are permitted provided that they are in their original configuration as fitted by the manufacturer to that specific Vehicle model.

3.9. The number and location of the driven wheels must remain as original to the model of Vehicle.

4. Wheels and Tyres 4.1. Wheels and tyre sizes are free but must fit within the standard unmodified wheel arch. 4.2. Vehicles must be fitted with tyres that are always legal for use on the Public Highway. 4.3. Tyres must comply with Chapter 8 App.4 Arts.2–3

4.4. Vehicles must have all spare wheels securely fastened in position and must not be fitted with spiked or studded tyres or any non-skid attachments other than chains if permitted by the Official Documents.

5. Electrical Systems

5.1. Vehicles must have a maximum of four forward facing beams as well as side and indicator lights unless further restrictions are specified in the Official Documents.

5.2. Light pods are not permitted. 5.3. A headlamp must provide the main beam and dipped beam functions.

5.4. An auxiliary lamp provides a beam other than that provided by the headlamp. With the exception of cars built before 31st December 1946 the maximum width of the lamp body of any auxiliary lamp must not exceed 222mm.

5.5. A headlamp may consist of a single reflector with a dual filament bulb or separate reflectors each with single filament bulbs providing the functions of main beam and dipped beam separately. This will be considered as equivalent to a single dual filament headlamp unit. Lamp units comprising two reflectors where one is fitted with a dual filament bulb will be considered as a combined headlamp and auxiliary lamp. In this instance therefore no additional auxiliary lamps may be fitted.

5.6. Auxiliary lamps unless fitted by the manufacturer as standard equipment using gas discharge or LED technology are not permitted and gas discharge or LED headlamp units may not be retro-fitted.

5.7. Auxiliary lights must not be used in neutral Sections except in poor visibility as permitted by law.

5.8. Where more than four beams are fitted as standard only four may be used and the remainder must be rendered unusable for the duration of the Event.

5.9. Vehicles must have all lights fitted and used according to Motor Vehicle Lighting Regulations . 5.10. External navigational or Marshal lights are not permitted.

5.11. For Events taking place wholly between half an hour before sunrise and half an hour after sunset Arts.5.1 5.6, 5.8 and 5.10 above do not apply.

5.12. Art.6.1 below is relaxed to permit advertising not exceeding 1250 sq cm in total. Also it is permitted to fit a sunstrip of no more than 90mm deep which may display the manufacturer ’s make or model, or the name of the Event , or a recognised Motor Club , or a registered charity, provided that this does not affect the Driver ’s view.

6. Miscellaneous

6.1. Vehicles may not use racing style numbers nor have any advertising except for event sponsor decals which must be incorporated within the rally plate.

6.2. Vehicles must be equipped with an effective method of stopping fuel supply operable by the Driver when normally seated (the ignition switch would normally cover this requirement).

6.3. Vehicles must use Permitted Fuel as defined in Chapter 8. 6.4. Brakes are free but must comply with Construction and Use Regulations.

6.5. A hydraulic handbrake is permitted where a functioning mechanical system is also present. The hydraulic handbrake lever shall operate in an arc not exceeding 50 degrees from the horizontal (see App. 23 Drawing number 1 ).

6.6. Vehicles must display registration plates in compliance with the current Road Vehicles (Display of Registration Marks) Regulations.

6.7. Where an Event includes any Section or Special Test held wholly or in part on private property all Vehicles must carry a Small Spill Kit complying with the NCR and which is recommended for events held wholly on the Public Highway.

6.8. For Road Rallies Navigation Rallies and Targa Road Rallies held between 07.00 and 22.00hrs Arts. 2.3 and 5.2 and 5.3 and 5.10 above do not apply and Art.6.1 is relaxed to permit advertising not exceeding 1250 sq cm in total.

7. ENDURANCE ROAD RALLY 7.1. In addition to Arts. 1 – 6.8 these Vehicles must comply with the following Arts.7 inclusive.

7.2. Standard production specification engines limited to 1400cc naturally aspirated petrol, 2000cc naturally aspirated diesel and 1400cc forced induction diesel are permitted.

7.3. The exhaust system is free but must retain the original exhaust manifold. 7.4. Where originally fitted with a catalytic converter the standard part must be retained. 7.5. The transmission must be as originally fitted to the model of vehicle. 7.6. Any changes to the gearbox or final drive are prohibited. 7.7. The suspension type and mountings must remain the same as that fitted by the manufacturer. 7.8. The shock absorbers may be of any make and may be uprated from standard.

7.9. Adjustable spring platform struts are permitted. The mounting method and position must remain as specified by the manufacturer.

7.10. Springs are free but must retain their original location. 7.11. Bushes may be changed for similar polymer materials but rose-joints or similar metal joints are prohibited.

7.12. Vehicles must be fitted with rollover protection of a minimum conforming to Chapter 7 App.13 Diagram 10 and seat belts conforming to Chapter 7 App.7 Art.9.4–9.6. Sunroofs must either be fitted with safety film conforming to Chapter 7 App.2 Arts.22.7–22.8 or comply with Chapter 12 App.13 Art.11.8.

7.13. Brake fluid pads and linings and stone protection are free.

7.14. For daylight Endurance Road Rallies it is permitted to fit a sunstrip of no more than 90mm deep which may display the manufacturer ’s make or model or the name of the Event or a recognised Motor Club or a registered national charity provided that this does not affect the Driver ’s view.

7.15. Must use tyres from Chapter 8 List 4. 7.16. All vehicles must carry a Small Spill Kit complying with the NCR.

8. HISTORIC ROAD RALLY CARS 9. Series Production Cars

9.1. Note: In this section the term MODEL refers to all variants of the same family of cars. To avoid misunderstanding competitors are advised to obtain a copy of the appropriate manufacturer ’s documentation as to the standard specification of the car.

9.2. Historic Road Rally Cars are categorised in the following periods. A Vehicle will be dated by the specification presented and not necessarily by the date of build or registration:

Historic Category 1 Road Rally Cars . Vehicles of a specification valid before 1 January 1968 and compliant with all of: Art.2.2 above (except Sports Cars which need not be fitted with bumpers) and Art.2.7 and Art.3.7 and Art.4.1 and Art.4.5 (also see Art.11.2 below ).

Historic Category 2 Road Rally Car . Vehicles of a specification valid between 1 January 1968 and 31 December 1974 and compliant with Arts.2.2–6.8 above inclusive (see also Art.11.2 below ). For Road Rallies and Rallies with Special Tests held between 07.00 and 22.00hrs Arts.3.1(a)-3.1(c) above inclusive do not apply.

c. Historic Category 3 Road Rally Cars . Vehicles of a specification valid between 1 January 1975 and 31 December 1981 compliant with their FIA Group 1 or 3 homologation papers or be a Series Production Car and comply with Arts.2.2 –6.8 above inclusive (see also Art.11.2 below).

Historic Category 2 and 3 Road Rally Cars are permitted to use matt black bonnets and wing tops subject to Art. 9.3 below. d. Historic Category 4(a) Road Rally Cars . Vehicles of a specification valid between 1 January 1982 and 31 December 1985 or Historic Category 4(b) Road Rally Cars . Vehicles of a specification valid between 1 January 1986 and 31 December 1990 compliant with their FIA Group A or N homologation papers or be a Series Production Car and comply with Arts.2.2–6.8 above inclusive (see also Art.11.2 below). e.

Vehicles homologated in FIA Group A are permitted provided they are in standard production specification the only modifications permitted (see also Art.10.1 below ) are to dampers springs and brake friction material. Individual Vehicles will only be accepted after receiving ASN approval.

FIA Appendix K to the International Sporting Code: Historic Road Rally Cars fully compliant with the current FIA Appendix K categories T (Touring Car/Group1/Group N) and GT (Grand Touring Cars/Group 3) only. These Vehicles must have been issued with a valid FIA Historic Technical Passport (HTP) or Historic Regularity Car Pass (HRCP) and must always fully comply with the document and the current FIA Appendix K .

10. Permitted Modifications

10.1. Only period modifications used in rallying on the particular make and model of Vehicle are permitted for Historic Road Rally Cars.

10.2. Modifications are only allowed if they were available before 1 January 1968 in the case of Historic Category 1 Road Rally Cars before 1 January 1975 in the case of Historic Category 2 Road Rally Cars before 31 December 1981 in the case of Historic Category 3 Road Rally Cars before 31st December 1985 in the case of Historic Category 4(a) Road Rally Cars or before 31st December 1990 in the case of Historic Category 4(b) Road Rally Cars.

10.3. Roof vents are only permitted subject to the above.

11. Recommended Classes

11.1. Along with the mandatory Historic Road Rally Classes requirements classes can be introduced based on capacity and / or age of Vehicle . It is recommended that they be the same as for Historic Stage Rallies.

11.2. Certain waivers may be available for Historic Road Rally Cars entered in Road Rallies and Rallies with Special Tests solely for vehicles manufactured before 31st December 1946.

11.3. The ASN may also grant discretionary waivers for Historic Road Rally Cars complying with Art.9.2 above in respect of Arts.3.1–3.4 above as appropriate for Road Rallies and Rallies with Special Tests held between 07.00 and 22.00hrs providing an Historic Grade Eligibility Scrutineer is appointed.

11.4. Application for waivers must be made to the ASN by the Organisers of the specific Event giving full details of the waivers sought.

11.5. Any such waivers will be exclusive to an individual Motor Club and the nominated Event.

11.6. Exceptionally the ASN may grant a written dispensation to use non-original parts from a different model or parts from a later period provided that the use of these parts does not confer an advantage in either performance or reliability and the Decision of the ASN is final and not susceptible to any form of Appeal . The ASN will consider written requests from Competitors who are unable to source vital components.

12. Engine

12.1. Forced induction is permitted if by means of a mechanically driven supercharger or by an exhaust driven turbocharger if fitted as original equipment by the Vehicle manufacturer. Such Vehicles will be classified as having an engine capacity increased 70%.

12.2. Induction air filter elements must be fitted that ensure the Vehicle complies with noise regulations.

12.3. Exceptionally and with the permission of the Chief Scrutineer those Vehicles for which 5000rpm is inappropriate may be tested at 3/4 of maximum rpm.

13. Wheels Tyres and Brakes 13.1. Vehicles must always be fitted with tyres that are legal for use on the Public Highway.

13.2. The size of the wheel may not differ from that originally fitted by more than 10% on nominal diameter and/ or by 1 inch (25.4mm) on nominal width.

13.3. Vehicles originally fitted with 10 inch diameter wheels may increase to 12 inch diameter wheels. 13.4. The minimum diameter permitted is 15 inches unless a smaller diameter was fitted as original equipment.

13.5. The tyre section as marked on the side wall in millimetres or inches must not differ by more than 1 inch (25.4mm) from that originally fitted.

13.6. The fitting of tyres with an aspect ratio of less than 65% is prohibited.

13.7. The fitting of a dual master cylinder or any other type of device providing a simultaneous action on all four wheels and divided action on two wheels is permitted provided the original brake pedal and pivot point are used and it must be possible under all conditions, running or stationary, for 25% minimum braking effort to be applied by the driver through the braking system to each axle. For Cars in Category 1 the adjustment of brake balance must not be possible by either the Driver or the Co-Driver when normally seated in the car.

13.8. A hydraulic handbrake is permitted where a functioning mechanical system is also present. The hydraulic handbrake lever shall operate in an arc not exceeding 50 degrees from the horizontal (See Drawing 1 App.23 ).

13.9. For Vehicles in Categories 2 or 3 or 4 Art.13.6 does not apply where OE specification tyre aspect ratios are less than those specified therein.

14. Miscellaneous

14.1. Vehicles must not use racing style numbers nor carry advertising other than event sponsor decals. Permitted Fuel must be used as defined in Chapter 1 App.1 (Nomenclature and Definitions).

14.2. Where an Event includes any Section or Special Test held wholly or in part on private property all Vehicles must carry a Small Spill Kit complying with NCR Regulations and which is recommended for Events held wholly on the Public Highway.

14.3. For events in accordance with App.15 Art.5.11 , retro fitted gas discharge or LED headlamp units are permitted.

15. Standard Production Cars compliant with Art. 9.2.c and d. must comply with Arts.9.3–14.2 inclusive and the following regulations:

Body (External). No changes or additions may be made to the side or plan silhouettes to that offered by the manufacturers in either standard form or manufacturer ’s optional extra form. The replacement of any body panel with one constructed of different material from that fitted by the manufacturer is prohibited. Front and rear bumpers must be retained and be of the same dimensions and constructed of the same material as those fitted by the manufacturer

b. The fitting of any form of additional wheel arch extension is prohibited. c.

Engine . The engine fitted must in all respects conform to that fitted by the manufacturer for the model of Vehicle.

To ensure oil and / or fuel are not deposited on the Public Highway sumpguards and tankguards may be fitted. It is permitted to fit a guard or guards to the silencing system that must retain at least the same number of silencer boxes and expansion chambers as catalogued for the Vehicle.

Transmission . The gearbox shall be that as fitted to the model of Vehicle . Changes to the gearbox or final drive ratio other than those permitted by Art.9.4 are prohibited.

CHAPTER 13 RALLY Appendix 16 - Technical Regulations – Special Stage Rally Cars

1. General

1.1. In addition to complying with Chapters 7 and 8 all cars competing in Stage Rallies must comply with the appropriate parts of the following:

1.2. Vehicles issued with a CCLB before 1st January 2009 refer to Arts 2.15 - 2.17 below.

Special Stage Rallies 2. Cars Eligible

2.1. All cars must comply with Chapters 7 and 8 and all statutory regulations concerning the construction and use of Vehicles. In addition cars must:

Be currently registered and taxed as a private car unless specific Event regulations relax the requirement for taxation by virtue of the entire Event taking place wholly on private property.

Have registration documents and a valid MOT Certificate where required by law. These documents must be produced at scrutineering for all Events irrespective of whether or not part of the Event takes place on the Public Highway .

Have a valid ASN Competition Car Log Book / Vehicle Passport that must be produced at scrutineering.

Display registration plates in compliance with the current Road Vehicles (Display of Registration Marks) Regulations.

e. All Vehicles must carry a Small Spill Kit complying with ASN Regulations.

2.2. Category 1 : Those that have been homologated in Groups ‘A’ or ‘N’ of the FIA Appendix ‘J’ or Groups 1 2 3 or 4 of the 1981 FIA Appendix ‘J’ Non homologated Series Production Cars or Specialist Rally Cars.

A Specialist Rally Car is a Vehicle of which at least 20 examples are manufactured within a consecutive twelve month period and is fitted with a Series Production Car Engine or Specialist Competition Engine.

Modifications are free within ASN Vehicle Regulations and where permitted as defined below in Arts.3 - 10.

The Vehicle must be in the configuration as supplied by the manufacturer with the engine (any Series Production Car Engine or Specialist Competition Engine ) in the original location.

d. Vehicles must retain the original number of and location of driven wheels Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) or Four Wheel Drive (4WD) except where a 4WD car other than a Specialist Rally Car is converted to Two Wheel Drive (2WD) without structural alteration.

2.3. Category 2 : Any Vehicle not complying with Art.2.2.a–d. above that may be authorised for use at the discretion of the ASN including Vehicles homologated and remaining fully compliant with FIA R/GT regulations.

Such authorisation will only be granted for Vehicles which retain the original manufacturer ’s Chassis / bodywork / unitary construction.

Substitution by a space frame Chassis will not be accepted.

Original manufacturer's bodywork must be utilised.

Any modifications homologated by the FIA may be incorporated.

Replica copies of manufacturers homologated body parts / aerodynamic devices will not be accepted.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 16 - Special Stage Rally Cars 502

Manufacturers of very low volume numbers of Vehicles will be able to apply for baseline specification registration prior to sale to individual customers.

The conversion of front wheel drive Vehicles to rear wheel drive (or four wheel drive) or of rear wheel drive Vehicles to four wheel drive is permitted subject to the bodyshell construction alterations from the bulkhead rearwards being limited to those detailed in FIA Art.279.10.3.10 and shown in FIA Appendix J Drawings 279-1 and 279-2 . Where rear wheel drive Vehicles are converted to four wheel drive the bodyshell forward of the front bulkhead may be modified solely to allow fitment of front driveshafts.

All materials added must be ferrous and must also be welded to the Chassis / bodywork / unitary construction.

i. Doors and windscreen must remain in the manufacturer's original material. j.

Vehicles must be fitted with an engine in compliance with Arts.4 below and if forced induction is used the turbo / super charger must comply with Art.4.6 below.

The Vehicle may not be used in Competition until the Competition Car Log Book / Vehicle Passport has been validated by the ASN and returned to the Vehicle owner.

2.4. Category 3 : Aluminium or Steel monocoque 2-wheel drive normally aspirated petrol or forced induction diesel production cars of a model first made on or after 1st January 1991.

All external panels including bumpers must be of the original shape and material. Side and rear windows may be replaced by plastic which must be mounted in the original mountings Article 3 applies except for Art.3.3–3.6 and 3.8 below.

Carpets headlining soundproofing and rear seat may be removed front seats to Art.12.7 below. All other interior trim may be removed except for the door cards / trim which must be retained and fitted in the original location. Steering wheel may be changed. All other controls switches and dash must be retained and fitted in the original location.

2.5. Engine must comply with Art.4.10 below regarding oil systems and the following;

Original induction system including air filters with a restrictor fitted upstream of the throttle body in compliance with FIA App J Article 256 every Vehicle will have a specified restrictor diameter which may be altered at any time.

b. Only the parts controlling the quantity of fuel delivered may be changed.

c. Standard exhaust manifold and systems must be retained standard stroke maximum over bore +0.60 mm.

d. Camshaft valves and pistons are free.

2.6. Original transmission must be retained using any optional or homologated ratios. Free differentials may be replaced by mechanical limited slip differentials. Unless fitted as standard active differentials are not permitted.

2.7. Suspension must comply with Arts.6.1.a–j below inclusive except that parts and systems forbidden by Arts.6.1 (i) and (j) are permitted when fitted as original or optional equipment by the manufacturer

2.8. Wheels and tyres must comply with Art.7 below inclusive except for the following; 2.9. Wheels must be the original width Art.7.5 below does not apply and wheel diameter is free. 2.10. Brakes must be of original specification and comply with the following;

Friction material free backplates may be removed or deformed ABS may be disconnected c. a hydraulic hand brake is permitted. 2.11. Minimum Vehicle weight will be as per the manufacturer ’s data for that model.

a. b.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 16 - Special Stage Rally Cars 503

2.12. Under shields sump and tank guards strut braces may be fitted. 2.13. The following apply as written:

Fuel Systems with Art.9 below b. Electrical systems with Art. 10. c. Safety items with Art.12.

2.14. The Vehicle may not be used in competition until the Vehicle Passport has been validated by the ASN and returned to the Vehicle owner.

2.15. Stage Rally Cars with a CCLB / VP issued before 1st January 2009 and which complied with H265 or H266 of the 2008 regulations ( contact the ASN for details) must comply with Art.2.1, Art.3.2, Art.3.9, Art.3.10 , Art.3.12 , Art.3.14, Art.4.6, Art.7 , Art.8, Art.9, Art.10.1 and Art.12 from 1st January 2012. CCLBs/ VPs for these vehicles remain valid until such time as the vehicle requires a full re-inspection following rebuilding but may be returned to Motorsport UK for updating ownership colour and other minor details.

2.16. Stage Rally Cars with a CCLB/VP issued before 1st January 2009 and which complied with H267 of the 2008 regulations ( contact the ASN for details) must comply with Art.2.1 , Arts. 2.3.a–j, Art.3.2, Art.3.9, Art.3.10 , Art.3.12, Art.3.14 , Art.4.6, Art.7 , Art.8, Art.9 , Art.10.1 and Art.12 from 1st January 2012 and must have been re-inspected and issued with a new CCLB / VP prior to that date.

2.17. Stage Rally Cars with a CCLB/VP issued before 1st January 2009 must comply with Art.3.11 and 3.13 below.

3. Body 3.1. The term body includes bodywork bodyshell unitary construction.

3.2. Must have a bulkhead between any fuel tank and filler and Driver / Passenger compartment sufficient to prevent the passage of flame or liquid. Where a fuel tank constitutes part of a bulkhead between passenger and luggage compartment an additional bulkhead must be fitted. Additional fuel tank protection may be required on inspection to obtain a Competition Car Log Book.

3.3. All bodyshells inclusive of removable panels and parts must be of the Vehicle manufacturer ’s specified materials specifications and minimum thickness except for bonnet front wings bumpers hatchbacks tailgates and boot lids which may be of alternative materials. Seam welding and localised gussets/reinforcement is permitted.

3.4. Except for Vehicles accepted under Category 2 front wings and rear wings/rear quarter panels and inner wings may be modified solely for the purpose of fitting wheel arch extensions.

3.5. Except for Vehicles accepted under Category 2 (see Art.2.3.g above ) and cars with modifications conforming to their homologation papers ( Art.2.3 above ) floor pans bulkheads and transmission tunnels may not be modified other than by localised alteration to accommodate the fitting of an alternative engine and/or gearbox and/or differential and / or axle seats and exhaust.

3.6. Provision of access holes purely to facilitate use of an alternative or modified gearbox control system and / or braking system is permitted.

3.7. The internal routing of pipes and wires and safety equipment is permitted. 3.8. The conversion of left to right hand drive is permitted including necessary accompanying modifications.

3.9. Glass sunroofs are not permitted. Sunroofs may be of a non-shattering solid rigid material other than glass. Any sunroof must be firmly secured in the closed position. The sunroof aperture may be closed by solid material permanently fitted in place.

3.10. Windscreens to be of laminated type only.

3.11. Side windows if of glass must be of laminated or toughened glass and if of toughened glass must be coated on the inside with a clear transparent safety film. The thickness of this film must not be greater than 100 microns.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 16 - Special Stage Rally Cars 504

3.12. Where advertising is allowed on windscreens it must not obscure the driver ’s vision nor cover more than one third of the depth of the visual area of the windscreen.

3.13. The fitting of mud flaps of a flexible material of 4mm minimum thickness behind each wheel extending to a minimum of 40mm each side of the tyre tread and to within 80mm of the ground when the car is unoccupied is mandatory.

3.14. Towing eyes of adequate strength and size must be fitted to or carried for fitting to the front and rear of the Vehicle . They must be painted a distinctive and contrasting colour.

4. Engine 4.1. Must comply with the following specification and actual capacity limits: 4.2. Production Car Engines :

Petrol engines with a maximum of six cylinders forced induction up to 2000cc with a 34mm restrictor or up to 2500cc with a 32mm restrictor and diesel engines with forced induction up to 2500cc with a 37mm restrictor.

Naturally aspirated with a maximum of six cylinders and more than 2 valves per cylinder – up to 3000cc.

Naturally aspirated with a maximum of six cylinders and a maximum of 2 valves per cylinder – up to 3500cc

Rover V8 pushrod engines up to 4000cc utilising the original Rover head castings and limited to either a maximum of 4 carburettor chokes or a single throttle body and the original plenum chamber.

4.3. Metro 6R4 2500cc and 2800cc (Single Plenum) engines complying with ASN Specification exclusive to 6R4s.

4.4. Specialist Competition Engines :

a. Naturally aspirated. b. No more than four cylinders. c. No more than four valves per cylinder. d. Maximum capacity of 2500cc.

4.5. Production Car Engines with a maximum of 2 rotors :

a. Rotary engine equivalence 1.7. Forced induction rotary engines equivalence (1.7. x 1.7.) = 2.89. b.

Rotary engines will be considered equivalent to 4 valves per cylinder petrol engines in respect of the maximum engine capacity including the application of equivalency factor a. above.

4.6. Forced Induction engines must be fitted with a restrictor at a maximum of 50mm from the extremes of the compressor blades. The restrictor orifice to be to the dimensions currently in force in FIA Appendix ‘J ’. Where there are two forms of forced induction fitted the restrictor must not exceed the appropriate FIA Appendix ‘J’ dimensions. Provision must be made for fitting seals to the unit(s). A fee is payable for the sealing of turbo chargers.

4.7. Except for Vehicles accepted under Category 2 a Vehicle may be fitted with a different engine not exceeding 25% increase of the capacity of the model when it was supplied as original equipment by its manufacturer.

4.8. The engine capacity of FIA R/GT cars complying with Category 2 . shall be limited to the current FIA Regulations.

4.9. Historic Rally Cars that are fully compliant with Appendix 17 are permitted without a restriction on engine capacity in Stage Rallies.

4.10. Engine Oil Systems – Unless equipped with a closed loop system a Catch tank of at least a one litre capacity to be incorporated in the oil breather system.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 16 - Special Stage Rally Cars 505

5. Transmission and Gear Selection Systems

5.1. The transmission system is free including gear selection system which may be modified or replaced by an alternative system.

5.2. The use of active front and rear differentials i.e. any system acting directly on the differential adjustments is forbidden except for cars originally homologated by the FIA. Only entirely mechanical systems are allowed. None of the parameters of the front and rear differentials can be modified except with the help of tools when the Vehicle is stopped.

5.3. Passive viscous differentials are considered mechanical and are permitted.

6. Suspension

6.1. Except for Vehicles accepted under Category 2 and Vehicles with modifications conforming to their homologation papers ( Art.2.3 above ):

The suspension must retain the operating principle and utilise the mounting points as provided by the vehicle manufacturer.

Strengthening of the sprung parts of the chassis and bodywork is allowed provided that the material used is the same material as the chassis/bodywork and follows the original shape and is in contact with it.

c. Springs shock absorbers anti-roll bars and control arms and links may be uprated. d. Only mechanically operated anti-roll bar systems are authorised. e.

The anti-roll setting can only be adjusted directly by the driver using an exclusively mechanical system without external power.

f. Any connection between dampers is forbidden. g. Any connections between front and rear anti-roll bars are forbidden. h. The ride height must be adjustable only with the use of tools and when the car is immobile. i.

Any servo control activating a power circuit acting directly or indirectly on the suspension parts is forbidden.

j. Any electronic control system for the shock absorbers is forbidden.

7. Wheels and Tyres

7.1. Not be fitted with spiked or studded tyres or any non-skid attachments other than chains if permitted in the Official Documents .

7.2. Have all spare wheels securely fastened in position.

7.3. Have complete wheels (flange + rim + tyre) free providing that they can be housed within the original bodywork (including wing extensions) and that they do not exceed the widths in relation to the cubic capacity of the Vehicle:

Up to and including 1600 cc: 8in b. Over 1600 cc: 9in. 7.4. Note: Wheel widths relate to the capacity of the Vehicle inclusive of the forced induction coefficient.

7.5. Rim diameters may be increased or decreased by up to a maximum of 2in but the rim diameter must not exceed 18in.

7.6. Wheels do not necessarily have to be the same diameter. 7.7. The complete wheel shall be measured with the tyre at normal running pressure. 7.8. The measurement of the width will be taken at the widest point of the complete wheel above hub level.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 16 - Special Stage Rally Cars 506

7.9. Wheel fixing by bolts may be freely changed to fixing by pins and nuts. 7.10. Must have tyres complying with Chapter 8.

7.11. The approved quantity of tyres must be detailed in the Official Documents. The maximum number allowed will not exceed 10 tyres (unsealed surfaces) and 12 tyres (sealed surfaces and all Single Venue Stage Rallies not covered by a Master Agreement) for Rallies up to 45 planned competitive miles. For Events over 45 planned competitive miles an additional 2 tyres may be added for each return to service after 45 planned competitive miles during the Event, but these may not be used prior to the relevant service point.

In the event of an extreme weather situation (defined as: Temperatures below 0c or over 28c within the 24 hour period prior to the start of the event, or snow fall within the same 24 hour period or during the running of the event), the Clerk of the Course may request the ASN Steward to suspend the tyre allowance on the grounds of safety.

Where there is significantly heavy rainfall and the Clerk of the Course (of a Sealed surface Event and all Single Venue Stage Rallies not covered by a Master Agreement) may issue a Bulletin with the approval of the ASN Steward, declaring a 'wet' Event . Following which, the use of wet tyres will be permitted outside of the specified allowance on the grounds of safety.

c. Competitors found to be in excess of the tyre limit are to be penalised in accordance with App.8 (u) or App.14 (v) as applicable.

7.12. The use of any device for maintaining the performance of the tyre with an internal pressure equal to or greater than atmospheric pressure is forbidden.

7.13. The interior of the tyre (space between the rim and the internal part of the tyre) must be filled only with air or nitrogen. This does not preclude the use of inner tubes.

7.14. The use of tyre heating devices is prohibited.

7.15. For all unsealed surface Stage Rallies approved by the ASN pursuant to App.1 Arts.1.10 and 1.11 (forest estates) only those tyres specified in Chapter 8 List 6 are permitted.

8. Braking Systems

8.1. Braking systems may be modified including fitment of uprated components conversion of drum brakes to disc brakes and use of alternative friction materials.

8.2. The use of non-metallic brake discs is not permitted.

9. Fuel Systems

9.1. If the filler cap is of the quick release type or where the Vehicle has been fitted with a non-standard filler be fitted with a recessed fuel filler cap.

9.2. Fuel lines may be installed within the Driver / Passenger compartment on safety grounds

9.3. Cars must be fitted with a self-seal connector of a type complying with Chapter 7 . Except as provided for in Ch.7 App.1 Art.1.5 Vehicles issued with a current Competition Car Log Book / Vehicle Passport prior to 1st Jan 2009 are not required to have a self seal connector

10. Electrical 10.1. There are restrictions concerning the use of auxiliary lights which are detailed in the sporting regulations.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 16 - Special Stage Rally Cars 507

11. Vehicle Weight Limits 11.1. All homologated Vehicles must conform to the minimum weights stated in their homologation documents.

11.2. All non-homologated Vehicles must conform to the minimum weights in the table below. The only exceptions are vehicles that have a specified minimum weight recorded in their ASN Competition Car Log Book / Vehicle Passport.

Cars post 1/1/1982 & 4WD Specialist Rally Cars

Cars up to 31/12/1981 2WD Specialist Rally Cars

Up to 1000cc

660kg

655kg

Up to 1400cc

700kg

620kg

770kg

Up to 1600cc

670kg

740kg

850kg

810kg

720kg

Up to 2000cc

Up to 2500cc

880kg

1080kg

770kg

945kg

880kg

Up to 3000cc

1150kg

Up to 3500cc

1230kg

1005kg

1075kg

1310kg

Up to 4000cc

11.3. The checking of Vehicle weights will be as set out in FIA Appendix J. 11.4. Note. Minimum weights relate to the cubic capacity of the car inclusive of the forced induction coefficient.

12. Safety

12.1. Have as a minimum a ROPS complying with Chapter 7 App.3 and Chapter 7 App.13 Diagram 14 or 15 and longitudinal door bars complying with Chapter 7 App.3 Art.12 (side sections Chapter 7 App.13 Diagram 18 .

12.2. For Vehicles not issued with a Vehicle Passport or Competition Car Log Book prior to 1st January 2019 – and of a make and model with a conception date post 31.12.2005 – the following additional members are mandatory:

a. Roof Reinforcement complying with Chapter 7 App.3 Art.13 and Chapter 7 App.13 Diagram 19.a, b., c . or d.

b. Windscreen Pillar Reinforcement complying with Chapter 7 App.3 Arts.15 on each side if Chapter 7 App.13 Diagram 69 dimension "A" is greater than 200mm.

12.3. Be equipped with an internal switch that is capable of isolating all electrical circuits and completely stopping the engine. The operating switch must be positioned so that it can be operated by the driver and the Co- Driver when normally seated with seat belts fastened.

12.4. Be equipped with an external circuit breaker complying with Chapter 7 App.5 Art.5.1–5.2. 12.5. Have currently FIA Homologated seat belts complying with Chapter 7 App.7 (four, five or six point).

12.6. Be equipped with fire extinguishers complying with Chapter 7 and also all the relevant parts of Chapter 7 App.6 Art.1 and Art 3. The Driver and Co-Driver must each be able to activate the extinguisher when normally seated with seat belts fastened.

12.7. Be fitted with front seats that were FIA Homologated to FIA Standard 8855-1999 8862-2009 or 8855- 2021 at the time of manufacture (but excluding seats for which the FIA Homologation was withdrawn) complying with Chapter 7 App.7 Arts.2.19–2.22

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 16 - Special Stage Rally Cars 508

12.8. For National Events FIA Homologated seats manufactured to FIA Standard 8855-1999 may be used for up to two years beyond the expiration of the original homologation label validity.

12.9. FIA Homologated seats manufactured to FIA Standard 8862-2009 or 8855-2021 may be used until 31st December of the year stated on the label.

12.10. Have substantial underbody protection covering any area of a fuel tank exposed to running damage. 12.11. Be equipped with high-intensity horns that can be operated by the Driver and the Co-Driver. 12.12. Competing Vehicles must carry an Emergency Red Warning Triangle (ECE 27) and an SOS / OK Board. 12.13. If a camera is carried the fitting must be specifically approved by a Scrutineer.

12.14. Belt cutter(s) must be carried on board at all times. Both driver and co-driver must be able to reach a belt cutter when seated with their harness fastened.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 16 - Special Stage Rally Cars 509

CHAPTER 13 RALLY Appendix 17 - Technical Regulations – Historic Special Stage Rally Cars

1. General

1.1. In addition to complying with Chapter 7 and Chapter 8 where applicable all Vehicles competing in Historic Special Stage Rallies must comply with the Regulations in or referred to in this Appendix. Exceptions are referred to below at Art.2.2.

2. The principles of Historic Special Stage Rally Cars Regulations

2.1. The ASN has created the Regulations in this Appendix so that Historic Cars may be used for Competitions under a set of rules that seek to preserve the specification of their period and prevent modifications of performance and behaviour which could arise through the application of modern technology. Historic Competition is not simply another formula in which to acquire trophies it is a specific Category in which an essential ingredient is devotion to the cars and to their history and period specifications. Historic Motor Sport therefore enables the active celebration of the history of the Motor Car.

2.2. Historic Special Stage Rally Vehicles must comply with Special Stage Rally Technical regulations with the following exceptions Appendix 16 Arts.2.2 and 2.3 and 3.14–4.4 inclusive and 4.6 and 4.10 and 5.3 and 6 - 7.14 inclusive and 10.1 and 11.3.

2.3. Cars Eligible

Historic Stage Rally Cars are categorised in the following periods. A Vehicle will be dated by the specification presented and not necessarily by the date of build or registration:

i. Historic Category 1 Rally Cars : Vehicles of a specification valid before 1 January 1968. ii. Historic Category 2 Rally Cars : Vehicles of a specification valid between 1 January 1968 and 31 December 1974. iii.

Historic Category 3 Rally Cars : Vehicles homologated in Groups 1, 2, 3 or 4 between 1 January 1975 and 31 December 1981. Vehicles in Category 3 must comply with their Homologation. iv. Historic Category 4a Rally Cars : Vehicles homologated in Groups A, N and B between 1 January 1982 and 31 December 1985 excluding any Vehicles that were regulated out by the FIA in period from rallies for safety reasons. Vehicles in Category 4 must comply with their Homologation forms and Appendix J of the 1985 FIA Yellow Book. v.

Vehicles homologated in Group B with an effective engine capacity exceeding 2000cc must have been issued with a valid FIA Historic Technical Passport (HTP) and must always conform with that document and with the current FIA Appendix K. vi. Historic Category 4b Rally Cars : Vehicles homologated in Groups A, N and B between 1 January 1986 and 31 December 1990 excluding any Vehicles that were regulated out by the FIA in period from rallies for safety reasons. Vehicles in Category 4b must comply with their Homologation forms and Appendix J of the 1990 FIA Yellow Book and Vehicles with an effective engine capacity exceeding 2000cc must have been issued with a valid FIA Historic Technical Passport (HTP) and must always conform with this document and the current FIA Appendix K. vii.

FIA Appendix K to the International Sporting Code : Historic Rally Cars fully compliant with the current FIA Appendix K . Cars must have been issued with a valid FIA Historic Technical Passport (HTP) and always conform with that document and with the current FIA Appendix K. Vehicles are exempt from the requirement to hold and present at scrutineering an ASN Competition Car Logbook or Vehicle Passport.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 17 - Historic Special Stage Rally Cars 510

3. Historic Categories 1, 2, 3 and 4

3.1. A valid Historic Rally Vehicle Identity Form (HRVIF) issued by the ASN , or (FIA Historic Technical Passport (HTP) issued by an FIA registered ASN , as appropriate, must be presented at scrutineering. No Vehicle is permitted to compete on an Event unless those documents are presented at scrutineering. This will be the definitive document for the technical specification of the Vehicle for which it has been issued.

3.2. The HRVIF will remain valid for a period of 10 years from the date of issue and must be renewed whenever the registered owner of the Vehicle changes.

3.3. Vehicles in any of the Categories registered after the appropriate date may be permitted to hold an HRVIF in the absolute discretion of the ASN . An applicant for HRVIF for such a car must provide documentary evidence to the ASN Technical Department with the identity form application to show that the specific Vehicle (not model) was manufactured within the specified period. This evidence will include any technical documentation supplied by the manufacturer and any documents relative to the Vehicle and any information available concerning Chassis and engine numbers and any other details from reliable and authenticated sources as may be available. On receipt of satisfactory evidence the ASN may issue an Historic Rally Vehicle Identity Form which must be presented at scrutineering with the registration document in accordance with Art.2.2 above.

3.4. Category 3 and Category 4 Vehicles must also present their Homologation forms at scrutineering.

3.5. Upon issue of the validated HRVIF the applicant will be issued with two individually numbered ASN Registered Historic Rally Vehicle stickers (see App.23 Drawing Number 3 ). These stickers are a visual affirmation of conformity with these Regulations and therefore must be affixed to the Vehicle one per side located on the rear section of the front wing and failure to respect this requirement is a breach of these Regulations and will render the Vehicle ineligible to compete and the Competitor subject to Judicial action.

3.6. A Licensed Eligibility Scrutineer may remove the ASN stickers (see App.23 Drawing Number 3 ) if the Vehicle is found not to comply with any of the provisions of this Appendix 17 .

4. Permitted Modifications

4.1. Only period modifications used in rallying on the particular make and model of car are permitted for Historic Category 1, 2, 3 and 4 Rally Cars. The modifications must be detailed on the HRVIF and be duly ratified by the ASN .

4.2. Modifications are only allowed if they were available before:

a. 1 January 1968 for Historic Category 1 Rally Cars. b. 1 January 1975 for Historic Category 2 Rally Cars. c. 1 January 1982 for Historic Category 3 Rally Cars. d. 1 January 1986 for Historic Category 4a Rally Cars. e. 1 January 1991 for Historic Category 4b Rally Cars.

4.3. In all cases the onus of proving a modification as being period rests with the Competitor who must submit the required documentary evidence.

4.4. Exceptionally the ASN in its absolute discretion may grant a dispensation to use non-original parts and or parts from a different model and or parts from a later period provided that the use of these parts does nor confer any advantage in either performance or reliability. The ASN will give consideration to written requests from Competitors who can evidence that they are unable to source vital components.

4.5. Competitors will be notified by means of an ASN Official Bulletin of any part subject to dispensation and a full list of dispensations will be published on the ASN website.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 17 - Historic Special Stage Rally Cars 511

5. Engine 5.1. Cylinder bores may be 60 thousandths of an inch oversize without affecting class eligibility. 5.2. Four-wheel drive vehicles fitted with forced induction are prohibited in Historic Categories 1, 2 and 3.

5.3. Forced induction is only permitted if by means of a mechanically driven super-charger, or by an exhaust driven turbocharger if fitted as original equipment by the vehicle manufacturer App.16 Art.4.2.a. Such Vehicles in Category 1, 2 and 3 will be classified as having an engine capacity increase of one third. Vehicles in Category 4a will be classified as having an engine capacity increase of 70% and must be fitted with a 34mm restrictor at a maximum of 50mm from the extremes of the compressor blades.

5.4. Engines must comply with ASN silencing levels. Exceptionally and with the permission of the Chief Scrutineer those cars for which 5000rpm is inappropriate may be tested at 3/4 of maximum rpm.

5.5. Vehicles in Category 4 equipped with rotary engines will be subject to an equivalency factor of 2:1.

6. Safety

6.1. Vehicles must be equipped with a safety rollover bar in accordance with Chapter 7 Arts. 1 – 62 and 66 -80 inclusive, and Chapter 7 Drawing 37 a) or b). Dotted lines signify optional features.

6.2. Door bars may be of single tube, crossed tube or twin tube design Chapter 7 App.13 Diagram 21 (g) or (h).

6.3. A single Diagonal Member is mandatory and a second Diagonal Member may be added to form crossed diagonals. Diagonals may be either installed across the Main Rollbar or between the Backstays.

6.4. Additional tubes for the mounting of harness shoulder straps are permitted.

6.5. All bars must remain within the confines of the Passenger compartment and must not be used as suspension pick-up point bracing unless the Competitor can prove that this was done in period to the specific model.

6.6. Vehicles in Category 4 must comply with App.16.

6.7. Belt cutter(s) must always be carried on board during an Event . Both Driver and Co-Driver must be able to reach a belt cutter when seated with their harness fastened.

7. Wheels, Tyres , Suspension and Brakes

7.1. Wheels and tyres must be fitted in compliance with Chapter 8 List 3 and Arts 11–15 of this Appendix except as follows: Appendix 16 to this Chapter Arts: 4.2 and 7.2 and 7.4 and 7.6–7.8 and 7.10–7.14 and must conform with the following:

For Categories 1, 2 and 3 the diameter of wheel may not differ from that originally fitted by more than 10%.

For Categories 1, 2 and 3 the complete wheels (flange + rim + tyre) are free providing that they are housed within the permitted bodywork and that they do not exceed the following widths in relation to the cubic capacity of the Vehicle :

Up to 1150 cc: 7in

Over 1150cc and up to 1600 cc: 8in

ii.

Over 1600 cc: 9in.

iii.

For Category 4 and Vehicles competing under FIA Appendix K all wheels and tyres must comply fully with FIA Appendix K Regulations for Vehicles in Rallies.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 17 - Historic Special Stage Rally Cars 512

7.2. The fitting of a dual master cylinder or any other type of device providing a simultaneous action on all four wheels and divided action on two wheels is permitted provided the original brake pedal and pivot point are used and it must be possible under all conditions, running or stationary, for 25% minimum braking effort to be applied by the driver through the braking system to each axle. For Cars in Category 1 the adjustment of brake balance must not be possible by either the Driver or the Co-Driver when normally seated in the car.

7.3. Dampers must be in accordance with Ch.13 App.17 Art.4 . For Categories One, Two and Three , Monotube dampers must not have any external gas inlet ports or adjusters, including plugged or blanked-off ports or adjusters.

8. Miscellaneous

8.1. The use of gas discharge technology in any forward-facing lights either main beam or auxiliary or in any reversing light is not permitted.

8.2. Unless of the specification used in period for the specific make and model of Vehicle the use of light pods to individually mount or to mount auxiliary lights as one unit is not permitted.

8.3. Roof vents may only be fitted if of the same specification as those fitted to the particular make and model of the car in period.

8.4. Any underbody protection must be of period specification. A guard moulded closely to the vehicle floor pan fixed by bolting and/or adhesive may be fitted but must not extend beyond the front and rear axle centre lines and the outer 100mm on each side must not cover the vertical section of the outer sills

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 17 - Historic Special Stage Rally Cars 513

CHAPTER 13 RALLY Appendix 18 - Servicing and Organised Assistance

1. General 1.1. This Appendix must be read in conjunction with all applicable Appendices to this Chapter. 1.2. Any breach of these Regulations may be treated as a breach of the NCR. 1.3. Organised assistance or Service anywhere other than in permitted areas is forbidden.

1.4. Organised assistance (service) may be Permitted on Special Stage Rallies if the Official Documents allow and providing that the Organisers have provided suitable service areas with Time Controls and a specific time allowance is permitted for Service.

1.5. Single Venue Stage Rallies must allocate a minimum time for Service.

1.6. An exception to Arts.1.4 –1.5 above with regard to time allowances applies for retired cars intending to apply for a re-start permitted by the Official Documents.

1.7. Service of a competing Vehicle may only be carried out in permitted areas as defined under Art.1.4 In any area where Service is not permitted, the presence of service crew, or any vehicle from which equipment or parts are supplied or obtained, or the setting up or the collection or the use of equipment previously deposited, will be considered to be servicing.

1.8. Service vehicles may be required by the Official Documents or the Official Instructions to follow a prescribed route to and from service areas. All other areas would then be ‘Out of Bounds’ to service vehicles and crews.

1.9. Competitors may only refuel in areas which have been specifically designated by the Organisers or by using commercially available Permitted Fuel dispensed directly from installed pumps at filling stations on the rally route. During refuelling, no one must be within the Vehicle and the engine must be stopped throughout any refuelling operation.

1.10. These Regulations do not prevent Competitors from making their own vehicles safe to drive and crews may work unassisted on their own Vehicles using equipment carried in their Vehicle in ‘No Service Areas’ except:

a. Within 100m of any Control. b. Between a Special Stage Arrival Control and the Special Stage Start Control. c. In any Parc Fermé.

1.11. The only work permitted in these areas is the following (unassisted): Cleaning:

a. b. c. d. lamp glasses windscreens windows identification markings and e. vehicle registration numbers.

1.12. Except in the areas listed above Competitors may also work on their Vehicle with the assistance of other Competitors or any nationally recognised breakdown service or commercial garage not associated with the Entrant and not organised in advance. Such service vehicles will not be allowed to enter official service areas.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 18 - Servicing and Organised Assistance 514

1.13. Competitors are responsible for ensuring that their service crews understand and comply with Regulations and if official Service Plates are issued by the Organisers that at all times the official Service Plate is affixed to the service vehicle.

1.14. A Competitor may be fined or otherwise penalised by the Clerk of the Course if the crew of any service vehicle associated with their entry contravene any Regulation or any Official Instruction or act in a manner contrary to the interests of the Event or of the ASN or motor sport generally. Competitors may also be fined by the Clerk of the Course and / or Stewards and / or the ASN National Court but not otherwise penalised for breach of Road Traffic Laws by their service crews.

2. Service Areas

2.1. All Service Areas must be under the supervision of a Safety Officer who should have suitable means of contacting the Emergency Services.

2.2. Special care must be taken to ensure that Service Areas are kept secure from spectators and that all relevant aspects of Health and Safety Regulations are observed.

2.3. Adequate fire extinguishers must be available at the site.

3. General

3.1. No service assistance may be expected from Organisers. Competitors are responsible for ensuring that they are supplied with fuel, oil, water etc even though Organisers may give advice as to where such supplies may be obtained.

3.2. A Vehicle may not be moved other than by its own power except:

a. By a ferry. b. By outside means for a minimum distance necessary to extricate it from difficulty. c. By gravity. d. By its crew.

3.3. During the course of an Event Competitors are not permitted to use or be directly or indirectly concerned in the use of helicopters or fixed-wing aircraft in the vicinity of the Event (whether in connection with servicing aerial surveillance or any other reason whatsoever) unless previous authority has been obtained from the ASN in writing pursuant to Arts.3.4 - 3.6 below and in compliance with CAA regulations.

3.4. Before considering any application for authorisation the ASN must be satisfied that any liabilities they consider apply to the activities including indemnity cover for the ASN and the Event promoters and Organisers and the landowner have been made available by the operator on their behalf to specified minimum requirements.

3.5. Any application must be made at least 14 days before an Event.

3.6. In accordance with CAA regulations no helicopter or fixed-wing aircraft is allowed within 500ft of the route or within 3000ft of any large crowd.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 18 - Servicing and Organised Assistance 515

CHAPTER 13 RALLY Appendix 19 - PR Requirements Charts

1. Chart 1

CODE PR REQUIREMENTS

A Personal visit to an adult member of household within 100m. B Letter to each householder within 100m. C Public notice. D

Personally visit and obtain signature from an adult member of any household within 500m of any point where competitors are required to stop (i.e. any control or clue point). E Consult RLO.

F Personal visit to an adult member of household within 150m. G

If timed to the second, not pass through any area which has in excess of 20 occupied dwellings within 300m radius of the route, unless written agreement is given by all of the householders within that area and the Motorsport UK has given its permission.

H Letter to each householder within 100m, unless the RLO agrees to a lesser requirement.

2. Chart 2 ALL EVENTS TRAVERSING THE PUBLIC HIGHWAY

Section

Time

Road Type

Permit

Requirement

23.59 to

ROAD RALLY (inc. HISTORIC)

A(G)

All Classes (see App.4 Art.4.1 )

STANDARD (timed to second) inc.

1 hour after sunrise

STANDARD (time to minute)

All Classes 24 hour B D

REGULARITY

A & B

Habitation Yellow/White

UCR/Private A & B

Habitation White/UCR/

TRANSPORT &

NEUTRAL

A, B & (Yellow 07.00 to 22.00)

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 19 - PR Requirements Charts 516

ECONOMY,

A & B Habitation

22.00 to 07.00

NAVIGATIONAL & 12 CAR RALLIES

A & B Habitation

STANDARD & REGULARITY

07.00 to 22.00

(All types) VINTAGE (22.00 to 07.00)

Yellow/White UCR/Private

24 hour

White/UCR

Private

24 hour

TRANSPORT & NEUTRAL

Yellow

22.00 to 08.00

24 hour E D

A, B, Habitation

& (Yellow 07.00 to 22.00)

ALL ALL 07.00 to 22.00 C D

VINTAGE

(07.00 to 22.00)

VETERAN ALL ALL 24 hour C D

NAV. SCATTERS ALL ALL 24 hour E D

ALL ALL 24 hour E D

TREASURE HUNTS TOURING ASSMS.

A & B, Habitation 22.00 to 07.00 C D

SPECIAL STAGE

ROAD

RALLIES including SINGLE VENUE STAGE RALLIES

ACCESS/EGRESS

ALL 24 hour F E

To/From STAGE To PUBLIC HIGHWAY

Private or

Roads Closed by appropriate Legislation

SPECIAL STAGE

24 hour F

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 19 - PR Requirements Charts 517

CLASSIC TRIALS and ALL OTHER EVENTS USING THE PUBLIC HIGHWAY

24 hour B D

White/UCR/ Private

Yellow 22.00 to 07.00 B D

A, B, Habitation

24 hour C D

& (Yellow 07.00 to 22.00)

For Codes see above in Chart 1

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 19 - PR Requirements Charts 518

CHAPTER 13 RALLY Appendix 20 - Medical and Safety Cover

1. General

1.1. This Appendix must be read in conjunction with Chapter 1 Appendix 3 (Insurance) and Chapter 11 (Emergency Medical) of the NCR. Organisers must check that the arrangements for Events conform to the ASN attest requirements and any published guidance. In the event of any doubt then Organisers must check with the ASN Safety or Legal Departments.

Medical and Safety Cover 2. Single Venue Stage Rallies

2.1. At each Venue there must be a Doctor or ASN Registered Paramedic and an ASN Licensed Rescue Unit.

2.2. It is mandatory that an ASN Licensed Recovery Unit or a Commercially Operated Recovery Unit is placed at or near those stage start locations where a Rescue Unit is positioned.

2.3. The Chief Medical Officer or Chief Paramedic being a Doctor or ASN Registered Paramedic , is responsible – in consultation with the Clerk of the Course and the Event Safety Officer – for ensuring that the required level of medical and rescue cover is provided and for:

a. b. c. the detailed organisation of doctors and the planning and deployment within stages and the organisation of ambulance meeting points and d. the notification of hospitals in relation to the stages.

2.4. The Doctor or ASN Registered Paramedic and Safety Officer in liaison with Stage Commanders must be aware of the evacuation routes from the stage and rendezvous points.

2.5. The Chief Medical Officer at the Event following consultation with the Clerk of the Course may appoint a deputy of suitable grade who could take over the Chief Medical Officer ’s duties in an emergency.

3. Stage Rallies (other than Single Venue Stage Rallies)

3.1. At Clubman, Interclub and National Multi-Venue Stage Rallies there must be a Doctor or ASN Registered Paramedic and an ASN Licensed Rescue Unit at every Stage (or group of Stages (with a maximum three in close proximity to each other)).

3.2. A Chief Medical Officer or Chief Paramedic who must be a doctor or ASN Registered Paramedic, must be appointed who is responsible – in consultation with the Clerk of the Course and the Event Safety Officer – for ensuring that the required level of medical and rescue cover is provided and for :

a. the detailed organisation of doctors, b. c. the planning and deployment within Stages the organisation of ambulance meeting points and d. the notification of hospitals in relation to the Stages.

3.3. The Chief Medical Officer at the Event or Chief Paramedic following consultation with the Clerk of the Course may appoint a deputy of suitable grade who could take over the Chief Medical Officer ’s duties in an emergency.

3.4. Those Stages without the immediate presence of an ASN Rescue Unit should position an ASN Licensed SSU at the Stage start.

3.5. For every Stage over nine miles long in addition to the above and at a suitable mid-point there must be a

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 20 - Medical and Safety Cover 519

Doctor or ASN Registered Paramedic and an ASN Licensed Rescue Unit or an ASN Licensed SSU .

3.6. It is mandatory that an ASN Licensed Recovery Unit or a Commercially Operated Recovery Unit is placed at or near those Stage start locations where a Rescue Unit is positioned.

4. International Stage Rallies (other than FIA Championships) 4.1. At every Stage start there must be:

a. A Doctor or ASN Registered Paramedic. b. An ASN Licensed Rescue Unit . c. An ASN Licensed Recovery Unit or a Commercially Operated Recovery Unit. For Stages over nine miles long these requirements must be repeated at a suitable mid-point.

5. International Stage Rallies (FIA Championship) 5.1. Medical and safety cover must be according to current FIA Regulations .

6. International and National Rallies

6.1. It is recommended that the Chief Medical Officer is appointed from the ASN Register and is approved for this grade of Rally.

6.2. A senior Medical Officer must be appointed on each Stage and be positioned at the Stage Start to work in close co-operation with and under the instructions of the Stage Commander.

7. General

7.1. ALL THE ABOVE REQUIREMENTS SHOULD BE REGARDED AS MINIMUM STANDARDS OF COVER AND HIGHER STANDARDS SHOULD ALWAYS BE AIMED FOR.

7.2. It is recommended that doctors carry all equipment that they feel necessary for the performance of their duties. The following is suggested:

Airways (two)

•

Cervical collar

•

Two large field dressings

•

Powerful hand torch

•

Space blanket

•

First aid kit.

•

7.3. It is recommended that Organisers make available a full resuscitation kit.

7.4. All accidents and incidents involving injury must be reported in writing by both the Medical Officer and Stage Commander to the Clerk of the Course.

7.5. A completed ASN report form signed by the Doctor must be sent to the Chief Medical Officer at the ASN .

Emergency Vehicles

7.6. There are three kinds of Rally emergency vehicles:

a. Rally Recovery Units. b. Rescue Units. c. Stage Safety Units (SSUs).

7.7. Their equipment and licensing criteria are listed in Chapter 5 Part A App.10 and Chapter 11

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 20 - Medical and Safety Cover 520

7.8. To assist Organisers and maintain safety cover unless licensed vehicles are present SSUs should be used to provide rescue first aid and fire-fighting at an incident as quickly as practicable (i.e. starting from the beginning of the stage and proceeding in the direction of the Stage ).

7.9. It is recommended that there is an SSU at each Stage Start.

8. Safety Cars

8.1. The only category of Safety Car that may be driven through a stage at near competitive speeds will be the Zero Car.

8.2. Safety Cars will be identified by carrying markings as specified in the ASN Safety Car Roles and Responsibilities e.g Spectator Safety / 000 / 00 / 0 and Sweeper as appropriate.

8.3. No other official car will carry such markings. All other sanctioned vehicles will be classified as Official Vehicles.

8.4. The Zero Car will be the last vehicle to traverse a stage before the first Competitor unless the Stage Commander or Clerk of the Course authorise otherwise.

8.5. The Zero Car will only stop in a Stage in the case of emergency. 8.6. Safety Cars must be fitted with an effective method of communicating with Rally Control.

8.7. Except for Class eligibility the Zero Car must pass the same pre-Event scrutiny as Competitors including Sound Testing.

8.8. There will only be two crew members in the Zero Car. 8.9. Where the Zero Car is a Competition Car then:

It is strongly recommended that Zero Cars have a current Competition Car Log Book / Vehicle Passport.

b. The crew members must wear overalls, helmets, FHRs and seat belts mandatory for Competitors. c. Fire extinguishers must be fitted and armed as for Competitors. 8.10. Crew members of each Safety Car must be signed-on Officials.

8.11. At least one crew member of each safety car team must have attended an ASN Safety Car Training Session .

8.12. At least one member of the Safety Car Team must have been involved in pre-Event planning. 8.13. All Safety Car Team members must be fully briefed on the safety plans for the Event.

8.14. No Driver who is barred from holding a Competition Licence or DVLA (or equivalent jurisdiction) driving licence can drive an Official or Safety or Zero Car or a Rally Emergency vehicle through a Special Stage.

8.15. Detailed Guidelines on ASN Safety Car Roles and Responsibilities are contained in the Stage Rally Safety Requirements published on the ASN Website and which supplement the above requirements.

9. Fire Extinguishers

9.1. Fire extinguishers must be available in any area defined as a Service Area and any area in which competing cars are assembled awaiting their attempt at a Stage and at Stage Stop Lines.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 20 - Medical and Safety Cover 521

CHAPTER 13 RALLY Appendix 21 - Specific Regulations for Junior Rally Driver Championships

1.1. This Appendix must be read in conjunction with Chapters 1 – 9 and 11 . 1.2. This Appendix modifies the relevant provisions of this Chapter 13. 1.3. The ASN may approve Championships for Junior Rally Drivers complying with the following:

1.4. All such Championships must appoint a Safeguarding Officer approved by the ASN and who shall attend all Championship Events .

1.5. All Events comprising the Championship must be individually permitted Single Venue Stage Rallies open only to Junior Rally Drivers .

1.6. Events may only take place at a single Venue and all Stages road sections and service areas must not cross or traverse any Public Highway including Footpaths / Bridleways / Restricted Byways / Byways Open to All Traffic or unclassified country roads.

1.7. Proposed Stage Diagrams must be submitted for authorisation at least 3 months prior to the Event in order for the ASN to inspect the Venue .

1.8. Drivers must be at least 14 years old and may continue as a Junior Rally Driver until 31st December in the year of their 17th birthday.

1.9. The Drivers Competition Licence shall be endorsed Junior Rally Formulae Only and will be held on their behalf by the Championship Co-ordinator .

1.10. Except with the consent of the ASN Chief Medical Officer Drivers must be of a minimum height of 1.4m. 1.11. Co-Drivers must hold a valid Competition Licence and ideally be a licensed BARS Instructor.

1.12. Co-Drivers must be 21 years or over not be a Parent / Guardian of the driver and meet the qualifications of a Stage Rally National Licence .

1.13. Vehicles must be Series Production Cars that are currently registered and taxed as a private car unless the specific Event Regulations relax the requirement for taxation by virtue of the entire Event taking place on private property.

1.14. The maximum engine capacity may not exceed 1200cc naturally aspirated. 1.15. The engine and transmission must be standard and unmodified.

CHAPTER 13 RALLY Appendix 22 - Specific Regulations for Special Stage Practice / Training Events

1.1. Any practising or training Event at which members of an ASN registered Club are acting in a managing or controlling capacity as representatives require the specific permission of the ASN in the form of a Permit .

1.2. The ASN will not Permit more than three Clubs to organise such an Event .

1.3. The ASN will appoint an Observer to all Special Stage Rally Practice / Training Events and the appropriate fees will be charged.

1.4. Participants in all practice / training Events must sign the usual indemnity specified Chapter 3 as well as a declaration that their Vehicle is in a fit condition for the Event .

1.5. Permit Fees will be in accordance with current rate for an Interclub Permitted Event . 1.6. Insurance per capita fees will be payable at the maximum Special Stage rate per Competitor . 1.7. There must be no spectators and entry to the Venue must be controlled.

1.8. Stages must be organised to the requirements of Appendix 2 Part C and Appendix 12 Arts. 3.40 –46 inclusive.

1.9. The definition of a Practising / Training Event must be complied with namely:

a. No Competition . b. There must be no awards. c. The sole purpose is for crews to gain experience of their Vehicles . d. Times may be recorded but must not be published. e. Vehicles must not be started / released onto any Stage simultaneously. f. The only permitted revenue obtained by the Organiser shall be entry fees. 1.10. No more than six attempts at any one stage layout will be permitted.

1.11. Although no awards or published times are permitted the Organiser must set a Bogey Time for the Stage and this time and the length of the stage must be notified in writing to the participants.

CHAPTER 13 RALLY Appendix 23 - Rally Drawings

Drawing 1 Drawing 3

Drawing 2

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 23 - Rally Drawings 524

Drawing 4

CHICANE ENTRANCE BOARD Examples of a typical chicane layout:

10 Metre Minimum

100m

10 Metre Minimum

100m

10 Metre Minimum

Minimum 2.13m

100m

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 23 - Rally Drawings 525

Drawing 5

Box with tape between ditches or hedges/walls

XXXXXX

Block & No Entry sign (facing cars) set back from junction

No Warning Arrow if junctions are very close

XXXXXX

Warning Arrow & Post Number sign on the side of the road where they are most visible. Between 100m + or - 10m before the junction

ARROW ANGLES & POSITIONS

XXXXXX

100m + or - 10m Warning

Gate

No Entry Sign Physical Block

XXXXX

Taped box extending beyond the road width to ditches, hedges, walls

Prohibited Area Sign (also to be used in other locations as required)

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 23 - Rally Drawings 526

Drawing 6 (Alternative to Drawing 5 without the use of box junctions)

Block ~ 200m

B B B

20m

10m 10m

10m

Block >20m

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 23 - Rally Drawings 527

Drawing 7

Yellow background

Beginning of Control Area (Stage Arrival)

Red background

At Stage Arrival Control

At Stage Start

Red background

Yellow

Warning of Stage Finish

(Both sides of track 100m

background

prior to

Flying Finish Line)

Red

At Flying Finish Line

background

(Both sides of track)

Countdown Boards (Evenly spaced between flying finish and stop line)

At the Stop Line

Red background

Drawing 8

Yellow background

Approximately 100m before Radio Point

At Radio Point

Blue background

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 23 - Rally Drawings 528

CHAPTER 13 RALLY Appendix 24 - Class Requirements

1. Stage Rally Class Structures

1.1. All Stage Rallies must use the Class structure detailed in Chart 50 . Events may choose to utilise all, or some, or amalgamate the Classes but must not deviate from the list.

Chart 50

Description

Class

1 Homologated (and formerly homologated) FIA Rally 2 and R5 cars and any derivatives*. FIA S2000 specification cars and any derivatives All World Rally cars (must comply with their homologation)

* Derivatives of Rally2/R5 specification cars permitted only until 31st December 2025. RHD conversions which retain all other aspects of the homologation will remain valid beyond this date.

* Exceptionally, Motorsport UK may grant a dispensation to use non-homologated parts to replace homologated components which are no longer available. Details on request from Motorsport UK Technical Department

2 All 4-wheel drive cars not eligible for Classes 1 & 4* *Not including derivatives of Rally2/R5 specification cars

3 2-wheel drive cars with normally aspirated engines over 2000cc or forced induction engines over 1500cc. Homologated (and formerly homologated) FIA RGT cars

4 Homologated FIA Rally 3 cars and Group N4 that still comply with their homologation 5 Homologated FIA Rally 4 and R2 cars with forced induction that still comply with their homologation

6 Cars with normally aspirated engines over 1600cc up to and including 2000cc or forced induction engines up to and including 1500cc

7 Homologated FIA Rally 5 and Rally 5-Kit cars

8 Cars with normally aspirated engines over 1400cc up to and including 1600cc, including R2, or forced induction engines up to and including 1000cc

9 Cars with normally aspirated engines up to and including 1400cc

10 Rally Start: Cars over 1600cc that meet the current technical specification of Rally First (as published on Motorsport UK website) plus Road Rally cars as per Ch.13 App.15 Art.1

11 Rally Start: Cars over 1400cc up to and including 1600cc that meet the current technical specification of Rally First (as published on Motorsport UK website) plus Road Rally cars as per Ch.13 App.15 Art.1

12 Rally Start: Cars over 1000cc up to and including 1400cc that meet the current technical specification of Rally First (as published on Motorsport UK website) plus Road Rally cars as per Ch.13 App.15 Art.1

13 Rally Start: Cars up to and including 1000cc that meet the current technical specification of Formula 1000 (as published on ASN website)

14 Junior 1000: Cars up to and including 1000cc that meet the current technical specification of Junior 1000 (as published on ASN website) 15 Hybrid Electric & full Electric cars of all types 16 • Land Rover Wolf

FIA Homologated Cross Country specification vehicles by OEM. By prior approval only*

• Cross Car (permitted for Single Venue Stage Rallies and Rally Time Trial only)

Vehicles as per all current technical regulations (as published on Motorsport UK website) *Approval to be sought from rally@motorsportuk.org & technical@motorsportuk.org

H1 (a)

Historic Category 1 Rally Cars including Appendix K. Up to 31.12.67. Up to 1600cc not including Twin Cam engine cars This class is to be automatically amalgamated with H1 when less than 5 entries are received.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 24 - Class Requirements 529

Historic Category 1 Rally Cars including Appendix K. Up to 31.12.67. All remaining cars over 1601cc including Twin Cam engine cars

H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 H8

Historic Category 2 Rally Cars including Appendix K. 1.1.68 – 31.12.74. Up to 1600cc Historic Category 2 Rally Cars including Appendix K. 1.1.68 – 31.12.74. 1601cc to 2000cc Historic Category 2 Rally Cars including Appendix K. 1.1.68 – 31.12.74. Over 2001cc Historic Category 3 Rally Cars including Appendix K. 1.1.75 – 31.12.81. Up to 1600cc Historic Category 3 Rally Cars including Appendix K. 1.1.75 – 31.12.81. 1601cc to 2000cc Historic Category 3 Rally Cars including Appendix K. 1.1.75 – 31.12.81. Over 2001cc

Historic Category 3 Rally Cars including Appendix K. All cars having engines with both more than one camshaft and more than two valves per cylinder. All cars with a Rotary Engine

H9 H10 H11 H12 H13 H14 H15

Historic Category 4 Rally Cars including Appendix K. 1.1.82 – 31.12.90. Up to 1300cc Historic Category 4 Rally Cars including Appendix K. 1.1.82 – 31.12.90. 1301cc to 1600cc Historic Category 4 Rally Cars including Appendix K. 1.1.82 – 31.12.90. 1601cc to 2000cc Historic Category 4 Rally Cars including Appendix K. 1.1.82 – 31.12.90. Over 2001cc Historic Rally Cars complying with FIA Appendix K not able to comply with Motorsport UK Tyre & Wheel Regulations Historic Category 5 Rally Cars including Appendix K. 1.1.91 – 31.12.99. Up to 1600cc

Historic Category 5 Rally Cars including Appendix K. 1.1.91 – 31.12.99. 1601cc to 2000cc including ‘Formula 2’ Kit Cars (including all Evolution and Maxi variants) that still comply with their homologation

H16

Historic Category 5 Rally Cars including Appendix K. 1.1.91 – 31.12.99. Over 2001cc (All period homologated Group A and Group N 4wd cars, not including formerly homologated World Rally Cars)

SUGGESTED AMALGAMATIONS (Lowest class number takes precedence when outlining Classes)

Classes 1, 2 & 4 Classes 5, 6 & 7 Classes 8 & 9 Classes 10, 11, 12 & 13 Classes 3, 14, 15 and 16 are not to be amalgamated if used

Classes H1 (a) & H1 Classes H2, H3 & H4 Classes H5, H6 & H7 Classes H9, H10, H11 Classes H14, H15 & H16

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 24 - Class Requirements 530

Chapter 14 Sprint , Hill Climb & Hot Lap Challenge

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 14 - Sprint, Hill Climb & Hot Lap Challenge 531

CHAPTER 14 SPRINT, HILL CLIMB AND HOT LAP CHALLENGE

1. General

1.1. This Chapter must be read in conjunction with Chapters 1 – 11 inclusive all of which apply except where specifically modified by the text of this Chapter.

1.2. The following Appendices apply to this Chapter: App. 1 Organisers Regulations including Scrutineering App. 2 Technical Regulations App. 3 Paddock and Track Regulations App. 4 Technical Regulations – all Categories App. 5 Specific Regulations for Hot Lap Challenge

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 14 - Sprint, Hill Climb & Hot Lap Challenge 532

CHAPTER 14 SPRINT, HILL CLIMB AND HOT LAP CHALLENGE Appendix 1 - Organisers Regulations Including Scrutineering

1. General

1.1. Permits for Sprints, Hill Climbs or Hot Lap Challenge are issued at the sole discretion of the ASN and are dependent upon a valid Track Licence being in existence.

1.2. For Hot Lap Challenge a valid Track Licence for a Racing Circuit is required.

1.3. A Club will only be allowed to organise Events up to National status unless the ASN has specifically approved an application for higher status.

1.4. Organisers must appoint only ASN licensed Clerks of the Course, Timekeepers and Scrutineers appropriate to the grade of the Event.

1.5. All Drivers must hold the correct category of Licence. 1.6. If the Entrant is not the Driver then the Entrant must hold an Entrant’s Licence .

1.7. Whenever possible, there shall be at least two Timekeepers at all Speed Events (Chapter 5 Part A App.7 ).

1.8. For Hill Climbs and Sprints , timing is only permitted up to an accuracy of 0.1 or 0.01 seconds.

1.9. If a Championship round is cancelled or changes its date due to reasons of safety or force majeure the Championship Organiser may arrange for an alternative Event or date for an Event to be included in their Championship calendar. Subject to Chapter 1 Art.1.4 only two such changes will be permitted during the duration of that particular Championship and the proposed amendment must be subject to ASN approval and will only be permitted if all registered Competitors have been advised and less than 15% (rounded up to the next whole number) of the Competitors registered for the Championship object to the change in writing. Competitors failing to respond within 4 weeks (28 days) from the date of the Organiser ’s written proposal to change being sent will be considered to agree to the change.

2. Medical and Rescue Requirements 2.1. The minimum medical and rescue requirements (including Practice ) are:

a. For Sprint and Hill Climb: One Doctor (or one ASN-Registered Paramedic and one Rescue Unit. b.

For Sprint and Hill Climb: Subject to the presence of a correctly crewed and equipped ASN registered Rescue Unit , the attendance of an ambulance is recommended but not mandatory. This is subject to the requirement that if a casualty is within the Rescue Unit the Event may not run until the casualty has been released for further care.

The Rescue Unit and the ambulance must be positioned to ensure unobstructed access to the Course as per the Track Licence.

d. Hot Lap Challenge: i.

At all permanent Circuits there shall be a medical centre equipped in accordance with the current ASN Medical Centre Protocol. The appropriate number of Doctors, ASN Registered Paramedics and ambulances must be present throughout Practice and Racing and positioned where necessary in accordance with the Track Licence. Provided that the basic minimum of one Doctor is complied with the remaining posts shall be filled with either ASN Registered Paramedics (Chapter 11) or Doctors appointed to the Event at the sole discretion of the Chief Medical Officer of the Event. At least one Licensed Rescue Vehicle and crew should be in attendance and positioned as indicated on the Track Licence.

ii.

iii.

iv.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 14 Appendix 1 - Organisers Regulations Including Scrutineering 533

2.2. Organisers in conjunction with the Chief Medical Officer of the Event must ensure that during Practice sessions and Competition the following are in attendance:

Adequate number of trained first-aid staff (e.g. members of St. John Ambulance Association, British Red Cross Society or St. Andrew Ambulance Association).

Ambulances should be equipped with basic resuscitation equipment and if possible a Casualty Immobiliser for handling a patient over difficult terrain and shall be reserved for use in connection with casualties arising from the Competition.

The ambulance must be so equipped that essential equipment does not have to be taken from any other Emergency Vehicle

2.3. In an emergency, the Chief Medical Officer may, at their discretion, designate as an ambulance any vehicle they deem adequate for this purpose.

2.4. When public attendance is expected suitable arrangements must be made by the Organisers for dealing with the first-aid requirements of spectators not arising from the event.

3. The Clerk of the Course For Licence Criteria see Chapter 5 .

3.1. In the case of all Sprints, Hill Climbs or Hot Lap Challenge the Clerk of the Course must hold a Clerk of the Course licence issued by the ASN valid for the grade of Event.

3.2. At all National and above Events there should be at least one Licensed Deputy / Assistant Clerk of the Course in addition to the Clerk of the Course.

3.3. At all other Events it is recommended that there be at least one Deputy / Assistant Clerk of the Course in addition to the Clerk of the Course . Deputy Clerks must be licensed but Assistant Clerks need not be.

4. Scrutineering 4.1. No Vehicle may be driven in the Event until it has been approved by a ASN Scrutineer of the Event.

4.2. All Vehicles competing in Hill Climbs or Sprints must be presented for scrutineering with a valid Competition Car Log Book / Vehicle Passport or an ASN Recognised Vehicle Identity Document unless the Vehicle is currently licensed for use on the Public Highway and is competing in a road legal condition. The onus of proof rests with the Competitor. See Appendix 4 Technical Regulations .

Any alteration or modification made to the Vehicle or any amendment to the original details shown in the Competition Car Log Book / Vehicle Passport must be in accordance with the prescriptions of Chapter 7 App.1.

Vehicles other than those used for Hot Lap Challenge may be liable to annual inspection by a Technical Commissioner or designated Scrutineer if:

Fitted with an engine of a greater capacity than that with which it was constructed; and / or ii. Altered or modified causing a change in classification.

4.3. If after approval any Vehicle is dismantled or modified in a manner that may affect its safety or eligibility or it is involved in any incident which is likely to have a similar effect or any aerodynamic device is added or removed it shall be represented for approval. The Entrant shall be responsible for seeking such fresh approval.

4.4. Any Vehicle involved in an incident which is unable to proceed shall not be touched by any person other than Officials without the specific approval of the Clerk of the Course. The Driver concerned may not drive again without the approval of the Medical Officer in charge.

4.5. Any Vehicle involved in an accident shall not be taken away from the Course without the prior authority of the Clerk of the Course.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 14 Appendix 1 - Organisers Regulations Including Scrutineering 534

4.6. A Vehicle involved in a Serious Incident shall only be touched with the authority of the ASN Safety Department except for the purposes of the extraction of the Driver under medical supervision.

4.7. The Official Documents for all Hill Climbs and Sprints should specify if timing is being activated by a light beam. In this case Competitors must be reminded that a timing strut in accordance with the Technical Regulations App.4 Art.11.1 is required.

5. Practice/Competition Restrictions 5.1. Must be stated in the Official Documents.

5.2. Practice: With the exception of Hot Lap Challenge all Competitors must receive the following opportunities for practice:

a. Before the competitive runs at least one practice run. b. Drivers must be permitted to either: i.

Walk the Course or ii. Drive over it at a non-competitive speed. 5.3. The Official Documents must state which Art.5.2.b. option is to be adopted.

5.4. Any Driver who has not previously competed at the Course within the preceding six months must make at least one Practice run in the Vehicle to be competed in. The Stewards of the Event may waive this requirement where a Driver can give satisfactory evidence of familiarity with the Course and the Vehicle Entered to compete but in which the Driver has not Practiced.

5.5. Where Practice times are not required for the purpose of arranging the order of competing then such times will be unofficial. Failure to record a time in such a case for whatever reason will not automatically qualify the Driver concerned to a re-run but this may be authorised by the Clerk of the Course

6. Starting 6.1. The Official Documents must specify:

a. The starting signal b.

The method of timing c. When timing commences .

6.2. Except for Hot Lap Challenge all Vehicles shall be started from a standing start with the engine running. Unless the Track Licence allows more than one Vehicle to be on the Course at the same time no Vehicle shall be started whilst there is an obstruction in its path either on the Course or in the braking area after the finish.

6.3. Vehicles starting singly or in line abreast shall be placed as follows:

When start timing is activated by a light beam the Vehicle must be stationary with the part which operates the timing apparatus 100mm behind the starting line.

If the timing is not recorded automatically then with that part of the front tyres which is in contact with the ground resting upon the Start Line.

c. Alternatively Organisers may substitute "400mm" as an alternative to the "100mm" shown in a. above . In such instances +/- 20mm will be the permitted tolerance for this alignment.

6.4. The Finish Line will be clearly indicated and must be notified in the Official Documents.

7. Signals

7.1. Signals will normally be restricted to a Red Signal at each Post . Marshals should be briefed as to halting a Driver in the Event of an incident as follows:

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 14 Appendix 1 - Organisers Regulations Including Scrutineering 535

In Hill Climbs : If the Red Signal is displayed competing Vehicles should come to a standstill as soon as practicable and await further instructions from the Marshals.

In Sprints : If the Red Signal is displayed competing Vehicles should come to a standstill as soon as practicable and await further instructions from the Marshal unless the Official Documents specify that the following alternative is applicable to the Event:

If the Red Signal is displayed then the Driver must immediately cease driving at competitive speed and proceed slowly to the Pits / Paddock / Start Line as directed by Marshals and at all times be prepared to stop and must stop if the Track is blocked.

7.2. In Sprints at Race Circuits other Signals may be used provided their use is clearly defined in the Official Documents.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 14 Appendix 1 - Organisers Regulations Including Scrutineering 536

CHAPTER 14 SPRINT, HILL CLIMB AND HOT LAP CHALLENGE Appendix 2 - Competitors Regulations

1. General

1.1. These Competitor Regulations must be read in conjunction with Chapter 2 (Judicial), Chapter 6 (Competitor Licensing), Chapter 7 (Competitor Vehicles and Vehicle Safety Equipment, Chapter 8 (Permitted Fuels and Tyres and Testing), Chapter 9 (Competitor Personal Safety Equipment)

1.2. Competitors in all Sprints, Hill Climbs or Hot Lap Challenge must comply with the Common Regulations for Competitors ( Chapter 6) and the following:

a. Vehicles must be presented for scrutiny and practice at the times specified in the Official Documents .

b. Vehicles competing in Hill Climbs and Sprints must comply with Technical Regulations of App.4 to this Chapter and Chapter 7 .

1.3. A valid Competition / Entrant Licence for Entrant and Driver must be produced to the Organisers on demand for the purposes of signing on to an Event.

1.4. Any Driver competing in a Racing or Sports Libre car of more than 1100cc or equivalent forced induction with the exception of a pre’1994 Formula Ford 1600 in compliance with the period Ford regulations must hold an RS National or Race National Licence unless the Vehicle is currently licensed for use on the Public Highway and competes in the Event in a road- legal condition.

1.5. Competitors must declare on their Entry forms whether or not they have ever held a valid RTA licence.

1.6. Competitors who have never held a valid RTA licence and who do not have any qualifying signatures towards upgrading their Competition Licence on their Upgrade Card may be specifically observed at the Event.

1.7. Any Driver whose vehicle is not capable of self-starting at any part of the Course must declare on their Entry form the method of operation together with a detailed starting instruction.

1.8. Drivers in Hot Lap Challenge must comply with the minimum licence criteria stipulated in App. 5 to this Chapter.

1.9. Junior Sprint and Junior Hill Climb Drivers aged 14 to 16 may compete until the end of the year of their 16th birthday at Interclub status in vehicles of the following types which will be classified separately from each other:

A Standard Car of no more than 110bhp maximum power output and in compliance with the Technical Regulations for Standard Cars ( App. 4 to this Chapter ).

b. A vehicle in compliance with Chapter 16 PART B App.9 Art.13.1 (Junior Rallycross), Chapter 16 PART A App.5 Art.28.1 (Junior Autocross), Chapter 12 App.1 (Junior Car Racing) or Chapter 13 App.21 (Junior Rally). Tyres must be to Chapter 8 List 1A, List 1B or as specified in the regulations of a current Junior Car Racing Championship . Any Competitor entering a vehicle in compliance with Chapter 12 App.1 or Chapter 13 App.21 . will be required to present their junior formulae licence.

1.10. Junior Sprint: New Drivers will be required to drive observed runs prior to the Competition and satisfy the Clerk of the Course that they are competent to take part subject to the following:

a. Start singly and run over the duration of the Course at least 3 times. b.

An ASN licensed Driver may accompany the new Driver subject to written approval of the Clerk of the Course.

Observed laps are not required if the Driver can provide the Clerk of the Course with proof of having competed as a Driver in three other ASN Permitted Events.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 14 Appendix 2 - Competitors Regulations 537

1.11. Junior Hill Climb: For participation in Junior Hill Climb Events the Driver must have gained signatures for having successfully completed a minimum of three Junior Sprint Events.

1.12. Organisers may provide an Intro-Class which will allow new Drivers to experience competitive motor sport on an Event-by-Event basis with the exception of Juniors ( Arts 1.9-1.11 above ) when:

a. b. c. d.

The RS Clubman licence is acceptable The Class will run separate to any other session The Vehicle must run on Chapter 8 Appendix 4 List 1A tyres

Vehicles must be in compliance with the Technical Regulations for Standard Cars ( App.4 to this Chapter ).

2. Competition Licence Retention and Upgrading 2.1. See Chapter 6 .

3. Competition Numbers

3.1. Vehicles will be identified by means of a Competition Number allocated by the Organisers which must be visible from each side of the Vehicle and displayed on a contrasting background in a proper and durable manner acceptable to the Chief Timekeeper at the Event.

3.2. Competition Numbers must be covered or removed at all times whilst driving on the Public Highway.

4. Drivers

4.1. Throughout Practice and Competition upon exiting from and until returning to the Paddock when the Driver is seated in the Vehicle they must wear clothing helmet and visors or goggles complying with Chapter Art.3 - 11.

4.2. Overalls homologated to FIA 8856- 2000 FIA 8856- 2018 or FIA 1986 standard are mandatory with the exception of Standard Cars (see App.4 Art.13 –16 where flame-resistant clothing is recommended (arms and legs must be covered) and Road Cars (see App.4 Art.17–23 where overalls must comply with Chapter 9 Arts.3.3.f.

4.3. Competitors are required to wear flame-resistant gloves (see Ch.9 Art.12.6 –12.8 ) with the exception of Standard Cars and Road Cars where their use is recommended.

4.4. An FIA approved FHR device fitted in accordance with FIA regulations is mandatory for all Drivers with the exception of Period Defined Vehicles and Standard Cars and Road Cars.

4.5. All required items must be produced for inspection and approval at scrutineering.

4.6. Only the Driver may be in a Vehicle during the Competition or Practice with the exception of App.2 Art.1.10.b.

4.7. Official Documents shall state if during warm-up of a Hot Lap Challenge Event the team data analyst is authorised to the accompany the Driver. That data analyst will then be required to comply with Art.5.1 below.

5. Results (Not applicable for Hot Lap Challenge)

5.1. A Driver may drive any number of Vehicles for which an Entry has been accepted by the Organisers unless the Official Documents specify a limit.

5.2. The same Vehicle may not be entered to compete for the same award more than twice and then only provided it is driven by different Drivers.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 14 Appendix 2 - Competitors Regulations 538

CHAPTER 14 SPRINT, HILL CLIMB AND HOT LAP CHALLENGE Appendix 3 - Paddock and Track Regulations

1. General

1.1. The spinning of wheels (tyre warming) will only be permitted in a designated area and which should be clearly defined by the Organisers.

1.2. The heating of tyres by any method other than at Art.1.1 above or the treatment of tyres by any chemical substance is prohibited. For the avoidance of doubt no manner of abnormally raising the temperature of the tyres/wheels above the natural ambient temperature is allowed. The use of heat guns to clean and prepare slick tyres between runs is permitted.

1.3. Single-use plastic tyre wrapping is prohibited.

1.4. Any Vehicle unable to complete the Course shall be stopped well clear of the Track and shall not be moved without prior permission from the Clerk of the Course.

1.5. No competing Vehicle shall be driven in the reverse direction of the Track except under the supervision of Officials.

1.6. Refuelling and work on the Vehicles other than by a Driver or Officials can only be carried out in the paddock unless the Clerk of the Course specifically authorises otherwise .

1.7. No more than two people at any time in addition to the Driver and Officials are allowed in attendance on each Vehicle in the identified starting area.

1.8. Except while on the Track no competing Vehicle shall be driven at a speed exceeding 10 mph without the specific permission of the Clerk of the Course.

1.9. In Hill Climbs If the Red Signal is displayed competing cars should come to a standstill as soon as practicable and await further instructions from the marshals.

1.10. In Sprints if the Red Signal is displayed competing cars should come to a standstill as soon as practicable and await further instructions from the marshals unless the Official Documents specify that the following alternative is applicable to the Event:

If the Red Signal is displayed then the Driver must immediately cease driving at competitive speed and proceed slowly to the Pit / Paddock / Start Line as directed by Marshals and at all times be prepared to stop if the Track is blocked.

1.11. Vehicles must not be left unattended under any circumstances when the engine is running. In the event that a responsible person is not seated in the driving position they must be in close proximity and the Vehicle must be under their supervision at all times.

2. Starting and Practising 2.1. Vehicles will start as specified. 2.2. Sprints and Hill Climbs : Singly.

2.3. The starting order will be in classes as determined by the Organisers unless the Official Documents specify otherwise.

2.4. The number of Vehicles on a Track at any one time is that permitted by the Track Licence with the exception of Junior Sprint or Hill Climb Competitors who must be on the Track singly at any time.

2.5. In Hill Climbs or Sprints on sealed surfaces should a Driver make an unsatisfactory start then provided that neither of the rear wheel centres have crossed the Start Line a Re-Start may be permitted.

2.6. Drivers will be under Starter ’s Orders when instructed by an Official to proceed to the Start Line. If a Driver takes undue time to comply then the Clerk of the Course or a Deputy may specify that the Driver must come forward within two minutes or forfeit the run.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 14 Appendix 3 - Paddock and Track Regulations 539

2.7. After crossing the Finish Line Drivers must slow down as appropriate and proceed as instructed.

3. Results

3.1. Unless the Official Documents say otherwise Drivers must be allowed a minimum of two runs in the same Vehicle in each Class entered with the faster run to count for the Results.

3.2. As between two Drivers the more meritorious performance will be that of the Driver who has covered the Course in a lesser time.

3.3. A Driver ’s time will be credited only if:

a. All four wheels of the Vehicle are on the Track when it crosses the Finish Line . b.

The run is made during the period provided for Vehicles in the appropriate class and not more than the appropriate number of competition runs have been made.

c. The Vehicle completes the correct Course without outside assistance.

3.4. If the boundaries of the Track are indicated by temporary markers the Official Documents shall specify if any and what penalties apply for striking a marker or crossing a given line.

3.5. To be classified as a finisher in the Competition a Driver must have completed at least one Competition run.

3.6. Only an equal number of runs for all Drivers in the same Class will be counted. In the Event of a tie between two or more Drivers the results of the next fastest run recorded (during competition runs) by the Drivers concerned shall be compared and so on.

3.7. If through their own error a Driver fails to record a time they shall not be entitled to a re-run.

3.8. In other circumstances (e.g baulking) a re-run may be granted by the Clerk of the Course who may order any penalties incurred in the initial run are applied to the re-run.

3.9. Judges may be appointed to adjudicate on:

a. Unsatisfactory or False Starts. b. Not following correct Course or touching marker. c. Baulking. d. Noise.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 14 Appendix 3 - Paddock and Track Regulations 540

CHAPTER 14 SPRINT, HILL CLIMB AND HOT LAP CHALLENGE Appendix 4 - Technical Regulations

These Technical Regulations must be read in conjunction with Chapter 7 (Competitors Vehicles and Vehicle Safety Equipment)

1. Categories

1.1. Categories are defined in the following regulations (except for Period Defined Vehicles (Non-Rally ) A-E inclusive which remain free). Classes within those categories are free but must be stated in the Official Documents .

1.2. Other than the provisions of Chapter 7 and Art.2 below and the specific Category regulations below as appropriate modifications are free.

1.3. ASN retains the sole discretion to determine the category into which a vehicle should be categorised should there be any doubt.

1.4. The onus of responsibility for the eligibility of competing Vehicles lies with the Competitor. 1.5. Standard Cars – Vehicles complying with. App.4 Art.13 1.6. Road Cars – Vehicles complying with App.4 Art.14 1.7. Modified Cars – Vehicles complying with App.4 Art .15 1.8. Sports Libre Cars – Vehicles complying with App.4 Art .16 1.9. Racing Cars – Vehicles complying with App.4 Art.17

1.10. In addition to complying with Chapter 7 all Vehicles competing in Sprints and Hill Climbs must comply with the following as a minimum:

2. Safety (Hill Climbs and Sprints)

2.1. Be fitted with a Roll Over Protection System complying with ASN requirements as specified in Chapter 7 except for cars of Periods A – E (see Ch.1 App.1 ) and Standard Cars and Road Cars Series Production as defined in these Regulations where it is recommended.

2.2. If fitted with lightened non-standard doors then must be fitted with a doorbar(s) complying with Ch.7 App.3 Art.12 on the Driver ’s side as a minimum.

2.3. Open and closed wheel Racing Cars and Sports Libre Racing Cars as defined in App.4 Art.16.1.a must comply with Ch.7 App.3 Art.24.

2.4. Seating and Seat Belts except for cars of Periods A – E ( Ch.1 App.1 ) must be worn and be correctly adjusted at all times during Events.

2.5. Road Cars : front seats may be replaced by fully trimmed Competition versions.

2.6. Standard Cars and Road Cars must have a minimum Three Point Harness System ( Ch.7 App.7 Art.6 ) with the exception of Junior Sprint and Junior Hill Climb Competitors who must have as a minimum a Four Point Harness ( Ch.7 App. 7 Art.7 ).

2.7. Modified Cars must have as a minimum a Four Point Harness ( Ch.7 App. 7 Art.7).

2.8. Sports Libre Cars and Racing Cars must be equipped with a homologated FIA safety harness minimum Five Point Harness (Ch.7 App. 7 Art.8).

2.9. Head restraints ( Ch.7 App. 7 Art.4 are mandatory for all Vehicles except for Vehicle of Periods A – E.

2.10. Fire Extinguishers – per Ch.7 App.6 recommended for discharge into cockpit and engine compartment in all Vehicles.

2.11. Towing point(s) of adequate strength and size are mandatory. They must be clearly identified and suitably

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 14 Appendix 4 - Technical Regulations 541

marked on the Vehicle using a high visibility colour and be accessible to the front and rear of the Vehicle.

3. Windscreen/Glass

3.1. Windscreens are mandatory for all closed Vehicles. They are free for open Vehicles .

3.2. Laminated windscreens lamp glass security and rear-view mirrors are not required unless specified in Official Documents or where there is a possibility of one car overtaking another .

3.3. Windscreen wipers must be operative on all Vehicles with windscreens.

4. Engines

4.1. Forced induction equivalence: 1.4 with the exception of Standard Road Cars ( Art.13 ) where forced induction equivalence is 1.7.

4.2. Rotary engine equivalence: 1.5. Forced induction rotary equivalence (1.4 x 1.5) = 2.1 or (1.7 x 1.5) = 2.55.

4.3. All engines must be provided with a means of starting which does not involve push starting or the use of external equipment or personnel except in the case of force majeure unless period defined or vehicles in possession of a Competition Car Log Book or Vehicle Passport prior to 31st December 2018.

4.4. Any connections to assist the starting of the car must be either in the Drivers’ cockpit or at the tail of the car requiring horizontal connection.

4.5. Undertrays: Must be provided with drainage holes to prevent accumulation of liquids.

4.6. Engine Oil Systems: Unless equipped with a closed loop system must have a catch tank of at least a one litre capacity to be incorporated in the oil breather system.

5. Wheels and tyres

5.1. Except those of centre-lock type must have any nuts securing road wheels of steel and in thread contact over a minimum length of 1.5 bolt / stud diameters. Extended or composite wheel bolts / studs are prohibited.

6. Fuel

6.1. For Standard Cars, Road Cars and Modified Cars: Permitted Fuel is mandatory. Only air may be mixed with the fuel as an oxidant.

6.2. Sports Libre and Racing Cars: Only Permitted Fuel or methanol may be used. When using methanol the addition of 10% by volume of Propanone is allowable.

Any Vehicle using methanol must include an approved additive which provides a distinguishable colour and smell when burning. The maximum permitted volume of additive within the fuel is 0.2%. The Vehicle must carry a Day Glo orange disc 70mm in diameter positioned adjacent to all Competition Numbers.

6.3. Alternative fuels may be permitted subject to prior ASN approval.

6.4. All Vehicles must be equipped with an effective method of stopping the fuel supply operable by the Driver when normally seated and with seat belt / harness secured with the exception of Standard Cars as defined in Art.13.1 below where it is recommend this is to be combined with or located adjacent to the internal ignition cut-off switch.

7. Electric Vehicles

7.1. Electrically powered vehicles are permitted subject to conformity with Ch.7 App.11 and any Official Documents (see Ch.3 App.10).

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 14 Appendix 4 - Technical Regulations 542

8. Electrical

8.1. All Vehicles must be equipped with an ignition cut-off switch having positive ‘ON/OFF’ positions clearly marked. The ignition cut-off and fuel pumps isolation system(s) must be operable by the Driver when normally seated with seat belts / harness secured except Standard Cars as defined in these Regulations where it is recommended.

8.2. Lighting equipment is not required unless the Vehicle is currently licensed for use on the Public Highway and competed on the Event in a road legal condition ( Art.12 below).

8.3. An external circuit breaker to Ch.7 App.5 Arts.5 is mandatory for all Vehicles except open cars of periods A – E and Vehicles in a road legal condition ( Art.12 below) when it is recommended.

9. Brakes 9.1. All cars must be fitted with fully operational braking systems.

10. Transmission 10.1. For Road Cars and Standard Cars the reverse gear must always remain operable. 10.2. For all other Categories a reverse gear is recommended.

10.3. A propellor shaft restraint is recommended for all front engined Vehicles with rear wheel drive comprising of either hooks or a rigidly fixed steel panel minimum 18swg.

11. General

11.1. Timing Struts – Where timing is activated by a light beam the vehicles must be fitted at the front with a vertical timing strut minimum vertical height 254mm the bottom of which shall be not less than 180mm and no more than 200mm from the ground. The strut will be in matt black on both sides over its total area which shall be not less than 254mm by 51mm. No other or further forward part of the Vehicle may interrupt these dimensions or actuate the timing.

12. Road Legal Condition

12.1. Where cars are required to compete in a road legal condition they must comply with Chapter 7 of these regulations and all statutory regulations concerning the construction and use of vehicles. Such Vehicles must:

Be currently registered and taxed as a private car and

a. b.

Have registration documents and c. Where required by law Vehicles must hold a valid full MOT Certificate including lighting. d.

Display registration plates in compliance with the current Road Vehicles (Display of Registration Marks) Regulations , unless the Official Documents specify otherwise.

These documents must be produced at scrutineering UPON REQUEST.

13. Regulations for Standard Cars 13.1. Description

13.1.1. Standard Cars: Saloons and Sports Cars produced in quantities of not less than 5000 per annum being of unitary construction two-wheel drive and up to (except for Junior sprint and hill climb per Ch.14 App.2 Art.1.9 ) 2litre engine capacity. The Vehicle must be manufactured after 1st January 2000 and be Type Approved. Any replacement components fitted must be a Standard Part / Standard Pattern Part.

13.1.2. Vehicles must compete in an Event in a road legal condition as defined in these Regulations.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 14 Appendix 4 - Technical Regulations 543

13.2. Permitted Modifications

13.2.1. Other than as detailed no other modifications are permitted:

a. Any FIA / ASN approved / homologated safety equipment may be installed. b. Brake friction material may be uprated.

13.3. Engine

13.3.1. Forced induction equivalence 1.7.

13.4. Wheels and tyres

13.4.1. Standard wheels and tyres from Ch.8 App.4 List 1A only may be used.

14. Regulations for Road Cars 14.1. Description

14.1.1. Road Cars - Series Production : Saloons and Sports Cars produced in quantities of not less than 1000 per annum.

14.1.2. Road Cars - Specialist Production Cars with a minimum annual production of 20 Chassis which do not qualify as Series Production Cars.

14.1.3. Road Cars – Electrified Series Production , - Standard Electrified Saloons and Sports Cars in quantities of not less than 1000 per annum, compliant with Ch.7 App.11 Art.1.9.

14.2. Vehicles must compete in an Event in a road legal condition as defined in Art.12 . 14.3. Chassis

14.3.1. Must conform to the Manufacturer ’s original chassis structure and specification of construction dimensions and material. Roll cages must not accept or assist any direct suspension loads.

14.4. Body (including aerodynamics)

14.4.1. Silhouette of the Vehicle must remain unaltered in construction dimension and material. The silhouette will be taken in the condition in which the Vehicle competes (convertible closed cars competing with the hood or top not erected shall have the silhouette determined in that condition).

14.4.2. Engine bonnet / cover and luggage / boot cover may be replaced with an alternative material. 14.4.3. Laminated windscreens permitted but all other glass may not be replaced by another material. 14.4.4. Interior trim must remain fitted (except floor carpets / mats).

14.4.5. All working equipment fitted as standard (heater window mechanisms sunroof door handles) must be operable at all times.

14.5. Engines / Motors

14.5.1. For Road Cars – Series Production: the cylinder block and cylinder head must remain in the original position and be externally identifiable as that fitted to the original model or specified option. Induction is free as are exhaust systems.

14.5.2. For Road Cars – Specialist Production: the cylinder block and head must be of a make and type produced in at least 1000 identical units originally available through the normal commercial channels of a land vehicle manufacturer.

14.5.3. Must be capable of being started from an onboard power source operable by the Driver when seated normally.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 14 Appendix 4 - Technical Regulations 544

14.5.4. Exhaust catalytic converters are required per Ch.7 App.8 Art.1.8 except where a Vehicle does not require a catalytic converter in accordance with UK Government legislation.

14.5.5. Road Cars – Electrified Series Production: no modifications to the electrified propulsion system or powertrain are permitted.

14.6. Wheels and tyres

14.6.1. Except for Period Defined Vehicles (non-Rally) A-H inclusive tyres are to Ch.8 Appendix 4 List 1A and List 1B.

14.7. Suspension and Steering

14.7.1. The suspension type mountings mounting method and position must remain the same as that fitted by the vehicle manufacturer with the exception of lever arm shocks which may be changed to Telescopic shock absorbers.

14.7.2. The shock absorbers may be of any make and may be uprated from standard. 14.7.3. Adjustable spring platform struts are permitted. 14.7.4. Springs are free but must retain their original location.

14.7.5. For Road Cars – Series Production bushes may be changed for similar polymer materials but not to spherical or similar metal joints.

14.7.6. For Road Cars – Specialist Production bushes may be changed for similar polymer materials spherical or similar metal joints.

14.7.7. Reciprocating ball steering may be replaced with rack and pinion.

14.8. Transmission

14.8.1. Road Cars – Series Production.

The gearbox and differential casing must be externally identifiable as that fitted to the original model or be a specified option and in either case remain in their original position;

The method of gear selection must remain standard (sequential selection only where fitted as standard).

14.8.2. Road Cars – Electrified Series Production , no modifications to the electrified propulsion system or powertrain are permitted.

15. Regulations for Modified Cars 15.1. Description

15.1.1. Modified Cars – Series Production: Must have been originally available through the normal commercial channels of the manufacturer in quantities of not less than 1000 Vehicles within 12 consecutive months.

15.1.2. Modified Cars – Electrified Series Production: Modified Electrified Saloons and Sports Cars in quantities of not less than 1000 per annum, compliant with Ch.7 App.11 Art.1.10.

15.1.3. Modified Cars – Specialist Production: Must have been originally available in quantities of not less than 20 Chassis over a period of 12 consecutive months.

15.2. Vehicles produced in lesser quantities may be admitted subject to the manufacturer obtaining approval from ASN.

15.3. Safety

15.3.1. See Articles 2 – 12.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 14 Appendix 4 - Technical Regulations 545

15.4. Chassis

15.4.1. The Chassis or unitary construction must remain to the manufacturer ’s original specification in construction and material within the wheel hub centres with the exception of the following:

a. Re-positioning of suspension pick-up points and engine mountings are permitted. b. Inner wheel arches only may be modified to allow the attachment of damper mountings. c.

It is only permitted to make holes for the passage of cables fuel water oil hydraulic instrument or fire extinguisher lines as per ASN Vehicle Regulations . All redundant holes must be covered with metal plates.

d. Reinforcing of the Chassis is allowed.

e. Bulkheads and / or inner wings may be modified to permit the clearance of the induction system. This shall be understood to include air induction ducting manifolding trumpets / ram pipes for engine carburation or fuel injection system only.

f. Localised alteration for the passage / clearance of the exhaust system. 15.5. Bodywork (including aerofoils)

15.5.1. Silhouette of the Vehicle as seen in side elevation must remain unaltered with the exception of engine bonnet/cover and boot lid / rear deck.

15.5.2. The doors engine bonnet / cover luggage compartment cover boot lid / rear deck or bodywork not forming part of the unitary construction may be changed for ones of different material. Wheel arch extensions are free.

15.5.3. Alternative materials may be used for external mudguards if attached by bolts and / or rivets. 15.5.4. Detachable hardtops are permitted providing the silhouette remains unaltered.

15.5.5. It is permitted to replace any glass window with plastic Ch.7 App.2 Arts.22.7–22.8 apply. A hole approximately 15cm diameter may be cut in the window next to the Driver for signalling or ventilation.

15.5.6. Demisting apertures are permitted in the rear windscreen / windows. They must be in the form of holes or slots and be positioned close to the top or sides but not both.

15.5.7. Open car with hoods may have them removed. Vehicles may run open or closed. If running closed a rear window of safety glass or plastic of minimum thickness 4mm is mandatory. Tonneau covers are permitted providing they are of flexible material and were originally specified for the Vehicle.

15.5.8. Front spoilers / air dams / splitters are permitted below the level of the road wheel centres up to 15cm beyond the overall plan periphery of the existing bodywork excluding bumpers.

15.5.9. Rear spoilers are permitted within the overall plan periphery of the original Vehicle excluding bumpers. A rear spoiler is a raised surface of opaque material integral with the rear deck with no gaps or openings in the surface front or rear and not exceeding half the vertical height of the original rear window fitted into the vehicle measured at the centre of the original window. The Vehicle manufacturer ’s original equipment or a specified option for that Vehicle is also permitted.

15.5.10. It is permitted to remove the floor carpets underfelt and sound insulation throughout the Vehicle as well as the rear seat the passenger ’s front seat and the head lining.

15.5.11. It is permitted to carry out modifications to window winders instrument panels and all driving controls.

15.6. Engine / Motors

15.6.1. The engine block must be externally identifiable as that fitted to the original model or a manufacturer specified option. Modification to all components is permitted.

15.6.2. With the exception of any engine fitted to a Vehicle complying with Art.15.1.1–15.1.2 the engine must be of a make and type produced in at least 1000 identical units and fitted to a Vehicle originally

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 14 Appendix 4 - Technical Regulations 546

available through the normal commercial channels of a land vehicle manufacturer. 15.6.3. Induction system free.

15.6.4. Oil coolers dry sump lubrication systems or additional water radiators are permitted within the periphery of the bodywork.

15.6.5. Must be capable of being started from an onboard power source operable by the Driver when seated normally.

15.6.6. Engine and transmission must remain in a similar position within the Vehicle and in the same position relative to each other as in the original model.

15.6.7. Modified Cars – Electrified Series Production: no modifications to the electrified propulsion system or powertrain are permitted.

15.7. Transmission

15.7.1. Transmission layout to remain as original. 15.7.2. Gearbox and differential are free. 15.7.3. Driven axle(s) free (see Art.15.8.4 ).

15.7.4. Modified Cars – Electrified Series Production: no modifications to the electrified propulsion system or powertrain are permitted.

15.8. Suspension

15.8.1. Additions and modifications to springs shock absorbers or suspension height are free.

15.8.2. The original type of suspension must be maintained (e.g. twin wishbone set-up cannot replace a single wishbone suspension; a sliding pillar cannot be replaced by a MacPherson strut; a trailing link cannot be replaced by wishbones or coaxial springing).

15.8.3. A live rear axle may not be replaced by an independent system or De Dion.

15.8.4. A live rear axle is allowed location links. If lever-arm shock absorbers are an original fitment they may be replaced by a single location link.

15.8.5. Suspension pick-up point positions may be altered providing the suspension system is maintained as being the original type.

15.8.6. Road springs are free.

15.8.7. The wheelbase must be to the dimensions of the original Vehicle plus or minus 2% or 5cm whichever is the greater.

15.9. Electrical

15.9.1. Electrical generators may be disconnected or removed.

16. Regulations for Sports Libre Cars 16.1. Vehicles that comply with any of the following Groups:

Any closed wheel Vehicle that does not comply with any other category as defined in these Regulations.

b. Bespoke electrical Vehicles compliant with Ch.7 App.11 Art.1.11 . c.

Sports Racing Cars d. Single seat closed wheel Racing Car the rear wheels enclosed by continuous bodywork.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 14 Appendix 4 - Technical Regulations 547

17. Regulations for Open Wheel Single Seat Racing Cars 17.1. Dimensions

17.1.1.

1500mm 1400mm Not to exceed the top of the front wheel rim

Maximum width ahead of front wheels Maximum width behind front wheels Maximum height of any part wider than 1100mm ahead of the front wheels Maximum height

900mm from the ground Maximum rear overhang 1500mm behind rear wheel axis.

17.1.2. Maximum height is measured with the car in any condition and Driver aboard. Safety roll-over bars and air boxes are not included in this measurement.

17.2. Wheels

17.2.2. Twin rear wheels are permitted.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 14 Appendix 4 - Technical Regulations 548

CHAPTER 14 SPRINT, HILL CLIMB AND HOT LAP CHALLENGE Appendix 5 - Specific Regulations for Hot Lap Challenge

Throughout these sections an asterisk(*) indicates a requirement for additional information to be printed in the Official Documents.

1. General 1.1. Unless stated hereafter, Organisers must comply with Chapter 3 and 14 of these NCR.

1.2. *For any Technical or Safety criteria not provided for by these Specific Regulations the Official Documents must state the definitive source of reference.

1.3. *The Official Documents must state what qualification is required to drive a specific Category of Vehicle. 1.4. Category of Driver : There will be:

Intro-Class for which a minimum of a RS Clubman Licence is acceptable Club-Class for which a minimum of a RS Interclub Licence is acceptable c. Pro-Class for which the Driver must be in possession of a Race Club Licence as a minimum.

a. b.

1.5. Designation in regard to Art.1.4b. and c. above is made by the Organising Committee and will be based upon a Driver ’s previous motor sport experience, in the first instance, and then may be dependent upon other factors e.g. engine capacity, Vehicle weight, lap times and previous Hot Lap Challenge classification.

1.6. The Intro-Class provides for an opportunity to experience competitive motor sport on an Event-by-Event basis.

a. The Class will run separate to any other session. b.

The Competitor will not score Points nor be classified, qualify for any end of day awards or set lap records.

c. The Vehicle must run on Chapter 8 List 1A or 1B tyres. d.

Any Competitor who achieves a lap time within 5% of the fastest time of the Class above on three or more occasions will be reviewed by the Organising Committee who may require the Driver to upgrade to the Club-Class.

1.7. Where the Event forms a round of a Series or Championship a Competitor who achieves a lap time within 5%, three or more times, of the fastest time of the Class above them will be reviewed by the Organising Committee who may require the Driver upgrades to that Class.

1.8. A new Driver who has not previously held a Competition Licence will be observed during Practice by the Clerk of the Course . It is the Drivers ’ responsibility to report this fact when signing on and await the instructions of the Clerk of the Course.

1.9. A Driver may be required to make runs under observation at any time. 1.10. Unless stated hereafter Vehicles must comply with Chapters 7, 9 and 14 of the NCR. 1.11. For Commercial type vehicles Chapter 7 App.2 Art.22.5 applies.

1.12. *Classification shall be as prescribed in the specific Class regulations contained within the Official Documents.

1.13. Competition Numbers must be in compliance with Art 6. 1.14. Tyres – Club Class to Chapter 8 List 1A or 1B. Pro Class free.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 14 Appendix 5 - Specific Regulations for Hot Lap Challenge 549

2. Driving Standards Observers

2.1. In consultation with the Clerk of the Course, Driving Standards Observers may position themselves at any point and may operate and report on a random basis as considered appropriate.

3. Marshals

3.1. Marshals shall patrol between the course and all unfenced enclosures. Those stationed outside the pits, paddock or enclosures should be warned to remain behind protective barriers, in the event of an impending incident. Officials should be briefed on their duties and wear no clothing whose colour might be confused with Signal colours.

4. Restrictions on Organisers 4.1. No Competition or Practice may take place until:

The Chief Medical Officer has reported to the Senior Clerk of the Course that the necessary Doctors / Paramedics , mobile ambulance vehicles and first aid personnel are present and have been briefed. If no ambulance or suitable substitute vehicle is available at the Event , the Competition or Practice must be suspended ( Chapter 11 ).

b. The Stewards of the Event have seen the Fire Equipment Certificate referred to in Chapter 10 App.4 Art.3. c.

The Clerk of the Course has reported to the Stewards of the Event that the conditions of the Permit and Track Licence are fulfilled. Before making such a report the Clerk of the Course , or a Deputy appointed by them specifically for such purpose shall inspect the Course and its installations.

The Clerk of the Course is sure that breakdown vehicles are present in sufficient number to cope with any incidents which may be expected having regard to the type of Course and number of Competitors.

The Clerk of the Course is satisfied that the Licensed Rescue Vehicle(s) are positioned in accordance with the Track Licence .

5. Scrutineering

5.1. Must be read in conjunction with the provisions of Chapter 14 in its entirety. If after approval for an Event any Vehicle is dismantled or modified in a manner which may affect its safety or eligibility or is involved in any incident which is likely to have a similar effect or is driven in Practice or Competition at another Event it shall be represented for approval. The Entrant shall be responsible for seeking such fresh approval.

5.2. Any Vehicle involved in an incident which is rendered unable to proceed or where any person is injured must not be touched by any person other than Officials without the specific approval of the Clerk of the Course . The Driver concerned may not participate again without the approval of the Chief Medical Officer.

5.3. No Vehicle taking part in an Event may be taken away from the Circuit before the final technical checks have been concluded for that session and Vehicles released from Parc Fermé without the prior authority of the Chief Scrutineer who will report such to the Clerk of the Course.

5.4. The Organising Committee may request the Clerk of the Course to verify the eligibility of a Vehicle by requiring it to Practice.

6. Competition Numbers

6.1. Vehicles will be identified by means of a Competition Number allocated by the Organisers and displayed as specified in Chapter 7. The use of “0” or “00” is prohibited unless preceded by any number 1 to 9.

6.2. The numbers shall be in position before the Vehicle is presented for scrutiny and will be subject to approval as to position, legibility and size. Modifications may be required as a result of observations during Practice.

6.3. Competition Numbers must be covered at all times when driving on the Public Highway .

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 14 Appendix 5 - Specific Regulations for Hot Lap Challenge 550

6.4. The Chief Timekeeper may decline to record the performance of any vehicle whose Competition Numbers are not readily apparent to the lap recorders.

6.5. On any Vehicle driven by a person who has not received six car race or Hot Lap Challenge signatures on their Competition Licence there shall be on the back of the car a yellow square 7in x 7in with a black diagonal cross with strokes 6in long and 1in wide.

6.6. The Organisers may in addition to the number format provided in Chapter 7 App 10 also permit Competition Numbers to be moved to the rear side windows (above the drivers’ name) on the Vehicle in which case.

6.7. The numbers for each rear side window, shall be:

a. b. a minimum of 200mm high with a stroke width of at least 20mm c. coloured reflective yellow.

6.8. In addition the windscreen of these Vehicles must display the Competition Numbers positioned on the upper area of the Passenger ’s side of the windscreen, as follows:

a. b. c. the numerals must be at least 150mm high be in the same colour and font as those displayed on the rear side windows

be placed no closer than 50mm from the lower edge of the windscreen “sun- strip” and 50mm from the side edge of the windscreen.

Competition Restrictions 7. Drivers

7.1. Ensure that during Practice and the Competition no team personnel are allowed on the Track with the exception of Art.9.2 below.

7.2. When a Vehicle is at its designated pit, team personnel (in accordance with Art.10.3 below) may work on the Vehicle . Should there be an approved signalling area one Timekeeper and one signaller for each Vehicle may be in this area.

8. Pit and Paddock Regulations

8.1. Refuelling and work upon the Vehicles other than by a Driver or Officials may only be carried out at the pits or in the Paddock (Chapter 10 App.4 Art.3.4 ). Unless expressly permitted by the Official Documents refuelling may not take place during a Practice session, Qualifying session or Competition.

8.2. A Driver shall vacate the Vehicle and the engine be stopped throughout any refuelling operation. Refuelling within the pit lane may only be carried out using either a churn of no more than 25 litres capacity equipped with a self-seal connection and closed loop breathing system or a refuelling rig in compliance with FIA requirements. In addition the Entrant shall ensure that throughout refuelling one person shall stand by the Vehicle with a fire extinguisher at the ready. Any personnel refuelling the Vehicle or on standby with a fire extinguisher during a pit stop must wear a safety suit in accordance with Chapter 9 Art.3 and flameresistant balaclava and gloves in accordance with FIA regulations.

8.3. A maximum of one Timekeeper and one person detailed by the Entrant for the purpose of signalling may be on the pit wall / signalling area at any time unless the Official Documents stipulate otherwise.

8.4. With the exception of Art.8.3 above only the fire cover attendant specified in Art.8.2 above the Driver and two other persons may be on the Course / in the pits in attendance on one Vehicle unless the Official Documents state otherwise.

8.5. If any fuel is stored in a pit the Entrant of the Vehicle using that pit shall ensure that an effective fire extinguisher is kept adjacent to such fuel.

9. Incidents

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 14 Appendix 5 - Specific Regulations for Hot Lap Challenge 551

9.1. The Clerk of the Course shall ensure that after every incident involving a competing Vehicle or vehicles the following are informed:

The Chief Scrutineer where mechanical failure is suspected, mechanical damage is substantial, or the completion of a serious incident form is necessary

The appointed ASN Steward where there is injury involving treatment beyond the capability of the Venue staff or where judicial action is likely or has been taken.

9.2. No Vehicle or Driver involved in a serious incident shall continue in Practice or the Competition nor may leave the Venue without approval of the Chief Scrutineer or Chief Medical Officer as appropriate. Full details of such approval must be delivered in the Stewards Report to the ASN

9.3. At the conclusion of each Session each Post-Chief shall report any incidents in writing to the Clerk of the Course . Post-Chiefs will also pay attention to driving standards.

10. Practice

10.1. Every Driver including Drivers of Vehicles which are to give performance demonstrations, must be given the opportunity of practising in conditions similar to those to be expected in the Competition. Any Driver who has not previously competed over the Course in its current layout, within the preceding twelve months, must complete at least three Practice laps in the Vehicle to be used by them during which they shall satisfy the Clerk of the Course as to their competence.

10.2. Drivers must be given at least the following opportunity for practising:

Organisers will provide a period sufficient to allow at least three laps of Practice in the prevailing conditions. It is recommended to schedule a period of 10 minutes of practice if the track is less than one mile in length; 15 minutes for a track between 1 mile and 2.5 miles; and 20 minutes for tracks over 2.5 miles.

Organisers will provide a separate Practice session for each category, Championship or Series (unless the Official Documents state differently). Qualified reserves shall enjoy precedence over Competitors practising entirely out of session or whose Practice times have been disallowed for whatever reason including on grounds of Vehicle eligibility.

Drivers whose best lap time exceeds by more than 10% that of the third fastest car within its Class (where similar weather conditions prevailed) may be Disqualified at the discretion of the Clerk of the Course.

During practising the number of Vehicles on the Course shall not exceed the number permitted in a Race by more than 20% unless the Track Licence specifies otherwise.

11. Starts 11.1. Starting positions will be determined by:

Practice times, or handicap, or selection made with the object of placing the fastest driver at the front, or current positions in a championship, or e. ballot (method specified in writing in the Official Documents). f.

a. b. c. d.

Signals

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 14 Appendix 5 - Specific Regulations for Hot Lap Challenge 552

11.2. Signals shall be in accordance with the following:

a. Each Flag Marshalling Post shall be provided with a Hazard Area Board and the following Signals : Yellow, Yellow and Red, Green, Blue, Red, White and Purple (if required), and shall be staffed by Marshals who are competent in their use. The Clerk of the Course shall be provided with, or have under their direct control, a Red Signal , a Black Signals , a Black and White Signal split diagonally, and a Black Signal with an Orange disc, together with means for clearly displaying a competing Vehicle’s number should it be necessary, as well as penalty boards. The National flag and a Black and White chequered Signal shall be available at the Start and Finish Lines or lines for appropriate use.

b. All Marshals’ posts shall show a Green Signal during the first lap of each session. c.

Officials ’ Signals will be conveyed to drivers by the following Signals which may be displayed by an appropriately coloured panel to which the Competitor number may be attached:

i. Red / Green lights or National flag: Session start. ii. Blue Signal – Stationary: Another Competitor is following close behind. iii. Blue Signal – ‘Waved’: Another Competitor is trying to overtake. iv.

White Signal : A service car or slow moving Vehicle is on the Circuit . The white Signal will be waved to indicate the sector of the Track that the slow moving Vehicle is in, and held stationary whilst the Vehicle is in the next sector. Yellow Signal – ‘Waved’: Danger, slow down sufficiently to ensure that full control of the Vehicle can be retained. No overtaking. Yellow Signal – Double ‘Waved’: Great danger. Slow down considerably. Be prepared to suddenly change from the projected racing line or take other evasive action including stopping if necessary. No overtaking. (This Signal may be supplemented or replaced by flashing yellow light(s) as an added warning.) vii. Yellow Signal with Red Stripes – Stationary: Slippery surface ahead. viii. Yellow Signal with Red Stripes – Waved: Slippery surface imminent. ix. Green Signal – ‘Waved’: All clear at the end of a danger area controlled by yellow Signals.

vi.

Also used to Signal the start of a session. x.

Red Signal : Immediately cease driving at competition speed and proceed slowly, without overtaking, and with maximum caution to pits or start line obeying Marshal’s instructions and being prepared to stop should the Track be blocked. Black Signal with Orange disc displayed with the Competitor ’s number: Notification of apparent mechanical failure or of a fire which might not be obvious to the Driver . The Vehicle concerned must call at its pit for repairs on the next lap. Black and White Rectangular Signal split diagonally and displayed with the Competitor ’s number: A warning to the Driver that their behaviour is suspect and that they may be Black- Signalled on further reports. xiii. Black Signal displayed with the Competitor ’s number: The Driver must stop at their pit on the next lap of receiving the Signal and report to the Clerk of the Course . A penalty of disqualification may be enforced by display of the Black Signal. xiv. Black and White Chequered Signal : End of session. xv. Hazard Area Board: A warning of a hazard that was not present when the sesson commenced.

xi.

xii.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 14 Appendix 5 - Specific Regulations for Hot Lap Challenge 553

At an incident where the Track is obstructed or Marshals are working at the trackside the following Signals will be used:

i. A ‘waved’ Yellow Signal at the post before a double ‘waved Yellow Signal . (This ‘waved’ yellow Signal may also be supplemented or replaced by flashing yellow warning lights). ii. A double ‘waved’ Yellow Signal at the post immediately preceding the incident. (These ‘waved’ yellow Signals may also be supplemented or replaced by flashing yellow warning lights). iii. A ‘waved’ Green Signal at the post immediately after the incident. iv.

If the incident is well off the Track and Marshals are not working at the trackside, the incident may be indicated by a single ‘waved’ yellow Signal followed by a ‘waved’ green Signal or by a Hazard Area board . e.

Overtaking or not slowing down is an offence from the point of passing the Yellow Signal until the Green Signal is passed.

If a hazard has been indicated by Yellow Signals as above then the Signal may be withdrawn even though the hazard remains. It will then be indicated by a Hazard Area Board at the Signal post preceding the hazard. It is then the Competitor ’s responsibility to take appropriate care.

When a Session is stopped by the Red Signal , ( Art.11.2.c.x ) the Clerk of the Course is not obliged to resume the Session .

Other than the Starter ’s Signal the minimum size for any Signal or appropriately coloured signal panel ( Art.11.2.c .) is 75cm x 60cm. (N.B. International Regulations require the Red Signal to be 80cm x 100cm minimum).

Once the Black and White chequered Signal has been displayed the Competition is over, and may not be restarted.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 14 Appendix 5 - Specific Regulations for Hot Lap Challenge 554

Chapter 15 Drag Race

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 15 - Drag Race 555

CHAPTER 15 DRAG RACE

This Chapter must be read in conjunction with Chapters 1 – 11 and the Drag Racing Yearbook.

1. General

1.1. Permits for Drag Race are issued at the sole discretion of the ASN and are dependent upon a valid Track Licence being in existence.

1.2. Except as provided by this Chapter Drag Race Events must comply with the relevant provisions of Chapters 1 – 11 and the Drag Racing Yearbook.

1.3. The Drag Racing Yearbook applies and may apply further limitations or requirements in addition to the following. The Drag Race Yearbook is NOT subject to the ASN stability regulations and amendments may be invoked as deemed necessary for the orderly conduct of the sport.

1.4. For any Technical or Safety criteria not provided for by these Specific Regulations the Official Documents must state the definitive source of reference.

1.5. Permits may be issued for a Drag Race or a Straightline Event which will be run in accordance with the Straightline Event Guidelines.

1.6. A Club will only be allowed to organise Events up to National status unless ASN has specifically approved an application for higher status.

1.7. If a Championship round is cancelled or changes its date due to reasons of safety or force majeure the Championship Organiser may arrange for an alternative Event or date for an Event to be included in their Championship calendar. Subject to Chapter 1 Art.1.4 only two such changes will be permitted during the duration of that particular Championship and the proposed amendment must be subject to ASN approval and will only be permitted if all registered Competitors have been advised and less than 15% (rounded up to the next whole number) of the Competitors registered for the Championship object to the change in writing. Competitors failing to respond within 4 weeks (28 days) from the date of the Organiser ’s written proposal to change being sent will be considered to agree to the change.

2. Officials and their duties 2.1. Unless stated hereafter Officials must comply with Chapter 5.

2.2. ASN Licensed Clerks of the Course, Timekeepers and Scrutineers appropriate to the grade of the Event must be appointed.

2.3. At all National and above Events there should be at least one licensed Deputy / Assistant Clerks of the Course in addition to the Clerk of the Course.

2.4. At all other Events it is recommended that there be at least one Deputy / Assistant Clerk of the Course in addition to the Clerk of the Course . Any Deputy Clerks must be licensed but Assistant Clerks need not necessarily be so.

2.5. The Race Director shall have the same responsibilities duties and powers of a Clerk of the Course and the same discretion in the general conduct and control of the Event and the application of penalties for any infringement by participant or Vehicle.

2.6. Subject to the prescriptions of the NCR the decision of the Race Director shall be final. 2.7. Whenever possible there shall be at least two Timekeepers at Events .

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 15 - Drag Race 556

Competitors

3. General 3.1. Unless stated hereafter Competitors must comply with Chapter 6 3.2. Participants shall be deemed to be any person within the meaning provided in Chapter 6 3.3. and Chapter 1 App.1.

3.4. The display of any identification, badge or pass will be deemed to identify the person concerned with the Entrant and will imply their acceptance of these Regulations.

3.5. Entrants and Drivers must ensure they have a Competition / Entrant Licence valid for the Event. 3.6. When signing on a valid Competition / Entrant Licence for Entrant and Driver must be produced. 3.7. For Drivers under the age of 18 years a PG Entrant Licence is required ( Chapter 6). 3.8. The Official Documents must state what qualification is required to drive a specific category of Vehicle.

3.9. Where a Driver is required to make an observed run prior to taking part in the Competition it is the Drivers’ responsibility to report this fact when signing on and await the instructions of the Race Director.

3.10. The Race Director may forbid a Driver to take part in the Competition for reasons of safety or any apparent deficiency in performance.

3.11. A Driver may not drive more than one Vehicle in any category at the same Event. Dual eliminator registration is prohibited subject to that permitted in the Drag Racing Book.

3.12. Any Driver deemed to have driven in a manner not compatible with general safety or whose behaviour or actions is prejudicial to the interests of the Organisers or motor sport generally may be immediately Disqualified from the Event ( Chapter 2 ).

4. Competition Licence and Upgrading 4.1. See Chapter 6 .

5. Vehicles 5.1. Unless stated hereafter Vehicles must comply with Chapter 7.

5.2. Trucks or Commercial Vehicles are prohibited to take part in Drag Races without the prior approval of ASN . Series Production Truck Vehicles of up to 1 ton payload are permitted.

5.3. Junior Dragsters may not be included in any Event without the prior approval of the ASN.

5.4. Classification shall be as prescribed in the specific Class regulations contained within the Official Documents.

5.5. Except for Straightline Events annual registration of Vehicles and Drivers with each Organising Club may be required as stipulated in the Drag Racing Yearbook .

5.6. Where Registration is required it must be submitted on the official Race Vehicle Registration form issued by each Organising Club. Forms which are amended incomplete or defaced are invalid.

5.7. Re-registration may be required for any change made to the classification of a Vehicle. 5.8. Vehicles may be given a permanent race number for the year.

5.9. Numbers must be displayed in accordance with the specific Class format; affixed in such a way to ensure their durability and legibility and be of sufficient contrast to their background. They shall be subject to the approval of the Chief Timekeeper.

5.10. The naming of a Vehicle will be subject to the approval of each Organising Club . Duplication of names will not be permitted.

5.11. Decals must be displayed as required by the Event or Organiser.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 15 - Drag Race 557

5.12. Vehicles must be in a clean and presentable condition throughout an Event. Personnel attending a competing Vehicle should be aware of the same considerations.

5.13. Competition Numbers must be covered or removed at all times whilst driving on the Public Highway .

6. Scrutineering 6.1. Vehicles must be presented for Scrutineering at the times specified in the Official Documents . 6.2. No Vehicle is permitted to take part in Practice or a Race without the approval of the Chief Scrutineer .

6.3. If after approval any Vehicle is dismantled or modified in a manner that may affect its safety or eligibility or it is involved in any incident which is likely to have a similar effect or any aerodynamic device is added or removed, it shall be represented for approval. The Entrant shall be responsible for seeking such fresh approval.

6.4. Any Vehicle involved in an incident which is unable to proceed shall not be touched by any person other than Officials without the specific approval of the Clerk of the Course . Furthermore, the Driver concerned may not drive again without the approval of the Chief Medical Officer of the Event.

6.5. Any Vehicle involved in an incident shall not be taken away from the Course without the prior authority of the Clerk of the Course.

6.6. The Race Director may require:

The eligibility of an Entrant, Driver or Vehicle to be checked at any time or prescribed place before or during the Event or afterwards subject to the Entrant being notified not later than half an hour after the publication of a valid provisional Result.

b. A Vehicle to be re-scrutineered at any time throughout the Event . c. A Vehicle to be dismantled to ensure it complies with the Regulations. d. An Entrant to supply such components and or samples as may be required. e. A Driver to be medically examined for reasons of safety. f. A Vehicle to Practice before its eligibility is verified.

7. Drivers

7.1. Throughout Practice and Competition , upon exiting from and until returning to the Paddock when the Driver is seated in the Vehicle they must wear clothing, helmet and goggles complying with Chapter 9 or where appropriate the specific Class regulations for Drag Races.

7.2. Overalls in accordance with GSR10.10 of the Drag Racing Yearbook are mandatory.

7.3. Competitors are required to wear flame-resistant gloves ( Ch.9 Art.12.6 ) or in accordance with GSR10.10 of the Drag Racing Yearbook standard.

7.4. An FIA approved FHR device fitted in accordance with FIA regulations is mandatory for all Classes where specified in the Drag Racing Yearbook.

7.5. All these items required by Arts.7.1–7.4 above must be produced for inspection and approval at scrutineering. 7.6. Only the Driver may be in a Vehicle during the Competition or Practice .

8. Pits Paddock and Track Fuel 8.1. The handling and storage of Fuel must comply with the law and local fire regulations. 8.2. The Official Documents shall specify the safe refuelling requirements at Art.16 below. 8.3. The fuelling and draining of Vehicles outside a designated fuelling area is forbidden. 8.4. The engine must be stopped during fuelling and the Driver must vacate the Vehicle. 8.5. The Vehicle must be clear of any Fuel handling or storage when starting the engine.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 15 - Drag Race 558

8.6. The Entrant must ensure that throughout fuelling a person will stand by the Vehicle with an adequate fire extinguisher.

8.7. Engine starting and Warm-ups: It is mandatory for a Driver or competent crew member to be seated in the normal driving position at any time the engine is running.

9. Medical and Rescue (see also Chapter 11)

9.1. Ambulance and Staff. The Organisers in conjunction with the Chief Medical Officer will ensure that during practice sessions and competition the following are in attendance:

Adequate first-aid staff (e.g. members of St. John Ambulance Association, British Red Cross Society or St. Andrew Ambulance Association).

Ambulances should be equipped with basic resuscitation equipment and if possible a Casualty Immobiliser for handling a patient over difficult terrain. These ambulances to be reserved for use in connection with casualties arising from the Competition.

It is important that the ambulance be so equipped that essential equipment does not have to be taken from any other Emergency Vehicle.

9.2. The minimum medical and rescue requirements (including Practice ) are:

a. One Doctor (or one ASN-Registered Paramedic and one ambulance. b.

The Rescue Unit and the Ambulance must be positioned to ensure unobstructed access to the Course as per the Track Licence.

There must be a second emergency vehicle equipped specifically for firefighting with the following minimum equipment:

i. 20lb (9kg) dry powder fire extinguishers. ii. fire-resistant blankets 6ft x 6ft (2m x 2m). 2 pairs fire-resistant / industrial gloves.

9.3. In an emergency the Chief Medical Officer may at their discretion designate as an ambulance any Vehicle they deem adequate for this purpose.

9.4. When public attendance is expected suitable arrangements must be made by the Organisers for dealing with the first-aid requirements of spectators not arising from the Event.

10. Starting 10.1. The Official Documents will specify:

a. The starting Signal. b. The method of timing. c. When timing commences. 10.2. Vehicles shall be started from a standing start with the engine running.

10.3. No Vehicle shall be started whilst there is an obstruction in its path either on the course or in the braking area after the finish.

10.4. The finish line will be clearly indicated. 10.5. The number of Vehicles on a Track at any one time is that permitted by the Track Licence.

10.6. The starting order will be in classes as determined by the Organisers unless the Official Documents specify otherwise.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 15 - Drag Race 559

10.7. Drivers will be under Starter ’s Orders when instructed by the Official Starter to ‘stage’ in accordance with ‘Staging’ procedure and requirements set out in the Drag Racing Yearbook.

10.8. After crossing the finishing line, competitors must slow down as appropriate and proceed as instructed.

11. Qualification

11.1. Except for Straightline Events a new Driver who has not previously held a Competition Licence will be subject to a cockpit orientation (blindfold) test.

11.2. A Driver may be required to make runs under observation at any time.

12. Paddock and Track Regulations

12.1. The spinning of wheels (tyre warming) will only be permitted in a designated area which should be clearly defined.

12.2. Refuelling and work on the Vehicles, other than by a Driver or Officials can only be carried out in the Paddock unless the Clerk of the Course specifically authorises otherwise.

12.3. The crew is limited to the number as stipulated in the class regulations within the Drag Racing Yearbook in addition to the Driver and Officials allowed in attendance on each Vehicle in the identified starting area.

12.4. Except while on the Track no competing Vehicle shall be driven at a speed exceeding 10 mph without the specific permission of the Clerk of the Course.

13. Penalties

13.1. Any specific penalties mentioned in these regulations do not preclude the imposition of additional penalties as deemed appropriate.

14. Instructions and Communications to Competitors 14.1. Any additional instructions published will be an Official Document of the Event under these Regulations.

15. Race Procedures 15.1. In accordance with the requirements of the Official Documents of the Event .

16. Refuelling

16.1. Refuelling and work upon the cars other than by a Driver or Officials may only be carried out at the pits or in the Paddock .

16.2. The Driver shall vacate the Vehicle and the engine be stopped throughout any refuelling operation.

16.3. The Entrant shall ensure that throughout refuelling one person shall stand by the Vehicle with a fire extinguisher at the ready.

16.4. Storage of Fuel is only permitted in containers having a screw or other approved safety cap and complying with the Law and local Fire Regulations.

16.5. If any Fuel is stored in a pit the Entrant of the Vehicle using that pit shall ensure that an effective fire extinguisher is kept adjacent to such Fuel.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 15 - Drag Race 560

Chapter 16 Autocross and Rallycross

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 16 - Autocross and Rallycross 561

CHAPTER 16 AUTOCROSS AND RALLYCROSS

1.1. This Chapter must be read in conjunction with Chapters 1 – 11. 1.2. This Chapter is split into PART A (Autocross) and PART B (Rallycross) and PART C (Off-Road Racing ) 1.3. The following Appendices comprise PART A (Autocross and Clubcross) App.1 App.2 App.3 App.4 App.5

Organisers Regulations Medical and Rescue Requirements Results Competitors Regulations Technical Regulations for Autocross and Clubcross

1.4. The following Appendices comprise PART B (Rallycross) App.6 App.7 App.8 App.9 App.10 App.11

Organisers Regulations Medical and Rescue Requirements Competitors Regulations Technical Regulations Rallycross Spaceframe Technical Regulations Spaceframe Drawings

1.5. The following Appendix comprise PART C (Off-Road Racing) App.12

Off-Road Racing Specific Regulations

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 16 - Autocross and Rallycross 562

CHAPTER 16 AUTOCROSS AND RALLYCROSS AND OFF-ROAD RACING PART A (AUTOCROSS AND CLUBCROSS) Appendix 1 - Organisers Regulations

1. General

1.1. Permits for Autocross and Clubcross Events are issued at the sole discretion of the ASN and are subject to prior approval of the Track details.

1.2. A Club will only be allowed to organise an Autocross Event of up to Interclub status unless the ASN has specifically approved an application for higher status.

1.3. A Club will only be allowed to organise a Clubcross Event if in possession of a Clubman grade Permit.

2. Track Criteria

2.1. The requirement for a Track Licence will be waived, subject to approval of the Track Plan for the proposed Course .

2.2. The Track Plan must be submitted to the ASN for approval with the Permit application and must be on a sheet A4 scale or larger. It must include:

a. Name of the Organising Club , date of Event and name of Venue . b. Length of Course (per lap). c. Length of longest straight. d. Position of the Start / Finish Line and direction of travel. e. Minimum width of Course . f. Position of paddock and spectator Enclosures and their distances from the Course . g. Type of fencing surrounding Enclosures (a post and rope fence is the minimum Permitted ). h. Position and type of protective barriers. i. Distance from the Course to all boundary lines. j. Types of boundaries (ie hedge, fence, wire; if wire: mesh, plain or barbed). k. Type of Course markers. l. Number of Judges required to ensure that all Course markers can be overseen by a Judge . m. Siting of Timekeeper , Flag Marshals , fire, emergency and first aid equipment and ambulance. n. Number of Vehicles proposed to start consecutively ( see Art.6 below ).

3. Course Layout

3.1. The Course should not include any straight exceeding 200m long, and all straights must be followed by a corner of at least 90°, off-setting the Course from its original line by at least twice the width of the Track .

3.2. The Start Line should be not less than 100m from the first corner.

3.3. The Finish Line should be situated so as not to allow competing Vehicles to be driven in a straight line from the Course to the paddock. Bales must protect the spectator and paddock areas where the entrance to the paddock is less than 30m from spectator Enclosures .

3.4. The paddock and any spectator Enclosures should not be less than 30m from the Course where there is no barrier designed to halt a competing Vehicle travelling between these Enclosures and the Course.

Where there is a barrier, the distance should not be less than 25m all the way round corners, and 20m alongside straights.

The minimum acceptable barrier will be two rows of straw bales or equivalent, placed approximately half way between the Course and the Enclosures .

The rows of bales must be approximately 3m apart and if each row is not continuous, any gaps must not exceed the length of a bale.

3.5. Any Vehicles parked in an Enclosure must be at least 10m from the front of the Enclosure .

3.6. Any natural hazards, such as trees, ditches and fences must not be less than 20m from the Course or in the case of any strand or barbed wire fence not less than 30m from the Course (though where hazards on the inside of the Course are protected by straw bales or the equivalent a 10m clearance from the Track is sufficient).

3.7. Straw bales must not be used as Course markers. 3.8. Clubcross Courses must comply with Arts.3.2–3.8 of this Chapter and the following:

a. The maximum length must not exceed 800 metres. b.

The maximum length of any straight must not exceed 100m and all straights must be followed by a corner of at least 90° off setting the Course from its original line by at least twice the width of the Course .

4. Organisation 4.1. The Course must be defined by penalty markers placed on both sides of the Track .

4.2. The number of penalty markers must be kept to the minimum necessary to ensure that Vehicles keep to the Course .

4.3. All penalty markers must be supervised by a Judge of Fact who must be in a safe location.

4.4. Other markers can also be used to show the outline of the Course but the penalty markers must be at least twice the height and of a different colour to any other markers.

4.5. There must be an adequate supply of spare markers and sufficient Officials to ensure that any marker that is displaced is immediately reinstated.

4.6. The Course must not be changed once practice has commenced except as instructed by Stewards to improve safety.

4.7. Any such change should be made at an appropriate time when all Competitors will have an equal number of runs on the modified Course .

4.8. Competitors must be informed of any such change and given the opportunity to inspect and comment upon the modifications.

4.9. Only a visual communication system is mandatory.

4.10. At each corner of the Course , there should be at least one Flag Marshal as well as one Fire Marshal with an extinguisher to cope with a petrol or electrical fire.

4.11. In the paddock at least one 9kg dry powder or equivalent extinguisher, one fire-resistant blanket and a pair of flame-resistant gloves should be available.

4.12. A Small Spill Kit must be available in the paddock area. 4.13. Only red flags will be issued to Marshals for signalling purposes. 4.14. If a heat is stopped by a red Signal it must be re-run. 4.15. Any Vehicle which had not started or which had retired from that heat may not take part in the rerun.

4.16. The appropriate local hospital authorities must be notified of the date and time of an Event , including Practice .

4.17. ASN Timekeepers and Scrutineers appropriate to the grade of the Event must be appointed.

4.18. It is strongly recommended that a breakdown vehicle capable of lifting at least two wheels of a competing Vehicle off the ground is in attendance.

4.19. Clubcross Events must not be timed to less than one second.

4.19.1. Timing should be by handheld watches and the appointment of an ASN-licensed Timekeeper is recommended.

5. Practice and Starts

5.1. All Competitors must be allowed three practice laps except where they are required to walk the Course before competitive runs begin (or are allowed to drive over it at non-competitive speeds) when only two practice laps will be allowed.

5.2. The Official Documents must specify the starting Signal , the method of timing and when timing commences.

5.3. Vehicles will be started in groups from a standing start with engines running. 5.4. The Finish Line must be clearly indicated.

5.5. All Clubcross Competitors will be given the opportunity to walk the Course prior to competing but no practice runs will be allowed, with all runs counting towards the Competition .

6. Number of Starters

6.1. If the Course is less than 10m wide a maximum of two Vehicles can be started consecutively. The second Vehicle is started when the first has a lead of not less than 200m (or one-third of a lap, whichever is the lesser).

6.2. If the Course is less than 10m wide but over 600m long three Vehicles can run consecutively so long as they are started not less than 200m apart.

6.3. If the Course is less than 10m wide at any point but over 600m long two Vehicles can be started simultaneously and a second pair started when the slower Vehicle of the first pair is at least 300m from the Start Line .

6.4. If the Course is not less than 14m wide at any point and over 1200m long two Vehicles can be started simultaneously and a second pair started when the slower Vehicle of the first pair is at least 300m from the Start Line . A third pair can be started when the slower Vehicle of the second pair is at least 200m from the Start Line .

6.5. If the Course is not less than 15m wide at any point and over 600m long then a maximum of four Vehicles may be started simultaneously unless specific approval has first been given by the ASN .

6.6. The starting of Vehicles consecutively at 200m intervals is subject to there being reasonable visibility. Where visibility may be impaired Vehicles should be started at greater intervals or singly so that there is no possibility of overtaking.

6.7. In the interests of accurate timekeeping, and because of the difficulty of correctly lining up vehicles on a soft surface vehicle-actuated starts are not permitted on non-metalled surfaces.

6.8. Only one Vehicle may run at a time in Clubcross Events .

7. Team Relays

7.1. In Autocross relay Events where Vehicles of more than one team are on the Course all Vehicles other than the first to start must be located in a safe position on the inside of the Course with their Drivers aboard.

7.2. Any Vehicle finishing except the last Vehicle of a team must do so by crossing a special line adjacent to but outside the Course proper. The Vehicle must then stop at a specified location and the Driver remain aboard until instructed by an Official to remove the Vehicle to the Paddock .

7.3. As soon as the front wheels of a finishing Vehicle cross this special line an Official will indicate with a green flag that the next team Vehicle can proceed. All Drivers joining the Course must do so with due regard to other Competitors already on the Course .

8. Awards

8.1. The maximum value of awards or benefits accrued to any Competitor in an Event must not exceed the following:

a. Clubman and Interclub : £250 b. National and International: No limit.

9. Scrutineering

9.1. No Vehicle may be driven in the Event until it has been approved by an ASN-Licensed Scrutineer at the Event .

9.2. If after approval any Vehicle is dismantled or modified or is involved in an incident in a way which may affect its safety or eligibility or any aerodynamic device is added or removed it must be represented for approval. The Entrant is responsible for seeking fresh approval.

9.3. Any Vehicle involved in an incident from which it is unable to proceed must not be touched by anybody other than Officials without the specific approval of the Clerk of the Course . The Driver concerned may not drive again without the approval of the Medical Officer in Charge.

9.4. Clubcross Vehicles must be scrutineered for basic safety preferably by an ASN-licensed Scrutineer.

CHAPTER 16 AUTOCROSS AND RALLYCROSS AND OFF-ROAD RACING PART A (AUTOCROSS AND CLUBCROSS) Appendix 2 - Medical and Rescue Requirements

1.1. This Appendix should be read in conjunction with Chapter 11 Emergency and Medical Services .

1.2. The minimum course requirements are for one Doctor or ASN-registered Paramedic and one ambulance to be in attendance.

1.3. Ambulances should be equipped with basic resuscitation equipment and if possible a Casualty Immobiliser for handling patients over difficult terrain. This essential equipment should not have to be taken from any rescue vehicles which must remain at all times fully operational on the Course .

1.3.1 The ambulances must only be used in connection with casualties arising from the Competition.

1.4. The Organisers in conjunction with the Chief Medical Officer of the Event must ensure that during both Practice sessions and Competition adequate first-aid staff are in attendance (eg St John’s or St Andrew Ambulance, Red Cross etc).

1.5. Clerks of the Course must have under their control either a licensed Rescue Vehicle or at least one emergency vehicle equipped with the following:

a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

Bolt cutters Pipe cutters capable of severing chassis tubes Tin snips Hacksaws complete with a quantity of blades Pad saw complete with a quantity of blades Spanners Fire-resistant blanket h. Industrial gloves.

CHAPTER 16 AUTOCROSS AND RALLYCROSS AND OFF-ROAD RACING PART A (AUTOCROSS AND CLUBCROSS) Appendix 3 - Results

1. Results – Autocross 1.1. To be classified as a finisher in a Competition a Competitor must complete at least one timed run.

1.2. Each Driver will be given two runs in the same Vehicle in each Class entered the faster run to count unless the Official Documents specify otherwise.

1.3. The Competitor who completes the Course fastest will be judged the winner.

1.4. Only an equal number of runs for all Competitors in the same Class will be counted. In the event of a tie between two or more Competitors the results of the next fastest run recorded by the Competitors concerned will be compared and so on.

1.5. If through their own error Drivers fail to record a time they are not entitled to a re-run.

1.6. In other circumstances (eg baulking) a re-run may be granted by the Clerk of the Course who may order that any penalties incurred in the initial run are applied to the re-run.

1.7. A Competitor ’s time will be valid only if:

All four wheels of the Vehicle are on the Course when it crosses the Finish Line

a. b.

The run is made in the correct period for the appropriate Class and no more than the appropriate number of timed runs has been made

The Competitor has correctly complied with any starting Signal d. The Vehicle completes the correct Course without outside assistance.

1.8. Where the boundaries of a Course are defined by penalty markers (see App.1 Arts.4.1–4.5 to this Chapter ), the following penalties will apply:

If a Vehicle strikes a penalty marker five seconds is added to the Vehicle’s time for each marker touched

If all four wheels of a Vehicle cross a straight line between any two markers no time is recorded and in addition the Vehicle must stop and not proceed until instructed to do so by an Official. Failure to stop may be deemed as driving in a manner incompatible with general safety (a breach of Chapter 2 App.1 Art.1.13 ).

2. Results – Clubcross

2.1. Competitors will be given the opportunity of a minimum of two runs the aggregate time of which will count for the results.

2.2. If more than two runs are permitted the worst time will be ignored and the aggregate of the remaining runs will count for the results.

2.3. The maximum number of runs must not exceed six.

2.4. All Competitors must have the opportunity to complete the same number of runs to count towards the results.

CHAPTER 16 AUTOCROSS AND RALLYCROSS AND OFF-ROAD RACING PART A (AUTOCROSS AND CLUBCROSS) Appendix 4 - Competitors Regulations

1. General

1.1. * Vehicles must be presented for scrutineering and Practice at the times specified in the Official Documents with any previous Scrutineering Labels removed.

1.2. Classes must be specified in the Official Documents .

1.3. Any Competitor not reporting as instructed may be fined, Disqualified or may forfeit any claim to a favourable starting position.

1.4. Vehicles being used must comply as follows:

a. In Autocross with Technical Regulations Arts.1–12.3 of App.5 to this Chapter. b. In Clubcross with Art.17.4 of App.5 to this Chapter. c. In Junior Autocross with Arts.1–7.6 and 17.5 of App.5 to this Chapter.

2. Signing On

2.1. When signing on a Competition Licence valid for the Event must be produced (see Annex A Chart 2 Chapter 6 ).

2.2. For Competitors under the age of 18 years a PG Entrant Licence is required Chapter 6 App.3 Art.2.13 applies.

2.3. Competitors must declare on their entry forms whether or not they have ever held a valid RTA licence.

2.4. Competitors aged 16 and above who have never held a valid RTA Licence must produce proof of having competed as a Driver in three Minicross or Clubcross Events or three other ASN-Permitted Events (such as Kart Racing, Autotests, Production Car Trials, etc), or show proof of having completed an approved driving course at a Race or Rally School recognised by the ASN .

2.5. Competitors having reached the year of their 14th birthday and above can compete in Minicross (grid size to be a maximum of four Vehicles ) and Clubcross . In the case of Minicross new Competitors will have to drive observed laps prior to Practice . In the case of Clubcross they must drive observed laps prior to the Competition in order to satisfy the Clerk of the Course that they are competent to take part. Observed laps are not required if the Competitor can provide the Clerk of the Course with proof of having competed as a Driver in three other ASN-Permitted Events.

2.6. Competitors having reached the year of their 14th birthday and above may compete in Junior Autocross and may continue until the end of the year of their 17th birthday.

2.7. Grid size to be a maximum of four Vehicles . and may not include any Class other than Juniors.

2.8. New Competitors will have to drive observed laps prior to the Competition in order to satisfy the Clerk of the Course that they are competent to take part, subject to the following:

a. Vehicles will start singly and run over three laps. b. No Passengers are permitted in the Vehicle. c.

Observed laps are not required if the Competitor can provide the Clerk of the Course with proof of having competed as a Driver in three other ASN Permitted Events.

3. Drivers

3.1. The following items must be produced by Drivers for inspection and approval at Scrutineering and be worn throughout the Competition, properly fastened and positioned:

A crash helmet meeting all current regulations, which fits properly, is in a serviceable condition and bears an ASN approval sticker ( Chapter 9 Arts.5 –7.8 ).

b. Goggles or visor of splinter proof material (unless in a closed car with a full-size windscreen). c.

Flame-resistant overalls covering arms, legs and torso up to the neck. The use of a flame-resistant balaclava, socks, shoes and underwear is strongly recommended ( Chapter 9 Arts.3 –4 ).

Complete gloves (not mitts or gloves with open backs). The use of flame-resistant gloves is strongly recommended.

e. An FIA approved FHR device, fitted in accordance with FIA regulations, is recommended.

3.2. In Autocross and Clubcross events, the same Vehicle may compete for the same award, however it must be driven by different Drivers.

3.3. Vehicles will be identified by Competition Numbers allocated by the Organisers and displayed as specified in the Technical Regulations ( Ch.7 App.10 ). The colour may be varied for different categories.

4. Licence Upgrading Criteria 4.1. Autocross : See Annex A Chart 2 Chapter 6

CHAPTER 16 AUTOCROSS AND RALLYCROSS AND OFF-ROAD RACING PART A (AUTOCROSS AND CLUBCROSS) Appendix 5 - Technical Regulations

1. General 1.1. Racing Cars are prohibited.

2. Body 2.1. If one bumper is removed then both must be along with all supports. 2.2. Reinforcing the front apron is not permitted. 2.3. Any undertray must be provided with drainage holes to prevent accumulation of liquids.

3. Wheels

3.1. At the start of each heat or race, Vehicles must be fitted with mudflaps behind all four wheels extending to a minimum of 38mm either side of the tyre tread and to a maximum of 76mm above the ground.

3.2. All nuts securing roadwheels (except centre-lock types) must be made of steel and in thread contact over a minimum length of 1

bolt / stud diameters.

1 ⁄ 2

3.3. Extended or composite wheel bolts/studs are prohibited. 3.4. The use of safety wheel nuts, to prevent wheels pulling over standard nuts, is strongly recommended.

4. Oil Systems

4.1. Any oil tank located outside the chassis or main structure of a Vehicle must be covered with a protective coating (eg GRP)

5. Fuel Systems

5.1. These should be equipped with an effective method of stopping fuel supply which can be operated by the Driver when seated normally with seat belt secured.

6. Electrical Systems

6.1. Vehicles should be equipped with an ignition cut-off switch having a clearly marked and positive ON–OFF position which can be operated by the Driver when normally seated with seat belt secured. It must also isolate electric fuel pumps.

6.2. Any forward-facing lamps of more than 32 sq cm surface area must be adequately protected against glass breakage.

7. Safety

7.1. Closed Vehicles must have a means of access on either side of the Passenger compartment which can be operated from inside or outside. Access must be sufficient to remove an occupant without interference from any door locking devices.

7.2. They must have an operating windscreen wiper and washer system.

7.3. The following parts of Chapter 7 remain unmodified: Chassis , Seating, Suspension, Steering, Cooling, Weight / Ballast, Exhausts, Protecting Bulkheads.

7.4. Any single seat Special and non-centre seated Production based Vehicle without windows must be fitted with either arm restraints to SFI standard 3.3 or on the driver ’s side (both sides for a single seat Special ) one-piece protection net(s) affixed securely on the inside of the safety cage using a quick release system situated on the upper part.

a. The use of "clip" fixings is recommended. b.

The fixings of the net on the lower part must not be removable without the use of tools. These nets must be to SFI standard 27.1 or have the following characteristics:

• Minimum width of the strips: 19 mm

• Minimum size of the meshes: 25 x 25 mm

• Maximum size of the meshes: 60 x 60 mm

and when viewed from the side must reach from the centre of the steering wheel to the rearmost point of the seat on the side concerned and must protect the window opening to the centre of the steering wheel.

8. Miscellaneous

8.1. Vehicles must be fitted with at least one mirror of minimum surface area 50 sq cm securely mounted to give a clear view to the rear. The edges of the mirror must be protected by a suitable cover to help prevent injury in event of an accident.

8.2. Where advertising is allowed on windscreens this must not obscure the Driver ’s vision nor reduce the minimum unobstructed vertical height to less than 250mm.

8.3. Vehicles must be presented at Scrutineering with all steering mechanisms, suspension linkages and flexible brake lines in a clean condition.

8.4. Four-wheel steering is permitted unless the Official Documents state to the contrary.

9. Autocross Vehicles

9.1. Categories and Classes are free but must be stated in the Official Documents . The following Classes are recommended and where used must comply with Arts.9.2–12.9 below . Capacity splits must be specified in the Official Documents

a. b. c. d.

Economy – “standard” production saloon cars Rally Vehicles All other Vehicles based on production Vehicles Specials and all four-wheel drive Vehicles

9.2. Vehicles which have never been homologated but which comply with App.16 Art.2.2 and App.16 Art.2.3 are eligible for Class B.

9.3. Category 1. Those that have been homologated in Groups ‘A’ or ‘N’ of the FIA Appendix ‘J’, or Groups 1, 2, 3 or 4 of the 1981 FIA Appendix ‘J’, Non homologated Series Production Cars or Specialist Rally Cars

b. Modifications are free within the ASN Vehicle Regulations. c.

The Vehicle must be in the configuration as supplied by the manufacturer, with the engine (any Series Production Car Engine or Specialist Competition Engine ) in the original location.

d. Vehicles must retain the original number of and location of driven wheels, Front Wheel Drive (FWD), Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) or Four Wheel Drive (4WD), except where a 4WD Vehicle other than a Specialist Rally Car is converted to Two Wheel Drive (2WD) without structural alteration.

9.4. Category 2. Any Vehicle not complying with Arts.9.3.a – d above that may be authorised for use at the discretion of the ASN including Vehicles homologated and remaining fully compliant with FIA R/GT regulations.

Such authorisation will only be granted for Vehicles which retain the original manufacturer ’s Chassis / bodywork / unitary construction.

Substitution by a space frame Chassis will not be accepted.

Original manufacturer's bodywork must be utilised.

Any modifications homologated by the FIA may be incorporated.

Replica copies of manufacturers homologated body parts / aerodynamic devices will not be accepted.

Manufacturers of very low volume numbers of Vehicles will be able to apply for baseline specification registration prior to sale to individual customers.

The conversion of front wheel drive Vehicles to rear wheel drive (or four wheel drive) or of rear wheel drive Vehicles to four wheel drive is permitted subject to the bodyshell construction alterations from the bulkhead rearwards being limited to those detailed in FIA Art.279.10.3.10 and shown in FIA Appendix J Drawings 279-1 and 279-2. Additionally where rear wheel drive Vehicles are converted to four wheel drive the bodyshell forward of the front bulkhead may be modified solely to allow fitment of front driveshafts.

All materials added must be ferrous and must also be welded to the Chassis / bodywork / unitary construction.

i. Doors and windscreen must remain in the manufacturer's original material. j. Cars must be fitted with an engine in compliance with Arts.9.4.k – t below. k. Production Car Engines: i.

Petrol engines with a maximum of six cylinders, forced induction up to 2000cc with a 34mm restrictor or up to 2500cc with a 32mm restrictor, and diesel engines with forced induction up to 2500cc with a 37mm restrictor. Naturally aspirated with a maximum of six cylinders, and more than 2 valves per cylinder – up to 3000cc. Naturally aspirated with a maximum of six cylinders, and a maximum of 2 valves per cylinder – up to 3500cc Rover V8 pushrod engines up to 4000cc, utilising the original Rover head castings, and limited to either a maximum of 4 carburettor chokes or a single throttle body and the original plenum chamber. l.

ii.

iii.

iv.

Metro 6R4 2500cc and 2800cc ( Single Plenum) engines complying with MSA Specification, exclusive to 6R4s.

m. Specialist Competition Engines: i. Naturally aspirated. ii. No more than four cylinders. iii. No more than four valves per cylinder. iv. Maximum capacity of 2,500cc. n. Production Car Engines with a maximum of 2 rotors.

i. Rotary engine equivalence 1.7. Forced induction rotary engines equivalence (1.7. x 1.7.) = 2.89. ii.

Rotary engines will be considered equivalent to 4 valves per cylinder petrol engines in respect of the maximum engine capacity including the application of equivalency factor (a) above.

Forced Induction engines must be fitted with a restrictor at a maximum of 50mm from the extremes of the compressor blades. The restrictor orifice to be to the dimensions currently in force in FIA Appendix ‘J’. Where there are two forms of forced induction fitted, the restrictor must not exceed the appropriate FIA Appendix ‘J’ dimensions. Provision must be made for fitting seals to the unit(s). A fee if £3.00 is payable for the sealing of turbo chargers.

p. With the exception of cars accepted under Art.9.4.a - j a Vehicle may be fitted with a different engine, not exceeding 25% increase of the capacity of the model, when it was supplied as original equipment by its manufacturer. q.

The engine capacity of FIA R/GT cars complying with this Art.9.4.a - j shall be limited to the current FIA Regulations .

Engine Oil Systems – Unless equipped with a closed loop system, a Catch tank of at least a one litre capacity to be incorporated in the oil breather system.

s. If forced induction is used the turbo / super charger must comply with Art.9.4.o above. t.

The Vehicle may not be used in competition until the Competition Car Log Book / Vehicle Passport has been validated by the ASN and returned to the Vehicle owner.

9.5. Except for Classes A and B modifications are free within Vehicle Regulations. 9.6. Class A Vehicles must comply with the following requirements:

The complete body shell, doors, boot or tailgate must be in production material, with no modification or lightening. Windscreens must comply with Art.14.5–14.10 below.

b. No torque biasing, locked differentials or traction control devices are permitted. c.

Interior trim and lights may be removed but standard dashboards must be retained. Additional instruments may be fitted.

All seats apart from the Driver ’s may be removed but the specification of the Driver ’s seat may be changed.

Wheel sizes are free.

Wheel spacers are not permitted.

Suspension operation must be as manufacturer ’s specification.

No four-wheel drive system is permitted.

The engine block (which may be bored out) must be standard for the model of Vehicle with standard inlet and exhaust manifold. There can be a maximum of two chokes unless the Vehicle is fitted as standard with more than two chokes. Fuel injection is permitted if standard on the model.

j. A roll-over bar or roll cage may be fitted. k.

The manufacturer‘s original gearbox and axle with all internals as originally supplied for that model of Vehicle must be retained and in their original positions.

Vehicles need not be taxed or insured 9.7. Class B requirements are detailed in Art.9.8 below.

9.8. Road Rally Cars must be taxed and comply with Arts.10 –15.4 Stage Rally Cars must comply with Art.9.3 and Art.9.4 and Art.16 Stage cars need not be taxed but for either a Road or Stage Rally Car , a current MoT, where appropriate, must be produced if applicable. Any forward-facing lights must comply with Art.6.2 . Tyres must comply with Art.21.

10. Road Rally Cars

10.1. The Vehicle must be currently registered and taxed as a Private Car and comply with all statutory regulations as to the Construction and Use regulations (especially regarding brakes lighting tyres warning devices rear view mirrors silencers speedometers wings and windscreens).

10.2. In this section the term MODEL refers to all variants of the same family of cars. In addition to complying with Chapter 7 ( Competitors Vehicles and Vehicle Safety Equipment ) and to the extent relevant Chapter 8 (Fuel and Tyres and Testing ). All Vehicles competing in Road Rallies must comply with the appropriate part of the following:

11. Body

11.1. Bodywork must represent the manufacturer ’s original profile and may include any optional extras available directly from the manufacturer.

11.2. Bumpers must be fitted. 11.3. Paintwork must be one colour or manufacturer ’s original colour scheme. No primer is to be visible.

11.4. Vehicles must not have wheel arch extensions unless fitted by the manufacturer as a standard item to the body shape.

11.5. All major internal trim as fitted to the body type by its original manufacturer when offering it for sale must be retained. Major internal trim includes headlining, inside door panels (which may be replaced with representative material) for all doors and / or rear side panels alongside the rear seat (for a 2 door car), carpets and rear seats. It does not include parcel shelves, boot carpet or boot side trims.

11.6. Front seats may be improved or replaced. 11.7. The trim including the rear seat may be cut to allow the fitting of a safety cage.

11.8. If equipped with a non-standard fuel tank it must be separated from the Driver / Passenger compartment by a protective bulkhead of non-flammable material preventing the passage of fluid or flame.

11.9. Full harness seat belts may be fitted. 11.10. Guards may be fitted beneath the vehicle to provide protection from damage.

12. Engines and Transmissions 12.1. Vehicle engines must have:

a. A maximum of four cylinders. b. A maximum of two carburettor chokes (two single or one double). c. A maximum of one camshaft per bank of cylinders.

12.2. Engines with more than one camshaft per bank of cylinders may be used providing that:

a. Any replacement engine comprises a block and cylinder head from the same engine family. b. c. they were originally fitted with fuel injection and

that the fuel injection system complete with inlet manifold and throttle body is retained unmodified except as permitted in Art.12.3.c below.

12.3. In respect of Art.12.3.b above it is permitted to make the following modifications to effect installation:

a. Alternative engine mountings, sump pan and exhaust manifolds. b. Relocation of ancillaries such as alternators and steering pumps. c. To change the orientation of the otherwise unmodified inlet manifold.

12.4. For diesel and petrol engines under 1500cc actual capacity forced induction is permitted providing that the complete original induction system is retained unmodified other than the replacement of the air filter element.

12.5. Fuel injection may be fitted where it was standard equipment by the manufacturer for that engine type and where the original plenum chamber and throttle body is retained for that engine type.

12.6. A standard Wankel unit will be considered as three cylinders. Twin Wankel units are prohibited.

12.7. Engines must comply with the silencing Noise levels and have induction air filter elements fitted that ensure the vehicle complies with noise regulations.

12.8. Only H shift pattern manual transmissions are permitted. The gear lever must remain the only means of changing gear unless an alternative method was originally fitted by the vehicle manufacturer as standard. Automatic transmissions are permitted provided that they are in their original configuration as fitted by the manufacturer to that specific Vehicle model.

12.9. The number and location of the driven wheels must remain as original to the model of Vehicle.

13. Wheels and Tyres 13.1. Wheels and tyre sizes are free but must fit within the standard unmodified wheel arch. 13.2. Vehicles must be fitted with tyres that are always legal for use on the Public Highway. 13.3. Tyres must comply with Chapter 8 App.4 Arts.2–3 .

13.4. Vehicles must have all spare wheels securely fastened in position and must not be fitted with spiked or studded tyres or any non-skid attachments, other than chains if permitted by the Official Documents .

14. Electrical Systems

14.1. Vehicles must have a maximum of four forward facing beams as well as side and indicator lights, unless further restrictions are specified in the Official Documents.

14.2. Light pods are not permitted. 14.3. A headlamp must provide the main beam and dipped beam functions.

14.4. An auxiliary lamp provides a beam other than that provided by the headlamp. With the exception of Vehicles built before 31st December 1946 the maximum width of the lamp body of any auxiliary lamp must not exceed 222mm.

14.5. A headlamp may consist of a single reflector with a dual filament bulb, or separate reflectors each with single filament bulbs providing the functions of main beam and dipped beam separately. This will be considered as equivalent to a single dual filament headlamp unit. Lamp units comprising two reflectors where one is fitted with a dual filament bulb will be considered as a combined headlamp and auxiliary lamp. In this instance therefore no additional auxiliary lamps may be fitted.

14.6. Auxiliary lamps unless fitted as standard equipment using gas discharge or LED technology are not permitted and gas discharge or LED headlamp units may not be retro fitted.

14.7. Auxiliary lights must not be used in neutral sections except in poor visibility as permitted by law.

14.8. Where more than four beams are fitted as standard, only four may be used and the remainder must be rendered unusable for the duration of the event.

14.9. Vehicles must have all lights fitted and used according to motor vehicle lighting regulations. 14.10. External navigational or Marshal lights are not permitted.

14.11. For Events taking place wholly between half an hour before sunrise and half an hour after sunset Arts.14.1 , 14.8 and 14.10 do not apply.

15. Miscellaneous

15.1. Vehicles may not use racing style numbers, nor have any advertising except for event sponsor decals which must be incorporated within the rally plate.

15.2. They should be equipped with an effective method of stopping fuel supply, operable by the Driver when normally seated (the ignition switch would normally cover this requirement) and must use Permitted Fuel as defined in Chapter 1 App.1.

15.3. Brakes are free but must comply with Construction and Use Regulations. A hydraulic handbrake is permitted where a functioning mechanical system is also present. The hydraulic handbrake lever shall operate in an arc not exceeding 50 degrees from the horizontal.

15.4. Vehicles must display registration plates in compliance with the current Road Vehicles (Display of Registration Marks) Regulations

16. Stage Rally Cars 16.1. Stage Rally Cars must comply with Arts.9.3–9.4 and the following:

16.2. Stage Rally Cars with a CCLB / VP issued before 1st January 2009, and which complied with H265 or H266 of the 2008 regulations, must comply with Arts.16.2.a – p. below from 1st January 2012. CCLBs / VPs for these vehicles remain valid until such time as the vehicle requires a full re-inspection following rebuilding, but may be returned to Motorsport UK for updating ownership, colour and other minor details:

All cars must comply with Chapter 7 of these regulations, and all statutory regulations concerning the construction and use of vehicles. In addition Vehicles must:

Be currently registered and taxed as a private car, unless specific event regulations relax the requirement for taxation, by virtue of the entire event taking place wholly on private property.

Have registration documents and, where a car is required by law to have a certificate, a valid MOT Certificate where appropriate. These documents must be produced at scrutineering for all events, irrespective of whether or not part of the event takes place on the Public Highway .

Have a valid ASN Competition Car Log Book/Vehicle Passport that must be produced at scrutineering ( Chapter 7 App.1 and App.12 ).

Display registration plates in compliance with the current Road Vehicles (Display of Registration Marks) Regulations .

f. All Vehicles must carry a small spill kit complying with Chapter 7 App.2 Art.22.15. g.

Have a bulkhead between any fuel tank and filler and driver/passenger compartment sufficient to prevent the passage of flame or liquid. Where a fuel tank constitutes part of a bulkhead between passenger and luggage compartment, an additional bulkhead must be fitted. Additional fuel tank protection may be required.

Glass sunroofs are not permitted. Sunroofs may be of a non-shattering solid rigid material other than glass. Any sunroof must be firmly secured in the closed position. The sunroof aperture may be closed by solid material permanently fitted in place.

i. Windscreens to be of laminated type only. j.

Where advertising is allowed on windscreens it must not obscure the driver ’s vision nor cover more than one third of the depth of the visual area of the windscreen.

Towing eyes of adequate strength and size must be fitted to, or carried for fitting to, the front and rear of the vehicle. They must be painted a distinctive and contrasting colour

Not be fitted with spiked or studded tyres or any non-skid attachments, other than chains if permitted in the Official Documents .

Braking systems may be modified including fitment of uprated components, conversion of drum brakes to disc brakes and use of alternative friction materials. o.

If the filler cap is of the quick release type or where the vehicle has been fitted with a non-standard filler, be fitted with a recessed fuel filler cap.

p. There are restrictions concerning the use of auxilary lights which are detailed in the sporting regulations.

16.3. Have, as a minimum, a ROPS complying with Chapter 7 App.3, Chapter 7 App.13 Diagram 14 or 15 and longitudinal door bars complying with Chapter 7 App.3 Art.12 (side sections Chapter 7 App.13 Diagram 18 ). For Vehicles not issued with a Vehicle Passport or Competition Car Log Book prior to 1st January 2019 – and of a make and model with a conception date post 31.12.2005 – the following additional members are mandatory:

a. Roof Reinforcement complying with Chapter 7 App.3 Art.13.1 and Chapter 7 App.13 Diagram 19 a., b., c., or d. b.

Windscreen Pillar Reinforcement complying with Chapter 7 App.3 Art.15.1–15.2 on each side if Chapter 7 App.13 Diagram 69 dimension "A" is greater than 200mm.

16.4. Be equipped with an internal switch that is capable of isolating all electrical circuits and completely stopping the engine. The operating switch must be positioned so that it can be operated by the driver and the codriver when normally seated with seat belts fastened.

16.5. Be equipped with an external circuit breaker complying with Chapter 7 App.5 Art.5.

16.6. Have currently FIA Homologated seat belts complying with Chapter 7 App.7 Art.7, Art.8 or Art.9 (four, five or six point).

16.7. Be equipped with fire extinguishers complying with Chapter 7 App.6 Art.1, 3 and 4 The driver and co-driver must each be able to activate the extinguisher when normally seated with seat belts fastened.

16.8. Be fitted with front seats that were FIA homologated to FIA Standard 8855-1999, 8862-2009 or 8855- 2001 at the time of manufacture (but excluding seats for which the FIA homologation was withdrawn) complying with Chapter 7 App.7 Art.2.1. For National Events FIA homologated seats manufactured to FIA Standard 8855-1999 or 8855-2001 may be used for up to two years beyond the expiration of the original homologation label validity. FIA homologated seats manufactured to FIA Standard 8862- 2009 may be used until 31st December of the year stated on the label.

16.9. Have substantial underbody protection covering any area of a fuel tank exposed to running damage. 16.10. Be equipped with high-intensity horns that can be operated by the driver and the co-driver. 16.11. If a camera is carried, the fitting must be specifically approved by a Scrutineer.

16.12. Belt cutter(s) must be carried on board at all times. Both driver and co-driver must be able to reach a belt cutter when seated with their harness fastened.

17. Body (including Aerodynamics)

17.1. Cars must be fitted with a laminated glass or polycarbonate windscreen or have a 2.5cm matrix wire mesh fitted over the whole of the windscreen aperture. If fitted with a glass or polycarbonate windscreen, the Vehicle must have an operative wiper / washer system. Where windscreens are removed, rear windows must also be removed. For open Vehicles , approved goggles / visors must be worn at all times.

17.2. If fitted with non-standard or lightened doors Vehicles must have an internal horizontal safety bar across each door aperture below the line of the window and at a suitable height to protect the Driver . This must not be integral with the door.

17.3. Any cover over the Passenger ’s compartment alongside the Driver must be made of foldable material except where the Driver / Passenger compartment is separated by a stress-bearing solid Chassis member as part of the original design.

17.4. With the exception of Vehicles in Class D any Vehicle’s silhouette viewed inside elevation must remain unaltered above the wheel hub centres of the original Vehicle except for the engine bonnet / cover the shape of which can be altered.

17.5. In Class C the following are permitted to reduce weight:

One-piece lightweight bonnet wing assemblies, providing adequate bracing is provided to replace lost

strength b. c.

Lightweight engine bonnet covers, boot lids and doors All non-stress-bearing internal components may be removed

17.6. Cars more extensively lightened than indicated above must be fitted with full roll-over bars to requirements of Chapter 7 App.3 Arts.22–23 .

18. Engine 18.1. See Chapter 7 Appendix 2 Arts.8.2 –8.4.

19. Brakes 19.1. Brakes must comply with Statutory Requirements as to the Construction of Motor Vehicles.

19.2. If there is no mechanical system available for braking on at least two wheels, two hydraulic systems are required so that in event of failure of one braking can be maintained on at least two wheels.

19.3. Vehicles constructed after 1930 must have brakes on all wheels.

19.4. When tested immediately prior to an Event the braking system on all Vehicles must work without impairing the Driver ’s control.

19.5. It must be possible under all conditions, running or stationary, for 25% minimum braking effort to be applied by the Driver through the braking system to each axle.

19.6. Brake balance adjusters must not be available for adjustment during running if they contravene Art.19.5 above.

20. Wheels

20.1. Any spare wheel must be securely fastened in position (a spare need not be carried unless specified in the Official Documents).

21. Tyres

21.1. Only tyres for use on the Public Highway by Vehicles or light commercial Vehicles are permitted. Slicks or any tyres that have been wholly or partly hand-cut are not allowed unless the Official Documents state otherwise.

22. Transmission

22.1. If fitted with front wheel drive, Vehicles must have an effective differential action between the driving wheels. Reverse gear is optional in Autocross Specials (Class D).

23. Oil Systems 23.1. In rear-engined Vehicle no part of the oil tank may be located to the rear of the gearbox casing.

24. Electrical Systems

24.1. It is permitted to remove all lamps. Vehicles in Classes C & D and all other Vehicles where the standard rear lights are removed or not functional must be equipped with two rear red warning lights with a minimum of 21W (or LED equivalent) each and an illuminated area of 60 sq cm. These must work with or replace the Vehicle brake light system at all times, must be between 600mm and 1500mm above the ground and must be clearly visible from behind. The fitting of generators is optional.

25. Silencing 25.1. Vehicles must comply with silencing levels in Chapter 7 Appendix 8 Art.2 .

26. Safety

26.1. Safety Criteria, Chapter 7 App.7 Art.6 three point and Chapter 7 Art.6 Arts.1.5–1.6 (not necessarily plumbed in) are mandatory. Chapter 7 App.3 Arts.22–23 , Chapter 7 App.7 Art.7 and Chapter 7 App.5 Arts.5 are strongly recommended.

27. Clubcross Vehicles

27.1. Only the following categories of Vehicle are allowed to compete in Clubcross Events. They must comply with the following:

Category ‘A’ Economy “Standard” Production Saloons . Cars must comply with Art.9.6 above and the following:

Maximum engine capacity: 2000cc

ii.

Forced Induction is prohibited

iii.

Four Wheel Drive is prohibited

iv.

Tyres must comply with Art.27.1.e. below.

Category ‘B’ Road Saloon Cars :

Maximum engine capacity: 2000cc

ii.

Forced Induction is prohibited

iii.

Four Wheel Drive is prohibited

Tyres must comply with Art.27.1.e. below.

iv.

Category ‘C’ Minicross Cars:

Cars must comply with Minicross Regulations

ii.

Tyres must comply with Art.27.1.e. below.

Category ‘D’ Stock Hatch Cars:

Vehicles must comply with Stock Rallycross Hatch Rallycross Regulations

ii.

Maximum engine capacity 1600cc

Tyres must comply with Art.27.1.e. below.

iii.

Only highway pattern tyres are permitted (ie not off-road, on / off-road or winter pattern).

28. Junior Autocross Vehicles

28.1.

The only category of Vehicle permitted in Junior Autocross Events are those complying with the following:

The engine must be naturally aspirated and must not have a capacity exceeding 1400cc.

Must be production Vehicles , front or rear wheel drive with standard unmodified engine in original position.

c. Must run induction systems, inlet manifolds and exhaust systems which are standard to the Vehicle. d.

Performance air filters and exhaust back boxes are permitted, but turbochargers or superchargers are not.

The dashboard is to remain as standard and in the original position, additional instruments may be fitted. All other interior trim may be removed. The Driver ’s seat must be a Competition Seat compatible with the requirements of Art.28.1.k below.

j. The silhouette of the Vehicle must not be altered. k.

Seat belts fitted in accordance with Chapter 7 App.7 Art.7 Four point (currently FIA homologated and with four separate fixing points) as a minimum are mandatory.

Must have no body kits, space framing or alterations, fibreglass or alloy panels to make the Vehicle lighter.

The windscreen may be of either laminated glass or plastic of the required thickness. No apertures will be permitted in windscreens. If fitted with a glass or plastic windscreen ( Chapter 7 App.2 Arts.22.7– 22.8 , the Vehicle must have an operative wiper / washer system. It is permitted to replace all other windows with plastic of the required thickness.

n. Chapter 7 App.3 Arts.22–23 , Chapter 7 App.14 Diagram 14 or 15 is mandatory.

CHAPTER 16 AUTOCROSS AND RALLYCROSS AND OFF-ROAD RACING PART B (RALLYCROSS) Appendix 6 - Organisers Regulations

1. Permits for Rallycross

1.1. Permits for Rallycross Events are issued at the sole discretion of the ASN . Venues must have a valid Track Licence for Rallycross.

1.2. A Club will only be allowed to organise Events of up to Interclub status unless the ASN has specifically approved an application for higher status.

1.3. The Clerk of the Course for a Rallycross Event must hold a valid ASN Licence.

1.4. For Interclub and above status Permitted Events only, for venues authorised by the issued Track Licence to include Joker Laps , the Joker Lap may be used. Two Judges of Fact to be appointed to oversee its use.

1.5. In each qualifying heat and final, one of the laps must be the Joker Lap.

2. Joker Lap 2.1. Characteristics:

Length: must be such that the time needed to cover a lap is at least 2 seconds longer than the best lap time achieved by a Super Car.

b. Width: minimum 10 m, maximum 12 m. c. The entry and the exit cannot be on the racing line. d.

Safety protection to separate the two roads must be in place. At the exit it must be possible for the Vehicles to be driving at the same speed as on the traditional Circuit.

e. A Marshal Post will be put in place if judged necessary for safety reasons.

2.2. The Driver must enter or leave the Joker Lap section in such a way that does not constitute a danger or hinder other Drivers. At the exit of the Joker Lap section the Vehicles on the main track have priority.

2.3. Those Drivers who do not take the Joker Lap :

In a Heat will receive a time penalty of 30 seconds. The penalty for Drivers who take it more than once will be decided by the Clerk of the Course.

In a Final or who take it more than once will be classified last in that Final before the non-starters. If this concerns more than one Driver they will be classified in the order of their respective positions on the starting grid before the non-starters.

3. Scrutineering 3.1. No Vehicle may be driven in the Event until it has been approved by an ASN Scrutineer at the Event.

3.2. * Vehicles must be presented for scrutineering at the time specified in the Official Documents with any previous Scrutineering Labels removed.

3.3. Any Competitor not reporting as instructed may be fined, Disqualified or may forfeit any claim to a favourable starting position.

3.4. Classes must be specified in the Official Documents . 3.5. Vehicles being used must comply with Technical Regulations in App.9. Art.1 and App.9 Art.12.11.c.

3.6. If after approval any Vehicle is dismantled or modified or is involved in an incident, in a way which may affect its safety or eligibility or any aerodynamic device is added or removed it must be represented for approval. The Entrant is responsible for seeking fresh approval.

3.7. Any Vehicle involved in an incident from which it is unable to proceed must not be touched by anybody other than Officials without the specific approval of the Clerk of the Course. The Driver concerned may not drive again without the approval of the Medical Officer in charge.

4. Drivers 4.1. Only the Driver may be in a Vehicle during the Competition or Practice. 4.2. Rallycross Drivers must conform to the Medical Requirements specified in Chapter 6.

4.3. Vehicles will be identified by Competition Numbers allocated by the Organisers and displayed as specified in the Technical Regulations Ch.7 App.10 or in line with the following:

The Organisers may, in addition to the number format provided in Ch.7 App.10, also permit Competition Numbers to be moved to the rear side windows (above the Drivers ’ name) on the Vehicle in which case.

The numbers for each rear side window shall be:

a minimum of 200mm high

ii.

with a stroke width of at least 20mm

iii.

coloured reflective yellow.

In addition the windscreen of these Vehicles must display the Competition Number positioned on the upper area of the Passenger ’s side of the windscreen as follows:

i. ii. iii. the numerals must be at least 150mm high be in the same colour and font as those displayed on the rear side windows be placed no closer than 50mm from the lower edge of the windscreen “sun-strip” and 50mm from the side edge of the windscreen.

The colour may be varied for different Categories.

4.3.1 The use of “0” or “00” is prohibited unless preceded by any number 1 to 9.

4.3.2 The numbers shall be in position before the vehicle is presented for scrutiny and will be subject to approval as to position, legibility and size. Modifications may be required as a result of observations during practice.

4.3.3 The Chief Timekeeper may decline to record the performance of any vehicle whose competition numbers are not readily apparent to the lap recorders.

4.3.4. On any car driven by a person who has not received six car Race/Rallycross signatures on their Interclub Licence , there shall be on the back of the car a yellow square, 7in x 7in, with a black diagonal cross, with strokes 6in long and 1in wide.

4.4. ASN or FIA Competition Car Log Books (CCLB) / Vehicle Passports are required at all Rallycross Events. Any ASN Competition Car Log Book issued prior to 31st December 2016 is now invalid.

4.5. Vehicles will be permitted to carry radio transmitters or receivers where the Official Documents allow, and only for the following:

a. b. for National and above status Permitted Events

for any Junior Category only a non-transmitting radio receiver tuned to the frequency of a single transmitting device which is under the direct and sole control of the Clerk of the Course is permitted. The system is to be used solely for providing Competitors with instructions or warnings issued by the Clerk of the Course.

Where required Ofcom licences must be in place.

5. Practice and Starts 5.1. All Competitors must be allowed three practice laps.

5.2. Any Driver who has not previously competed over the Course within the preceding four weeks must complete at least one observed practice lap in the Vehicle to be raced.

5.3. The Official Documents must specify: the starting signal; the timing method; when timing commences; and the method of allocating starting positions.

5.4. Vehicles will be started from a standing start, with the engines running, and the Finish line must be clearly indicated.

5.5. The spinning of wheels (tyre cleaning) before the start is only permitted in the designated area clearly defined on the Track licence and should be under supervision of the start Marshals. It cannot be performed when a Marshal or any other person is standing in front or or behind the Vehicle.

5.6. Judges of Fact may be appointed to adjudicate on:

a. False starts. b. Not following correct course, or touching a marker. c. Baulking or contact. d. Noise.

6. Signals

6.1. Signals may be used as appropriate in accordance with Art.7.3 and 7.4 below 6.2. A Yellow Signal gives warning of an incident and prohibits overtaking until the incident is passed.

6.3. Officials’ Signals will be conveyed to Drivers and may be displayed either by flags and or by an appropriately coloured light panel to which the Competitor number may be attached.

6.4. A ‘static flag’ may be replaced by a coloured light Signal and a ‘waved flag’ may be replaced by a flashing coloured light Signal :

a. Red / Green lights or National Flag: Race start. b.

Yellow – ‘Waved’: Danger slow down sufficiently to ensure that full control of the Vehicle can be retained. No overtaking.

Red: Immediately cease driving at racing speed and proceed slowly without overtaking and with maximum caution to pits or start line obeying Marshal’s instructions and or Light Signals and being prepared to stop should the Track be blocked.

Black and White Rectangular split diagonally and displayed with the Competitor ’s number: A warning to the Driver that their driving conduct is suspect and they may be shown a black Signal on further reports.

Black displayed with the Competitor ’s number: The Driver must stop at their pit on the next lap of receiving the Signal and report to the Clerk of the Course . A penalty of Disqualification may be enforced by display of the Black Signal .

f. Black and White Chequered - End of Race or Practice .

6.5. Any race can be stopped at the sole discretion of the Clerk of the Course by ‘waving’ the Red Signal at the Start / Finish Line . Competitors will be warned that the race has been stopped by the simultaneous ‘waving’ of the Red Signal at all Flag Marshalling Posts.

6.6. Re-runs will only be permitted at the discretion of the Clerk of the Course and:

a. when a Red Signal has been shown during a Heat or Final ; and / or b. when the end-of-race Signal is displayed inadvertently or otherwise before the leading Vehicle completes the scheduled number of laps.

6.7. Only the participants in the first start are entitled to participate in the re-run and must occupy the same place as for the previous start. In this case any possible warnings or penalties will however apply for the re-run.

6.8. Where a Driver in a Heat or Final causes a re-run the Driver concerned may be Disqualified from the results.

6.9. All other incidents will be treated as " Force Majeure ".

6.10. If a Heat or Final is stopped by a Red Signal and subsequently restarted any Driver who started in the original Heat or Final but who is not able to start in the re-run will be classified in front of any Drivers who did not start at all.

6.11. If not restarted the result will be based on the order of crossing the Finish Line at one lap less than at the time of the first showing of the Red Signal.

6.12. No work may be carried out on the grid unless on grounds of safety and only with the approval of the Scrutineer.

6.13. The Clerk of the Course may order that the duration of the second part or re-run of any race shall be of a shorter distance than originally scheduled or may be abandoned altogether.

6.14. If no Vehicles are running under their own power the Clerk of the Course may order the end of race Signal to be displayed. The results will be declared on the relative positions of Vehicles at the time they last crossed the Finish Line under their own power.

6.15. Any race stopped before the leader has completed one lap will be declared a “No Contest” and available Vehicles will restart from their original grid positions.

7. Track Regulations

7.1. Any driver intending to leave the course shall signal their intention in good time and shall satisfy themselves that it is safe to do so.

7.2. The driver of any car leaving the course because of being unable to maintain racing speed should signal the intention to do so in good time and is responsible for ensuring that the manoeuvre is carried out safely and as near as possible to a point of exit

7.3. Overtaking according to the circumstances may be carried out either on the right or on the left. In response to each attempted overtaking manoeuvre no more than one change of direction to defend a position is permitted.

Any Driver moving back towards the racing line having earlier defended their position off-line should leave at least one Vehicle width between their own Vehicle and the edge of the Track on the approach to the corner. Manoeuvres liable to hinder other Drivers such as deliberate crowding of a Vehicle beyond the edge of the Track or any other abnormal change of direction are strictly prohibited. Any Driver who appears guilty of any of the above offences may be reported to the Clerk of the Course.

ii.

iii.

7.4. Should a Vehicle leave the Track for any reason and without prejudice to Art.8.5 below the Driver may re-join. However this may only be done when it is safe to do so and without gaining any advantage.

7.5. Causing a collision, repetition of serious mistakes or the appearance of a lack of control over the car (such as leaving the track) will be reported to the Clerk of the Course and may entail the imposition of penalties up to and including the Disqualification of any Driver concerned.

7.6. It is not permitted to drive any Vehicle unnecessarily slowly, erratically or in a manner deemed to be potentially dangerous to other Drivers at any time.

7.7. Breaches of Art.8.8.a may be reported and / or determined only by:

A duly appointed Judge of Fact and/or b. Senior Officials through the use of suitable equipment under the control of the Organisers.

7.8. Track regulations as detailed in Arts.8.1 –8.7 above, as appropriate, apply to Rallycross and Off Road Racing in addition to the following specific elements in respect of Rallycross Tracks :

a. Drivers must use the Track at all times and may not leave the Track without a justifiable reason. b.

The white lines, tyre stacks, marker poles or other devices identified by the Clerk of the Course during the briefing defining the track edges are considered to be part of the Track.

The Clerk of the Course will identify during the Drivers Briefing and in written form the specific areas to be judged.

A Driver will be judged to have left the Track if two wheels of the Vehicle go beyond the outer edge of any kerb, the white line or Track markers or should the Vehicle pass behind or substantially move any physical marker where there is no kerb.

e. Pushing or other contact resulting in a lasting advantage is strictly prohibited.

7.9. Breaches of Art.8.8.d above may be penalised following a report by a Judge of Fact using the following scale of penalties over the course of the Event and notified by issue of a Clerks Decision in each instance which will detail where the breach occurred:

1st breach – no penalty 2nd breach - warning 3rd breach – 5 second penalty added to session time 4th breach – 10 second penalty added to session time 5th breach – Disqualification

7.10. No competing Vehicle shall be driven in the reverse direction of the Track except for the minimum distance to remove it from an unexpected situation and then only under Official supervision.

8. Results 8.1. *The Official Documents will specify the method by which a winner is decided.

CHAPTER 16 AUTOCROSS AND RALLYCROSS AND OFF-ROAD RACING PART B (RALLYCROSS) Appendix 7 - Medical and Rescue Requirements

1. Medical and Rescue Requirements 1.1. The minimum Course requirements (including at Practice ) are as follows:

Rallycross : one Doctor or ASN-Licensed Paramedic , one ambulance and one licensed Rescue Unit crewed in accordance with Chapter 11 Art.20.

Minicross : one Doctor or ASN-Licensed Paramedic , one ambulance and either one licensed Rescue Unit with licensed crew, or one emergency vehicle equipped.

Where Minicross is organised within a Rallycross Event , the medical and rescue requirements stipulated for Rallycross also apply to the Minicross Competition within that Event.

Ambulances should be equipped with basic resuscitation equipment and if possible a Casualty Immobiliser for handling patients over difficult terrain. This essential equipment should not have to be taken from any rescue vehicles which must remain at all times fully operational on the Course. The ambulances must only be used in connection with casualties arising from the Competition.

The Organisers in conjunction with the Chief Medical Officer must ensure that during both Practice sessions and Competition adequate first aid staff are in attendance (eg. St John or St Andrew Ambulance, Red Cross etc).

CHAPTER 16 AUTOCROSS AND RALLYCROSS AND OFF-ROAD RACING PART B (RALLYCROSS) Appendix 8 - Competitors Regulations

1. Signing On 1.1. When signing on a Competition Licence valid for the Event must be produced (see Table in Chapter 6 ). 1.2. Competitors must declare on their entry forms whether or not they have ever held a valid RTA licence.

1.3. Competitors aged 16 and above who have never held a valid RTA Licence must produce proof of having competed as a Driver in three Minicross or Clubcross Events , or three other ASN-Permitted Events (such as Kart Racing , Autotests, Production Car Trials , etc), or show proof of having completed an approved driving course at a Race or Rally School recognised by the ASN .

1.4. Competitors having reached the year of their 14th birthday may compete in Junior Rallycross and may continue until 31st December of the year of their 17th birthday:

a. For Junior Rallycross maximum grid size to be as per Track Licence. b.

New Competitors will have to drive observed laps prior to the Competition in order to satisfy the Clerk of the Course that they are competent to take part. Vehicles will start singly and run over three laps. Observed laps are not required if the Competitor can provide the Clerk of the Course with proof of having competed as a Driver in three other ASN-Permitted Events or having successfully completed an approved driving course at a Race or Rally School recognised by the ASN .

1.5. Any Driver competing in a Vehicle of 0.34bhp / kg or higher (excluding driver weight) and measured at the driven wheels must be the holder of an RS National Licence as a minimum.

1.6. For Competitors under the age of 18 years a PG Entrant Licence is required ( Ch.6 App.3 Art.1.13 applies)

2. Licence Upgrading Criteria 2.1. Rallycross : See Chapter 6 App.8.

3. Scrutineering

3.1. * Vehicles must be presented for scrutineering and practice at the times specified in the Official Documents with any previous Scrutineering Labels removed. Classes must be specified in the Official Documents . Any Competitor not reporting as instructed may be fined, Disqualified or may forfeit any claim to a favourable starting position.

3.2. Vehicles being used must comply with Technical Regulations Appendix 9 to this Chapter .

3.3. If after approval any Vehicle is dismantled or modified or is involved in an accident in a way which may affect its safety or eligibility or any aerodynamic device is added or removed it must be represented for approval. The Entrant is responsible for seeking fresh approval.

3.4. Any Vehicle involved in an incident from which it is unable to proceed must not be touched by anybody other than Officials without the specific approval of the Clerk of the Course. The Driver concerned may not drive again without the approval of the Medical Officer in charge.

3.5. No Vehicle may be driven in the Event until it has been approved by an ASN Scrutineer at the Event .

4. Drivers

4.1. Any Driver who has not previously competed over the Course within the preceding four weeks must complete at least one observed practice lap in the Vehicle to be raced. Only the Driver may be in a Vehicle during the Competition or Practice.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 16 Part B (Rallycross) Appendix 8 - Competitors Regulations 588

4.2. Rallycross Drivers must conform to the Medical Requirements specified in Chapter 6 App.2 .

4.3. Vehicles will be identified by Competition Numbers allocated by the Organisers and displayed as specified in the Technical Regulations (Chapter 7 App.10) or in line with the following:

The numbers shall be in position before the vehicle is presented for scrutiny and will be subject to approval as to position, legibility and size. Modifications may be required as a result of observations during Practice.

b. Competition Numbers must be covered at all times when driving on the Public Highway. c.

The Chief Timekeeper may decline to record the performance of any Vehicle whose Competition Numbers are not readily apparent to the lap recorders.

d. On any Vehicle driven by a person who has not received six signatures on their Interclub Licence , there shall be on the back of the Vehicle a yellow square, 7in x 7in, with a black diagonal cross, with strokes 6in long and 1in wide. e.

The Organisers may, in addition to the number format provided in Chapter 7 App.10 , also permit Competition Numbers to be moved to the rear side windows (above the Drivers ’ name) on the Vehicle in which case.

The numbers for each rear side window shall be:

a minimum of 200mm high

with a stroke width of at least 20mm

ii.

iii.

coloured reflective yellow.

In addition the windscreen of these Vehicles must display the Competition Number positioned on the upper area of the Passenger ’s side of the windscreen as follows:

4.3.1 The use of “0” or “00” is prohibited unless preceded by any number 1 to 9.

4.4. The colour may be varied for different Categories.

4.5. The following items must be produced by Drivers for inspection and approval at Scrutineering and be worn throughout the Competition properly fastened and positioned:

A crash helmet meeting all current regulations, which fits properly, is in a serviceable condition and bears an ASN approval sticker (see Arts.5–7.8 of Chapter 9 ).

b. Goggles or visor of splinter proof material (unless in a closed car with a full-size windscreen). c.

Flame-resistant overalls covering arms, legs and torso up to the neck. The use of a flame-resistant balaclava, socks, shoes and underwear is strongly recommended ( Arts.3–4 of Chapter 9 ).

Complete gloves (not mitts or gloves with open backs). The use of flame-resistant gloves is strongly recommended.

e. An FIA approved FHR device fitted in accordance with FIA regulations is mandatory.

4.6. Vehicles will be permitted to carry radio transmitters or receivers where the Official Documents allow and only for the following.

a. for National and above status Permitted Events

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 16 Part B (Rallycross) Appendix 8 - Competitors Regulations 589

b. for any Junior Category only a non-transmitting radio receiver tuned to the frequency of a single transmitting device which is under the direct and sole control of the Clerk of the Course is permitted. The system is to be used solely for providing Competitors with instructions or warnings issued by the Clerk of the Course .

4.7. Where required Ofcom licences must be in place.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 16 Part B (Rallycross) Appendix 8 - Competitors Regulations 590

CHAPTER 16 AUTOCROSS AND RALLYCROSS AND OFF-ROAD RACING PART B (RALLYCROSS) Appendix 9 - Technical Regulations

1. Rallycross Vehicles 1.1. Racing Cars are prohibited.

1.2. Vehicles will be classified as detailed in the Official Documents . They must be of rigid construction and comply with the regulations below. They must have been homologated in Group N, A or B of FIA Appendix J or in groups 1, 2, 3 or 4 of 1981 FIA Appendix J (although homologation may have lapsed) or commercial vehicles specifically approved by the ASN .

1.3. Vehicles complying with current FIA Appendix J Article 279 regulations, in their entirety, are also permitted, even where homologation may have lapsed.

1.4. *Mass-produced non-homologated Vehicles may be accepted for events up to National level.

1.5. Rallycross Vehicles in compliance with Chapter 16, Appendix 10 Part B and issued the Rallycross Space Frame Vehicle Identity Form (RXVIF). The Vehicle may not be used in Competition until the Vehicle Identity Form has been validated by the ASN and returned to the Vehicle owner.

1.6. Rallycross Vehicles of mixed construction being part Spaceframe , part Unitary Construction or other, issued with a Competition Car Log Book / Vehicle Passport prior to 31st December 2016 and complying with specific regulations approved by the ASN .

1.7. Rallycross Spaceframe Vehicles issued with a Competition Car Log Book / Vehicle Passport prior to 31st December 2016 complying with Championship Technical Regulations approved by the ASN ( Art.46 applies).

1.8. Rallycross electric Vehicles specifically approved by the ASN . Additional safety training and requirements will be an integral element of the application and approval.

2. Body (including Aerodynamics)

2.1. The Vehicle must have a bulkhead separating the cockpit from the engine compartment. It must retain its original material and location compared to the standard car. Installing components up against or passing through this bulkhead is permitted providing nothing protrudes into the cockpit more than 200mm (as measured perpendicularly to the bulkhead). This will be measured at the point of intrusion, and parallel to the ground. If the protrusion includes the engine, the cam / valve cover may not extend further back than the forward most point of the windscreen aperture when viewed directly from above. For Scrutineering purposes a 13mm diameter hole must be drilled at the forward most point of the screen aperture.

2.2. Bumpers and supports if fitted must both be as originally fitted to the mass-produced vehicle. No reinforcing of bumpers or supports is permitted. If one bumper is removed, then both must be along with all supports.

2.3. Reinforcing the front apron is not permitted. 2.4. Any undertray must be provided with drainage holes to prevent accumulation of liquids.

2.5. The windscreen must be of either laminated glass or polycarbonate of the required thickness. No apertures will be permitted in windscreens. If fitted with a glass or polycarbonate windscreen the Vehicle must have an operative wiper/ washer system. All Drivers must wear approved goggles or visors, unless the Vehicle is fitted with a polycarbonate windscreen. A wire mesh stone guard adequately fitted to the bodywork and with a minimum matrix of 1in is permitted with any type of windscreen.

2.6. When viewed from above wheels must be covered by rigid material at all times. The outside shape of the original coachwork must be retained except around the wings.

2.7. Openings may be made in the bonnet or boot lid for ventilation providing they do not make mechanical components visible.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 16 Part B (Rallycross) Appendix 9 - Technical Regulations 591

2.8. The Bodywork must be of the vehicle manufacturers specifications and minimum thickness with the exception of airboxes, radiators, front wings, rear wings / rear quarter panels and removable parts and panels, which may be of alternative materials. Seam welding, and localised gussets/ reinforcement is permitted.

3. Engine

3.1. The engine may be modified but the block must be from a mass-produced engine and must have the same number of cylinders as the original mass-produced engine for that Vehicle.

3.2. Specialist Competition Engines as defined in Chapter 1 App.1 ( Nomenclature and Definitions ) are also permitted.

3.3. The engine must be located within the original engine compartment. 3.4. Twin engine configurations are not permitted unless mass produced in that form.

4. Oil Systems 4.1. Oil systems must have catch tanks fitted.

4.2. Any oil tank located outside the chassis or main structure of a Vehicle must be covered with a protective coating (eg GRP)

5. Fuel Systems

5.1. These should be equipped with an effective method of stopping fuel supply which can be operated by the Driver when seated normally with seat belt secured.

6. Transmission 6.1. Transmissions can be modified.

6.2. The clutch and its control are free but automatic operation of the clutch is prohibited unless fitted by the manufacturer to that body style. The clutch must be operated by the Driver ’s feet, unless an alternative method of operation is fitted by the manufacturer to that body style. Modification for disabled Drivers permitted in accordance with Chapter 7 App.2 Art.3.

6.3. The final drive assembly, differentials, propshafts and driveshafts are free. Electronically-controlled systems are prohibited.

6.4. *The Official Documents may require four-wheel drive Vehicles to be subject to some form of handicap (not necessarily a delayed start).

7. Electrical Systems

7.1. Vehicles should be equipped with an ignition cut-off switch, having a clearly marked and positive ON–OFF position, which can be operated by the Driver when normally seated with seat belt secured. It must also isolate electric fuel pumps.

7.2. Any forward-facing lamps of more than 32 sq cm surface area must be adequately protected against glass breakage.

7.3. All lights may be removed but all Vehicles must be equipped with two rear red warning lights to be used in fog, with a minimum of 15W each and an illuminated area of 60 sq cm. These must work with or replace the car brake light system at all times, must be between 1150mm and 1500mm above the ground and must be clearly visible from behind.

7.4. Generators are optional but a self-starter system must be operable at all times.

8. Brakes

8.1. Brakes may be modified but an effective handbrake is obligatory. The handbrake may be modified for fly-off operation.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 16 Part B (Rallycross) Appendix 9 - Technical Regulations 592

8.2. There must be at least two hydraulic systems so that if one fails braking is maintained on at least two wheels (not on the same side).

8.3. The braking system on all Vehicles must work without impairing the Driver ’s control when tested immediately prior to an Event. It must be possible under all conditions, running or stationary, for 25% minimum braking effort to be applied by the Driver through the braking system to each axle.

8.4. Brake balance adjusters must not be capable of adjustment during running if they contravene Art.8.3 above.

8.5. Anti-lock devices are prohibited but brake discs are free subject to being made of ferrous material.

9. Wheels

9.1. At the start of each Heat or Race, Vehicles must be fitted with mudflaps behind all four wheels extending to a minimum of 38mm either side of the tyre tread and to a maximum of 76mm above the ground.

9.2. All nuts securing roadwheels (except centre-lock types) must be made of steel and in thread contact over a minimum length of 1

2bolt / stud diameters.

1 /

9.3. Extended or composite wheel bolts / studs are prohibited. The use of safety wheel nuts to prevent wheels pulling over standard nuts is strongly recommended.

9.4. Maximum wheel width on all Vehicles is 250mm (wheel width = flange + rim + tyre).

10. Silencing 10.1. Vehicles must comply with silencing levels in Chapter 7 App.8 Art.2.

11. Safety

11.1. Closed Vehicles must have a means of access on either side of the Passenger compartment which can be operated from inside or outside. Access must be sufficient to remove an occupant without interference from any door locking devices. They must have an operating windscreen wiper and washer system.

11.2. Vehicles must comply with safety criteria in:

Chapter 7 App.3 Arts. 22–23 , Chapter 7 App.13 Diagrams 14 , 15 or 17 with door bars as shown in Diagram 18 mandatory.

With the exception of Lotus Elise / Exige derivatives and Vauxhall VX220 the door bars on the driver's side must be in accordance with Chapter 7 App.13 Diagram 21.g, 21.h or 21.j.

c. Harness: Chapter 7 App.7 Art.9 as a minimum. d. Fire extinguisher: Chapter 7 App.6 Arts.1 and 3 minimum. e. Chapter 7 App.5 Art.6 f. Chapter 7 App.5 Art.5 g. Chapter 7 App.7 Art.4

12. Miscellaneous

12.1. The following parts of Chapter 7 remain unmodified: Chassis , Suspension, Steering, Cooling, Weight/ Ballast, Exhausts.

12.2. Active suspension, and any system which allows control of the spring flexibility, shock absorption or trim height when the car is moving, is prohibited unless fitted by the manufacturer to that body style.

12.3. ASN or FIA Competition Car Log Books / Vehicle Passports are required at all Rallycross Events . Any ASN Competition Car Log Book issued prior to 31st December 2016 became invalid on 1st January 2022 and will require a newly issued Vehicle Passport.

12.4. Vehicles must be fitted with at least one mirror of minimum surface area 50sq cm securely mounted to give a clear view to the rear. The edges of the mirror must be protected by a suitable cover to help prevent

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 16 Part B (Rallycross) Appendix 9 - Technical Regulations 593

injury in event of an accident.

12.5. Where advertising is allowed on windscreens, this must not obscure the Driver ’s vision nor reduce the minimum unobstructed vertical height to less than 250mm.

12.6. Vehicles must be presented at Scrutineering with all steering mechanisms, suspension linkages and flexible brake lines in a clean condition.

12.7. Four-wheel steering is permitted unless Official Documents state to the contrary.

12.8. Seats. Be fitted with a driver ’s seat FIA Homologated and mounted in accordance with Chapter 7 App.7 Art.2 .

12.9. For National Events FIA homologated seats manufactured to FIA Standard 8855-1999 may be used for up to two years beyond the expiration of the original homologation label validity. FIA homologated seats manufactured to FIA Standard 8862-2009 or 8855-2021 may be used until 31st December of the year stated on the label.

12.10. The heating of tyres or their treatment by any chemical substance is prohibited. For the avoidance of doubt, no method of abnormally raising the temperature of tyres / wheels above the natural ambient temperature is allowed.

12.11. Vehicles must have:

a. Internal bonnet locks removed and external positive locking fasteners fitted. b. Steering column locks rendered inoperative. c.

Towing eyes of adequate strength and size fitted front and rear. These should be painted a contrasting bright colour.

12.12. If the engine/motor(s) is run with the drive engaged whilst the Vehicle does not have any of the driven wheels in direct contact with the ground the Vehicle must be securely supported on stands (not jacks) and:

A competent person must be in the driver ’s seat while the engine/motor(s) is running and

b. There must be a safe zone around the Vehicle with only essential personnel admitted while the engine/ motor(s) is running and c.

Each Driver / Entrant is responsible for controlling and managing the above obligations within their own paddock space and for briefing their own personnel on all matters of safe work practices.

13. Junior Rallycross Vehicles

13.1. The only Category of Vehicle permitted in Junior Rallycross Events , other than Vehicles complying with the MDA Junior Minicross Regulations (as approved by the ASN ), are those complying with the following:

a. Be a Series Production Car , front or rear wheel drive complying with the provisions of Chapter 7 and Arts.1 – 12.11. b.

Be specifically authorised by the ASN by issue of a Junior Rallycross Vehicle Passport . The Vehicle may not be used in Competition until the Junior Rallycross Vehicle Passport has been validated by the ASN and returned to the Vehicle owner.

c. The engine must be naturally aspirated and must not have a capacity exceeding 1400cc. d.

The cylinder head and block must remain as originally supplied by the Manufacturer as a Standard Part for that model.

Where the Vehicle is fitted as standard with an ECU then that ECU must remain fitted and as specified by the Championship Regulations.

f. The engine cooling system must remain standard to the Vehicle. g. Induction systems, inlet manifolds and exhaust systems must remain standard to the Vehicle.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 16 Part B (Rallycross) Appendix 9 - Technical Regulations 594

h. Performance air filters and exhaust back boxes are permitted. i. At any time the ASN may impose further restrictions to limit engine performance. j. The silhouette of the Vehicle must not be altered. k.

The bodyshell must be of the vehicle manufacturers specifications and minimum thickness with the exception of rear wings / rear quarter panels and removable parts and panels, which may be of alternative materials. Seam welding, and localised gussets / reinforcement is permitted.

The dashboard is to remain as standard, in the original position and the standard instruments retained and operable.

All other interior trim must be removed including carpets, roof lining and passenger seats. Interior door panels may be replaced with an alternate non-flammable material.

n. All window glass to be replaced with polycarbonate, Chapter 7 App.2 Art.22.9 applies. o.

p. An interior rear view mirror must be fitted to the Vehicle . q.

All Vehicles must have substantial underbody protection covering any area of both the fuel tank and engine sump exposed to running damage.

r. The handbrake system is to remain as standard. s.

The fitting of mud flaps of a flexible material of 4mm minimum thickness behind each wheel extending to a minimum of 40mm each side of the tyre tread and to within 80mm of the ground when the car is unoccupied is mandatory

t. Wheels must be of the standard production size and material applicable to the vehicle. u.

The steering column is to remain as standard ( Part B App.9 Art.12.11.b ) but the steering column locks must be rendered inoperative. The steering wheel and mounting hub are free.

v. Standard production gearbox and differential applicable to the Vehicle must be used. w.

The original method of suspension operation must be retained and utilise the mounting points as provided by the manufacturer. Shock absorbers and coil springs may be uprated and adjustable.

13.2. Safety

13.2.1 In addition to the requirements of Art.11 above and Chapter 7 Apps.3 and App.6 :

13.2.2 Double longitudinal door bars must be fitted to the drivers side of the roll cage in accordance with Chapter 7 App.13 Diagram 21.g, 21.h, 21.j.

13.2.3 Fire Extinguisher: must be plumbed-in in accordance with Chapter 7 App.6 Art.1 minimum.

14. Historic Rallycross

14.1. ASN has created the Regulations for Historic Rallycross so that Historic Cars may be used for Competitions under a set of rules that seek to preserve the specification of their period and prevent modifications of performance and behaviour which could arise through the application of modern technology.

14.2. Historic Competition is not simply another formula in which to acquire trophies, it is a discipline apart, in which one of the essential ingredients is a devotion to the cars and to their history. Historic Motor Sport enables the active celebration of the History of the Motor Car.

14.3. Historic Rallycross vehicles must comply with the regulations below and Rallycross Vehicle Technical regulations ( Arts.1 - 12.11 ) with the exception of Engine ( Art.3 ).

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 16 Part B (Rallycross) Appendix 9 - Technical Regulations 595

14.4. Cars Eligible

14.4.1 Must have been Homologated or be a model commercially available before 31st December 1991.

14.4.2 A validated Historic Rallycross Vehicle Identity Form (HRXVIF) must be obtained from the ASN and presented at scrutineering. This will be the definitive document for the technical specification of the vehicle for which it has been issued. The HRXVIF will remain valid for a period of 10 years from the date of issue or such time as the registered owner of the vehicle changes if earlier.

14.4.3 Vehicles manufactured after the appropriate date may be permitted, providing that documentary evidence is submitted to the Motorsport UK with the identity form to show that the specific car (not model) is of the same specification as one manufactured within the specified period. This evidence will include any technical documentation supplied by the manufacturer, documents relative to the vehicle, and any other details from reliable and authenticated sources as may be available. On receipt of satisfactory evidence the ASN will issue an Historic Rallycross Vehicle Identity Form which must be presented at scrutineering.

14.5. Permitted Modifications

14.5.1 Only period modifications used in Rallycross on the particular make and model of Vehicle are permitted.

14.5.2 They should be detailed on the Historic Rallycross Vehicle Identity Form and duly ratified by the ASN .

14.5.3 In all cases the onus of proving a modification as being period rests with the Competitor who must submit the required documentary evidence.

14.5.4 Exceptionally the ASN may grant a dispensation to use non-original parts, parts from a different model, or parts from a later period, provided that the use of these parts does nor confer an advantage in either performance or reliability. The ASN will consider written requests from Competitors who are unable to source vital components.

14.6. Engine

14.6.1 The engine is free but the block must be from a Series Production or FIA homologated engine and must have the same number of cylinders as the original engine for that model. The engine must be located within the original engine compartment. Twin engine configurations are not permitted unless homologated in that form.

14.6.2 Standard Wankel units are considered as three cylinders, twin Wankel units as six cylinders.

14.6.3 Be equipped with a positive method of throttle closing in event of linkage failure, by means of an external spring to each throttle spindle.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 16 Part B (Rallycross) Appendix 9 - Technical Regulations 596

CHAPTER 16 AUTOCROSS AND RALLYCROSS AND OFF-ROAD RACING PART B (RALLYCROSS) Appendix 10 - Rallycross Spaceframe Technical Regulations

These regulations are mandatory for all Spaceframe Vehicles . All vehicles must comply with Chapter 7 , and Appendix 9 Art.1-12 of this Chapter unless where specified below:

1. General Technical Requirements and Exceptions

1.1. The use of magnesium or titanium alloy is not permitted, with the exception of titanium sheets which may only be used for heat shields.

1.2. All Spaceframe Vehicles must have an identification number stamped into a plate measuring 80mm x 20mm which must be welded to the centre of the underside of the main ‘B’ hoop.

2. Safety Requirements 2.1. As a minimum:

ROPS door bars to Chapter 7 App.13 Diagram 21.a or 21.g or h are mandatory, on driver and passenger side.

Where the door bar elements of the ROPS cross, a reinforcement for the bend or junction must be fitted in all four angles. This reinforcement must be made from bent sheet metal with a U shape the thickness of which must not be less than 1.0 mm. The ends of this gusset (point E) must be situated at a distance from the top of the angle (point S) of between 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the biggest of the tubes joined. Appendix 11 Drawing 8.6 . A cut-out is permitted at the top of the angle but its radius (R) must be no greater than 1.5 times the outer diameter of the biggest of the tubes joined. The flat sides of the gusset may have a hole, the diameter of which must not be greater than the outer diameter of the biggest of the tubes joined.

A currently FIA homologated competition seat with appropriate mountings is mandatory in accordance with Chapter 7 App.7 Art.2.

All Vehicles must be fitted with an extinguisher system plumbed-in for discharge into both the engine compartment and the cockpit ( Chapter 7 App.6 Art.1 ).

3. Chassis and Bodywork 3.1. The Vehicle must have the Silhouette of a Series Production Car of a closed type.

3.2. The wheelbase will be as per the Series Production Car specification with a tolerance of ±0.5%. The vehicle width of the Series Production Car must be retained with a maximum permitted increase of 100mm.

3.3. The minimum elements of the Spaceframe are shown in App.11. 3.4. The Drivers door must be of steel construction.

3.5. No element of the ROPS may pass through the space normally used for the front passenger; to allow driver extraction from either side of the car.

3.6. The floor frame is an integral part of the structure and the ‘A’ and ‘B’ main hoops must attach to it. The floor frame must be constructed from either minimum 50mm x 2mm square box section or minimum 50mm x 2mm diameter tube material in accordance with Chapter 7 App.3 Art.20 The floor must be made of either minimum 10mm composite, 1mm steel or 2mm aluminium alloy to be fixed to the top of the floor frame as defined in App.11 Drawing 8.2.

3.7. The forward most part of the Spaceframe must be at least 100mm behind the forward most part of the front bumper ( App.11 Drawing 8.5 ).

3.8. The rear most part of the Spaceframe must be at least 100mm forward the rear most part of the rear bumper ( App.11 Drawing 8.5 ).

3.9. The roof must be of either minimum 10mm composite, 1mm steel or 2mm alloy to be fixed to the top of the upper surface to protect the driver as defined in App.11 Drawing 8.3.

4. Main cage 4.1. The bulkheads ( Chapter 7 App.2 Arts.6.1–6.4 ) must extend across the full width of the Spaceframe . 4.2. Bulkheads must be made of minimum 1mm steel and be welded to the Spaceframe . 4.3. For front bulkheads App.9 Art.21 of this Chapter applies. 4.4. No part of the rear bulkhead must be further forward than the rearmost part of the driver ’s seat.

4.5. Cars with a front engine location must be constructed so that the rearmost part of the engine is at least 25mm in front of the front bulkhead.

4.6. In rear-engine cars the bulkhead must extend vertically to at least the same height as the highest part of the engine. From this point a polycarbonate window, minimum thickness 5mm may complete it, extending to the full height of the interior space as well as a horizontal cover extending to the rearmost part of the interior space ( Chapter 7 App.2 Arts.6.5–6.6 ).

4.7. In either case the full bulkhead must completely isolate the driver from the engine compartment.

4.8. A similar bulkhead must isolate the engine and exhaust system from the fuel tank Chapter 7 App.2 Arts.6.1 –6.4 ).

4.9. No part of the engine may protrude through either the front or rear bulkheads ( Chapter 7 App.2 Arts.6.5– 6.6 ).

4.10. Power Transmission System / Flywheel Protection

4.11. The transmission tunnel frame will be fabricated from steel tubing with minimum dimensions of 25mm x 2mm ( App.11 Drawing 8.4 ).

4.12. This frame to be reinforced (on the drivers’ side and top of tunnel), at the rear of the gearbox and at the clutch/flywheel area, for a minimum distance of 200mm (centre lines based on the front propshaft flange and 25mm rearward from the gearbox to engine mounting face) using minimum 2.6mm steel extensively welded to the inside of the frame. Using the same centre line for 300mm minimum 1.2mm steel will be extensively welded to the outside of the tunnel. The remainder of the tunnel may be covered by minimum 1mm steel or minimum 1.5mm aluminium.

4.13. Front wheel drive, the front bulkhead must be reinforced where the flywheel and drive shafts are directly in line with the driver.

5. Aerodynamic Devices 5.1. Must not exceed the overall limits of the original bodywork dimensions ( Chapter 7 App.2 Arts.6.10–6.14 ). 5.2. Must not be wider than the widest part of the car ’s bodywork or higher than the highest part of the roof. 5.3. Within these restrictions their design is free

6. Body panels 6.1. Door hinges must be of adequate strength. 6.2. Body material is free subject to Art.1.1 and Art.3.4 above .

7. Engine 7.1. App.9 Arts.3.1 and 3.3 apply.

7.2. Forced Induction engines must be fitted with a restrictor in compliance with FIA Appendix J, Article 279, Article 3.7.

8. Suspension and Steering 8.1. The operating method and the design of the suspension system are free.

8.2. Suspension parts may not be attached to the Spaceframe at those elements making up the major components of the ROPS i.e. main/front hoop and main braces.

8.3. The springing medium must not consist solely of bolts located through flexible bushes or mountings but may be of fluid type.

8.4. There must be movement of the wheels to give suspension in excess of any flexibility in the attachments. 8.5. Chromium plating of steel suspension members is prohibited. 8.6. All suspension members must be made of homogeneous metallic material. 8.7. All vehicles must be fitted with a steering column of a collapsible type.

9. Fuel Tank / Fuel 9.1. Fuel Systems must comply with Chapter 7 App.4.

9.2. No part of the fuel tank to be located less than 300mm from the bodyshell in both lateral and longitudinal directions, and must be outside the driver ’s compartment, and be separated from the driver ’s compartment by a metal firewall or container, both of which must be flameproof and liquid-proof.

9.3. Fuel fillers passing through the cockpit must be isolated and fitted with non-return valves at the fuel tank.

10. Exhaust and Silencing 10.1. The orifices of the exhaust pipes must be between 100mm and 450mm above the ground. 10.2. Exhaust gas may only exit at the end of the exhaust system. 10.3. All exhaust gasses including wastegate outlet must pass through the main exhaust system. 10.4. No part of the chassis may be used to evacuate exhaust gases.

11. Weights

11.1. The weight of the car is measured with the driver on board wearing their full racing apparel, and with the fluids remaining at the moment at which the measurement is taken.

11.2. The minimum weight must be: 4 Wheel Drive 1300kg 2 Wheel Drive 900kg.

CHAPTER 16 AUTOCROSS AND RALLYCROSS AND OFF-ROAD RACING PART B (RALLYCROSS) Appendix 11 - Spaceframe Drawings

Drawing.8.2 Floor frame

Drawing.8.1 ROPS

Drawing.8.4 (Pt 1) Transmission tunnel

Drawing.8.3 Plan view

Drawing.8.6 Gusset

Drawing.8.4 (Pt 2) Detail of transmission tunnel

E

Drawing.8.5 Plan view

Minimum 100mm

Suspension top mount

Floor/Roof skin

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 16 Part B (Rallycross) Appendix 11 - Spaceframe Drawings 600

CHAPTER 16 AUTOCROSS AND RALLYCROSS PART C (OFF-ROAD RACING) Appendix 12 - Off-Road Racing Specific Regulations

This Appendix must be read in conjunction with PART A and PART B of this Chapter .

1. Off-Road Racing

1.1. Off-Road Racing, which includes Cross Car ( Art.1.11 below ) and similar Events can only take place on a circuit complying with ASN Regulations .

1.2. The maximum number of Vehicles that can start a Race is limited to 12. 1.3. Events must comply with the provision for Rallycross particularly in relation to medical requirements. 1.4. Vehicle regulations must be laid down by the organising Clubs and approved by the ASN .

1.5. Competitors must comply with Chapters 6, 14 and 15 and with the Official Documents issued for the Event.

1.6. Vehicles must remain in the Paddock when not competing.

1.7. Vehicles must not be driven in the Paddock or at any other time off the Track at a speed in excess of 5mph.

1.8. Vehicles must not be driven into the spectators’ Enclosure at any time without the express permission of the Clerk of the Course.

1.9. Any Driver who has not previously competed over the course within the preceding four weeks must complete at least one observed practice lap in the vehicle to be raced.

1.10. For Venues authorised by the issued Track licence (Rallycross) to include Joker Laps, the Joker Lap may be used. Judge(s) of Fact must be appointed to oversee its use, PART B App.6 Art.1.5–2.1 apply.

1.11. Cross Car (XC) and Cross Car Junior (XC Jnr .) are rear engine 4 wheeled (2 wheel rear drive) single seater Vehicles with a multitubular spaceframe chassis which must have a safety cage as an integral part of the Chassis . The ASN have adopted the FIA technical regulation guidelines and these are available upon request (with the exemptions detailed in Art.1.12 below ).

XC – Cross Car. A Competitor may participate from their 16th birthday. The minimum Vehicle weight with the Driver wearing full racing apparel on board and with the fluids remaining at the time the measurement is taken will be 425kg with a recommended vehicle power of 130hp.

XC Jnr. – Cross Car . A category reserved for Drivers having reached the year of their 14th birthday and who may continue until 31st December of the year of their 16th birthday. The Vehicle power will be no greater than 75hp with a minimum vehicle weight with the Driver wearing full racing apparel on board and with the fluids remaining at the time the measurement is taken of 410kg.

The minimum Vehicle weight with neither the driver nor full racing apparel and with the fluids remaining at the time the measurement is taken is 345kg. At no time during the Competition may a Vehicle weigh less than this minimum weight.

1.12. FIA Technical Regulations for Cross Cars permitted exemptions: a.

The FIA homologated ECU may be replaced with the ECU specific to the series model of motorbike engine. The ECU may be further restricted by Championship Regulations or SRs in respect of a standalone Event.

b. The manifold and exhaust are free ( Chapter 7 App.8 Art.1 and Chapter 7 App.8 Art.2 apply) c. Tyres are free (subject to ASN approval) d.

The series model of motorbike engine GSXR K is permitted

Chapter 17 Trials

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 17 - Trials 602

CHAPTER 17 TRIALS

1. General

1.1. This Chapter must be read in conjunction as applicable with the following Chapters and which form the Trials ‘Yearbook’:

General Governance Judicial Organisers Organisers Championships Officials Licensing Competitors Vehicles and Vehicle Safety Equipment Permitted Tyres and Fuel Testing Competitor Personal Safety Equipment Chapter 10: Circuits and Venues Chapter 11: Emergency Medical and Services

Chapter 1: Chapter 2: Chapter 3 : Chapter 4: Chapter 5: Chapter 6: Chapter 7: Chapter 8: Chapter 9:

1.2. The format of this Chapter is identical to all Chapters. Each Chapter is supported by numbered Appendices with all elements variously separated and or grouped to provide a logical flow to the texts.

1.3. In the published texts there will be hyperlinks in blue font to other Chapters but not initially to Appendices.

1.4. All Chapters and all Appendices (to all Chapters) are numbered commencing at 1. Where applicable a numbered paragraph may be / is further divided by either alphabet sub-paras (i.e: a, b etc) or sub-numbered (i.e: i ,ii, etc).

This Chapter comprises: App. 1 App. 2 App. 3 App. 4 App. 5 App. 6 App. 7

Organisers Regulations Competitors Regulations Technical Regulations - Classic Reliability Trials Formula Technical Regulations - Car Trials Formula Technical Regulations - National Trials Car Formula Technical Regulations - Historic Sporting Trials Car Formula Charts and Diagrams

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 17 - Trials 603

CHAPTER 17 TRIALS Appendix 1 - Organisers Regulations

Note: * indicates that additional information must be provided in the Official Documents for the Event .

1. General

1.1. A Regulation in italics indicates that the Regulation may not apply if so stated in the Official Documents for the Event.

1.2. A Permit for the organisation of a Trial is issued at the sole discretion of the ASN .

1.3. A Club will only be allowed to run Events up to Interclub status unless the ASN has specifically approved an application for National status.

1.4. Organisers intending to use any Forestry Commission property for Events must liaise with the ASN Forestry Liaison Officer at least 3 months before the Event .

1.5. No contact should be made with Forest District before receiving approval from the ASN or its appointed Forestry Liaison Officer.

1.6. Special attention should be paid to the following:

Every practicable precaution must be taken to avoid depositing mud or soil on the Public Highway when leaving private property.

b. Warning notices as required by Chapter 3 App 3 must be displayed. c. The beginning and end of observed sections must be marked by signs. d.

The starts of sections should be reasonably flat and wide so that all Competitors can at least enter the section.

The layout of sections should ensure that areas can be marshalled by the minimum possible number of Officials.

Sections should be of a winding nature so as to place a premium on driving skill, although the radius of all corners must be adequate for all cars entered.

If possible alternative routes should be planned in case of a change of weather conditions and to provide varied routes within sections for different classes.

h. Metal rod markers should not be used. i.

Markers should be placed to avoid the likelihood of Competitors putting four wheels out between markers and where they are unlikely to be moved by bushes or branches.

j. Clearly visible sub-section numbers should have a minimum figure height of 50mm. k. Sub-section markers should be closely grouped in areas of expected failure. l. Organisers should be aware of the nearest hospital and the best route to get to it in case of incident. m.

When Competitors under 17 years of age are allowed to compete Organisers should note the information in Appendix 2 ‘Crew’ and Chapter 6: regarding Minimum Ages.

No person under the age of 14 can act as a marshal or assistant marshal unless under the constant supervision of a marshal over 18 years old.

At single site Events a Medium sized Spill Kit must be available at each section or group of adjacent sections.

At Events which utilize the public highway each Vehicle must carry a Small Spill Kit as defined in Chapter 1 App 1.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 17 Appendix 1 - Organisers Regulations 604

Classic Reliability Trials

In addition to Arts 1.1–1.6 above Organisers of Classic Trials must:

2.1.

Locate any Holding Controls so as to avoid public nuisance.

Draw to the attention of Competitors any sensitive areas in the vicinity of the route.

Brief all Marshals and ensure they are readily identified.

Appoint and brief a Chief Official who should be clearly identified for each observed section to ensure that the Trial is seen not to unduly inconvenience members of the public.

e. Ensure that the Chief Official has a working knowledge of the Rights of Use of the section.

2.2. *The Official Documents must specify the following which are additional to and take precedence over App. 2 Arts 2–5.4

a. Any public roads which are to be part of the route. b. Any observed sections or tests on public roads. c. The method of detailing the route and any maps required. d. Any time schedule. e. The time interval between cars at the Start. f. The method of resolving ties. g. The boundaries of observed sections which must be indicated by natural hazards flags or posts. h. The start or re-start line in an observed section or test which may be varied for each Class.

2.3. Any signs displayed except during an observed section test or quiet zone will be considered as supplementary aid without mandatory authority unless otherwise specified in the Official Documents. The mandatory marking for quiet zones does not preclude the Competitor ’s responsibility to take necessary action should the sign not be in position.

2.4. Judges may be appointed to adjudicate on:

a. Stopping at Stop and Give Way signs. b. Unauthorised use of auxiliary lights. c. Unauthorised possession of radio equipment. d. Contravention of Out of Bound areas.

2.5. Driving Standards Observers may be appointed to adjudicate on:

a. Excessive vehicle sound (observed during the Event ). b. Excessive speed. c. Driving in a manner likely to bring Motorsport into disrepute. d. Inconsiderate parking or waiting.

2.6. No private road must be used by Competitors unless specific permission to do so is given in the Road Book or Route Card.

2.7. Competitors must visit controls checks observed sections and tests in the order set out in the Road Book or Route Card unless otherwise specified.

2.8. Organisers should notify the appropriate Parish Councils. 2.9. Organisers should issue instructions on the sensible use of the roads, including:

a. Closing of gates etc.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 17 Appendix 1 - Organisers Regulations 605

b. Clearing of roads at end of sections. c.

Following the ‘Country Code ’ adding that that failure to observe the Code may lead to disciplinary action.

2.10. *The Organisers may establish a check at any point to observe maintenance of a set speed time schedule or route provided the intention to do so is stated in the Official Documents and Competitors are given information to enable them to comply.

2.11. Official Documents and Final Instructions to Competitors in Events using Footpaths, Bridleways and Restricted Byways should include the following statement:

“This Event is routed along and/or across public rights of way. Competitors must exercise caution and reduce their speed accordingly near other path users. Be especially careful near horses. Slow down, stop and switch off your engine if necessary.”

2.12. The Specific Regulations should clearly state if the Public Highway is to be used. Any part of an Event that takes place on the Public Highway must comply with the Motor Vehicles ( Competitions and Trials) Regulations and will require public relations work to be undertaken as specified in Art.2.12.1, 2.12.2 and App 7 of this chapter.

2.12.1 Public Relations work must be undertaken by Organisers on all Events using the Public Highway in accordance with the current legislation and as follows:

Consult with the Route Liaison Officers before starting PR work. If the RLO requires additional PR work in sensitive areas this must be undertaken.

b. Be diplomatic positive and clear about the legal aspects of route authorisation. c. If the Event is run in England or Wales do not intimate that it is authorised by the Police. d.

Avoid asking for ‘authorisation’ or ‘permission’ from house-holders – it invites unnecessary difficulties.

e. All PR work must be by responsible members of the Organising Club or of a Local Club . f.

The work should be completed to allow enough time to undertake a re-route should this prove necessary.

h. Special consideration should be given to householders with pets or livestock.

2.12.2 Where an Organiser is intending to publish a guide to the route or specific locations for spectators to see the Event ensure that:

Householders within 500m of any specifically advised location have been effectively PR’d without difficulty and these areas are marshalled.

b. The information issued contains warnings of locations that spectators must avoid (blackspots, sensitive areas etc). c.

Ensure that each PR crew prepares reports on each visit and these are available to the Clerk of the Course and the Stewards on the day of the Event and to the RLO on request.

Special note must be made about problem areas for the benefit of future Events and these reports must be passed on to RLOs .

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 17 Appendix 1 - Organisers Regulations 606

2.13. Any time schedule on the Public Highway or any part of the route must not exceed:

Darkness

Daylight 60mph 30mph

Motorways Trunk and A-roads

B-roads 26⅔ mph 20mph All other roads 20 mph 15mph All heavily populated areas

15 mph

2.14. When Controls are less than 20 miles apart (except start and finish controls where the length of the route is 20 miles or less) the time schedule on the public highway must not exceed an average speed of 15mph.

2.15. The Route Card must show both time and mileage between individual points so that changes in Permitted average speeds are apparent.

2.16. *Any maps required by Competitors must be notified in the Official Documents . 2.17. Organisers must ensure the status of any Tracks along the route is verified and stated in the Route Book. 2.18. Where it is proposed to use or cross any Footpath, Bridleway or Restricted Byway the Organiser must:

Obtain the agreement of the Landowner and the Highway Authority (unless the route is already on a road of higher status).

b. Notify the Police (clarifying the nature of the Event ). c. Notify the National Parks (if appropriate). d. Ensure a Liaison Officer is appointed to deal with the above matters and resolve any difficulties.

2.19. No oral instruction to Competitors during an Event will be valid if it affects any of the route or the time schedule or the layout or the performance of an observed section or test.

2.20. Any such instruction to vary the elements referred to at Art.2.19 above must be displayed as an Official Notice or issued in writing to each Competitor.

2.21. Any Competitor driving at an excessive speed in a reckless manner or in a manner likely to bring Motor Sport into disrepute or convicted of any driving offence committed during an Event may be disqualified.

2.22. Competitors must declare in writing to the Organisers at the Finish whether during the Competition they have been involved in any incident or accident involving or causing damage to other persons or property.

2.23. Observed sections may not be more than a quarter of a mile long and no special time schedule may be applied from start to finish of a section more than 100yds long (an Observed Test).

2.24. The layout of sections should take account of the location of possible failure points.

2.25. *The Official Documents must specify the exact procedure to be followed on each section where there is a stop and Re-Start test. Unless the Official Documents specify otherwise a stop and Re-Start must take place at either a line to be stopped astride or in a designated zone within which at least two wheels must be placed. When the car as judged by a Marshal is completely at rest it must re-start in a forward direction only. Any rearward movement of the Vehicle will incur a penalty.

2.26. Sections should if possible be of sufficient width to allow a choice of route. 2.27. Sub-section numbers should be placed on the right-hand side. 2.28. The Organisers of Events on a single site should have a First Aid Kit on-site at a clearly identified location. 2.29. Penalty marks will be incurred in accordance with App. 2 Art.5.4 .

2.30. Check Vehicles for sound before the Start or along the route. These checks should be manned by experienced Driving Standards Observers . Noisy Vehicles must be stopped if necessary and be reported to the Clerk of the Course.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 17 Appendix 1 - Organisers Regulations 607

3. Car Trials In addition to Arts 1.1–1.6 above Organisers of Car Trials must:

3.1. Wherever possible the use of road sections should be avoided. If road sections are used then Arts. 2.6 and 2.9–2.22 apply.

3.2. *The entry in may be split into class groups of roughly equal number, which should start from different observed sections simultaneously.

3.3. The layout of sections should take account of the location of possible failure points and safe exit routes.

3.4. Sections should if possible be of sufficient width to allow a choice of route and at no point be less than 4m wide.

3.5. The use of trees or natural hazards as course boundaries should be avoided where possible. 3.6. Stakes should not be placed against trees.

3.7. It is recommended that sections be laid out using a minimum of 13 pairs of marker stakes of a minimum height of 1m and with colour coding to clearly identify each side of the route. (see diagram in App 7 Drawing 2 ). Additional markers may be used to clarify different routes for different classes or to clarify Art.1.6.g .

3.8. *If sub-section numbers are not placed on both sides of the route, they should be on the right-hand side, with the corresponding guide markers on the left-hand side.

3.9. Organisers may at any convenient time after the start of the Competition require Competitors in some or all Classes to increase or decrease the minimum permitted tyre pressure by a maximum of 5lb/sq in. This decision must be advised to Competitors in writing and sufficient time must be allowed for them to comply.

3.10. The Organisers of Events on a single site should have a First Aid Kit on-site at a clearly identified location.

4. Sporting Trials 4.1. In addition to Arts 1.1–1.6 above Organisers of Sporting Trials must: 4.2. Road sections should not be used.

4.3. The entry in should be split into groups of equal number, which should start from different observed sections simultaneously.

4.4. The layout of sections should take account of the location of possible failure points and safe exit routes. 4.5. Sections should if possible be of sufficient width to allow a choice of route. 4.6. The use of trees or natural hazards as course boundaries should be avoided where possible. 4.7. Stakes should not be placed against trees.

4.8. It is recommended that sections be laid out using a minimum of 13 pairs of marker stakes of a minimum height of 1m and with colour coding to clearly identify each side of the route. (see diagram in App.7 Drawing 2 ). Additional markers of other colours may be used to clarify Art.1.6.g.

4.9. *If sub-section numbers are not placed on both sides of the route they should be on the right-hand side with the corresponding guide markers on the left-hand side.

4.10. There should be a First Aid Kit (including an eye bath) on-site at a clearly identified location.

4.11. Organisers may at any convenient time after the start of the competition require Competitors in some or all Classes to increase or decrease the minimum permitted tyre pressure by a maximum of 5lb/sq in. This decision must be advised to Competitors in writing and sufficient time must be allowed for them to comply.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 17 Appendix 1 - Organisers Regulations 608

5. Historic Sporting Trials 5.1. In addition to Arts 1.1–1.6 above Organisers of Historic Sporting Trials must:

5.2. *Wherever possible the use of road sections should be avoided. If road sections are used then Arts 2.6 and 2.9-2.22 apply.

5.3. *The entry in should be split into class groups of roughly equal number which should start from different observed sections simultaneously.

5.4. The layout of sections should take account of the location of possible failure points and safe exit routes. 5.5. Sections should if possible be of sufficient width to allow a choice of route. 5.6. The use of trees or natural hazards as Course boundaries should be avoided where possible. 5.7. Stakes should not be placed against trees.

5.8. It is recommended that sections be laid out using a minimum of 13 pairs of marker stakes of a minimum height of 1m and with colour coding to clearly identify each side of the route. (see diagram in App 7 Drawing 2). Additional markers may be used to clarify different routes for different classes or to clarify Art.1.6.g.

5.9. *If sub-section numbers are not placed on both sides of the route, they should be on the right-hand side, with the corresponding guide markers on the left-hand side.

5.10. Organisers may at any convenient time after the start of the competition require Competitors in some or all Classes to increase or decrease the minimum permitted tyre pressure by a maximum of 5lb/sq in. This decision must be advised to Competitors in writing and sufficient time must be allowed for them to comply.

5.11. There should be a First Aid Kit (including an eye bath) on-site at a clearly identified location.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 17 Appendix 1 - Organisers Regulations 609

CHAPTER 17 TRIALS Appendix 2 - Competitors Regulations

Note: * indicates that additional information must be provided in the Official Documents for the Event . A Regulation in italics indicates that the Regulation may not apply if so stated in the Official Documents for the Event .

1. Eligibility 1.1. * Competitors must report at the start and for scrutineering at the times stated in the Official Documents.

1.2. Any Competitor reporting late may be fined disqualified or may forfeit any claim to a favourable starting position.

1.3. At the Start each Competitor any Passengers and the Vehicle must all be checked for eligibility.

1.4. Drivers and Passengers must produce a valid Club Membership Card and Competition Licence as detailed in Chapter 6

1.5. Passengers under 18 years old will not be considered as Competitors for the purpose of Club Membership.

2. The Crew 2.1. The same Driver must drive throughout any Competition .

2.2. ‘Bouncing’ will be permitted only within the confines of the seating compartment and then only so long as no portion of either the Driver ’s or Passenger ’s body other than arms and hands is placed outside the sides of the car or behind the seat they are occupying.

3. Numbers

3.1. Competition Numbers will be issued at the Start and must be displayed on each car throughout the Competition .

3.2. Numbers will be allocated by the Organisers . 3.3. Competitors will start in numerical order. 3.4. Numbers must be removed at the Finish or if a Competitor retires.

4. Observed Sections and Route

4.1. Details of observed sections and tests (if any) must be issued at the Start and the onus of following the correct route will rest with the Competitor .

4.2. Any signs displayed other than in an observed section will be a supplementary aid without mandatory authority.

4.3. *There will be no time schedule to be maintained during the Event unless the Official Documents specify otherwise.

4.4. Competitors will proceed from point to point with as little delay as possible and any Competitor suspected of loitering may be ordered to proceed by an Official.

4.5. Competitors arriving at a test or an Observed Section more than 20 minutes after the preceding Competitor may be refused permission to attempt that test or observed section.

4.6. No unauthorised assistance is allowed and cars must complete the course under their own power. 4.7. No case of force majeure will be taken into consideration.

4.8. Before attempting an observed section Vehicles must be brought to rest with a leading front wheel hub vertically over the Start line as indicated by Officials and the Driver must not proceed until instructed to do so.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 17 Appendix 2 - Competitors Regulations 610

4.9. It is permissible to start the Vehicle when only one hub is on the line and the car is askew providing the other hub has not crossed the line.

4.10. Competitors must attempt to negotiate observed sections non-stop unless the Official Documents specify otherwise.

4.11. Failure of a Vehicle to maintain unassisted forward motion in the direction of the Course will be regarded as failure to comply with this requirement.

4.12. The point of failure will be at a vertical line from the centre of the hub of the front wheel which is the furthest from the start of the section. See App 7 Drawing 2.

4.13. Observed sections may be divided into subsections. In such cases signs will indicate the beginning and end of the sub-sections.

4.14. A Vehicle will be deemed to have entered an observed section or subsection when a vertical line from the leading front wheel hub centre has passed any marker indicating the beginning of the section.

4.15. A Vehicle will be considered to have left an observed section or sub-section when a vertical line from the leading front wheel hub centre has passed any marker indicating the end of the section.

4.16. Failure to proceed for whatever reason from the starting position into an observed section when instructed to do so will be regarded as failure in that section.

4.17. The start line will indicate the greatest penalty and the Finish line zero penalty .

5. Results 5.1. Judges may be appointed to adjudicate on:

a. Conforming with the correct route on the course. b. Touching markers. c. Failure to proceed non-stop when required. d. Conformity with Arts.7 , 11 or 15 below. e. Noise. f. Time of arrival/departure at observed section test control or check. g. Unauthorised smoking. h. Unauthorised assistance or servicing.

5.2. Performances on any observed section or test may be ignored at the Organiser ’s discretion even though there have been successful attempts to negotiate the section or test. If this discretion is exercised no performance on the section or the test in question will be taken into account when compiling the results. This discretion may be for a Class or a number of Classes.

5.3. Competitors start with zero marks.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 17 Appendix 2 - Competitors Regulations 611

5.4. *Penalty marks will be incurred as follows unless otherwise stated in the Official Documents :

Marks Lost a. Each minute late in reporting at the start or re-start 5 b. Failing in observed section not divided into sub-sections 6

c. Failing in observed section not divided into sub-sections which includes a stop and re-start type test 6

d. Failing in an observed section which is divided into sub-sections. 12 (The penalty for failure will decrease In proportion to the number of sub-sections negotiated non-stop)

e. Failing in observed section which includes a stop and Re-Start type test. The Penalty for failure will decrease according to the position of the test within the section. 12

f. Not attempting or being ready to attempt an observed section sub- section or test when instructed so to do. 12

g. Not complying with a reasonable instruction by an Official for which a Penalty is not otherwise stipulated provided warning of the Penalty is given 12

h. Driver and/or Passengers not seated in accordance with Arts 2.2 above 12 i. Causing undue noise at any point 12

j. Breach of any statutory requirement concerning the use of a motor Vehicle during the Event 12

k. For second offence under (i) or (j)

Event Disqualification l. Varying ballast during Event (per offence) 50

Classic Trials 6. Eligibility

6.1. Competing Vehicles must comply with App. 3.

7. The Crew

7.1. Passengers must be properly seated i.e. both the Passenger and the seat back must be upright and facing forward.

7.2. Where the Driver is over 17 years old and holds a full RTA Licence the Passenger must fulfil the minimum age requirement below.

Open or Convertible Vehicles

Saloons or hardtop Vehicles

7.3. If Art 2.1 is varied entries may be accepted from Drivers aged 16 or from Drivers of 17 or over who do not hold a full RTA Licence . In such cases the Driver must be accompanied by a Passenger who holds a full RTA Licence and is experienced as a Driver of Classic Trials to the satisfaction of the Clerk of Course . Any such Driver may only attempt sections wholly on private land.

7.4. Additionally the rear seats of saloon cars can be occupied by the number of people for whom they were designed. Passengers who occupy the rear seats of the Vehicle must not be less than 2 years of age any child under 12 years of age or 135cm in height must be seated using an approved ‘child restraint’.

7.5. Passengers aged between 2 and 12 years old will be signed on by their parent or guardian.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 17 Appendix 2 - Competitors Regulations 612

7.6. Passengers are not required to occupy the front seat where suitable rear seats are available unless the Official Documents state otherwise. All Passengers in a vehicle with a soft-top or no roof must be at least 14 years of age. However in Class 8 only one Passenger is allowed who must occupy the seat alongside the Driver.

7.7. Members of the crew at the Start cannot be varied during an Event except with Official approval.

8. Observed Sections and Route

8.1. *The Official Documents including the Route Book will specify whether sub-section signs are penalty markers as per Arts 12.2–12.4 .

8.2. A Competitor will also be considered to have failed to negotiate an observed section non-stop if all four wheels are positioned outside the boundary of the course at the same time. The boundary is represented by a straight line drawn from course marker to course marker along the direction of the course, or by natural obstacles preventing such a straight line.

8.3. All markers are deemed live and those markers that are not in the sequence being negotiated by the Competitor shall be considered as indicating the section’s boundary, unless deemed otherwise on a particular section by the Clerk of the Course . In such cases the penalty recorded shall be that of the part of the section between gates and not necessarily the value of the marker touched.

8.4. To be classified as a finisher a Competitor being the car and crew entered must have attempted at least 75% of the total number of observed sections and arrive at the Finish under its own power within 20 minutes of the time of arrival of the preceding Vehicle .

9. Results 9.1. *The Competitor incurring the least Penalty will be the winner and so on.

Car Trials 10. Eligibility

10.1. Competing Vehicles must comply with Appendix. 4 except that in Clubman Events the Organisers may state in the Official Documents that any or all of the following Car Trials Technical Regulations have been replaced by the equivalent Classic Trials Regulations at Appendix 4 Arts.5.1.a ., d., e. and 8.2, 9.4, 10.1.a. and c..

11. The Crew 11.1. During all Observed Sections and tests the seat alongside the Driver must be occupied.

11.2. If a Passenger is carried they must be properly seated i.e. both the Passenger and the seat back must be upright and facing forward and:

Where the Driver is over 17 years old and holds a full RTA Licence the Passenger must be of at least 12 years of age.

Entries may be accepted from Drivers aged 14 15 or 16 or from Drivers of 17 or over who do not hold a full RTA Licence . In such cases the Driver must be accompanied by a Passenger who holds a full RTA Licence and is experienced as a Driver of Car Trials or Sporting Trials to the satisfaction of the Clerk of Course.

11.3. Additionally the rear seats of saloon cars can be occupied by the number of people for whom they were designed. Passengers who occupy the rear seats of the Vehicle must not be less than 2 years of age any child under 12 years of age or 135cm in height must be seated using an approved ‘child restraint’.

11.4. Passengers aged between 2 and 12 years old will be signed on by their parent or guardian. 11.5. Members of the crew at the Start cannot be varied during an Event except with Official approval.

12. Observed Sections

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 17 Appendix 2 - Competitors Regulations 613

12.1. Unless the Official Documents state otherwise at some convenient break after approximately half the Observed Sections have been attempted the running order will be reversed within each Class . Competitors will remain in the correct running order unless instructed otherwise by an Official.

12.2. A Competitor will also be considered to have failed to negotiate an observed section non-stop if:

a. Any part of their Vehicle or its occupants touch a marker. b.

All four wheels are positioned outside the boundary of the Course at the same time. The boundary is represented by a straight line drawn from course marker to Course marker along the direction of the Course.

12.3. The point of failure will be considered to be that at which any marker is first struck or the point at which the boundary of the course is first crossed by all wheels of the competing Vehicle .

12.4. Should this point of failure coincide with the division between two sub-sections the marks lost will be those appropriate to failure in whichever of the two sub-sections provides the greater penalty.

12.5. All markers are deemed live and those markers that are not in the sequence being negotiated by the Competitor shall be considered as indicating the section's boundary unless deemed otherwise on a particular section by the Clerk of the Course . In such cases the penalty recorded shall be that of the part of the section between gates and not necessarily the value of the marker touched.

12.6. To be classified as a finisher a Competitor must have attempted at least 75% of the sections and hand in their score card to the Secretary of the Event within 20 minutes of the preceding Competitor .

13. Results

13.1. Each Competitor will be provided with a results card which must be produced on demand by Officials to mark at each section .

13.2. *In calculating Class positions the actual number of marks lost by each Competitor is the deciding factor. However where an overall best performance (irrespective of Class) is required an Index of Performance will be established for each Class by taking the average performance of the best 50% of finishers (or if there is an odd number of finishers the total plus one) in the respective Class.

13.3. To be classified as a finisher for index purposes only a Competitor must have attempted all sections. Competitors ’ marks lost are then expressed as a percentage of this index.

13.4. In the Event that the best 50% of finishers (as defined in Art.13.2 above) represents less than five Competitors then scores equivalent to that of the Class winner must be added to the results of the Class a sufficient number of times so that the average for the Class can be based on five scores.

13.5. In the Event of one or more Competitors finishing with a total score of zero for the whole Event then a notional penalty of one mark will be added to the total score of ALL finishers before calculating the Index of Performance.

13.6. Ties will be resolved by comparing the number of penalties lost by each Competitor on each section the winner being the Competitor who has the greater number of low penalties. Should this method not resolve the tie the Organisers may resort to the ‘furthest cleanest’ principle starting from Hill One.

Sporting Trials and Historic Sporting Trials 14. Eligibility

14.1. Cars must comply with App.5 or App.6 or 750MC Trials Formula as appropriate.

15. The Crew

15.1. During all Observed Sections and tests the seat alongside the Driver must be occupied by a Passenger who must be properly seated i.e. both the Passenger and the seat back must be upright and facing forward. The Passenger ’s hips must be located within the cockpit and on or in front of the rear axle line (Penalty as per Art 5.4.h ).

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 17 Appendix 2 - Competitors Regulations 614

15.2. Where the Driver is over 17 years old and holds a full RTA Licence the Passenger must be of at least 14 years of age.

15.3. Entries may be accepted from Drivers aged 16 or from Drivers of 17 or over who do not hold a full RTA Licence . These Drivers must be accompanied by a Passenger who holds a full RTA Licence and is experienced as a Driver in Sporting Trials and who must produce a valid Club Membership Card.

15.4. Members of the crew at the Start cannot be varied during an Event except with Official approval.

16. Observed Sections 16.1. A Competitor will also be considered to have failed to negotiate an Observed Section non-stop if:

a. Any part of their Vehicle or its occupants touch a marker. b.

All four wheels are positioned outside the boundary of the course at the same time. The boundary is represented by a straight line drawn from Course marker to Course marker along the direction of the course.

16.2. The point of failure will be considered to be that at which any marker is first struck or the point at which the boundary of the Course is first crossed by all wheels of the competing Vehicle .

16.3. Should this point of failure coincide with the division between two sub-sections the marks lost will be those appropriate to failure in whichever of the two sub-sections provides the greater penalty.

16.4. All markers are deemed live and those markers that are not in the sequence being negotiated by the Competitor shall be considered as indicating the section's boundary unless deemed otherwise on a particular section by the Clerk of the Course. In such cases the Penalty recorded shall be that of the part of the section between gates and not necessarily the value of the marker touched.

16.5. To be classified as a finisher a Competitor must have attempted at least 75% of the sections and hand in their score card to the Event Secretary within 20 minutes of the preceding Competitor .

17. Results 17.1. *The Competitor incurring the least penalty will be the winner and so on.

17.2. Each Competitor will be provided with a results card which must be produced to the Officials to mark at each section.

17.3. Ties will be resolved by comparing the number of penalties lost by each Competitor on each section the winner being the Competitor who has the greater number of low penalties. Should this method not resolve the tie the Organisers may resort to the ‘furthest cleanest’ principle starting from Hill One.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 17 Appendix 2 - Competitors Regulations 615

CHAPTER 17 TRIALS Appendix 3 - Technical Regulations – Classic Reliability Trial Vehicles

Note: (1) * indicates that additional information must be provided in the Official Documents Note: (2) A Regulation in italics indicates indicate a Regulation which may be amended in Official Documents. Note: (3) This Appendix must be read in conjunction with App. 2 and Chapter 7: 1. General

1.1. Classic Reliability Trial Vehicles will be classified as follows unless otherwise stated in the Official Documents :

Class

Description

1 Front-engined, front wheel drive production Vehicles (including those fitted with Torque Biasing/Limited Slip Differentials).

2 Production cars built prior to 1941, and the following: MG TC, Morgan 4-4 Series 1, HRG 1100 and 1500, and Ford models (upright models to 1959) E04A, E494A, E4930A/B, E93A, E493A, and 103E. Dellow Mk 1,2,3 & Bucklers Mk 5&6, Pre 1941 Cars holding a current VSCC Buff Form, Non- production cars built from pre-1941 components individually approved.

3 Front-engined, rear wheel drive, production saloons (except Vehicles in Class 6).

4 Rear-engined, rear wheel drive production saloons up to and including 1300cc (except Vehicles in Class 7).

5 (a) Front-engined production sports cars (except Vehicles in Classes 1, 6 and 90). (b) Vehicles in full HST Historic Class specification with fiddle brakes disabled.

(c) Non-production cars built mainly from pre-1941 components (except Vehicles approved for Class 2) individually approved. Such Vehicles may include some post war components including BMC A-Series engines up to 948cc, Reliant OHV engines, A Series Rear Axles, Ford 105E Series Back Axles, Tubular Frame Chassis. These Vehicles must have at least one operational European carburettor and run on tyres satisfying Art 7.13 (Crossplies).

(d) Production cars eligible for Class 2, but running on radial tyres. 6 (a) Rear-engined, rear wheel drive production cars (except Vehicles in Class 4).

(b) Front-engined production cars fitted with torque biasing differentials as standard equipment, or any other form of traction control as standard equipment, throughout that model range and unavailable without it from stock.

7 (a) Production cars modified beyond permitted limits.

(b) Rear-engined production cars fitted with torque biasing differentials as standard equipment, or any other form of traction control as standard equipment, throughout that model range and unavailable without it from stock.

(c) Front engine cars manufactured on a limited basis conforming to an accepted specification. Where modified beyond the accepted specification these cars will be classified in Class 8:

(c)(i) Have the rearmost part of the front seat cushion(s) forward of any part of the rear tyres (c)(ii) Have a wheelbase of 90in (228.6cm) or greater 8

8 (a) Non production cars.

(b) Rear-engined cars (except Vehicles in Classes 4, 6, and 7).

(i) Have the rearmost part of the front seat cushion(s) rearward of any part of the rear tyres, or (ii) Have a wheelbase less than 90in (228.6cm)

90 Suzuki X90 Vehicles having the original engine block.

1.2. A current MOT certificate where appropriate must be produced at the Scrutineers’ request.

2. Safety

2.1. All Vehicles must comply with Construction and Use Regulations and be fitted with safety belts if appropriate. Where fitted seat belts must be worn on the Public Highway.

2.2. Handheld fire extinguishers to a level of safety specified in Chapter 7 App 6 are mandatory and which are accessible to the crew (note a 1.75ltr minimum for AFFF or 2x1ltr AFFF or 2x1kg Powder is permitted).

3. Chassis / Body

3.1. Chassis /body structures must comply with definitions of a Saloon, Closed, Sports or Touring Car as applicable.

3.2. In particular Vehicles must:

a. Be equipped with an effective windscreen or aero-type screen. b.

The body overhang of non-production cars must not exceed one-fifth of the overall car length at the front and one- third at the rear. Overhang is measured from the line of the road wheel centres.

For production cars any extensions must not exceed the overhang proportions of a non-production car. Any additional spare wheel carrier should be fitted as close as possible to the body and satisfy Arts.7.9–7.12 Production cars need not comply with Chapter 7 in respect of bonnets.

Retain their original wheelbase. Any alteration to the wheelbase of a production car (except in Class 2) will transfer the car to Class 8.

e. Be equipped with the same number of seats as intended by the manufacturer. f. Have the forward and rearward bulkheads of the engine compartment in their original positions. g. Retain the engine cover boot lid and wings although the material may be changed.

3.3. With the exception of cars of periods A to D all cars must be equipped on all wheels with mudguards which present no sharp edges and cover the complete wheel (flange+rim+tyre) around an arc of 120 degrees. This minimum coverage must:

b. c. be achieved with a continuous surface of rigid material. The rear tyre must not be visible when viewed from above

extend forward ahead of the axle line extend downward behind the wheel d. extend downward behind the driven wheel to a point no more than 150mm above the axle centre line.

3.4. Vehicles must be equipped with two fixed seats for Driver and Passenger the rearmost part of which must not be behind the rear wheel axis.

3.5. The weight distribution of the Vehicle may be altered by the addition of Ballast.

3.6. The position of the battery spare wheel and fuel tank may be changed but any further modifications will cause the Vehicle to be reclassified to Class 7(a).

3.7. In Classes 1 to 7 and 90 any Ballast tool or other boxes must be positioned within the body shell or the bumpers firmly secured and not visible protruding or varied during Events (see Art.3.10 ).

3.8. A luggage box within the plan view of the car may be included in an accepted specification for a car in Class 7(c).

3.9. The silhouette of Vehicles in Classes 1 to 6 and 90 as seen from the side must be unaltered except for the engine cover, spare wheels and bumpers. Bumpers may be removed but if retained must be in the original manufacturer ’s position.

3.10. In Class 2 Vehicles the chassis must be that of the original manufacturer for the Vehicle although a change in bodywork is permitted providing it is in keeping with the period.

3.11. To be eligible for Class 7(a) the chassis/floor pan of the original car (between wheel centres) must be retained.

4. Engine

4.1. The engine must comply with Ch.7 App.2 Art.8 regarding positive throttle closure by external springs unless exempt due to the use of original standard manufacturer fitted electronic throttle control.

4.2. If forced induction is used, the coefficient will be 1.4:1.

4.3. There are no restrictions on engine tuning providing the cylinder block is of the same manufacture and configuration as the original.

4.4. The make type and number of carburettors is unrestricted.

4.5. The position of the engine mountings in the chassis may not be altered. Any further modifications will cause the Vehicle to be reclassified to Class 7(a).

4.6. No part of the external exhaust system may be more than one metre above the ground.

5. Brakes 5.1. Vehicles must not have separate braking for individual driven wheels (fiddle brakes).

6. Suspension 6.1. Springs and shock absorbers may be changed and additional springs and shock absorbers fitted. 6.2. Anti-tramp and anti-roll bars Panhard Rods and Watts Linkages are permitted.

6.3. Except for Classes 7(a) and 8 the original springing system and spring mounting points must be retained in operational use eg leaf spring systems must retain at least the minimum number of leaves specified by the manufacturer and must not be replaced by coil or other springing systems.

7. Wheels and Tyres 7.1. Duplicated driving wheels are not Permitted unless specified in the Official Documents . 7.2. Competitors must carry a spare wheel and tyre as a replacement for one wheel on the Vehicle.

7.3. Wheels of up to the standard diameter must be used except for Classes 5(c) 7(a) and 8 where wheel diameter is free.

7.4. In Class 8 the maximum tyre section must be 185mm.

7.5. In all Classes 1 to 8 and 90 (except Class 2) the maximum permitted difference between front and rear tyres must be two sections.

7.6. No tyre may be smaller than that recommended by the car manufacturer.

7.7. Standard tyres must be used and all types of Grip and Town & Country block patterns are prohibited. Radial tyres with a maximum tread gap exceeding 8mm are prohibited. A tyre will be deemed to have a block gap not exceeding 8mm if when fitted to a rim and inflated to 25psi an 8mm round bar will stick in the gap when horizontal. Purely circumferential gaps may be ignored.

7.8. In all Classes spare wheels must be firmly secured by a permanent fixing.

7.9. Not more than two spare wheels may be carried externally and these must be fitted as close as possible to the bodywork (excluding bumpers).

7.10. No part of the spare wheel(s) may be mounted externally in front of the windscreen unless in the manufacturer ’s standard position or on the roof.

7.11. Vehicles with an external rear-mounted spare wheel in the manufacturer ’s standard position may add a second spare wheel mounted flush with the original wheel with no spacer.

7.12. The spare wheel(s) or mounting(s) may not extend rearwards more that 200mm from a vertical line passing through the rearmost part of the original bodywork (excluding bumpers) or more than 100mm beyond the rearmost part of the original bumper position for the model of Vehicle whichever creates the lesser protrusion. An alternative maximum dimension not exceeding 400mm may be included in an accepted specification for a car in Class 7(c).

7.13. Class 2 Vehicles must use cross-ply tyres (which need not be listed in Chapter 8 Lists 1 or 2 but which must not be of Grip Town & Country or Dual Purpose pattern).

8. Transmission 8.1. Be fitted with non-torque biasing differential in full and free operation between the driving wheels unless:

a. A differential was not fitted by the manufacturer. b. The Vehicle is restricted to running in a nominated Class or Formula.

8.2. Vehicles must be two-wheel drive only unless the Official Documents of the Event allow four-wheel drive.

8.2.1 Four-wheel drive vehicles operating in two-wheel drive mode are not eligible, unless Permitted by the Official Documents.

8.3. It is not permitted to change the gearbox or transaxle casing (except in Class 7(a) or 8) or Vehicles running to an accepted specification.

8.4. Original gear ratios may be changed.

8.5. It is not permitted to fit limited slip torque biasing locked or lockable differentials other than as provided for in 6 and 7(b) as standard equipment.

8.6. The rear axle casing must not be modified except for cars in Classes 7(a) and 8 and those cars in Classes 1 and 3 to 6 whose model and mark type was originally manufactured before 1955.

8.7. Vehicles may fit replacement differentials crown wheels and pinions provided the differential action remains free operating.

9. Electrical Systems 9.1. Vehicles must have a maximum of four forward facing beams in addition to side and indicator lights.

9.2. Auxiliary lights should not be used in non-competitive sections except in fog or falling snow as permitted by law.

9.3. All lights must be fitted and used in accordance with the Motor Vehicle Lighting Regulations.

10. Miscellaneous

10.1. Other than Chapter 7: and in the following sections there are no special requirements under Vehicle Regulations for: Chassis/Engines Suspension Brakes Steering Cooling Oil Systems Fuel Systems Electrical Systems Weight/ Ballast Exhausts.

10.2. Auxiliary lamps unless fitted as standard equipment using gas discharge or LED technology are not permitted and gas discharge or LED headlamp units may not be retro fitted.

10.3. Any car which has been improved within the manufacturer ’s specification for the range will be considered as a production car.

10.4. The fitting of a safety roll-over bar is recommended. 10.5. The fitting of sump chassis and exhaust under-body guards and proprietary tow bars is permitted. 10.6. The footbrake clutch and accelerator pedals must all be in their original positions.

10.7. Silencing of Vehicles must be to the levels specified in Chapter 7 App.8 Art.2 with engines running at three quarters maximum rpm.

10.8. For Vehicles in Class 2 (pre-1941) any mechanical modification as permitted by Art.4 must be compatible with the period.

10.9. Rearward vision whilst properly seated within the confines of the Vehicle’s bodywork or ROPS must be possible. Vehicles with solid rear bulkheads or an obstructed view along the centreline of the longitudinal axis must be fitted with either external rear view mirrors or a reversing camera. Mirrors and/or cameras must be operational during competition.

10.10. Exhaust Catalytic Converters are required per Chapter 7 App.8 Art.1.8 except where a Vehicle does not require a catalytic converter in accordance with UK Government legislation.

10.11. Battery powered Vehicles may compete in appropriate classes in Car Trials and Classic Reliability Trials , (excluding Sporting Car Trials ), subject to the Official Documents of the Event .

CHAPTER 17 TRIALS Appendix 4 - Technical Regulations – Car Trials Formula

Note: (1) * indicates that additional information must be provided in the Official Documents Note: (2) A regulation in italics indicates indicate a Regulation which may be amended in the Official Documents. Note: (3) This Appendix must be read in conjunction with App.2 and Chapter 7:

Classes:

1.1.

*Classes are free but must be stated in the Official Documents . The following are suggested.

CLASS A FWD SERIES PRODUCTION CARS CARRYING NO BALLAST

1.2.

Front wheel drive cars of any age, carrying no ballast and having no modifications except as follows:

the fitting of under body protection weighing no more than 10kg (including fittings)

b. c. the replacement of wheels in accordance with Art.8.2 below the replacement of tyres in accordance with Art.8.3 below Minimum tyre pressures on driven wheels: up to 1200 cc: 12 psi up to 1400 cc: 14 psi over 1400 cc: 16 psi

1.3. CLASS S NEW UNMODIFIED FWD SERIES PRODUCTION CARS CARRYING NO BALLAST

Standard front wheel drive cars first registered on or after 1 January 2009*, taxed for road use, carrying no ballast and having no modifications except as follows:

a. the fitting of under-body protection weighing no more than 10kg (including fittings); b. c. the replacement of wheels in accordance with Art.8.2 below the replacement of tyres in accordance with Art.8.3 below Minimum tyre pressures on driven wheels: up to 1200 cc: 12 psi up to 1400 cc: 14 psi over 1400 cc: 16 psi * 2009 will be retained for the years 2024, 2025 & 2026 after which it will be reviewed.

1.4. CLASS B FWD SERIES PRODUCTION CARS

Permitted modifications in accordance with Arts.2.1–10.5 below . Minimum tyre pressures on driven wheels:

up to 1200cc: 12 psi up to 1400cc: 14 psi over 1400cc: 16 psi

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 17 Appendix 4 - Technical Regulations - Car Trials Formula 621

1.5. CLASS C 1990 ONWARDS RWD SERIES PRODUCTION CARS AND SPORTS CARS

Rear wheel drive Series Production Cars and Sports Cars first registered on or after 1 January 1990. Permitted modifications in accordance with Arts.2.1–10.5 below . Minimum tyre pressures on driven wheels: Front engined: 14 psi

Mid/rear engined: 20 psi 1.6. CLASS D SERIES PRODUCTION CARS NOT ELIGIBLE FOR ANY OTHER CLASS AND KIT CARS

a. RWD SERIES PRODUCTION CARS

Permitted modifications in accordance with Arts.2.1–10.5 . Minimum tyre pressures on driven wheels: FE Sports Cars up to 1800cc: 16 psi FE Saloon Cars up to 1800cc: 14 psi RE Cars up to 1000cc: 22 psi FE Sports Cars over 1800cc: 22 psi FE Saloon Cars over 1800cc: 20 psi RE Cars over 1000cc: 26 psi b. MODIFIED SERIES PRODUCTION CARS AND KIT CARS**

Cars (not eligible for Classes A,B or C) complying with App.3 Art.1 Classes 1-6 and 7(b) and front engined Kit Cars modified beyond Car Trials Formula regulations and up to the limits specified in App.3 Art.1 Class 7(c), and with the ACTC approved specification readily available for inspection. App.3 Art.1.2 does not apply as MoT is not required when off road. The Car Trials Wheel and Tyres regulations Art.8.2–8.3 must be complied with. Minimum tyre pressures on driven wheels: FWD Cars: 16 psi FE Kits Cars: 24 psi FE RWD Cars: 22 psi RE Cars: 26 psi

**Compliance shall not extend to App.3 Art.7.1 or Art.8.2 below i.e. only wheels of the sizes detailed in their ACTC specification may be used. In all other cases of rule compliance Classic Reliability Trial Vehicles’ regulations will prevail.

2. General

2.1. *Any car fitted with a torque biasing differential or any other form of traction control as catalogued for that car may have tyre pressures set at 4psi above the specified Class pressure.

2.2. Cars with an overall length of 166 inches and over in Classes A and B above may reduce tyre pressures by not more than 4 psi subject to an absolute minimum pressure of 10 psi.

2.3. Optional or alternative equipment as listed by the manufacturer may be fitted with the exception of gear and differential ratios.

2.4. Special tuning and competition catalogues etc. are not acceptable as manufacturer ’s handbooks.

3. Safety

3.1. Vehicles must comply with Construction and Use Regulations and be fitted with safety belts if appropriate. The following are recommended:

a. Safety roll-over bar to safety criteria Chapter 7 App.3 Art.22. b. The wearing of seat belts is optional when fitted to the vehicle.. c.

Handheld fire extinguishers to safety criteria Chapter 7 App.6 Art.3 (note a 1.75ltr minimum for AFFF or 2 x 1ltr AFFF or 2 x 1Kg Powder is permitted).

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 17 Appendix 4 - Technical Regulations - Car Trials Formula 622

4. Chassis/Body 4.1. Vehicles should not have any chassis or body alterations except:

In Classes B-D Bodywork ahead of and below the centre line of the front wheels and behind and below the centre line of the rear wheels may be removed.

Panels to the front and rear of the centre line of the front and rear wheels respectively may be replaced by panels from any model in the same family of cars.

In Classes B-D the weight distribution of the Vehicle may be altered by the addition of Ballast which must be positioned within the body shell or bumpers firmly secured and not visible or protruding.

Ballast must not be varied during an Event.

The fitting of sump chassis and exhaust under-body guards is permitted.

External mirrors may be removed.

4.2.

In particular Vehicles must:

Be equipped with an effective windscreen or aero-type screen.

The body overhang of non-production cars must not exceed one-fifth of the overall car length at the front and one- third at the rear. Overhang is measured from the line of the road wheel centres.

For production cars any extensions must not exceed the overhang proportions of a non-production car. Any additional spare wheel carrier should be fitted as close as possible to the body. Production cars need not comply with Chapter 7 in respect of bonnets.

4.3. With the exception of cars of periods A to D all cars must be equipped on all wheels with mudguards which present no sharp edges and cover the complete wheel (flange+rim+tyre) around an arc of 120 degrees. This minimum coverage must:

b. c. be achieved with a continuous surface of rigid material. The rear tyre must not be visible when viewed from above

extend forward ahead of the axle line extend downward behind the wheel d. extend downward behind the driven wheel to a point no more than 150mm above the axle centre line.

4.4. Vehicles must be equipped with two fixed seats for Driver and Passenger the rearmost part of which must not be behind the rear wheel axis.

5. Engine 5.1. Engine tuning is permitted within the following limitations:

The cylinder head and block must remain as originally supplied by the manufacturer as standard for that model.

If the Class structure suggested in Arts. 1.1–1.6 above is used then except for Classes B and C the carburettors and inlet and exhaust manifolds must remain as originally supplied by the manufacturer as standard for that model.

Fuel injection and/or forced induction are prohibited unless offered by the manufacturer as standard or optional equipment for that model.

d. If forced induction is used, the coefficient will be 1.4:1 e. Stroke of the crankshaft may not be altered. f. Cylinders may be re-bored to a maximum of +0.060in.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 17 Appendix 4 - Technical Regulations - Car Trials Formula 623

6. Brakes

6.1. Vehicles must not have separate braking of individual driven wheels (fiddle brakes) but it is permitted to increase the braking power of the Vehicle .

7. Springs and Shock Absorbers

7.1. Spring and shock absorber mounting points must be retained unaltered. In Classes B-D the springs and shock absorbers themselves may be changed and anti-roll bars and anti-tramp bars added.

8. Wheel and Tyres 8.1. Duplicated driving wheels are not permitted unless specified in the Official Documents .

8.2. It is permitted to replace standard wheels provided they can be fitted without altering the hubs or anything attached to them.

8.3. Tyre sizes and aspect ratios are free providing they are compatible with Construction and Use Regulations for the Vehicle concerned.

8.4. Use of the following tyres is prohibited:

a. those having any of the following patterns inscriptions or manufacturers’ designations: ‘All Seasons’ ‘Grip’ ‘Snow’ ‘Special Use’ ‘Town & Country’ ‘Mud & Snow’ ‘M+S’ ‘M.S.’ ‘M&S’ or the Three Peaks Mountain Snowflake symbol;

b. those constructed primarily for off-road use; c. those having additional grooves intentionally cut into the tread pattern [post manufacture]. d. Goodyear All Weather Steel Radial Goodyear Vector Pirelli P7 Michelin XRN or Uniband Rally Steel.

8.5. Tyres with sidewall markings removed are prohibited in all Events unless they are correctly marked ‘Retread’ or ‘Remould’.

8.6. Spare wheels and tyres must only be carried in the same numbers and mounting position(s) as provided by the manufacturer.

8.7. On the driven wheels only use minimum tyre pressures as specified in the Official Documents.

9. Transmission 9.1. Be fitted with non-torque biasing differential in full and free operation between the driving wheels unless:

a. A differential was not fitted by the manufacturer. b. The Vehicle is restricted to running in a nominated Class or Formula. 9.2. Vehicles must be two-wheel drive only unless the Official Documents allow four-wheel drive.

9.3. Four-wheel drive Vehicles operating in two-wheel drive mode are not eligible unless Permitted by the Official Documents.

9.4. If the Class structure suggested in Arts. 1.1–1.6 above is used then only gear and axle ratios as stated in the Official manufacturer ’s datasheet for the model and year of manufacture can be used except for Vehicles in Class D(b)

9.5. *Where components are changed to alter gear ratios as provided for above they must be readily interchangeable and from the same car manufacturer.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 17 Appendix 4 - Technical Regulations - Car Trials Formula 624

10. Miscellaneous 10.1. All Vehicles must:

a. Have bumpers fitted when originally supplied for the Vehicle except Vehicles in Class D(b) b. c.

Be allowed to use proprietary accessories available for the Vehicle Not use alloy or plastic panels unless fitted as original equipment

10.2. If the Class structure recommended in Arts.1.1–1.6 above is used then rear seats must be fitted in the same way as originally supplied.

10.3. Battery powered Vehicles may compete in appropriate Classes subject to the Official Documents of the Event.

10.4. Other than Chapter 7: and in the previous sections there are no special requirements under Vehicle Regulations for: Chassis/Engines Suspension Brakes Steering Cooling Oil Systems Fuel Systems Electrical Systems Weight/ Ballast Exhausts.

10.5. Exhaust Catalytic Converters are required per Ch.7 App.8 Art.1.8 except where a Vehicle does not require a catalytic converter in accordance with UK Government legislation.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 17 Appendix 4 - Technical Regulations - Car Trials Formula 625

CHAPTER 17 TRIALS Appendix 5 - Technical Regulations – National Trials Car Formula

Note: (1) * indicates that additional information must be provided in the Official Documents

Note: (2) A Regulation in italics indicates indicate a Regulation which may be amended in the Official Documents for the Event.

1. Eligibility

1.1. The National Trials Car Formula involves four-wheel Vehicles complying with all Technical Regulations except:

a. Chapter 7 App.2 Arts.6.5–6.9 and Arts.22.4 - 22.9. b. Period Vehicle Waivers . 1.2. Vehicles can be divided into two classes up to 850cc and over 850cc up to 1650cc. 1.3. Details of 750 Motor Club Trials Formula should be obtained from:

750 Motor Club, Donington Park Circuit, Melbourne Road, Castle Donington, Derby, DE74 2BN Tel: 01332 814548.

2. Safety

2.1. An electrical cut out switch per Chapter 7 App.5 Art.5 is mandatory. The switch must be located on the offside rear of the car and be rearward facing - see App. 7 Drawing 1. Ch7 App.3 Art.23.2 is recommended.

3. Chassis

3.1. Chassis construction is free but permitted wheelbase and width dimensions are shown in the App. 7 Chart 1.

3.2. Vehicle engines must be located with the centre of the foremost original manufacturer ’s sparking plug orifice not more than one-fifth of the wheelbase behind the centre line of the front wheel hubs where the only operative water radiator is mounted in front of the engine or one-eighth if no radiator is fitted in front of the engine (tolerance 1cm).

4. Body 4.1. There is no requirement for a windscreen or aero-type screen.

4.2. The bodywork must be of adequate strength and proper construction to provide a compartment for Driver and Passenger. It must meet the following criteria:

a. The front and rear overhangs must be as specified in App. 7 Chart 1. b.

It must be equipped with fixed seats for a Driver and one adult Passenger and have seat backs not less than 30.5cm measured from the uncompressed base seat cushions along the angle of the seat back.

The rearmost portion of the seats (without cushions) at this 30.5cm height must not be behind a line through the vertical axis of the rear hubs.

4.3. All Passenger handles must be of rigid construction securely anchored and neither flexible nor adjustable.

4.4. No handle must be capable of touching the ground in the event of a roll-over and all handles must be sited so that in the event of the car hitting a solid object the handles are protected from contact with the object by the chassis.

4.5. Any handle forward of the centre line of the rear axle must be fixed in accordance with dimension E as detailed in App. 7 Chart 1.

4.6. Rear mudguards must be of adequate strength to protect Driver and Passenger from wheels and tyres.

4.7. Rear mudguards must cover the full length of the tyre in plan-view at the top of the wheel and must extend outwards to within 5cm of the outside edge of the tyre wall.

4.8. Front mudguards must cover the full width of the tyre over an arc of 90° and extend rearward to not more than 10° above the horizontal line through the front hub.

5. Engine

5.1. Vehicles must use a single four-stroke production car engine not exceeding 1650cc. If forced induction is used, the coefficient will be 1.4:1 and the engine must comply with Ch.7 App.2 Art.8 regarding positive throttle closure by external springs unless exempt due to the use of original standard manufacturer fitted electronic throttle control.

5.2. Modifications are free.

6. Suspension 6.1. Any form of suspension can be used. For minimum track front and rear details see App. 7 Chart 1.

7. Steering 7.1. Any form of connection from steering wheel to the front wheels is permitted. 7.2. The position of the two swivel axes must not vary whilst steering. 7.3. Four-wheel steering is not permitted.

8. Brakes 8.1. Vehicles must be fitted with operative and effective front and rear brakes.

8.2. Independent rear braking is permitted but no self- compensating controls are permitted on the rear brakes which must be single leading-shoe drum brakes or disc brakes.

9. Wheels and Tyres 9.1. Duplicated driving wheels are not permitted unless specified in the Official Documents .

9.2. Wheel rims must not exceed a width of 11.43cm (4.5in) measured between the bead flanges nor a diameter of 15inches for driven wheels.

9.3. Tyre security devices are permitted in the rims. 9.4. Wheels should not carry any chains spikes or non-skid attachments.

9.5. Tyres must be of a maximum size 165mm x 15inches on driven wheels and must be selected from Chapter 8 Tyre List 3 .

9.6. Vehicles fitted with tyres that have previously been included in Chapter 8 Tyre List 3 may compete for class awards only and may not be included in the overall classification.

9.7. Vehicles must carry one spare only which must be a driving wheel as fitted on the car fitted with any listed tyre. It is not permitted to add ballast to the spare wheel.

9.8. Motorcycle tyres on non-driven wheels are permitted. 9.9. Minimum tyre pressure 2psi.

10. Transmission 10.1. Vehicles must be equipped with a differential gear which divides torque equally between the driving wheels.

10.2. Vehicles should not use any locked or lockable torque biasing or limited slip differentials or any other automatic device which is designed to achieve the same result.

10.3. Any clutch/torque converter attached to the engine flywheel must be bolted directly to the engine crankshaft. 10.4. Gearboxes and transmissions with a sequential shift are prohibited.

11 . Weight 11.1. Free.

12 . Miscellaneous 12.1. Vehicles can have a starter motor mounted on either engine block or clutch cover. 12.2. Vehicles must comply with the silencing levels specified in Chapter 7 App . 8 Art . 2 .

12.3. All measurements must be in accordance with these regulations when the car is unladen on a level horizontal surface.

12.4. Other than Chapter 7 and in the previous Articles of this Appendix there are no special requirements under Vehicle Regulations for: Chassis/Engines Suspension Brakes Steering Cooling Oil Systems Fuel Systems Electrical Systems Weight/Ballast Exhausts.

CHAPTER 17 TRIALS Appendix 6 - Technical Regulations – Historic Sporting Trial Car Formula (HST)

Note: (1) * indicates that additional information must be provided in the Official Documents

1. General

1.1. Vehicles must be prepared in the spirit of the period. The term “period” refers to the Historic Class for cars manufactured between 1/1/1931-31/12/70 and for cars in the Post Historic Class those manufactured between 1/1/1971 – 31/12/1978.

1.2. The Organisers of a Historic Sporting Trials reserve the right to disqualify any car that has a specification, component or modification (other than permitted specification modifications) that would not have been used in period.

1.3. In all cases the onus of proving a specification, component or modification as being in period rests with the Competitor who must submit the required documentary evidence.

2. Eligibility

2.1. The Historic Sporting Trials Car Formula involves four-wheel Vehicles complying with all Chapter 7 Technical Regulations except:

a. Chapter 7 App.2 Arts.6.5–6.9 and 22.4–22.9 b. Period Vehicle Waivers (E to G)

2.2. In the following Regulations :

a. The term “Ford Sidevalve” refers to components from the following models: E04A, E494A, E4930A/B, E93A, E493A, E83W, 100E and 103E. b.

The term “period” refers to the Historic Class for cars manufactured between 1/1/1931-31/12/70 and for cars in the Post Historic Class those manufactured between 1/1/1971 – 31/12/1978.

3. Classes

3.1. Vehicles will be divided into two classes, Historic (1/1/1931 – 31/12/1970) and Post-Historic (1/1/1971 – 31/12/1978) according to their technical construction in the following regulations.

4. Chassis

4.1. Must be of period design, constructed of steel tube and complying with the wheelbase and track dimensions shown in Appendix 7 Chart 1 .

4.2. Vehicle engines must be located with the centre of the foremost original manufacturer’s sparking plug orifice not more than one-fifth of the wheelbase behind the centre line of the front wheel hubs where the only operative water radiator is mounted in front of the engine or one-eighth if no radiator is fitted in front of the engine (tolerance 1cm).

5. Body 5.1. The Chassis must be covered by an open body of period design constructed from Aluminum, Steel or Fibreglass.

5.2. The bodywork must be of adequate strength and proper construction to provide a compartment for Driver and Passenger. It must meet the following criteria:

a. The front and rear overhangs must be as specified in App.7 Chart 1.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 17 Appendix 6 - Technical Regulations - HST Formula 629

It must be equipped with fixed seats for a Driver and one adult Passenger and have seat backs not less than 30.5cm measured from the uncompressed base seat cushions along the angle of the seat back.

The rearmost portion of the seats (without cushions) at this 30.5cm height must not be behind a line through the vertical axis of the rear hubs.

All Passenger handles must be of rigid construction securely anchored and neither flexible nor adjustable.

No handle must be capable of touching the ground in the event of a roll-over and all handles must be sited so that in the event of the car hitting a solid object the handles are protected from contact with the object by the chassis.

Rear mudguards must be of adequate strength to protect Driver and Passenger from wheels and tyres.

Rear mudguards must cover the full length of the tyre in plan view at the top of the wheel and must extend outwards to within 5cm of the outside edge of the tyre wall. Front mudguards must cover the full width of the tyre over an arc of 90° and extend rearward to not more than 10° above the horizontal line through the front hub.

ii.

6. Engine 6.1. Only the following engines are permitted in Historic Class :

a. Ford Sidevalve. b.

BMC A Series up to 948cc c. Austin 7 d.

Reliant 600/700/750 OHV e. Reliant 750 Sidevalve.

6.1.1 Maximum of 60 thou overbore is permitted, the stoke must be standard and the camshaft and valves must be in original position.

6.2. Post Historic Class must use a period engine of up to 1650cc. 6.3. At least one period European Carburetor must be fitted and in operation 6.4. Forced induction is not permitted unless originally fitted to the vehicle. 6.5. Ignition systems must use a period distributor but the use of a contact breaker is not mandatory. 6.6. Ignition mapping or any form or engine management system is not permitted. 6.7. Electric Water Pumps and cooling fans are permitted. 6.8. The fitting of a generator is optional.

7. Gearbox 7.1. Historic Class Vehicles must be:

Fitted with a gearbox from a series production car of period. the casing and gear ratios may not be modified other than the fitment of a Ford 100E input shaft to a Ford 8 gearbox.

b. The gearbox must be bolted directly to the engine.

8. Suspension

8.1. Historic Class Vehicles must use transverse leaf front suspension unless the vehicle was manufactured in period using coil over dampers with the lower mountings on or close to the king pins. Otherwise Vehicles must be fitted with period leaf or coil spring systems.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 17 Appendix 6 - Technical Regulations - HST Formula 630

8.2. Only steel bodied dampers are permitted. 8.3. Gas, remote reservoir or double adjustable dampers are not permitted. 8.4. Independent suspension is not permitted.

9. Front Axle 9.1. Historic Class Vehicles must be fitted with the front axle beam from an Austin 7 or Ford Sidevalve. 9.2. Post Historic Class Vehicles must be fitted with a steel front axle beam of period design.

10. Steering 10.1. Cars in the Historic Class must use a period steering box. 10.2. The position of the two swivel axles must not vary whilst steering. 10.3. Four-wheel steering is not permitted.

11. Rear Axle 11.1. Vehicles must use a live rear axle from a period series production car.

12. Transmission 12.1. Vehicles must be equipped with a differential gear which divides torque equally between the driving wheels.

12.2. Vehicles should not use any locked or lockable torque biasing or limited slip differentials or any other automatic device which is designed to achieve the same result.

12.3. Any clutch/torque converter attached to the engine flywheel must be bolted directly to the engine crankshaft. 12.4. Gearboxes and transmissions with a sequential shift are prohibited.

13. Brakes 13.1. Disc brakes are not permitted. 13.2. Vehicles must be fitted with operative and effective front and rear brakes.

13.3. Independent rear braking is permitted but no self-compensating controls are permitted on the rear brakes which must be single leading-shoe drum brakes.

14. Wheels and Tyres 14.1. Tyre security devices are permitted in the rims. 14.2. Wheels should not carry any chains, spikes or non-skid attachments.

14.3. Vehicles must carry one spare only which must be a driven wheel as fitted on the car fitted with any permitted tyre

14.4. It is not permitted to add Ballast to the spare wheel. 14.5. Motorcycle tyres on non-driving wheels are permitted. Minimum tyre pressure 2psi.

14.6. In Historic Class a control tyre specified in the Official Documents must be used on the driven wheels. Front wheels must bolt onto the brake/hub.

14.7. In Post Historic the rear wheels rims must not exceed a width of 11.43cm (4.5in) measured between the bead flanges nor a diameter of 15in.

14.8. Tyres must be of a maximum size 165mm x 15in on driving wheels and must be selected from Chapter 8 Tyre List 3 or previous lists.

15. Weight

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 17 Appendix 6 - Technical Regulations - HST Formula 631

15.1. Free.

16. Miscellaneous 16.1. Vehicles can have a starter motor mounted on either engine block or clutch cover. 16.2. Vehicles must comply with the silencing levels specified in Chapter. 7 App.8 Art.2.

16.3. All measurements must be in accordance with these Regulations when the car is unladen on a level horizontal surface.

16.4. Fuel must be Gasoline / Petrol as defined in Chapter 1 App.1. 16.5. The lowest overall forward gear ratio is 23:1. 16.6. No Ballast may be carried.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 17 Appendix 6 - Technical Regulations - HST Formula 632

CHAPTER 17 TRIALS Appendix 7 - Charts and Diagrams

Chart 1

National Trials Car Formula dimensions (in mm) for Under and Over 850cc Classes.

Under 850cc Class Over 850cc

A Minimum wheelbase 1905 1981 B

Minimum front track measured on C/L of tyre’s contact patch 1117 1117 Minimum rear track measured on C/L of tyre’s contact patch 1117 1117 D Minimum cockpit width 813 813 E Minimum to Passenger handle 635 635 F

Maximum front axle to no. 1 plug (tolerance 10mm)

1/5 of wheelbase 1/5 of wheelbase

G Maximum rear overhang 1/3 of wheelbase 1/3 of wheelbase H Minimum height side to seat 152 152 J Minimum seat back height 305 305 K Minimum front mudguard arc 90° 90° L Maximum rear mudguard from tyre edge 51 51

Note: CD Radiator in front of engine, if water-cooled.

NATIONAL TRIALS CAR FORMULA DIMENSIONS

Front Spark Plug

Rear Axle

Front Axle A

1 D

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 17 Appendix 7 - Charts and Diagrams 633

Drawing 2

Diagram illustrating the application of App.2 Art.4.12 . The lower figures preceded by F indicate the correct penalties for a car stopping in the position shown.

Drawing 1

Chart 2 PR Requirements

CODE

PR REQUIREMENTS A Personal visit to an adult member of household within 100m. B Letter to each householder within 100m. C Public notice. D

Personally visit and obtain signature from an adult member of any household within 500m of any point where competitors are required to stop (i.e. any control or clue point). E Consult RLO.

F Personal visit to an adult member of household within 150m. G

H Letter to each householder within 100m, unless the RLO agrees to a lesser requirement.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 17 Appendix 7 - Charts and Diagrams 634

ALL EVENTS TRAVERSING THE PUBLIC HIGHWAY

PR Requirement

Permit Section Road Type Time STANDARD (timed to second) inc.

23.59 to

All Classes (see 10.2)

1 hour after sunrise A(G) D

STANDARD

(time to minute) All Classes 24 hour B D

A & B

22.00 to 07.00

Yellow/White

UCR/Private

ROAD RALLY (inc. HISTORIC)

REGULARITY

A & B

07.00 to 22.00

White/UCR/

Private

24 hour Yellow 22.00 to 07.00 E D Habitation

TRANSPORT & NEUTRAL

A, B & (Yellow 07.00 to 22.00) A & B

24 hour C D

STANDARD & REGULARITY

ECONOMY,

NAVIGATIONAL & 12 CAR RALLIES

(All types) VINTAGE (22.00 to 07.00)

TRANSPORT &

NEUTRAL A, B, Habitation & (Yellow 07.00 to 22.00)

24 hour E D

VINTAGE (07.00 to 22.00)

ALL ALL 07.00 to 22.00 C D

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 17 Appendix 7 - Charts and Diagrams 635

VETERAN ALL ALL 24 hour C D

NAV. SCATTERS ALL ALL 24 hour E D

TREASURE HUNTS

ALL ALL 24 hour E D

TOURING ASSMS.

A & B, Habitation 22.00 to 07.00 C D

22.00 to 07.00

Yellow

White/UCR/ Private

24 hour

ROAD

A, B, Yellow Habitation

07.00 to 22.00

SPECIAL STAGE

RALLIES including SINGLE VENUE STAGE RALLIES

ACCESS/EGRESS

24 hour

ALL

To/From STAGE To PUBLIC HIGHWAY

Private or

Roads Closed by appropriate Legislation

24 hour F

SPECIAL STAGE

White/UCR/ Private 24 hour B D

CLASSIC TRIALS

and ALL OTHER EVENTS USING THE PUBLIC HIGHWAY

Yellow

22.00 to 07.00 B D

A, B, Habitation & (Yellow 07.00 to 22.00)

24 hour C D

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 17 Appendix 7 - Charts and Diagrams 636

Chart 3 All Events on the Public Highway

Requirements for All Events on the Public Highway No regular assistance organised in advance may be used by Competitors. No assistance may be expected from the Organisers.

Competitors are responsible for ensuring that they are supplied with fuel, oil, water, etc, even though the Organisers may advise on where these supplies may be obtained.

A car may not be moved other than by its own power except:

(a) By a ferry. (b) By outside means for a minimum distance necessary to extricate it from difficulty. (c) By gravity. (d) By its crew. (e) By Official assistance/recovery.

Competitors are strongly advised to carry a First Aid Kit, high visibility vests or jackets and, where appropriate, a torch.

The use of in-car cameras on the Public Highway is permitted on Observed Sections only. In all other Sections on the Public Highway the use of in-car cameras is prohibited.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 17 Appendix 7 - Charts and Diagrams 637

Chapter 18 Karting

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 - Karting 638

CHAPTER 18 KARTING

This Chapter must be read in conjunction with 1 - 6 and 9 - 11.

The following Appendices apply to this Chapter: App. 1 Organisers Regulations General App. 2 Kart Race Circuits General App. 3 Equipment for Events at Kart Race Circuits App. 4 Officials and their Obligations App. 5 Race Procedures App. 6 Short Circuit specific Judicial Provisions App. 7 Competitors Regulations including Personal Clothing and Licences App .8 General Technical Regulations App. 9 Kart Race Technical Drawings with Dimensions

1. Definitions and General Prescriptions

Data Logging Device: recognised as a device that will allow the downloading of information from the Kart. A revolution counter that monitors maximum revs is not considered a Data Logging Device.

Kart : a small four wheeled racing Vehicle with a rigid frame and no suspension of the wheels. The engine(s) including any electric powertrain driving the rear wheels only and these rear wheels must be joined by a single piece rear axle with no differential action between them. The Driver will be seated with feet to the fore.

Kart Category: a Category regulating age and may also regulate height and / or weight of the Driver in any Class. Kart Class : a Class within which Kart Racing takes place defined by the engine or other criteria. Region : A grouping of individual Recognised Kart Clubs as recognised for the time being by the ASN.

Standard Club Event : Is any Event which is run on a Recognised Kart Club’s monthly set schedule and which forms a round of the Club Championship.

Steel : (in respect of the following regulations): Structural steel or structural steel-alloy meeting the ISO 4948 classifications and the ISO 4949 designations. Only alloy steels having at least one alloy element with a mass content of ≤ 5% are allowed.

2. Championships 2.1. No Championship may take place until an ASN Championship Permit has been issued.

2.2. The Notice of Intent and Regulations must be submitted to the ASN in accordance with the timescales laid down in the relevant NCR (see Chapter 4 App.6).

2.3. Any Championship for which awards either Race by Race or as the result of a Series of Races include cash or goods in lieu of cash or in which a sponsor ’s name or title is used in connection with the title of the Championship or Series is deemed a Commercial Championship and subject to a Registration Fee which will be notified by the ASN.

2.4. In the case that a round is cancelled due to reasons of safety or Force Majeure the Championship Permit holding Club is entitled contrary to Chapter 3 App.10 Art.4.1.d to arrange an alternative date (and if necessary Venue ) upon which to run the Event provided that 85% of the Competitors entered for the Event agree to the change. Only those entered for the cancelled Event may take part in the alternative Event.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 - Karting 639

3. New Kart Classes

3.1. The acceptance by the ASN of any new non-gearbox Kart Class (except Bambino) is subject to the proposed Class being currently certified under ASN Kart Class Homologation Regulations which are available from the Technical Department of the ASN.

3.2. New non-gearbox Kart Classes (except Bambino) will only be homologated at three yearly intervals the next period commencing 01.01.2026. Applications for new Kart Class Homologations must be made in writing to the ASN by no later than 31st March of the year preceding the next period.

3.3. Exceptionally any CIK-FIA recognised and/or Homologated Class may be introduced by the ASN at any time.

3.4. Only one non-gearbox Class per Category will be permitted from any single manufacturer.

4. Specific Types of Kart Race

4.1. An Endurance Kart Race is a Kart Race of a minimum of 60 minutes duration where the need to refuel and / or make Drivers stops or changes is an integral part of the Race . Drivers must have reached their 16th birthday. A group of licensed Drivers may be referred to collectively by their Team name without the requirement to hold an Entrant Licence.

4.2. There are two types of Endurance Kart Events and which require different licence grades:

Engines which do not exceed 17hp in total per Kart Drivers must hold a minimum of a Kart Clubman Licence.

For engines exceeding 17hp in total per Kart Drivers must hold a minimum of a Kart Interclub Licence .

4.3. A Kart Clubman Event is a Kart Event run primarily as entry level Karting. Competitors must hold the minimum of a Kart Clubman Licence.

4.4. Senior Kart Clubman . For age 16 years and over. Engines may not exceed 17hp in total per Kart . 4.5. Junior Kart Clubman . For age 11 to 16. Engines may not exceed 10hp in total per Kart .

4.6. A Super K-X Event is a Kart Race Event run primarily for entry level low cost club Karting . Competitors must hold the minimum of an RS Clubman Licence endorsed by the Organising Club for racing following a competency test. Organiser ’s guidelines are published by the ASN .

4.7. A Kart K-X Event is an `Arrive & Drive’ format comprising of multiple Championships , offering a variety of Events , designed for both entry level and the more experienced Kart Competitor . Competitors must hold the minimum of an RS Clubman Licence endorsed by the Organising Club for racing following a competency test.

5. Bambino

5.1. Kart Teams are prohibited in the Bambino Category with the exception of those specifically approved by the Organising Club / Championship . An approved Team must:

• hold a valid ASN Entrant Licence

• have at least £5 million Public Liability Insurance

• have at least the Team Manager with a valid Suitability Check through the ASN.

• provide discounted space with assistance for a new Driver (s) at an agreed fee for, at least, the Driver ’s first Event(s)

5.2. A Team is a Race legal entity or other racing Team operating commercially and hosting Drivers and providing any race services or covered accommodation whether receiving financial gain or not where the principal is not also the PG Entrant Licence holder.

5.3. Bambino Event: Time Trial: Pre-Race training which can only be held on Circuits specifically licensed

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 - Karting 640

for Bambino . Drivers must hold a Kart Clubman (Bambino) Licence which they can obtain from their 6th birthday and may continue in Bambino until the 31st December in the year of their 8th birthday. Full details and criteria are contained within the ASN Karting Yearbook.

5.4. Bambino Race: A Bambino Race may only be held on Circuits specifically licensed for Bambino Racing subject to the following:

a. Drivers must be at least 6 years of age. b. Drivers must have satisfactorily completed an ARKS test. c. Drivers must hold a Kart Interclub ( Bambino ) Licence. d. The Event format must only provide for timed qualifying heats and final(s).

6. Category Restrictions

6.1. The Category, age and weight criteria are mandated below. Regulations within the ASN Karting Yearbook may apply further limitations.

7. Class Safety Exemption

7.1. For the Bambino, Cadet and Inter Categories only the ASN may in its entire discretion authorise a Driver to remain in the Category beyond the Category maximum permitted age due to that Driver ’s low weight and / or height. Any approved Exemption will only allow the Driver to compete at Interclub status Events with the benefit of that Exemption ( Chapter 1 Art.1.4 ).

8. Bambino

8.1. Pre-Race training and racing in accordance with the current ASN Bambino Karting Regulations for Drivers aged 6 -8 years. A Driver may not compete until the date of their 6th birthday but may continue in the Class until 31st December of the year of their 8th birthday.

9. Cadet 9.1. This is a Category for 8–12-year-olds.

9.2. A Driver may enter the Cadet Category from their 8th birthday or the calendar year of their 8th birthday having proof of satisfactorily completed at least 3 ASN Bambino Races (not Time Trial). Drivers may continue in the Category until 31st December in the year of their 12th birthday

A Competitor who holds a Kart Interclub ( Bambino Race ) licence may exchange it for a Kart Interclub Licence if qualified to enter Cadet. They will be a novice until having satisfactorily completed five Races.

9.3. Drivers in the year of their 8th birthday meeting a minimum height of 125cm having satisfactorily completed 3 ASN Bambino time trials may move to the Cadet Category and be restricted to a single venue subject to:

a. Having satisfactorily completed the approved ARKS course (Please refer to Chapter 6 App.6 ) b.

The Competition Licence application must be endorsed and submitted to the ASN by the Recognised Kart Club.

The Licence will be held by the ASN Recognised Kart Club and remain valid for their ASN Permitted Cadet Kart Races only until the Driver has either:

i. ii. reached their 8th birthday; or obtained the ASN Stewards or the Clerk of the Course signature on the upgrade card at a minimum of three Interclub Kart races.

9.4. Once the Driver has reached their 8th birthday they will be eligible to apply for an unrestricted Interclub Kart Licence.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 - Karting 641

9.5. Having moved into the ASN Inter or Junior Category a Driver cannot revert to the ASN Cadet Category.

10. Inter

10.1. Category for 10-13 year-olds. A Driver may enter the Inter Category from their 10th birthday or the calendar year of their 10th birthday with a Kart National Licence , and continue until the 31st December of the year of their 13th birthday.

10.2. The minimum Driver weight and height and the class weight will be defined in the Class Regulations. All restrictions will be within the parameters of the current Kart Class Homologation or Re-Homologation Regulations.

10.3. Having moved into the ASN Junior Category a Competitor cannot revert to the ASN Inter Category .

11. Junior

11.1. Category for 12 to 16 year-olds. A Driver may enter the Junior Category from the calendar year of their 13th birthday or from their 12th birthday with a Kart National Licence and continue until 31st December in the year of their 16th birthday. Drivers cannot compete in Gearbox Karts until their 13th birthday (subject to individual Class Regulations ).

11.2. Having moved into the ASN Senior Category a Driver cannot revert to the ASN Junior Category .

11.3. A minimum Driver weight is required in the Junior Category. This weight will be defined in Class Regulations and must be within the parameters of the current Kart Class Homologation or Re- Homologation Regulations.

12. Senior

12.1. A Driver may enter the Senior Category from the calendar year of their 16th birthday or from their 15th birthday with a National Licence. A minimum Driver weight is required for any Driver below the age of 16 competing in a Senior Category except for International ITE Licence holders. This weight is defined in individual Class Regulations.

13. CIK Classes

13.1. For only CIK-FIA Classes the ASN may authorise variations to the ages above subject to further limitations as per Class Regulations.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 - Karting 642

CHAPTER 18 KARTING Appendix 1 - Organisers Regulations General

1. General

1.1. Organisers must apply the Regulations provided by this Chapter 18 and its Appendices and its related NCR Chapters.

1.2. A Kart Race Event may only be Organised by Clubs registered and Recognised as Kart Clubs by the ASN.

1.3. A Permit for any Kart Event or Championship is issued at the sole discretion of the ASN and is subject to the Circuit having a valid ASN Track Licence.

1.4. A maximum of one International or ASN Championship Event Permit for gearbox and one for nongearbox Karts can be issued on the same weekend.

1.5. Organisers must adhere strictly to the Class designations referred to in this Chapter and must not in any way modify the title or Classes or permit the use of unauthorised engines unless given specific prior permission in writing by the ASN.

1.6. Full details of all approved Classes are referred to in this Chapter 18.

2. Parade / Demonstration

2.1. Application may be made to the ASN for an extension to an Organising Permit to enable a demonstration in accordance with specific criteria available upon request from the ASN.

3. Historic Karting

3.1. Application may be made to the ASN to be permitted to utilise the provisions of the CIK-FIA ClasCIK Karting Guidelines . The ASN may amend the Guidelines as detailed below. This does not permit anyone to organise Race Events for historic Karts under Permit by the ASN.

3.2. The ASN may authorise:

a. b. c.

Single-Kart parade Multi-Kart demonstration Eligible Drivers

The Driver must reach the following birthday during the calendar year

13 years old for a category with a cylinder capacity up to 100cc with a restrictor.

–

16 years old for a category with a cylinder capacity up to 210cc

–

18 years old for any category with a cylinder capacity over 210cc.

–

4. Classic Karting

4.1. The ASN may permit an extension to the period specifications of the CIK-FIA ClasCIK Karting Guidelines for Classic Karts 1/1/1989 to 31/12/1997. Eligible drivers in accordance with Art.3.2 above.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 Appendix 1 - Organisers Regulations General 643

CHAPTER 18 Appendix 2 - Kart Race Circuits General

1. General

1.1. Organisers must apply the Regulations provided by this Chapter 18 and its Appendices and its related NCR Chapters.

Circuits

2. Track Licences

2.1. All applications for a Track Licence must be submitted to the ASN and in conformity with all its requirements from time to time available from the ASN Safety Department on written request.

2.2. A digital plan of the Track must be lodged with the ASN together with the Application for a Track Licence. 2.3. A new application for a Kart Track Licence must be made at least ten weeks before any proposed Event.

2.4. If the Organiser of an Event is a new Club having been granted a Track Licence then its first three Events after being granted a Track Licence must be restricted to its own Club members and be subject to ASN observation.

2.5. Track Licences for new Short Circuits must conform to CIK-FIA Regulations and will only be granted after the ASN (and in its discretion FIA) inspection.

2.6. Temporary Tracks will be subject to ASN approval and must conform in all ways to the Track Licence issued.

3. Grading 3.1. Track Licences will be graded as follows:

a. All status Events up to and including International. b. All status Events up to and including National. c. for Interclub Events only. d.

For Bambino Events. A specific endorsement must be details on the Track Licence to Permit these Events.

3.2. If a Race Venue Track incorporates a Short Circuit those Tracks will be subject to individual grading and Track Licences.

4. Circuit Categories 4.1. There are five categories of Track for Kart Racing :

Kart Permanent Tracks with a lap distance of less than 1500m where the shape can be determined at all times and all protective barriers are permanently in position.

Kart Temporary Tracks with a lap distance less than 1500m where barriers are not permanently positioned.

Round the Houses Tracks using public roads or passing through residential areas or so classified by the ASN.

Race Venues : Any Kart circuit other than Art.4.c above and exceeding 1500m in lap distance and all licensed Motor Race Circuits.

e. Indoor Kart Tracks. 4.2. Safety precautions must be those approved by the ASN for Kart Events at that Track .

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 Appendix 2 - Kart Race Circuits General 644

4.3. During Practice the number of Karts on the Track shall not exceed the number permitted in a Race by more than 10%.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 Appendix 2 - Kart Race Circuits General 645

CHAPTER 18 KARTING Appendix 3 - Equipment for Events at Kart Race Circuits

The following minimum equipment is mandatory for all Kart Events:

1.1. Medical Equipment and Personnel and facilities as mandated by App.4 to this chapter and where applicable Chapter 11.

1.2. Warning Notices, tickets and other authorisations for admission to the Venue including the pits and paddocks and any Enclosures as required by Chapter 3 :.

1.3. The following Signals:

a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m.

Red lights for starting and stopping a Race National Flag for start back up Yellow / black quartered Blue White Yellow Yellow with red stripes Green Red Black with orange disc Black and white diagonally split Black and white chequered Green with yellow chevron

1.4. Fire extinguishers (minimum 2kg dry powder) with a manufacturer ’s or agent’s certificate issued prior to the season’s certifying that they are in working order. As a minimum, one must be available at the start line two in the paddock in clearly visible positions and one at each Marshal Post.

1.5. Track cleaning equipment comprising as a minimum two units of:

a. One ordinary shovel. b. Two brooms. c. A metal container of 3kg of a suitable cleansing agent for removing oil. d. Adequate replenishment supplies for c. above.

1.6. A public address system available to the Clerk of the Course (a hand-held powered megaphone is acceptable as a minimum) for communicating with Competitors.

1.7. A Starter ’s Sheet and an Officials’ signing-on-sheet in the control of the Event Secretary . Competitors and Officials may sign-on digitally if the Organiser elects to run the Event in this way when the relevant details must be notified in the Official Documents.

1.8. An Official Notice Board for all official communications, grid positions and Race results. The relevant details of the Official Noticeboard must be notified in the Official Documents.

1.9. Certified calibrated scales and 100kg of certified check weights. 1.10. A calibrated Noise meter, microphone and accessories. 1.11. At an Event where there is to be transponder and / or light beam timing:

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 Appendix 3 - Equipment for Events at Kart Race Circuits 646

a. The following necessary calibrated equipment must be present:

i. Decoder system for Transponders Certified in accordance with Chapter 5 PART A App.7

Arts.18 and 19 . ii.

Transponders Certified from the ASN Approved list in accordance with Chapter 5 PART A App.7 Arts.18 and 19. Light beam equipment Certified in accordance with Chapter 5 PART A App.7 Arts.18 and 19.

iii.

b. The following necessary calibrated may be used: i.

A working standalone camera system 1.12. A minimum of one Small Spill Kit must be provided in all paddock areas. 1.13. At Race Venues the equipment must be to a similar standard to that required for a Car Race Event .

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 Appendix 3 - Equipment for Events at Kart Race Circuits 647

CHAPTER 18 KARTING Appendix 4 - Officials and their Obligations

This Appendix must be read in conjunction with Chapter 3 and Chapter 5.

All Officials must always respect the provisions of Chapter 5 as they apply to their respective roles and appointments and proceed on the basis that they are ambassadors for the sport.

1. Officials

1.1. Any Club organising a Karting Event must appoint the Officials listed below and brief them fully prior to the Event .

1.2. All Officials must sign on before commencing their duties. 1.3. In carrying out their duties Officials must not expose themselves to any unnecessary hazard. 1.4. Any Official trackside must wear enhanced visibility clothing whilst High Visibility is strongly recommended.

2. Clerk of the Course 2.1. The Clerk of the Course must hold a Licence valid for the grade of the Event at which they officiate. 2.2. The duties of the Clerk are those specified in this Chapter and Chapter 5.

2.3. A Clerk who has a judicial function shall always respect the relevant provisions of Chapter 3 and App.9 to this Chapter.

2.4. A Clerk of the Course will normally have only one Deputy at any Event. 2.5. Details of the upgrading procedure for Kart Clerks of the Course are given in Chapter 5 .

2.6. The Clerk of the Course is responsible for observing all Competitors at an Event where the Stewards of the Event are responsible judicial duties in accordance with App.6 of this Chapter and if satisfied with their competence shall sign their Upgrade Card.

3. Medical Organisation 3.1. To the extent applicable Chapter 11 applies.

3.2. All International Permit and Race Venue Events must have at least one Doctor and two ambulances in attendance.

3.3. One ambulance must be equipped with portable resuscitation equipment and a crew trained in its use. 3.4. It is recommended that a fast rescue car is also available for all Race Venue Events.

3.5. At all other Events a local authority, St John’s, Red Cross or other approved ambulance equipped to a suitable standard and including a portable resuscitation unit with crew trained in its use must be in attendance at all times.

3.6. A Doctor or an ASN-registered Paramedic in accordance with Chapter 11 must be present throughout Practice and Racing.

3.7. It is recommended that if entries exceed 100 or for ASN Championship Events there should be two ambulances present or one ambulance and a fully equipped medical centre.

3.8. If only one ambulance is present and it has to leave the Venue Racing must not continue until it returns unless alternative suitable transport approved by the Doctor or the chief medical representative is present and available with sufficient trained staff to operate it and the equipment carried.

4. Kart Scrutineer

4.1. The Chief Kart Scrutineer must hold a licence (minimum National grade) valid for the grade of Event . Licence grades are mandated at Chapter 5.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 Appendix 4 - Officials and their Obligations 648

5. Marshals

5.1. The Clerk of the Course must ensure that responsible persons are appointed as Flag, Track and Paddock Marshals and that they are fully briefed as to their duties.

5.2. All Marshal posts as detailed on the Track Plan must be fully manned and equipped. Marshal posts must be properly protected and Flag Marshals must always remain within the confines of that protection while any Race is in progress.

6. Lap Scoring and Timing

6.1. Manual lap scoring must be carried out at all Events . Where transponder timing takes place a working stand-alone camera system under the direct control of the Chief Timekeeper for the purposes of lap scoring should be used.

6.2. Where there is no transponder timing the Chief Lap Scorer must be named in the Official Documents as a Judge of Fact in relation to Race finishing order.

6.3. Where timing takes place there must be a Chief Timekeeper who must hold an ASN Licence valid for the grade of Event as provided by Chapter 5 App.18 Chart 1.

6.4. Where timing takes place to an accuracy of 0.001 seconds the Chief Timekeeper must be of Kart National grade.

6.5. If using a light beam timing must be to an accuracy of not less than 0.001 seconds and the equipment must be certified in accordance with Chapter 5.

6.6. Transponder timing at Short Circuit Kart Events must not be to an accuracy of less than 0.01 seconds.

6.7. Transponders must be from the ASN Approved list and used in conjunction with decoders certified in accordance with Chapter 5 .

6.8. The fitment of the transponder must be in accordance with the manufacturer ’s instructions at a predetermined position on the Kart as detailed in the Official Documents.

7. Flag Marshals 7.1. Flag Marshals are responsible for signalling to Competitors and warning them of hazards. 7.2. Flag Marshals should not leave their posts to render assistance in the case of an incident.

8. Track Marshals 8.1. Track Marshals are responsible to the Clerk of the Course for ensuring:

The Track surface, markings and protection systems are maintained in good order throughout an Events .

b. Where alternative routes on Tracks exist those not being used are properly indicated. c.

The fire-fighting equipment is readily available and correctly located and that Track Marshals are familiar with its operation

The Track cleaning units are located at suitable points

d. e.

Proper supervision of the removal from the Track of any Kart which may have stopped on or adjacent to the Track

f. All entrances to the Track are manned and that no unauthorised person comes within the Course.

8.2. If Enclosures are not surrounded by fencing Track Marshals must be stationed at intervals between all Enclosures and the Track .

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 Appendix 4 - Officials and their Obligations 649

Paddock Marshals

8.3. Paddock Marshals must:

a. Maintain orderly conduct in the paddock and / or pit area. b.

Notify Competitors of their starting positions

c. Assemble Competitors prior to a Race. d. Ensure that no competing Kart goes onto the Track until it has been approved by the Scrutineers. e. Exclude from the paddock any unauthorised persons.

9. Event Secretary

9.1. The Secretary’s duties are detailed in Chapter 5.

10. Stewards

10.1. The Organising Club is responsible for the appointment of two Event Stewards whose duties are detailed in Chapter 5 ..

10.2. The ASN will also appoint a Steward whose duties are detailed in Chapter 5. and App.6 of this Chapter and who will also be responsible for observing all Competitors (including novices) where the Clerk of the Course is responsible for all judicial duties and if satisfied with their competence shall sign their Licences.

10.3. Stewards must not undertake any additional duties.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 Appendix 4 - Officials and their Obligations 650

CHAPTER 18 KARTING Appendix 5 - Race Procedures

1. General

1.1. The Clerk of the Course may permit a change of make of Kart Chassis or engine from those nominated on an Entry form provided application is made in writing before the end of scrutineering.

1.2. Only a Driver using a scrutineered engine / Kart Chassis who has completed a minimum of three laps Practice at racing speeds within the official Practice period will be permitted to Race.

1.3. Only one chassis may be used except when a second chassis is permitted in the Official Documents.

1.4. The maximum number of engines which may be used during an Event is two unless specifically varied in the Official Documents.

1.5. Changing the crankcase constitutes a change of engine.

1.6. Unless otherwise stated in Official Documents the Starter shall be deemed as a Judge of Fact in respect of Race Starts.

1.7. The number practising and / or taking part in qualifying Practice if applicable at any time shall not exceed the maximum permitted on the Track for a Race by more than 10%.

1.8. Adequate Practice periods must be allotted to all Classes which must include sufficient time for Drivers requiring observation to be seen.

1.9. Where possible novice and experienced Drivers should be allocated separate sessions. 1.10. Exceptionally for Race Venue Events 120% of the number permitted to Race may Practice at a time. 1.11. At no time may non-gearbox and gearbox Karts Practice or Race together.

1.12. Due regard must be paid to Driver experience and the relative speed of the Karts if different Classes are on the Track at any one time during Practice .

1.13. The Track or its features or markings may only be changed between the last Practice period and the Event itself in exceptional circumstances.

1.14. Should it be necessary to make any change following the scheduled Practice an additional period of Practice must be arranged.

1.15. The starting order in which Karts shall be arranged will be determined by:

a. Ballot. b. Lap times recorded in Practice . c. Order of receipt of entry. d. Finishing order of a preceding Race. e. As defined in Official Documents.

1.16. With the exception of Kart Clubman Events where the Kart Clubman guidelines apply in all Races where the grid position is determined by Art.1.15.a., c. or e. above novice Drivers must occupy the rearmost grid positions. Where timed qualifying is used it shall have the same status as a Race.

1.17. The Pole position must be on the side of the Track that is on the inside of the first corner after the start or as otherwise defined on the Track Licence subject to Art.1.17.a below.

Championships may request authority from the ASN to make provision for the pole position Driver to elect to take their grid position to the right or left of the Track provided that the Clerk of the Course is notified on the Pole Position Notice Form as soon as the Driver reaches the “Pre-Grid“. This election will only modify the first row of the grid to the exclusion of the remainder of it.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 Appendix 5 - Race Procedures 651

The Pole Position Notice Form must be signed by the Driver and the Entrant responsible for the Driver at the Event .

1.18. The Start Line will be indicated on the Track by a painted white line. Optionally (and recommended) Tracks may also use the following markings to aid controlled starts (see App.9 Drawing 13):

Two 2m wide lanes bordered by painted white lines from a point no more than 100m and no less than 50m leading to the Start Line.

A painted yellow line 25m prior to the Start Line . For rolling starts this yellow line will also be indicated by soft cones (one cone on each side of the Track ).

1.19. When the Starter is ready for a Race to commence the Green Signal must be shown to Drivers . A Marshal will then display a Green Signal which will be the Signal for the Karts to be released on to the Track . After the Marshal has removed the Green Signal the entrance to the Track will be closed and no further Karts will be allowed to join the Track . Exceptionally the Official Documents may permit participation after the removal of the Green Signal .

1.20. Karts will form up in the assembly area and will be started when authorised by the Paddock Official after the Green Signal has been shown. Drivers will be under Starter ’s Orders from the moment that the Green Signal is displayed.

1.21. Each Track will establish a ‘Safety Line’. Any Competitor who having passed that ‘Safety Line’ receives assistance from anyone other than a signed-on Official may be Disqualified from the results.

1.22. Starts for Races shall be as shown below:

a. ‘Le Mans’ or any starts other than those specified below are forbidden. b. Short Circuit Kart Events (all classes). A standing start with engines running or a rolling start. c. Race Venue Events . All starts must be slow rolling starts following a formation lap.

1.23. In the case of a rolling start on display of the Green Signal Karts will proceed round the Track in grid formation at a steady pace to await the starting Signal .

1.24. The Karts may be preceded by an official Pace Vehicle. 1.25. If there is no Pace Vehicle the Driver in No.1 position will control the speed.

1.26. When the Starter is satisfied that the Karts are approaching the Start Line in correct position and at an acceptable speed the starting Signal will be given by extinguishing the red light (or by raising the National Flag should a light failure occur). If a further lap is required the red lights will remain on or the National Flag will not be raised.

1.27. Once the Race start has been given Drivers can break formation but should this occur before the start Signal is given i.e. Drivers leave the corridors or break formation with the red lights on then a ‘false start’ penalty will be applied.

1.28. False / Jump / Standing Start : A false start occurs when a Driver under Starter ’s orders gains an unfair advantage by either:

a. being in an incorrect position on the grid or b. moving forward from the Driver ’s prescribed position.

1.29. Breaking formation : In the case of a rolling start a Driver under Starter ’s orders who fails to maintain their corridor or accelerates early or unevenly will be penalised in accordance with Art.1.30 below.

1.30. The penalty added to the time taken by the Competitor to complete the course shall be the addition of 3 seconds (or 3 places where there is no Licensed Timekeeper ) for partly crossing the lanes and of 5 seconds for completely getting out of the corridor. This will not incur penalty points. The penalty for accelerating early or unevenly will be 5 seconds or 3 places where there is no Licensed Timekeeper.

1.31. Where the optional Track markings are used the Clerk of the Course must make reference to their use

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 Appendix 5 - Race Procedures 652

in the Drivers briefing. When used the start Signal will not be given before the yellow line. The Karts approaching the Start Line must remain in formation at approximately half Race speed (which will be set by the Pole sitter) and be driven within the set of two-metre lines appropriate to their side of the grid. It is an offence to accelerate in any way before the yellow line or drive outside the marked lines (please refer to App 9 Kart Race Technical Drawings )

1.32. In the case of a standing start on display of the Green Signal Karts will proceed round the Track to the designated start line where a Red Signal will be shown and they will stop on their allotted grid markings. No start lights will be illuminated.

Should a Kart fall to the back of the field for any reason on the rolling lap and not be in formation at the display of the yellow Signals at the corners prior to the start that Kart must immediately fall back to and start from the rear of the grid. When the Starter is satisfied that the Karts are in their correct position they will withdraw the Red Signal and point to the start Signal which may be illuminated as red lights (this may be in a sequence of Red Lights until they all remain on). iii. Within a period of 5 seconds the Red Signals will be extinguished to indicate a Race start. iv.

ii.

Any movement prior to the Red Signals being extinguished will be judged as a false start and will be penalised with a minimum of 5 second penalty (or 3 places where there is no licensed Timekeeper). If the starter is not satisfied or a Driver is unable to take the start they will indicate a false start which means an extra formation lap must be covered.

a. A Driver unable to start must remain in the Kart and notify that situation by raising an arm. b.

In this case an additional formation lap may be granted; any Drivers who have been unable to start will be allowed to get out of their Karts and restart by their own means and once the whole field has passed them but

They will not be authorised to regain their original position in the formation and will take the start from the rear of the grid in order of arrival. No other Driver will be allowed to occupy the place(s) which have remained vacant.

2. Stopping of a Race

2.1. The Clerk of the Course (or their Deputy ) may decide to stop a Race or Practice at any time. Should a Race be stopped by the display of red Signals the following procedures will apply:

i. Any Race stopped before the leader has completed two laps will be declared null and void. ii. The Race will be re-run in its entirety as per Art.2.2 below. iii.

All available Karts will restart from their original grid positions; the grid may be closed up for any missing Karts . iv. Front fairings may be reset without penalty on the grid.

2.2. If it becomes necessary to remove all Karts from the Track repairs may be made and all Karts that came under Starter ’s orders for the original Race will be permitted to start the re-run Race from the dummy grid in their original positions.

2.3. If 2 or more laps but less than 75% of Race distance has been completed by the leader the Clerk of the Course shall at their discretion decide to:

Abandon the Race. In which case the Race (result) shall be declared as the order of finishing on the last full lap completed by all Karts proceeding under their own power when the red Signal was first displayed followed in classification by non-running Karts on a roll back of laps basis and order of stopping.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 Appendix 5 - Race Procedures 653

b. Consider the Race suspended and run it as a two-part Race. i.

In this case the Karts will be restarted in a single file rolling start with no overtaking before the start line. After one or more laps under Yellow and Black quarter Signals the start will be signified by the ‘waving’ of the Green Signal The starting order for the second part of the Race shall be the order at the last full lap completed by all Karts still proceeding under their own power when the Red Signal was first displayed. Any time penalty will be recorded and added to the final result. Drivers “one or more lap(s) down” shall be put in their correct position i.e. behind the Drivers on the same lap as the leader. v. The Race distance shall be the number of laps required to make up the full Race distance. vi.

ii.

iii.

iv.

The finishing order of the second part shall be the finishing order of the Race ( Drivers “one or more lap(s) down” in the first part shall be deemed to have finished the Race “one or more lap(s) down” unless they have un-lapped themselves) followed in classification by non-running Karts on a roll back of laps basis and order of stopping. c.

If the Judge of Fact reports that the front fairing on one or more Karts was no longer in the correct position when the Race was suspended in all situations a time penalty of 5 seconds will be imposed automatically on the Driver(s) concerned and added to the final result. This is not susceptible to Appeal . Any front fairing which is subject to a Judge of Fact report must be reset on the grid before the Race is re-started.

2.4. If 75% or more of the Race distance has been completed by the leader the Race will be deemed to have ended. The Race results shall be declared as the order of finishing on the last full lap completed by all Karts still proceeding under their own power at the time of the first showing of the Red Signal was displayed followed in classification by non-running Karts on a roll back of laps basis unless Championship Regulations specify otherwise.

3. Re-Starting Procedures 3.1. If the Race is to be re-run in its entirety or restarted the following procedure will apply:

While the Race is stopped the whole Course will be considered as Parc Fermé and no work may be carried out to any Kart (except to reset the front fairing in the correct position under the supervision of the Scrutineers ).

Mechanics will not be allowed on the Course until permission is given by the Clerk of the Course . Neither the mechanics nor Incident Marshals already on the Track can approach or touch any Kart until permission is given. When authorised by the Clerk of the Course spark plugs may be changed and finger adjustments may be made to the carburettor settings.

ii.

iii.

3.2. If a Kart leaves the Track during the stoppage:

a. It will not be permitted to rejoin the Race. b.

Any Kart not Racing at the time of the incident that caused the Race to be stopped cannot rejoin the re- started Race .

Karts involved in the incident that gave rise to the stoppage or who subsequently stopped racing because of the incident prior to the Red Signal may only re-join the Race if the Clerk of the Course in consultation with the Chief Scrutineer is satisfied that a Kart is safe to continue without repair and the Chief Medical Officer is satisfied the Competitor is fit to continue racing. These Karts must start at the rear whether the Race is run over the full distance or as a two part Race.

Those Karts that stopped after the incident that gave rise to the stoppage because they were instructed

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 Appendix 5 - Race Procedures 654

to do so or because the Track was blocked may join the restarted Race in their proper places. 3.3. For Events on Race Venues and Round the House Circuits the procedure is detailed in Chapter 12 .

4. Race Finish and Results

4.1. After receiving the end of Race Signals all Karts must proceed directly to the Parc Fermé without stopping giving or receiving any object whatsoever and without any assistance (except that of Marshals if necessary).

4.2. Any classified Kart unable to reach the Parc Fermé by its own means will be placed under the control of Marshals who will supervise the movement of the Kart to the Parc Fermé.

4.3. The method of determining the Results of a Race must be specified in the Official Documents for the Event and / or Championship as the case may be.

4.4. Where timing is not authorised it is prohibited to publish times or speeds in any Practice or Race Result.

4.5. Any other publication or display giving this information must clearly be shown and declared as ‘Unofficial’ and ‘For Information Purposes Only’.

4.6. Should the end of the Race Signal inadvertently or otherwise be displayed before the leading Vehicle completes the scheduled number of laps or before the prescribed Race time has been completed the Race will nevertheless be deemed to end at the moment the Signal is given. If the chequered Flag/Signal is given to the leader then the Result will be issued accordingly but if the chequered Flag/Signal is first given to a Competitor other than the leader then the Result should be given at the end of the last completed lap of the leader. Should the end of the Race Signal be inadvertently delayed the Race will nevertheless be deemed to finish at the correct moment and Competitors be classified accordingly in the Results .

5. Parc Fermé

5.1. The Parc Fermé shall be sufficiently large and secure so that no unauthorised persons can gain access. The location of Parc Fermé at the Venue must be specified in the Official Documents by reference to a plan.

5.2. Officials may require a Kart and / or Driver ’s personal equipment to be moved to a designated location and there remain under Parc Fermé controls and condition.

5.3. Parc Fermé restrictions and permissions must be specified in the Official Documents.

5.4. Only authorised Officials may enter Parc Fermé and inspect a Kart and Driver ’s personal equipment and no intervention on a Kart or Driver ’s personal equipment is allowed by any Driver or person however associated with the Driver ’s Entry unless authorised by such Officials pursuant to Art.5.3 above.

5.5. When the Parc Fermé is in use Parc Fermé regulations apply in the area between the finishing line and the Parc Fermé entrance.

6. Signals 6.1. Red lights are mandatory for the starting Signal . 6.2. The National Flag should only be used as a starting Signal if the lights fail.

For a rolling-start the Karts start when the Signal is raised b. For a standing start the Karts start when the Signal is dropped. 6.3. A Green Signal with Yellow chevron indicates a false start.

6.4. A Green Signal may be used to indicate either a formation lap or the end of a yellow Signal zone on the Track or per Art.11.5.f below.

6.5. A Yellow / Black quartered Signal may be introduced by the Clerk of the Course at Short Circuit Kart Race Events and deployed as follows:

The Signal will be ‘waved’ and first be displayed at the Start / Finish line and then will flow around the

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 Appendix 5 - Race Procedures 655

Circuit in both directions as an adjacent post displays their ‘waved’ Signal . b.

Upon display of the Yellow / Black quartered Signal all Karts must slow down to a steady pace (as on a rolling start) and must line up in order behind the leader who will act as the pace setter.

c. No overtaking is permitted. d.

The field will remain in close formation at reduced speed for as long as it takes to clear the obstruction or remove the hazard.

Competitors who fail to slow down sufficiently or who overtake under the Yellow / Black Signal may be disqualified or otherwise penalised.

When the Clerk of the Course is satisfied that the problem is resolved the Race will be resumed by the display of a Green Signal at the Start / Finish line and the simultaneous withdrawal of all Yellow / Black Signals around the Circuit. Overtaking remains strictly forbidden until having passed the green Signal on the start and finish line.

6.6. Yellow Signals

a. A stationary Yellow Signal shall be shown to warn of an incident or hazard after that Marshal Post . This Signal means danger slow down sufficiently to ensure that full control of the Kart can be retained. No overtaking. b.

Yellow Signal – ‘Waved’ means: Great danger. Slow down considerably. Be prepared to suddenly change from the projected racing line or take other evasive action including stopping if necessary. No overtaking.

Yellow Signal with Red Stripes may be used to indicate slippery surface ahead and if ‘waved’ then imminent.

6.7. Red Signal shall be displayed to immediately bring all racing to a stop where an incident has occurred necessitating Marshals to go on Track. Karts shall be directed by Marshals to either return with caution to the grid or to Parc Fermé as directed by the Clerk of the Course or the Race Director . No overtaking is permitted and Drivers must be prepared to stop at any time.

6.8. Blue Signal may be displayed as a static Signal to indicate to the Driver of a Kart that another Competitor is following close behind of as a ‘waved’ Signal is trying to overtake.

6.9. Black and White diagonal Signal may be displayed to warn a Driver as to Driving Standards and may give rise to penalties or the Black Signal .

6.10. Black Signal may be displayed to a Driver for a breach of Driving Standards or for Technical irregularity and required the Driver to stop in pits or Parc Fermé at the end of the lap on which it is displayed and must report immediately to the Clerk of the Course .

6.11. Black Signal with Orange disc and Kart number may be displayed to indicate to the Driver concerned that there is a mechanical failure affecting the Kart . The Kart must be driven immediately to the pits or Parc Fermé for examination by a Scrutineer .

6.12. Black and White Chequered Signal shall be displayed to end a competitive or other session other than where a Red Signal has been deployed.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 Appendix 5 - Race Procedures 656

CHAPTER 18 KARTING Appendix 6 - Short Circuit specific Judicial Provisions

1. Clubman Short Circuit Kart Events

1.1. The Clerk of the Course is responsible for all judicial duties with the exception of Events specifically authorised by the ASN for the Stewards of the Event to have Judicial responsibility in accordance with Art.2.1 below.

1.2. Neither the decision for imposing any penalty nor the penalty itself during any timed qualifying or heats is eligible for Appeal . Where the Clerk of the Course is satisfied with the evidence presented and for decisions issued before the relevant end of session Signal is shown imposing time or place penalties only no formal Hearing is required.

1.3. In respect of the final(s) the Stewards of the Event may hear a validly lodged Appeal where permitted against sporting matters determined by the Clerk of the Course . However there is no right of Appeal to the National Court against any sporting decision of the Stewards of the Event OR against any Eligibility Decision .

1.4. Clubman Status Kart Events may operate the CIK Judicial process at Arts.2.2 - 2.4 below where specific authority has been requested by the Organiser and has been given by the ASN for the purposes of the Event Permit . Such Permission must be clearly notified in the Official Documents for the Event .

2. Interclub and above status 2.1. The Stewards of the Event are responsible for all Judicial duties.

2.2. Neither the decision for imposing any penalty nor the penalty itself is eligible for Appeal . Where the Stewards of the Event are satisfied with the evidence presented and for decisions issued before the relevant end of session Signal is shown imposing time or place penalties only. No formal Hearing is required.

2.3. Any penalty resulting from a Judge of Fact statement may be imposed directly by the Clerk of the Course .

2.4. Interclub Status Kart Events may operate the Clerk of the Course Judicial process at Art.1.1 above where specific authority has been requested by the Organiser and has been given by the ASN for the purposes of the Event Permit . Such Permission must be clearly notified in the Official Documents for the Event .

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 Appendix 6 - Short Circuit specific Judicial Provisions 657

CHAPTER 18 KARTING Appendix 7 - Competitors Regulations including Personal Clothing and Licences

1. General

1.1. This Appendix must be read in conjunction with the general text of this Chapter 18 and the related Appendices. Chapters 1, 2, 6, 9 and 12 are of application.

1.2. Competitors must report for signing-on and scrutineering at the time specified in the Official Documents or risk being fined or Disqualified . Signing on may be managed digitally by the Organisers and then the details must be set out in the Official Documents.

1.3. Presentation to the Scrutineers of a Kart and the Driver ’s personal protection equipment is a Declaration of Conformity with all applicable Regulations. There is no right of Appeal to the National Court in respect of an Eligibility Decision made at the Event or where a Kart or any component of it is sealed at the Event for subsequent examination other than at the Event. See App.6 to this Chapter.

1.4. No Kart may be driven in Practice or in a Race until it has been passed and logged by the ASN Scrutineer.

1.5. In addition to signing-on the following items must be produced for approval on demand of an Official of the Event:

a. Applicable Licence of the appropriate grade. b. Club Membership Card (if appropriate).

1.6. For all Events except Bambino the Clerk of the Course in consultation with the Stewards will designate the Race as follows:

a. DRY – All Competitors must use dry tyres. b. OPEN – Competitors have the choice of tyres (i.e. wet or dry). c. WET – All Competitors must use wet tyres.

1.7. Wet tyres are defined in App.8 to this Chapter.

a. At no time may a Kart be fitted with a mixture of wet and dry tyres. b. Tyres shall only be those defined in the Class Regulations. 1.8. Competitors must obey the Signals detailed in App. 5 to this Chapter.

1.9. All Karts that take the start by crossing the start line under their own power will be classified as a finisher on a roll back of laps basis.

1.10. Where the Official Documents so provide a finisher may have to complete a certain designated percentage of a race in order to be classified as a finisher.

1.11. Any Driver leaving the Track more than twice for whatever reason may be Disqualified from the Race.

1.12. Where a Driver consistently drives with a wheel off the Track or leaves the Track this will be a breach of Regulations and the Driver may be penalised at the discretion of the Clerk of the Course.

1.13. Once a Race or Practice session has started Karts may only be worked upon in a place of safety. 1.14. Refuelling during a Race is forbidden unless permitted by the Official Documents.

1.15. Any Driver receiving outside assistance other than by an Official between coming under starter ’s orders and the end of the Race may be Disqualified from the results at the discretion of the Clerk of the Course.

1.16. All transmission or communication of data whether verbal or electronic between a moving Kart and the Kart’s Entrant or Team is only allowed in the following circumstances:

If officially sanctioned cameras and other recording devices and transponders are fitted as required by the Organisers of a specific Event as specified in the Official Documents.

Voice communication in Endurance Races where the Official Documents specify the use of relevant equipment which must be appropriately licensed.

c. A single burst of timing data from the Kart as it passes the receiver. d.

Where the Driver / Competitor has an ASN approved information system that receives timing data and / or instructions or warnings which is under the direct control of the Clerk of the Course or Chief Timekeeper.

1.17. For Short Circuit Karting only engines must not be run in the pits or paddock. The Chief Scrutineer may permit a Competitor to start their engine in a designated area only as identified by the Chief Scrutineer.

2. Track Regulations and Driving Standards

2.1. Any Driver intending to leave the Course or to enter the pits shall Signal the intention to do so in good time and be satisfied that it is safe to do so.

2.2. The Driver of any Vehicle leaving the Track because of being unable to maintain racing speed should Signal the intention to do so in good time and is responsible for ensuring that the maneuver is carried out safely and as near as possible to a point of exit.

2.3. Should a Kart stop somewhere other than in the pit lane it must be moved as soon as possible so that its presence does not constitute a danger or hinder other Drivers . If the Driver is unable to move the Vehicle marshals may assist. If such assistance results in the Driver re-joining the Race this must be done without committing any breach of the Regulations and without gaining any advantage.

2.4. No Kart able to proceed under its own power shall be stopped either on the Track or the verges of the Course but shall proceed to the pits or paddock unless in doing so causes a hazard to other Competitors.

2.5. A Kart alone on the Track may use the full width of the Track.

However as soon as it is caught by a Kart which is about to lap it the Driver must allow the faster Driver past at the first possible opportunity.

b. Any Driver who appears to ignore the blue Signals will be reported to the Clerk of Course. c.

Overtaking according to the circumstances may be carried out either on the right or on the left. In response to each attempted overtaking maneuver no more than one change of direction to defend a position is permitted.

Any Driver moving back towards the racing line having earlier defended position off-line must leave at least one Kart width between their own Kart and the edge of the Track on the approach to the corner.

Manoeuvres liable to hinder other Drivers such as deliberate crowding of a Kart beyond the edge of the Track or any other abnormal change of direction are strictly prohibited.

Any Driver who appears guilty of any of the above offences may be reported to the Clerk of Course and penalised.

2.6. Drivers must use the Track at all times and may not leave the Track without a justifiable reason. For the avoidance of doubt:

a. The white lines defining the Track edges are considered to be part of the Track . b.

A Driver will be judged to have left the Track if any part of the contact patch of the tyre of the Vehicle goes beyond either the outer edge of any kerb or the white line where there is no kerb.

2.7. Should a Kart leave the Track for any reason and without prejudice to Art.2.9 below the Driver may re-join. However this may only be done when it is safe to do so and without gaining any advantage.

2.8. Causing a collision with another Kart and / or repetition of serious mistakes or the appearance of a lack of control over the Vehicle (such as leaving the Track ) will be reported to the Clerk of Course and may entail the imposition of penalties up to and including the Disqualification of any Driver concerned.

2.9. It is not permitted to drive any Kart unnecessarily slowly or erratically or in a manner deemed to be

potentially dangerous to other Drivers at any time. 2.10. Breaches of Art.2.7 above may be reported and/or determined only by:

A duly appointed Judge of Fact and/or b. Senior Officials through the use of suitable equipment under the control of the Organisers.

2.11. Breaches of Art.2.7 may be penalised as follows:

In qualifying the lap on which the breach occurred should be disallowed. Note should be made on the result sheet of any times disallowed.

b. During races the following scale of penalties will be applied: c. d. e. f. g. h. i.

1st breach – no penalty 2nd breach – warning Signal 3rd breach – a 5 second penalty added to Race time 4th breach – a further 10 second penalty added to Race time 5th breach – Drive Through penalty in addition to the preceding time penalties 6th breach – Black Signal

Care should be taken to ensure that all Signals (flag and / or Light Board and Board ) must have been displayed to the Driver concerned before moving up the penalty scale. All penalties applied should be noted on the result sheet.

2.12. No competing Kart shall be driven in the reverse direction of the Track except for the minimum distance to remove it from an unexpected situation and then only under official supervision.

Clothing

3. Crash Helmets

3.1. Crash helmets bearing the ASN Approval Sticker must be worn at all times during training and Practice and Competition.

3.2. The user must ensure that the helmet is to a standard specified in the current ASN NCR and that it fits and is secured properly and that it is in a serviceable condition. Refer to Chapter 9.

3.3. Full face helmets complete with visor are mandatory. 3.4. Visors must be manufactured by the helmet manufacturer and must not impede vision.

4. Gloves and Suits

4.1. Complete gloves (not mitts or gloves with open backs) and boots (which must cover and protect the ankles) must be worn at all times.

4.2. Trailing or loose scarves are not permitted.

4.3. For Race Venue Kart Events all Drivers must wear leather suits, suits approved to FIA Standard 8877- 2022 Grade 2, or suits approved to EN17092 Class AAA.

4.4. For Short Circuits only leather suits or suits of a recognised CIK Homologation standard per Chapter 9. are acceptable.

4.5. Leather suits must comply with current CIK-FIA Regulations and have a minimum thickness of 1.2mm measured at any part of the suit.

4.6. All clothing must be securely fastened at wrists and ankles and neck and must be adequate to minimise abrasions.

4.7. Drivers may wear two-piece suits providing they are zipped together and confirm with Arts. 25 to 28 above.

4.8. Correctly fitted wet-weather suits specifically designed for this purpose may be worn over an approved Kart suit in wet weather.

4.9. Driving suits helmets visors and all other protective clothing must be presented for inspection by the Scrutineers on demand including in Parc Fermé .

4.10. The only acceptable CIK-FIA homologated suits are those to standard No. 2001-1 or No.2013-1 level 1 or 2 or those to FIA Standard 8877-2022 Grade 1 or 2. Examples of the CIK-FIA homologation labels are shown in Appendix 9 Drawing 2 .

5. Kart Licences – See Chapter 6 For information on Licence validity see the chart of Minimum Acceptable Licences in Chapter 6.

5.1. Kart Competition Licences except Kart Clubman Licences are issued to Competitors from the age of six. There are five grades:

Interclub National International ITG International ITF International ITE 5.2. Entrant Licences will not be issued to persons under 18 years of age. 5.3. Retaining and upgrading procedures are set out in Chapter 6 .

a. b. c. d. e.

5.4. Except in the Bambino Class or Super KX Events, a Competitor will be considered as a ‘ Novice ’ and must use Novice number plates in accordance with App.8 Art.30.10 and for Race Venue Kart Events a Novice Cross Plate is required (yellow square on the rear of the Kart dimension 7 x 7 inches with a black diagonal cross with strokes 6 inches long and 1 inch wide) until the Driver has obtained six Kart Race signatures from ASN Stewards or a Clerk of the Course per App.4 Art.2.6 to this Chapter. Completion of the ARKS Course as provided by Chapter 6 will constitute one of the six signatures. One of these six signatures may have been obtained at a NatSKA Event held under an ASN Permit . Thereafter the Driver can continue to compete on an Interclub Licence or can upgrade to a National Licence in accordance with Chapter 6 App.6 but will no longer be considered a Novice.

5.5. A valid Licence must be produced at signing-on at all Events. 5.6. Race Venue Event Licences

The Driver may either produce a Kart Licence specifically endorsed valid for Race Venue Karting or a Car Race Licence see the chart of Minimum Acceptable Licences in Chapter 6.

New Competitors must be able to demonstrate that they have either undertaken their ARKS test at a Venue Licensed for Race Venue Karting or having taken the Short Circuit ARKS test must demonstrate their experience to the satisfaction of the Clerk of the Course or an ARKS Instructor during Practice at a Race Venue Kart Event . New Drivers will be considered as Novices and must carry Novice plates until they have received four signatures from the Clerk of the Course for competing successfully at Race Venue Kart Events.

c. Drivers in Division 1 will require the minimum of a Kart National Licence. 5.7. For Competitors under the age of 18 years a PG Entrant Licence is required Chapter 6 applies.

6. Category Restrictions

6.1. The Category, age and weight breaks are provided in the general text of this Chapter 18. Regulations within App.10 may apply further limitations.

7. General Conduct and Social Media

7.1. All Competitors by applying for and obtaining a Licence from the ASN and by Entering and competing in any Race and / or Championship Event or other Event which relies upon the Competitor holding an ASN Licence undertake to respect and comply with all Codes of Conduct published by the ASN in relation to their general behaviour and conduct and of those connected to their Entry or participation including engagement with any social media platform all which codes are hereby given Regulatory effect. Any breach of this Regulation may lead to suspension of Licence by the Stewards of an Event or the temporary or permanent suspension and / or withdrawal of any Competitor ’s Licence by the ASN and / or referral to the National Court.

8. Breaches of Regulations

8.1. Any breach of these Regulations or of any applicable NCR may be subject to the applicable Judicial Procedures under Chapter 2 and / or App.6 to this Chapter.

CHAPTER 18 KART RACING Appendix 8 - General Technical Regulations

This Appendix must be read in conjunction with App.9 (Drawings) and App.10 (Class Regulations). All Karts must comply with these Technical Regulations .

Modification, addition, variation or tuning other than specifically permitted in these Regulations is prohibited. Anyone requiring clarification or definitions concerning the Technical Content of these Regulations should apply in writing to the ASN .

The approval of a Kart or component is an indication of the acceptance solely for the purpose of these Regulations and is not to be taken as a guarantee or warranty as to the standard of its design or manufacture or its fitness or suitability for any use to which it may be put.

1. General

1.1. The Scrutineer must be satisfied that a Kart is safe is of an adequately strong construction does not include any temporary components and presents no undue hazard to its Driver or to other Competitors .

1.2. Steering brakes and wheels must be adequate for speeds that are likely to be attained. 1.3. Rear view mirrors are forbidden. 1.4. Drive-by-wire and traction control devices are forbidden. 1.5. The use of titanium or magnesium is prohibited.

2. Chassis Frame

2.1. The Chassis Frame must be constructed from magnetic Steel tubing and be permanently marked with a unique number in an easily accessible position.

2.2. Cross-section is free. 2.3. The Chassis Frame must be of one-piece construction either welded or brazed.

2.4. Any form of Chassis Frame control which includes pivots, dampers or similar devices is prohibited. The addition of bolt-in torsion and / or stiffness bars is specifically permitted subject to Class Regulations.

2.5. No additional holes for lightening or any other purpose (except those required for seat fixing) may be drilled in the Chassis Frame tubes.

2.6. Only those holes shown in the manufacturer ’s homologation or in a manufacturer ’s official replacement parts list will be allowed.

2.7. Any replacement of original components and fixings must be fit for purpose.

2.8. No part of the Kart other than the bolts or clamps fixing the floor tray, the engine, the seat and seat stays or the brake discs, the front kingpin bolts, the sprocket, the wheels, the seat and the tyres may protrude below the bottom of the main longitudinal Chassis Frame tubes. The floor tray may be clamped direct to the lower edge of the main longitudinal Chassis Frame tubes.

2.9. Independent components fitted to protect the underside of the Chassis Frame tubes which may make contact with the ground are prohibited unless they are of a non-metallic type and of a design specifically approved by the ASN . (Note: Engine clamps, battery box clamps and brake disc protectors correctly positioned are exempt).

3. Dimensions (Excluding Cadet Inter and Bambino Classes) 3.1. Wheelbase

a. Non-Gearbox and KZ: Minimum 1010mm maximum 1070mm unless specified in Class Regulations .

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 Appendix 8 - General Technical Regulations 663

b. Gearbox (except as specified in Art.20.a above): Minimum 1010mm (250cc and above: 1060mm) maximum 1270mm.

3.2. Track – Minimum two-thirds of the wheelbase.

3.3. Overall length – Maximum 1820mm without a front and/or rear fairing. 1880mm for 210 and 250 Gearbox. 2100mm including bodywork for all Gearbox when in Race Venue Event trim .

3.4. Overall width – All classes unless specified in Class Regulations Maximum 1400mm.

3.5. No part of the Kart can protrude outside the quadrilateral formed by the front fairing the wheels and the rear wheel protection nor be higher than 650mm from the ground (except for a structure solely designed as a head-rest).

4. Flooring

4.1. There must be a floor made from suitably rigid durable material that stretches only from the central strut of the Chassis Frame to the front of the Chassis Frame unless specified in Class Regulations and for Karts in Race Venue Event trim when the floor must be at least from the central strut of the Chassis Frame to the front of the Kart .

4.2. The minimum thickness of the floor tray must be 1.4mm for metallic 1.5mm for composite and 3mm for plastic.

4.3. The floor tray must be flat with any deviation allowed upwards and not downward.

4.4. The floor must be edged on each side with a tube or rim to prevent the Driver ’s feet from sliding off the floor.

4.5. If the floor is perforated on the horizontal surface with the exception of a hole to access the steering column fixing the holes must not have a diameter of more than 10mm and they must be apart by four times their diameter as a minimum.

4.6. It is permitted to drill additional holes for the specific purpose of mounting such items as pedal heelstops ballast sensors and fuel tank provided that the holes are restricted to the minimum size and number required to meet the purpose. Holes must not cause undue weakening of the floor tray at critical points.

4.7. It is permitted to use floor trays with decorative holes or slots so long as they are provided by the manufacturer and that the holes are in the raised sector(s) of the tray.

4.8. Mechanical fixings with more than three threads protruding on the underside of the floor tray are not permitted.

5. Suspension and Wheels 5.1. Any method of suspension including elastomeric material or by pivots is prohibited.

5.2. Wheels must be equipped with pneumatic tyres (with or without tubes) and the front wheels / hubs must be fitted with rolling element bearings.

5.3. Wheels which have been cut and welded are prohibited. 5.4. The attachment of the wheels to the axles / hubs must incorporate locking pins or self-locking nuts.

5.5. The requirement for wheel retaining locking nuts or secondary locking devices is waived for CIK-FIA Homologated wheels and their associated fixings.

5.6. Hubs with a single retaining bolt feature must not protrude beyond the end of the axle unless designed for that purpose and must incorporate a retaining device.

5.7. Extended hubs with one or two retaining bolts designed to overhang the end of the axle are permitted.

5.8. Any hub with an overall length (excluding wheel studs) of less than 60mm must not overhang the ends of the rear axle.

5.9. No form of hub nave plate is permitted on the wheel.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 Appendix 8 - General Technical Regulations 664

5.10. Tyre bead retention pegs are permitted in all classes.

5.11. For Race Venue Events all wheels must be fitted with some form of bead retention inside and outside. Bead retention as a minimum is defined as a wheel with a minimum of a 0.5mm raised lip on the inner edges of the tyre housing.

5.12. For all gearbox Karts both rear outer rims must in all cases incorporate additional bead retention comprising three pegs at equidistant positions. Applicable to wet and dry tyres.

6. Tyres 6.1. When inflated on the wheel rims tyres must not exceed the following maximum external diameters:

Bambino / Cadet / Inter: front 260mm and rear 290mm Superkart: front and rear 350mm All others: front 280mm and rear 300mm 6.2. Minimum external diameter must not be less than 222mm. 6.3. Tyres for all Classes must be as detailed in the Class Regulations .

a. b. c.

6.4. All tyres designated for a specific Class must be identical in specification to the samples that have been tested and selected. Control tyres may be held by the ASN as a reference in the event of any dispute.

6.5. Tyres must be freely available as single units to the open market in the UK so that customers are not forced to buy either complete sets or other equipment in order to purchase a particular tyre.

6.6. To qualify as a wet tyre tyres must be moulded in such a way as to ensure that grooves are created to leave a minimum of 60% and a maximum of 85% of the total surface area as a raised tread pattern. The grooves must have a minimum depth of 2mm at race start.

6.7. Hand cutting of all tyres is prohibited. 6.8. Remoulded tyres are prohibited.

6.9. Heating of tyres by any method or their treatment by any chemical substance is prohibited. For the avoidance of doubt no manner of abnormally raising the temperature of the tyres/wheels above the natural ambient temperature is allowed.

6.10. Any Competitor found to be using chemical treatment on tyres in contravention of Regulations ( Art.6.9 above ), may in addition to any other penalty be referred to the ASN for further action ( Ch.8 App.3 Art.7.2 ).

6.11. Mechanical removal of accumulated rubber debris is permitted.

6.12. The interior of the tyre (space between the rim and the internal part of the tyre) must be filled only with air or nitrogen.

6.13. For all gearbox Karts valve caps must be fitted to all valves at the start of each race or Practice session.

7. Brakes

7.1. Non-gearbox Karts must have effective brakes acting on the rear wheels only unless specified in Class Regulations .

7.2. Gearbox Karts must have brakes operating on all four wheels with independent front and rear systems which must be hydraulic. Should one of the systems fail the other must guarantee braking on two front or rear wheels.

7.3. Master cylinders must be fitted in a position safe from impact at least 150mm behind the front bumper or to the rear of the pedals.

7.4. Hydraulic pipes must be securely fitted to the Chassis Frame upper sides and be protected against damage.

7.5. All Karts must have an effective dual connection between the brake pedal and caliper if mechanical and

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 Appendix 8 - General Technical Regulations 665

between the pedal and master cylinder if hydraulic.

7.6. Where there is a dual linkage between master cylinders the mandatory requirement for a secondary dual connection is waived.

7.7. The prime connection may be either solid or cable operated with a secondary safety cable set slightly looser to act as a back up in case of failure.

7.8. Drum brakes are not permitted. 7.9. Brake discs must be made from ferrous material. 7.10. When a cable is used a minimum thickness of 1.8mm is mandatory.

7.11. If the brake disc protrudes below or is level with the main Chassis Frame tube nearest to the ground then an efficient rear brake disc protective pad (in Teflon, Nylon, carbon fibre, Kevlar or Rilsan) is mandatory in all Categories (except Gearbox Classes unless specified in Class Regulations ). This protection must be placed laterally in relation to the disc in the longitudinal axis of the Chassis Frame or under the disc. It must be located within 120mm of the centreline of the brake disc.

8. Steering

8.1. The Kart must be controlled by a steering wheel with a continuous rim not incorporating any reflex angles in its basic shape.

8.2. The upper and lower one third of the circumference may be straight or of a different radius to the rest of the wheel.

8.3. Any device mounted on the steering wheel must not protrude by more than 20mm from the plane forward of the steering wheel (see App.9 Drawing 11 ) and must not have sharp edges.

8.4. It is recommended that the minimum diameter for a steering wheel is not less than 300mm across its widest section.

8.5. Steering wheels with flat handgrips are acceptable. 8.6. Flexible steering controls by cable or chain are prohibited.

8.7. All parts of the steering must have a method of attachment offering maximum safety (split pins, self-locking nuts or burred bolts).

8.8. The fitting of a steering lock is not permitted when the Kart is being driven.

8.9. The steering column must have a minimum diameter of 18mm and a minimum wall thickness of 1.8mm. It must be a hollow tube and be constructed from magnetic Steel.

8.10. All Karts must have the steering column mounted in such a way that even if the bottom retaining fastening is removed it cannot pull free from its lower bearing.

9. Stub Axles 9.1. The use of chromium-plated stub axle assemblies is not permitted for any 250cc Gearbox Classes .

10. Seating 10.1. It is recommended that the seat be made of a fire-retardant material.

10.2. The seat must be rigidly located on the Chassis Frame and designed to securely locate the Driver without movement relative to the Chassis Frame when cornering or braking.

10.3. It is mandatory that all seats comprise metal or nylon reinforcement at all the anchorage points between the seat supports any additional seat stays and the seat.

10.4. Reinforcements must have a minimum thickness of 1.5mm and a minimum surface area of 130mm2 or a minimum diameter of 40mm.

10.5. All supports must be bolted or welded at each end.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 Appendix 8 - General Technical Regulations 666

11. Pedals 11.1. The pedals must never protrude forward of the Chassis Frame or bumper. 11.2. The accelerator must be operated by a pedal equipped with a return spring.

11.3. Any device linking the accelerator and brake pedals such that either of them may be prevented from being independently depressed partially or fully is prohibited.

11.4. For Karts in Race Venue Event specification the brake pedal and all the parts operating the master cylinders must be made of steel and must be strong enough to withstand the forces applied.

12. Exhausts 12.1. The exhaust system must exit behind the Driver and must not exceed a height of 450mm.

12.2. The terminal part of the silencer must not cross the quadrilateral formed by the outside of the wheels and the front and rear bumpers and must not present a hazard.

12.3. The Kart must have protection to prevent any contact between the exhaust system and the Driver when seated in the normal driving position.

12.4. Unless specifically authorised in Class Regulations exhaust lengths may not be varied whilst the Kart is in motion. Any such system must be failsafe in operation not present a hazard and incorporate a measurable reduction in sound level.

12.5. Intake and exhaust silencing is mandatory. 12.6. Engines must be prepared and equipped to meet or better noise level requirements.

12.7. Event Organisers and venue operators may impose more strict levels according to their own environmental requirements. Such additional restrictions must be published in the Official Documents and be approved by the ASN.

12.8. The requirements for noise control Officials (Environmental Scrutineers ) are detailed in Ch.5 Part A App.6 Art.6 .

13. Noise Testing

13.1. Effective exhaust and induction muffling is mandatory on all Karts so that noise level regulations are complied with.

13.2. The responsibility rests with the Competitor to comply with the noise regulations. 13.3. Scrutineers will check all intake and exhaust silencers for professional construction and secure fixing. 13.4. Any Competitor losing a silencer during a race will be immediately shown a black Signal .

13.5. Intake silencers sealed to the carburettor intake so that all air entering the carburettor passes through the intake silencer are mandatory for all Classes.

13.6. Details of specific silencing requirements and of approved silencers are given in the Kart Yearbook .

13.7. In all classes all air entering the intake silencer must do so without the addition or proximity of any device that may direct an increased flow of air from the forward movement of the Kart towards the inlet.

13.8. The use of acoustic measures such as inserts between head and cylinder fins to reduce noise in air cooled classes is permitted unless prohibited by Class Regulations .

13.9. Noise testing must be carried out at all Kart Race Events using equipment equal to or better than the minimum requirements of G.7.8 which should be calibrated before use.

13.10. Tests will be conducted using a microphone suspended over the Track above the normal driving line and connected by cable to the Noise level meter.

13.11. The microphone should be positioned on a straight section of the Track at a point where Karts are at maximum power.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 Appendix 8 - General Technical Regulations 667

13.12. The measurement position should be selected so that the effects of ambient and reflected noise is minimised. This position will be shown on the Track Licence .

13.13. Maximum noise levels will be 108 dBA with a microphone set at a height of 1.8m ±0.1m or 105 dBA with a microphone set at a height of 3.6m ±0.1m above the track.

14. Fuel

14.1. Fuel must be Permitted Fuel as defined in Chapter 8 part (a) plus lubricant where applicable. CIK-FIA compliant Fuel as defined in Chapter 8 part (b) may be used if specified in Championship Regulations.

14.2. The petrol / lubricant mixture as well as petrol only must comply with the ASN defined specifications in Chapter 8 .

14.3. The use of power boosting or octane boosting additives by competitors in any fuel is prohibited.

14.4. All systems of injection and/or spraying of products other than fuel are forbidden unless specifically permitted in Class Regulations .

14.5. Electrically powered Karts are permitted subject to ASN approval. 14.6. Alternative fuels may be permitted subject to ASN prior approval.

14.7. The fuel tank must be fixed in such a way that neither it nor the fuel pipes which must be flexible present any danger of leakage during the Competition.

14.8. The use of fuel catalyst devices fitted to fuel lines is prohibited. 14.9. If plastic is used for the tank it must be of a type suitable for carrying fuel. 14.10. The tank must supply the fuel pump with petrol under normal air pressure only. 14.11. Unless otherwise specified the petrol tank must be mounted within the area of the Chassis Frame . 14.12. Where appropriate the Class Regulations will specify tank capacity.

14.13. For all Classes to enable a fuel test to be conducted three litres of fuel should be present and a minimum of one litre of fuel must be present at the end of each Race . The penalty for failure to have the minimum quantity present is disqualification from the results in that Race .

14.14. Fuel samples will be tested in accordance with the procedure in Ch.8 App.2 .

14.15. If control fuel is specified for use in an Event or Championship this must be specified in the Official Documents .

14.16. Any Competitor found to be using fuel or lubricants in contravention of Regulations may in addition to any other penalty be referred to the ASN for further action ( Ch.8 App.2 Art.1.9 ).

14.17. Competitors must declare the percentage of lubricant used and further must provide when requested a minimum of 0.5 litre of that lubricant.

15. Bodywork and Bumpers 15.1. The following regulations apply unless specifically varied in Class Regulations .

16. Short Circuit Karts 16.1. All Short Circuit Karts must be fitted with bumpers and bodywork providing front rear and side protection.

16.2. All bodywork fitted to Short Circuit Karts (with the exception of Bambinos and pre-2023 900mm Cadet chassis) must be CIK-FIA Homologated with the sole exception of the rear protection . CIK-FIA Homologated bodywork that expired in 2008 or later may continue to be used.

16.3. CIK-FIA Homologated bodywork consists of a Front Fairing Front Panel (Nassau Panel) Rear Wheel Protection and Side Pods as well as their homologated bumpers/bars and fixings. All parts must at all times conform to the relevant homologation fiche in every way.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 Appendix 8 - General Technical Regulations 668

16.4. The combination of homologated bodywork elements of different makes or models is authorised save and except that the two side bodywork elements must be used together as a set. Components from the same element cannot be mixed i.e. side bars from one homologation cannot be used with side pods from another homologation.

16.5. Alternative CIK-FIA Homologated bumpers only as detailed on the ASN published list may be used in lieu of those homologated with the side pod or front fairing.

16.6. No element of bodywork may be used as a fuel tank or for the attachment of ballast. 16.7. No alteration of bodywork elements is allowed.

16.8. On non-gearbox Karts (except Bambino) the CIK-FIA Homologated detachable front fairing mounting kit ( CIK-FIA drawing 2.2 / 3.2) must be used unless otherwise specified in Class or Championship Regulations .

17. Front Bumper (App.9 Drawing 12) 17.1. The front bumper must:

a. Consist of two magnetic Steel elements lower and upper. b. Be independent from the attachment of the pedals. c. Be attached to the Chassis Frame by four points. d. Have a minimum front overhang of 350mm.

17.2. The lower bar must:

a. Have a height of 90mm ± 20mm. b.

Have two attachment tubes of at least 50mm long parallel (in both horizontal and vertical planes) to the axis of the Chassis Frame . They must be 450mm ± 5mm apart and centered in relation to the longitudinal axis of the Kart . These attachments must be welded to the Chassis Frame .

c. Have a minimum diameter of 20mm (the two corners must have one constant radius of curvature). d. Have a straight length of 305mm ± 10mm in relation to the longitudinal axis of the Kart .

17.3. The upper bar must:

a. Have a height of 225mm ± 25mm from the ground.

b. Have attachments 550mm ± 5mm apart and centered in relation to the longitudinal axis of the Kart . These attachments must be welded to the Chassis Frame .

c. Have a minimum diameter of 16mm (the two corners must have one constant radius of curvature). d. Have a straight length of 385mm ± 5mm in relation to the longitudinal axis of the Kart .

18. Front Fairing (App.9 Drawing 4 & 5) 18.1. The front fairing must:

a. Under no circumstances be located above the plane through the top of the front wheels. b. Not comprise any sharp edges. c.

Have a maximum gap between the front wheels and the back of the fairing of 180mm (with the wheels in the straight-ahead position). 150mm maximum for gearbox Karts unless varied in Class Regulations .

Have a front overhang of 680mm maximum. 650mm maximum for gearbox Karts unless varied in Class Regulations .

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 Appendix 8 - General Technical Regulations 669

18.2. Where the CIK-FIA Homologated detachable front fairing mounting kit (17.1.6) is mandatory it must at all times be fitted and maintained in the correct position in accordance with App.9 Drawing 16 . It is not permitted to reposition nor attempt to reposition a front fairing except by stopping in the repairs area (where such a facility is provided) and this may not be done after passing the chequered flag and before release from Parc Fermé .

19. Front (Nassau) Panel (App.9 Drawing 4) 19.1. The front panel must:

a. Not be located above the horizontal plane through the top of the steering wheel. b. Allow a gap of at least 50mm between it and the steering wheel. c. Not protrude beyond the front fairing. d. Have its lower part solidly attached to the front part of the Chassis Frame . e.

Have its top part solidly attached to the steering column support with one or several independent bar(s).

20. Rear Bumper 20.1. There is no mandatory requirement for a CIK-FIA Homologated rear wheel protection for National Events.

20.2. For all Classes except 210 National and Superkart 250 Mono a CIK-FIA Homologated rear wheel protection in accordance with the CIK-FIA regulations may be used in lieu of a rear bumper.

20.3. For all gearbox Classes where a CIK-FIA Homologated rear wheel protection is not used a rear bumper to gearbox rear bumper regulations ( Art.25 ) must be used.

20.4. The rear bumper must :

Be constructed from magnetic Steel tubing with minimum outside diameter of 18mm and a minimum wall thickness of 1.4mm.

Consist of a minimum of a single horizontal tube with outer extensions forming a closed loop with two link tubes to the Chassis Frame anchorage points (as per App.9 Drawing 3 Diagram 1 ) at least 450mm apart at any point. The radius of the outer extension is free but it should not be less than 2.5 times the tube outside diameter.

Have its tube and uppermost extension element between 160mm and 200mm above the ground in dry configuration.

d. Have its upper tube and extension loops made from a single piece of tubing. e.

In side-view have a rearward rake of between 20 and 45 degrees to the vertical (see App.9 Drawing 3 Diagram 3 ).

Have an overall width not exceeding the rear width of the Kart at any time (measured to the outside of the rear wheels or tyres whichever is the greater).

g. Cover at least 50% of each rear wheel / tyre at all times. h. Have any attachment fasteners made of high tensile Steel . i.

Have any studs with more than three threads protruding from the rear of the Kart covered with appropriate nuts caps or suitable protective cover.

21. Side Bumpers (App.9 Drawing 12) 21.1. The side bumpers must :

Be fixed to two welded tube attachments that must be 500mm ± 5mm apart. These two attachment tubes must be least 50mm long parallel (in both horizontal and vertical planes) to the axis of the Chassis Frame .

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 Appendix 8 - General Technical Regulations 670

b. Have their upper bar at a minimum height of 160mm above the ground.

21.2. The side bumpers may be shortened and re-drilled in order to reduce the width of the Kart ; no other modifications are permitted to the CIK-FIA Homologated side bumpers.

22. Side Pods (App.9 Drawing 4) 22.1. The side pods must :

Never be located either above the plane through the top of the front and rear tyres or beyond the plane through the external part of the front and rear wheels (with the front wheels in the straight-ahead position). In the case of a “Wet Race” App.7 Art.1.6.c side pods may not be located outside the plane passing through the outer edge of the rear wheels.

Not have the outermost point of the external face located inside the vertical plane through the two external edges of the wheels (with the front wheels in the straight-ahead position) by more than 40mm.

c. Have a ground clearance of 25mm minimum and 60mm maximum. d.

Have uniform and smooth surfaces that must not comprise holes or cuttings other than those necessary for their attachment.

e. Have a maximum gap between the front of the side pods and the front wheels of 150mm. f. Have a maximum gap between the back of the side pods and the rear wheels of 60mm. g. Not overlap the Chassis Frame as seen from underneath. h. Be solidly attached to the side bumpers.

23. Gearbox Kart Bumpers

23.1. All gearbox Karts in the 125 Open Superkart 250 Mono and 210 National Classes unless specified in Class Regulations must be fitted with bumpers / bodywork providing front rear and side protection.

23.2. Rear bumper measurements will be taken as follows:

a. For the upper element the measurement will be taken to the top of tube. b.

For the lower element it will be measured to the top of the tube and then the diameter of that tube subtracted the result being the official measurement of height.

Where a gap is specified the gap will be measured between the bottom of the upper element and the top of the lower element.

d. All measurements to be taken with the Kart in dry configuration. 24. Gearbox Front Bumper

24.1. The front bumper must :

Consist of at least two Steel elements. An upper bar mounted in parallel above a lower bar. Both bars with a minimum diameter of 18mm and a minimum wall thickness of 1.5mm and being connected with two vertical tubes and welded to the upper rail as a minimum and presenting a vertical flat face.

b. Allow the attachment of the front fairing whenever a mandatory requirement. c. Be attached to the Chassis Frame by four points. d. Have a front overhang of maximum 350mm. e.

Have the lower bar straight and with a width of 150mm minimum in relation to the longitudinal axis of the Kart .

Have the attachments of the lower bar parallel (in both horizontal and vertical planes) to the axis of the Chassis Frame ; they must be 155mm minimum apart but are recommended to be a minimum of 220mm apart as mandated by CIK-FIA Superkart regulations and centred in relation to the longitudinal

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 Appendix 8 - General Technical Regulations 671

axis of the Kart at a height of 60mm ± 20mm from the ground. g.

Have the upper bar straight and with a width of 250mm minimum in relation to the longitudinal axis of the Kart .

h. Have the upper bar 170mm minimum and 220mm maximum above the ground. i.

Have the upper bar attachments 500mm ±50mm apart and centred in relation to the longitudinal axis of the Kart .

j. Have the attachments of the upper bar and the lower bar welded to the Chassis Frame . k.

At no time have its upper element exceeding the height of the foot pedals with the pedals in the relaxed position.

25. Rear Bumper 25.1. The rear bumper must :

Be constructed of magnetic Steel tubing with a minimum outside diameter of 18mm and a minimum wall thickness of 1.5mm.

Consist of a minimum of two horizontal and parallel tubes with outer extensions forming a closed loop with a minimum radius of 2.5 times the tube outside diameter with two vertical link tubes to the Chassis Frame anchorage points (as per App.9 Drawing 3 Diagram 2 ).

Have a maximum vertical gap between any two horizontal elements not exceeding 95mm except that maximum dimension may be exceeded provided that there is at least one element – minimum outside diameter of 18mm and minimum wall thickness of 1.5mm – fitted approximately centrally and vertically as seen from the rear either permanently fixed or clamped between these horizontal elements.

Have its upper tube and uppermost extension element between 220mm and 280mm above the ground and be a minimum of 1100mm in length and a maximum of the overall Kart width.

e. Have its upper tube and extension loops made of a single piece of tubing. f.

Have its lower tube fixed horizontally between the main uprights or the end of the Chassis Frame main tubes between 40mm and 90mm above the ground in dry configuration be straight and a minimum of 600mm in length. If the Kart is fitted with a rear diffuser with a minimum of four vertical strakes not more than 20mm from the bumper the minimum height of the lower element must be between 75mm and 165mm. Alternatively for Race Venue Events only the lower tube must be between 100mm and 140mm above the ground in dry configuration be straight and a minimum of 600mm in length.

g. Inside have a rearward rake of between 0 and 45 degrees to the vertical ( App.9 Drawing 3 Diagram 2 ). h.

In the case where a vertical bumper is fitted have the extension loops strengthened by triangulated Steel braces to the Chassis Frame to reduce folding in onto the rear tyre.

Have an overall width not exceeding the rear width of the Kart at any time (measured outside the rear wheels or tyres whichever is the greater).

j. Cover at least 50% of each rear wheel / tyre at all times. k. Have any attachment fasteners made of high tensile Steel . l.

Not be an alternative design/material or an adjustable width bumper except with specific written approval from the ASN .

Have any studs with more than three threads protruding from the rear of the Kart covered with appropriate nuts caps or suitable protective cover.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 Appendix 8 - General Technical Regulations 672

26. Side Bumpers 26.1. Side bumpers are mandatory in all configurations whenever CIK-FIA Homologated bodywork is not used. 26.2. Side bumpers must :

Be made from magnetic Steel tubing with a minimum outside diameter of 18mm and a minimum wall thickness of 1.5mm.

Consist of two bars each side of the Kart both bars being connected with two tubes and welded together and presenting a vertical flat face and they must be attached to the Chassis Frame by a minimum of two points. These two attachments must be parallel to the ground and must be a minimum of 450mm apart. Note for CIK-FIA Division 1 and 2 Superkarts the two attachments must be perpendicular to the axis of the Chassis-Frame and must be a minimum of 520mm apart.

Have a clearance between the bars and the tyres not exceeding 100mm (with front wheels in the straight-ahead position).

Not extend beyond the plane through the outside of the front and rear tyres with the front wheels in the straight-ahead position (dry configuration).

e. At all times cover a minimum of 66% of the rear tyres. 26.3. The lower bar must:

a. Not exceed the height of the top of the rear axle. b. Have a minimum straight length of 500mm. c. Be 60mm ± 20mm from the ground.

26.4. The upper bar must :

a. Be joined to the lower bar at each end and also include two additional uprights. b. Have a minimum straight length of 400mm. c. Be 200mm ± 20mm from the ground.

27. Gearbox Short Circuit Bodywork

27.1. Gearbox Short Circuit bodywork is defined as including mandatory bodywork to general Short Circuit Kart regulations unless varied in the Class Regulations .

27.2. Lateral bodywork and front fairings must never cut the plane through the top of the front and rear tyres.

27.3. Rear vertical wing ends are permitted if Class Regulations allow but any form of wing or winglets or fully enveloping body panels are not permitted.

28. Gearbox Race Venue Event Kart Trim

28.1. Gearbox Race Venue Event Kart trim is defined as any combination of wings (either full width or part width), side pods which are above the plane of the top of the front to rear tyres, or a full width front fairing to Art.29.10 .

28.2. Wings are not mandatory. 28.3. If a front fairing is mandatory it will be specified in Class Regulations .

28.4. No part of the bodywork, including wings and end plates, shall be adjustable from the driving seat in racing condition when the Kart is in motion.

29. Race Venue Event Kart Bodywork 29.1. Bodywork bubble-shield and wing must:

a. Be soundly constructed of a non-metallic material.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 Appendix 8 - General Technical Regulations 673

b. If plastic be splinter-proof. c.

Be designed to provide maximum safety for the Driver and other Drivers both during normal racing and in any accident.

d. Not present any sharp edges. 29.2. No part of the bodywork including wings and end plates shall:

Be higher than 600mm from the ground except for structures solely designed as head-rests with no possible aerodynamic effect.

b. Extend beyond the rear bumper. c. Be nearer to the ground than the floor tray. d.

Extend laterally beyond the plane of the front and rear tyres (with the front wheels in the straightahead position and with the wheels in their outermost position), except in the case of a wet Race (see App.9 Drawing 9 ).

e. Have a width of more than 1400mm. f. Have a gap of less than 25mm between any part of the bodywork and the tyres.

29.3. Should a complete bodywork and bubble-shield be used, ( App.9 Drawing 6, 8 & 10 ) the bubble-shield shall be connected to the bodywork by no more than four quick release clips and shall have no other fixing device.

29.4. Should the bubble-shield be a separate structure, its maximum width shall be 500mm and the maximum width of its fixing frame 250mm.

29.5. The bubble-shield must neither be located above the horizontal plane passing through the top of the steering wheel nor be less than 50mm from any part of the steering wheel.

29.6. At the bottom the bubble-shield shall end symmetrically 150mm minimum from the pedals in the normal resting position and shall expose (not cover) the Driver ’s feet and the ankles.

29.7. In all cases, when the bubble-shield is removed, no part of the bodywork shall cover any part of the Driver seated in the normal position seen from the above.

29.8. The front of the nose of the bodywork must not constitute a sharp angle but must have a minimum radius of 20mm.

29.9. Front fairings must be such that it is possible for the front bumper to comply with the requirements.

29.10. They must not be wider than the front wheels when in a straight-ahead position and the top of the fairing must be above the horizontal plane passing through the top of the front tyres.

29.11. The floor tray shall be of flat construction and must have a curved beading edge.

29.12. From 230mm ahead of the rear shaft the floor tray may have an angle orienting it upwards (extractor). If the latter has one or two side fins, they must not protrude beyond the plane formed by the flat part of the floor tray.

29.13. Neither the floor tray nor any other part of the bodywork shall in any way resemble a skirt. 29.14. The floor tray shall not extend beyond either front or rear bumpers.

29.15. The width of the floor tray shall conform to and not exceed the dimensions of the bodywork including wings and end plates.

29.16. It is not allowed to cut lightening holes in the floor tray.

30. Number Plates 30.1. Number plates must have rounded corners (with diameters 15 to 25mm) and 220mm sides. 30.2. Stick-on panels used on an existing surface in lieu of a number plate need not have rounded corners and

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 Appendix 8 - General Technical Regulations 674

must be at least 170mm high by 170mm width with a minimum 10mm space on all sides of the numbers.

30.3. Number plates or stick-on panels as described above must be displayed in accordance with App.9 Drawing 14 .The numbers must be at least 150mm high and 20mm stroke width.

30.4. Numbers must be fitted to front rear and both sides and must be securely attached and numbers always legible.

30.5. For Race Venue Events number plates must be carried front rear and on the side facing the Timekeeper ’s box.

a. The plates must be square with sides of minimum 250mm. b. The numbers must be minimum 200mm high with a minimum stroke of 30mm. c. The plates must be fixed so as not to bend or otherwise change their attitude in the airflow. 30.6. No Club may alter the requirements concerning the numbering of Karts .

30.7. The plates must be in opaque flexible plastic fixed in such a way that they are not deflected by the airflow. and the front and side plates may be made of fibre glass (polyester).

30.8. The plates must be solid or be attached to a solid backing and contain no holes other than those required for fixing.

30.9. The numbers must be of the ‘Classic’ type as shown below and represented with an Arial type font:

1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 – 6 – 7 – 8 – 9 – 0 .

30.10. Novice number plates will be black with either white or yellow numbers.

30.11. The ASN reserves the right to approve non-standard race numbers such as Grand Prix Winner – GP and 0 (zero) and also race numbers 1-10 (one to ten). No other non-standard numbers or numbers 1-10 are permitted.

30.12. Those awarded their respective “number” (one to ten) or non-standard plate may use it for the following year should they continue to race in the same Class and in the same type of event ( Short Circuit Gearbox one to ten may not use their numbers for Race Venue Events or vice-versa).

30.13. As soon as Championship results are declared final the previous seasons plates may no longer be used and the new Championship winners will be the only Drivers allowed to use such numbers.

31. Weight

31.1. Class Regulations will define minimum Class weights which are defined as the minimum weight for the kart plus driver and equipment (race condition) at any time.

31.2. Subject to Art.6–13 at the beginning of this Chapter clubs may run Classes to heavier weight limits (if ASN approval is given by the issue of a Kart Technical Exception ( KTE )) but may not reduce the weight limits.

31.3. If it is necessary to use ballast in order to achieve a minimum weight this may be achieved by the addition of one or more solid blocks attached to the Chassis Frame , to a chassis auxiliary part (as defined in current FIA Karting Technical Regulations) except bumpers, or to the seat.

31.4. Maximum mass of a single ballast: 5.0kg. Combined ballast on the same attachment counts as a single ballast. 31.5. Ballast must be attached by means of tools with a minimum of two bolts each of minimum M8 size.

31.6. If the ballast is attached to a chassis auxiliary part, all bolts linking the auxiliary part to the Chassis Frame must be of the same minimum diameter as that used to attach the ballast itself.

31.7. Reinforcement plates are mandatory for the attachment of the ballast to the seat. These plates must have a minimum thickness of 1mm and a minimum diameter of 20mm.

31.8. No solid object (excluding jewellery / dog tags) may be carried on the Driver ’s person.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 Appendix 8 - General Technical Regulations 675

31.9. After a Kart and Driver have competed in any session it is not permissible to alter the weight of the Kart or Driver in any way before being weighed.

31.10. For Classes that include a minimum Driver weight only mandatory items of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) as required by App.7 are to be included when the Driver is weighed.

32. Rear Lights on Race Venue Event Gearbox Karts 32.1. A rear-facing high intensity lamp must be fitted.

32.2. It will be permanently illuminated when wet tyres are fitted to the Kart or a Race is designated as a Wet Race or when instructed to do so by the Clerk of the Course.

32.3. Only lamps having a high intensity polarised light source and homologated with the ASN / FIA will be permitted.

32.4. The lens must have a minimum surface area of 280mm2 and the illumination must be visible from a point 45° either side of the centre-line.

32.5. The lamp unit must be mounted securely and centrally on the Kart forward of the rear bumper and the whole illuminated area of the light is to be positioned in the area shown in App.9 Drawing 15 in wet or dry configuration.

32.6. The light must be able to be switched on by the Driver when seated in the normal driving position by means of a switch.

32.7. Karts with lights not switched on when a race is declared wet will not be let out onto the circuit from the Assembly Area or Pit Lane.

33. Engines and Transmissions

33.1. The Scrutineer must be satisfied that the engine transmission exhaust system and all associated parts are installed in an appropriate manner and will perform safely and present no undue hazard to the Driver or other Competitors.

33.2. Where hand-throttle systems are fitted to assist push starts these should be maintained in a clean and failsafe condition.

34. Engine 34.1. The engine / motor must be the sole propelling unit of a Kart in running order.

34.2. Unless the Official Documents state otherwise only engines readily available through normal commercial channels may be used.

34.3. Forced induction in any form is not permitted. 34.4. Power valves are allowed subject to Class Regulations . 34.5. All electronic/microchip methods of operation are forbidden.

34.6. Unless Class Regulations permit any form of manually operated or variable ignition (advancing or retarding systems) is forbidden.

34.7. Unless Class Regulations permit the use of programmable electronic engine management systems which can be varied whilst the Kart is in motion is also forbidden.

34.8. Engines must be fitted with effective radio interference suppressors. 34.9. Only sealed leak proof batteries are permitted. 34.10. Proprietary lead acid batteries sealed for life properly mounted and protected are acceptable.

34.11. Engine starter batteries and separate auxiliary data logger batteries where permitted must be fitted to a main Chassis Frame tube or within the confines of the main Chassis Frame and shall be placed on the Chassis Frame in an area located to the side of the seat opposite the engine and behind the central strut or alternatively mounted on or behind the seat. The battery carrier must be welded directly to the Chassis

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 Appendix 8 - General Technical Regulations 676

Frame or attached by means of tools with a minimum of two bolts each of minimum M8 size or four bolt each of minimum M6 size.

34.12. If Lithium batteries are used they must carry the appropriate “EC” and markings.

34.13. All karts fitted with a self-starting system must also be fitted with an operational on/off ignition switch clearly marked with the relevant positions.

34.14. The Driver of a self-start kart must be in the seat when the engine is started if the Kart is placed on the ground or when it is running on the dummy grid. It is recommended that the brake is applied during the starting procedure.

34.15. Terminals and electrical connectors must be covered with insulating material.

34.16. No part of the cooling system is permitted to be located directly in front of the Driver ’s seat and may not pass over any part of the Driver ’s body.

34.17. All pressurised pipes must be reinforced and a catch tank is recommended on cooling systems with vented caps.

34.18. A retaining device is recommended on pressure caps. 34.19. The use of inhibiting agents including anti-freeze is permitted.

35. Transmission

35.1. The transmission is the method of transferring drive from the crankshaft drive sprocket to the back axle sprocket.

35.2. For some Classes this drive may have a variable ratio gearbox interposed between engine and back axle sprocket.

35.3. Direct drive Classes must not be fitted with a variable ratio transmission. However they may be fitted with a clutch if permitted in Class Regulations .

35.4. Clutches are recommended for all Bambino Cadet Inter and Junior Categories and are mandatory for all new Cadet and Junior ASN homologated engines.

35.5. Karts competing in the Gearbox Classes must be equipped with a variable ratio transmission providing a minimum of two speeds and must be fitted with a clutch.

35.6. All Classes must use axles of magnetic Steel material with a maximum external diameter of 50mm.

35.7. The axle wall thickness at all points (except in keyway housings) must comply as minimum to the dimensions shown in the table below. Exceptionally axles for use in 210 and Superkart 250 Mono Classes with a diameter greater than 40mm must have a minimum wall thickness of 2.9mm. Please also refer to Class Regulations for any variations.

Maximum external diameter(mm) Minimum thickness (mm) 50 1.9 49 2.0 48 2.0 47 2.1 46 2.2 45 2.3 44 2.4 43 2.5 42 2.6 41 2.8 40 2.9

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 Appendix 8 - General Technical Regulations 677

3.1

3.2

3.4

3.6

3.8

4.0

4.2

4.4

4.7

4.9

5.2

Solid Axle

≤28

35.8. The drive must always be to the rear wheels only. 35.9. Any method may be used provided no differential is incorporated.

35.10. All methods of chain oiling and greasing whilst the Kart is in motion are forbidden unless specifically permitted in the Official Documents .

35.11. Sprocket protectors are permitted in all Classes but must not be metallic.

35.12. Effective protection must be provided over the top and both sides of the exposed transmission chain (or belt) and sprockets and extend to at least the lower plane of the rear axle.

35.13. Access for the starter is permitted. 35.14. Clutches on non-gearbox Karts must be covered preferably by metal guards. 35.15. Non-gearbox Karts must use a 219 pitch chain only.

35.16. For Race Venue Events all rear axles must be fitted with a circlip – or a similarly effective hub retaining device – on each end of the axle.

36. Cameras

36.1. Where used cameras must be attached securely to the Kart and be approved by the Chief Scrutineer and Event Organiser. The weight of the camera (excluding any additional casing mounting and associated fixing) must not exceed 100g.

36.2. The images captured by the camera must not be deleted before 30 minutes following the conclusion of the last race at the Event and must be surrendered to an Official of the Event on demand.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 Appendix 8 - General Technical Regulations 678

CHAPTER 18 KART RACING Appendix 9 - Kart Race Technical Drawings with Dimensions

Drawing 1

Drawing 2 Only suits bearing one of the below labels are acceptable as CIK homologated

Drawing 3

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 Appendix 9 - Kart Race Technical Drawings with Dimensions 679

Drawing 4

Drawing 5

Code Letter

Cadet/Inter

Short Circuit

Cadet 900

Limit

(950)

25mm 25mm 25mm Minimum

(Driver onboard) 60mm 60mm 60mm Maximum

Maximum

180mm (150mm gearbox)

150mm 130mm(f)/ 160mm(r)

C 60mm 60mm 60mm Maximum D 50mm 50mm 50mm Minimum E 250mm 250mm 200mm Minimum

300mm 300mm 300mm Maximum

530mm 630mm Maximum

680mm (650mm gearbox)

G 1000mm 700mm As homologated Minimum

External width of front track

1000mm As homologated Maximum

H 40mm 40mm 30mm Maximum

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 Appendix 9 - Kart Race Technical Drawings with Dimensions 680

Drawing 6 Lower end of bubbleshield showing minimum 15cm gap between shield and pedals. Also indicating the maximum 4 fixing points if shield attached to bodywork.

Drawing 7 The plan showing the limits beyond which neither bodywork, wings or end plates may protrude. (Kart in dry tyre condition.)

Drawing 8 Bubbleshield showing overall width dimensions and the maximum width of supports

Drawing 9 Floor tray. Showing legal and illegal. Illegal is defined as creating a skirt effect.

Drawing 10 Bubbleshield profile showing horizontal line it must not cross and the minimum 5cm gap between the shield and steering wheel.

Drawing 11 Steering wheel projection

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 Appendix 9 - Kart Race Technical Drawings with Dimensions 681

Drawing 12

Drawing 13

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 Appendix 9 - Kart Race Technical Drawings with Dimensions 682

Drawing 14

Drawing 15

Drawing 16 Correct Position

Unacceptable position – if any part of the front bumper tubes is in an area marked ‘A’

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 18 Appendix 9 - Kart Race Technical Drawings with Dimensions 683

Chapter 19 Autotest

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 19 - Autotest 684

2025 National Competition Rules CHAPTER 19 AUTOTEST

1. Specific Regulations for Autotest and AutoSOLO (including Evening Autotests and AutoSOLOs)

1.1. This Chapter must be read in conjunction as applicable with the following Chapters and which form the Autotest ‘Yearbook’:

Chapter 1: Chapter 2: Chapter 3: Chapter 4: Chapter 5: Chapter 6: Chapter 7: Chapter 8:

General Governance Judicial Organisers Championships Officials Competitor Licensing Competitors Vehicles and Vehicle Safety Equipment Permitted Tyres and Fuel Testing Competitor Personal Safety Equipment

1.3. In the published texts there will be hyperlinks in blue font to other Chapters but not initially to Appendices (pending upgraded ASN IT).

2. This Chapter comprises: 2.1. The following Autotest-specific Appendices apply:

App. 1 App. 2 App. 3 App. 4 App. 5 App. 6 App. 7 App. 8 App. 9

Organisers Regulations Clerk of the Course Duties and Responsibilities Technical Regulations applying to all Events Autotests Specific Regulations Production Car Autotests Specific Regulations AutoSOLO Specific Regulations Competitor Regulations including Licensing Summary of Requirements Drawings

3. Provisions applying to all Events

3.1. In all cases the reference to a Chapter of the NCR or to an Appendix in this or any applicable Chapter is a reference to the current published Chapter and / or Appendix at the date of the Event .

3.2. All Events shall be Organised in conformity with this Chapter including App. 1 and the relevant provisions and the applicable responsibilities within NCR Chapter 1 - Chapter 6

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 19 - Autotest 685

3.3. The Clerk of the Course specific duties at App. 2 are in addition to the relevant provisions and the applicable responsibilities within NCR Chapters 1 – 3 and 5.

3.4. Competitors must comply with App. 3 and 7 of this Chapter and the sub-discipline specific Appendix ( 4 , 5 or 6) as well as all applicable elements of NCR Chapter 1, 2 and 6.

3.5. The Technical Regulations at App. 3 apply as current at the date of the Event. 3.6. A summary of key requirements appears at App. 8.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 19 - Autotest 686

CHAPTER 19 AUTOTEST Appendix 1 - Organisers Regulations

1. General

1.1. Permits for the organisation of Autotests , Production Car Autotests, AutoSOLOs and Evening Autotest/AutoSOLO are issued at the sole discretion of the ASN.

1.2. A Club can only organise an Autotest or AutoSOLO Event up to and including Clubman status unless and until all necessary upgrading criteria for a higher status have been complied with. Permits for Production Car Autotests will only be issued at Clubman status.

1.3. For an Autotest or AutoSOLO to be considered for upgrading to Interclub status it must first be observed in the same format as a Clubman Event and have a minimum entry of 15 starters.

1.4. The Supplementary Regulations must in addition to any all other relevant requirement of the NCR specify:

Details of the tests (see examples at Drawings 1 and 2 ) or when these details will be notified to Competitors.

b. The number of runs per Driver and how these count towards the results. c. The method of identifying Vehicles. d.

The method of timing and whether or not the timing apparatus is started by the Vehicle or by the starting Signal.

The starting Signal.

Whether carrying a Passenger will be allowed or not or will be compulsory.

The marking of the Tests .

The method of calculation of results with reference to App.9 Penalty Tables.

Any specific provisions regarding discounting of worst scores in the calculation of results.

The method of resolving any tied scores.

If any car may be entered to compete for the same award more than twice but in any event in all cases must be driven by different Drivers.

1.5. Before the start of the Competition Event all Vehicles and Competitors including any permitted Passengers must be checked for eligibility to compete.

2. Test Layouts 2.1. The route must be made available to all Drivers before any test. 2.2. There must be no optional direction of travel except as specified in Art.3.10 below.

2.3. Clarification of where and how a change of direction or spin turn may be made without incurring a penalty must be available on request to all Competitors before the start of any test.

2.4. Practising for tests is not permitted. 2.5. The start and finish of all tests must be in a forward direction.

2.6. All Drivers should have the opportunity to walk the course before competing. If not the tests must be arranged such that the whole of the course is visible to the Driver from the start line

2.7. Markers should be not less than 1m in height unless otherwise specified in the Official Documents .

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 19 Appendix 1 - Organisers Regulations 687

2.8. ‘All forwards’ tests (except AutoSOLOs):

Where there are no stop astride penalty lines (other than the Start and Stop lines) Competitors must not be allowed or required to travel more than 50m without changing direction by:

i. ii.

Executing a turn of over 180° around a single marker; or Changing direction through a three-marker line either in slalom fashion or by completing a turn of between 90° and 180°; or Changing direction through a three-marker triangle whose base is at right angles to the original line of travel requiring Competitors to turn through 90° from the line of entry. b.

iii.

Whichever of the above methods is used to change direction this will not preclude the inclusion of less severe slalom manoeuvre which produce turns of less than 90° being incorporated between the mandatory directional changes every 50m.

c. All lines or pairs of adjacent markers forming part of any all-forward test must be a minimum of 3.5m and a maximum of 5m long or apart.

d. See App.9 Drawing 1 Example of a test showing all of the above elements in use.

3. Test Procedures

3.1. Drivers will be considered under Starter ’s orders when instructed by an Official to proceed to the Start line.

3.2. Drivers then failing to proceed may forfeit their run or may be penalised in accordance with App.9 Penalty Tables

3.3. A start will only be valid if made under the Vehicle’s own power. 3.4. Timing will start when the leading wheel of the front axle crosses the Start line.

3.5. When a Vehicle is required to stop astride a line the line must be between its front and back axles and all the area of the tyres in contact with the ground must be seen to have crossed the full width of the line.

3.6. Similarly if a car is required to cross a line with all four wheels all tyre contact area must be seen to be clear of the line.

3.7. Timing at completion of a test must be based on the leading wheel (on the front axle) crossing the Finish line.

3.8. Penalties will be applied for failure to cross the line with both front wheels or alternatively if timed to a flying finish for crossing the baulk line.

3.9. In the event of Competitors performing a test incorrectly their times must still be recorded together with the appropriate penalties.

3.10. In any diagram illustrating a test the dimensions should be approximate and for guidance only. Indications of the direction of travel of the competing Vehicles when crossing a line or passing between markers must be shown unless specified otherwise (ignoring ‘shunts’ to avoid markers).

3.11. A maximum penalty (see App.9 Penalty Tables.) shall be applied if a Competitor fails to follow the prescribed test route by passing the wrong side of one or more markers crosses with both leading wheels a marked test line in the wrong direction out of the prescribed sequence or too many/few times without correcting the mistakes by returning to the point where they deviated from the test diagram before crossing the test finish line unless otherwise specified in the Official Documents .

3.12. In changes of direction and spin turns either lock can be used (unless the test diagram specifically states otherwise). It is recommended for safety reasons that Drivers are on the ‘inside’ during spin turns.

3.13. Clerks of the Course wishing to define direction of travel between markers should include any necessary marked line(s).

3.14. In the event of a re-run caused by a timing failure the greater number of penalties incurred in either run will be added to the time taken in assessing the performance on that test.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 19 Appendix 1 - Organisers Regulations 688

3.15. Each test layout must be attempted at least twice or more if specified in the Official Documents with the exception of Events organised for cars of Periods A – D.

4. Marking 4.1. Judges must be appointed to each test to adjudicate on:

a. False starts; b. Crossing/failing to cross marker lines; c. Touching markers and not following the correct route.

4.2. Competitors will be provided with a score card for the Organisers to record times and penalties at the completion of each test run.

4.3. Marks will be lost for time taken (if applicable) and for any infringements of the test instructions such as striking a marker or crossing a boundary line.

4.4. Each Competitor ’s worst score on any test layout may be discarded in arriving at the total penalties for the Event if specified in the Official Documents.

5. Results 5.1. Competitors will start with zero marks.

5.2. Performance will be assessed as in App.9 Penalty Tables. unless otherwise specified in the Official Documents .

5.3. All Class awards must be calculated on the basis of penalty marks lost with the Competitor incurring the least penalty points being judged the winner.

5.4. To be classified as a finisher Competitors must complete not less than half of the tests and must hand in their score card to Officials within 15 minutes of all other Competitors completing the final test.

5.5. In the event of a tie the Competitor who was first to have the lesser penalty from the start will be adjudged the winner unless otherwise specified in the Official Documents .

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 19 Appendix 1 - Organisers Regulations 689

CHAPTER 19 AUTOTEST Appendix 2 - Clerk of the Course Duties and Responsibilities

1.1. The duties and responsibilities of the Clerk of the Course at Autotest, Production Car Autotest and AutoSOLO Events includes ensuring the following:

The maximum size for any timed Test site is 200m by 200m. The 200m applies to the overall length and width of the area on which the Test is conducted and not the actual distance covered by a Vehicle performing the Test ;

At all timed Tests , all spectators and non-essential Marshals not protected by a solid barrier capable of stopping a car must be separated by rope or fencing at least 10m from the edge of the course and at least 20m from the Finish Line . Any space at the edge of the Course allowed for braking and changes of direction must not impinge on the above distances.

1.2. Every Test must have at least one person responsible for:

a. The general running of the Test ; b. Observing and recording penalties; c. Recording the times taken; d. Completing the score card with the addition of penalties; e. Returning displaced markers to their original position. 1.3. Judges of Fact must be appointed to each Test site to adjudicate on excessive sound. 1.4. Warning Notices as required by Chapter 3 App.3 must be displayed.

1.5. Fire extinguishers (minimum 5kg total capacity in units of not less than 2kg) must be available at each Test site.

1.6. The Organisers must provide a First Aid Kit. 1.7. A Medium Sized Spill Kit must be available at each test site.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 19 Appendix 2 - Clerk of the Course Duties and Responsibilities 690

CHAPTER 19 AUTOTEST Appendix 3 - Technical Regulations applying to all Events

1. General 1.1. Classes are free but the Class structure must be stated in the Official Documents.

1.2. Any entered Vehicle must be a Car for vehicle tax purposes and currently registered and taxed unless otherwise specified in the Official Documents .

1.3. Whilst on the Public Highway Vehicles must comply with all Statutory Regulations as to Construction and Use.

1.4. Hybrid, Electric and Battery-powered and Light Goods Vehicles may compete in appropriate Classes subject to the Official Documents .

1.5. Production cars whose original wheelbase is less than that specified in Chapter 7 App.2 Art.22.6 are permitted.

1.6. Every Production Car Autotest Vehicle must have been in series production and on general catalogued sale and available from stock through normal retain dealer outlets in the UK. It is the Competitor ’s responsibility to demonstrate this conformity.

1.7. A summary of Key Requirements is at App. 8. 1.8. Competing Vehicles must comply with the following:

a. Body (including Aerodynamics): i.

Body shape must conform to the original silhouette of the production Vehicle and retain the original layout of engine and transmission; ii. Bumpers can be removed and wheel arch extensions added; iii. An effective windscreen or Aero-type screen must be fitted; iv.

Any areas of window opening or transparent material originally specified as part of the vehicle to provide Driver visibility must remain consistent with the original specified dimensions and position. No additional areas may be added. If a Vehicle is equipped with any such additional areas they must be rendered opaque before the vehicle is allowed to compete; v. Vehicles not complying with the above will be classified as Specials. b. Engine must comply with Chapter 7 App. 2 Arts.8.1–8.4. c. Silencing must comply with silencing levels in Chapter 7 App.8 Art.2. d.

Safety: all open Vehicles and Specials are recommended to fit safety roll-over bars to at least Chapter 7 App.3 Art.20.

e. The following parts of Chapter 7 remain unmodified by this section: Chassis; Seating; Suspension; Brakes; Steering; Tyres; Cooling; Oil Systems; Fuel Systems; Electrical Systems; Weight/Ballast; Exhausts; Silencing.

f. All Vehicles should carry a Small Spill Kit complying with Chapter 7 App.2 Art.22.15. g. Tyres from Chapter 8 App.4 Lists 1B or 1C are not permitted.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 19 Appendix 3 - Technical Regulations applying to all Events 691

CHAPTER 19 AUTOTEST Appendix 4 - Autotests Specific Regulations

1. Passengers 1.1. Passengers are not allowed on Autotests on any Timed Tests.

2. Unlicensed Drivers and Minimum Ages

2.1. Entries may be accepted from Drivers who are aged 16 years and over who do not have a valid, full RTA Licence subject to the following:

a. The Vehicle must by definition be a ‘Touring Car ’ (see Chapter 1 App.1 ) b.

Engine capacity must not exceed 1400cc

c. Forced induction is not permitted.

3. Test Layouts

3.1. Vehicles must not be allowed to travel more than 100m (between maneuvers) without having to stop astride a penalty line and reverse or drive clear of the line or maneuver in a garage or box.

3.2. Competitors must either stop astride a penalty line or make a change of direction of at least 90° at a distance of not more than 25m before the finish line.

3.3. Any ‘garage’ used in an Autotest must have a minimum length of 6m and a minimum width of 3.5m.

3.4. When Competitors are required to perform a 180° turn in a box, the size of the box should be sufficient to contain a circle of 16m diameter.

3.5. All lines or pairs of adjacent markers forming part of any test must be a minimum of 3.5m long or apart.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 19 Appendix 4 - Autotests Specific Regulation 692

CHAPTER 19 AUTOTEST Appendix 5 - Production Car Autotests Specific Regulations

1. General

1.1. The Official Documents for an Event will state whether cabriolet / Sports Cars will compete with the hood erected or a hardtop fitted, or not.

1.2. Every Production Car Autotest (‘PCA’) Vehicle must have been in series production and on general catalogued sale and available from stock through retail dealer outlets in the UK.

2. Passengers 2.1. A Passenger must be carried in all Timed Tests.

2.2. The Passenger must occupy the seat alongside the Driver and, except where competing in a Period Defined Vehicle (Non-Rally) (both historic and non-historic Vehicles ) Categories A-F, wear a properly fastened and approved seat belt at all times during the test.

2.3. No other Passenger is allowed.

2.4. The Passenger in a Touring Car , or a cabriolet/ Sports Car with the hood erected or a hardtop fitted, must be aged 12 years or over and be at least 135cm in height (subject to any medical or disability exemption)

2.5. The Passenger in a cabriolet/ Sports Car without the hood erected or hardtop fitted must be aged 16 years or over and be at least 135cm in height (subject to any medical or disability exemption)

3. Unlicensed Drivers and Minimum Ages

3.1. Entries may be accepted from Drivers who are aged 14 years and over who do not have a valid, full RTA Licence , subject to:

a. The Vehicle must by definition be a ‘’ Touring Car ’’ (Chapter 1 App.1) b. c.

The Vehicle engine capacity must not exceed 2000cc including forced induction

A Passenger must be carried who holds a valid, full RTA Licence and be experienced in Autotests or AutoSOLOs .

4. Test Layouts 4.1. All lines, and pairs of adjacent markers, forming part of any test must be a minimum of 3.5m long or apart. 4.2. Any ‘garage’ must have a minimum length of 6m and a minimum width of 3.5m.

4.3. When Competitors are required to perform a 180° turn in a box, the size of the box must be sufficient to contain a circle of 16m diameter.

4.4. Each test must be designed so that a Competitor is not expected to engage reverse gear more than four times (ignoring manoeuvres to correct mistakes).

4.5. ‘ All forwards’ tests : Appendix 1 Art.2.8 applies.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 19 Appendix 5 - Production Car Autotests Specific Regulations 693

CHAPTER 19 AUTOTESTS Appendix 6 - AutoSOLO Specific Regulations

1. General

1.1. The Official Documents for an Event will state whether cabriolet/ Sports Cars will compete with the hood erected or hardtop fitted or not.

2. Technical Regulations

2.1. Every AutoSOLO car must have been driven to the Event must be currently registered (no trade plates) taxed insured and where appropriate in possession of a valid MOT

3. Passengers 3.1. A Passenger may be carried on any Timed Tests.

3.2. The Official Documents for an Event will specify whether the Driver can elect to carry a Passenger or not. If carried the Passenger must occupy the seat alongside the Driver.

3.3. One Passenger may be carried in each competing car to assist in giving directions to the Driver. Once the Event has started the number of occupants of the car must not be varied.

3.4. The Driver and where carried the Passenger must wear a properly fastened and approved seat belt at all times during the test except where competing in a Period Defined Vehicle (Non-Rally) (both historic and non-historic) Categories A-F.

3.5. No other Passenger is allowed.

3.6. The Passenger in a Touring Car or a cabriolet/ Sports Car with the hood erected or a hardtop fitted must be aged 12 years or over and be at least 135cm in height (subject to any medical or disability exemption).

3.7. The Passenger in a cabriolet/ Sports Car without the hood erected or hardtop fitted must be aged 16 years or over and be at least 135cm in height (subject to any medical or disability exemption).

4. Unlicensed Drivers and Minimum Ages

4.1. Entries may be accepted from Drivers who are aged 14 years and over who do not have a valid full RTA Licence subject to:

a. The Vehicle must by definition be a ‘ Touring Car ’ b.

The Vehicle engine capacity must not exceed 2000cc including forced induction

c. A Passenger must be carried who holds a valid full RTA licence and be experienced in AutoSOLOs.

5. Test Layouts

5.1. Only sealed surfaces can be used for AutoSOLO tests which must be run in an all-forwards direction. 5.2. The course must consist of a series of gates slaloms and turns of at least 90° every 60m. 5.3. The maximum spacing of cones in a slalom along the line of the test is 20m. 5.4. Turns of over 90° must be on a minimum radius of 5m.

5.5. All lines or pairs of adjacent markers forming part of any test must be a minimum of 3.5m and a maximum of 5m long or apart.

5.6. A typical test is illustrated in Appendix 9 Drawing 2 .

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 19 Appendix 6 - AutoSOLO Specific Regulations 694

CHAPTER 19 AUTOTEST Appendix 7 - Competitor Regulations including Licensing

1. Licences

1.1. Drivers and where applicable Passengers must produce a valid Club membership card and Competition Licence (see Chapter 6 App. 1).

1.2. Competitors must declare on their entry form if they hold a valid full RTA Licence .

1.3. Competitors holding a valid full RTA licence may use any Vehicle allowed by the Official Documents including Technical Regulations.

1.4. Passengers under 18 years old will not be considered as Competitors for the purpose of Club membership.

2. Instructions to Competitors 2.1. Before the start cars and Competitors (including any Passengers ) must be checked for eligibility.

2.2. Any Competitor not reporting as instructed may be fined penalised disqualified or forfeit their starting position.

2.3. Except where competing in Period Defined Vehicles (Non-Rally) (both historic and non-historic) Categories A-F it is recommended that drivers wear as a minimum a lap belt on any timed test.

2.4. A Vehicle may not be Entered to compete for the same award more than twice unless otherwise specified in the Official Documents and in all circumstances it must be driven by different Drivers.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 19 Appendix 7 - Competitor Regulations including Licensing 695

CHAPTER 19 AUTOTEST Appendix 8 - Summary of Requirements

A Summary of Key Requirements

“Common Rules” Test Area for Autotest

Production Car Autotests

Autotest all Forwards

Autotest with Reversing

AutoSOLO

200m x 200m 200m x 200m

200m x 200m

Maximum Test Area 200m x 200m

200m x 200m Surface Free Free Free Free Sealed Cone height “should” be 1m 1m 1m 1m 1m

Gate width 3.5m min 3.5m min – 5m max 3.5m min 3.5m – 5m 3.5m min – 5m max

Maximum distance before manoeuvres Reverse gear engagements

100m 50m 50m 50m max 60m

Free Should be none! 4 max “None” Should be none!

Turns over 90˚ Free Free Free Free min 5m radius 180˚ turn in box 16m dia min 16m dia min 16m dia min 16m dia min min 5m radius (10m Ø ) “Garage” size (minimum) 6m x 3.5m N/A 6m x 3.5m N/A N/A Slalom spacing

20m max

Technical

No – if Official Documents state not needed No – if SR state not needed

Yes

MOT

Tax

Yes

Minimum age driver 16 16 14 14

Touring car – 2000cc* inc forced induction

Touring car – 2000cc*

Maximum cc 1400* 1400*

inc forced induction Mandatory – Must have Full RTA Licence and Autotest experience if driver does not Closed Car = 12 Open Car = 16

Subject to Official Documents

Passenger allowed No No

Closed Car = 12 Open Car = 16

Minimum age passenger

None allowed None allowed

If driver has Full RTA licence and Autotest experience

If driver has Full RTA Licence and Autotest experience

Type of car – young driver Battery powered and light commercial vehicles

Touring car Touring car Touring car Touring car

Subject to Official Documents

Must be driven to event No No No Yes

Note: Chapter 7 Technical Regulations applies in addition to App 3 of this Chapter. * Unlimited when Driver holds a Full RTA Licence.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 19 Appendix 8 - Summary of Requirements 696

CHAPTER 19 AUTOTESTS Appendix 9 - Drawings

Drawing number 1 Drawing number 2

Penalty Table Marks lost

PENALTY TABLE

AutoSOLO Autotest PCA

(a) Each minute late in reporting at the start or a restart 5 5* 5*

Not attempting or being ready to attempt a test when instructed to do so Not performing a test correctly, other than in (d) or (e) or not completing the test or making a false start Striking any barrier, wall or marker or crossing the boundary of a test (per mistake) Failing to cross or stop at any line or specified position as required in a test (per mistake)

20* 20* 20*

(b)

20* 20* 20*

(c)

(d)

5 5 5

(e)

5 5 5

1 and fraction

(f)

Every second (and fraction) taken to complete test

*Plus the lowest by any Competitor in the class making an attempt correctly on that run. The maximum penalty (including time) for any test cannot exceed penalty (b) or (c) above. All unless otherwise specified in the Official Documents

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 19 Appendix 9 - Drawings 697

Chapter 20 Cross Country

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 - Cross Country 698

CHAPTER 20 CROSS COUNTRY EVENTS

1. General Provisions 1.1. This Chapter must be read in conjunction with Chapters 1 – 7 , 9, 11. 1.2. The following Appendices comprise this Chapter: App.1 App.2 App.3 App.4 App.5 App.6 App.7 App.8 App.9

Organisers Regulations - All Events Organisers Regulations - All Events using the Highway Organisers Regulations - Definitions of Event Sections using the Highway Organisers Regulations - Trials and Un-timed Events Organisers Regulations - Timed Events Competitors Regulations - All Events Competitors Regulations - All Events using the Highway and Hill Rallies Competitors Regulations – Trials and Un-timed Events Competitors Regulations – All Timed Events App.10 Technical Regulations App.11 Charts and Diagrams App.12 PR Guidance App.13 Technical Regulations for Junior Trials Vehicles

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 - Cross Country 699

CHAPTER 20 CROSS COUNTRY Appendix 1 - Organisers Regulations – All Events

1. General 1.1. These Regulations are supplemented by Apps 2 -5 inclusive as appropriate to the type of Event.

1.2. An ASN Organising Permit is required for any form of Cross Country Event and is issued at the sole discretion of the ASN .

1.3. The ASN Organising Permit number and the Competition Authorisation Office (CAO) authorisation numbers where applicable must be included in the Final Instructions.

1.4. A Recognised Club will only be allowed to run Events up to Interclub status unless the ASN has specifically approved an application for National or International status.

1.5. Every practicable precaution must be taken to avoid depositing mud or soil on the public highway when leaving private property.

1.6. Warning Notices as required by Chapter 3 App 3 must be displayed. 1.7. Organisers should be aware of the nearest hospital and the best route there in case of incident.

1.8. The Organisers of Events on a single site must have on site at a pre-identified locations a First Aid Kit in compliance with requirements for 11-20 employees as specified in BS 8859-1:2011 (and including an eye wash).

1.9. No person under 14 may act as a Marshal or Assistant Marshal unless under the direct supervision of a Marshal over 18 years old.

1.10. Competition Licences should be signed by the Clerk of the Course if the holders complete the Event without any adverse report. Signatures may be obtained by both Driver and Navigator.

1.11. The use of the public forest estates managed by Natural Resources Wales, Forestry and Land Scotland and Forestry England must have been approved by the ASN . Permission must be applied for by an annually specified date prior to the Forestry year (which runs 1 January - 31 December).

1.12. All Cross Country Events using public forest estates are restricted to the tyres defined as All Terrain in Appendix 10 to this Chapter .

1.13. The Clerk of the Course for either a Competitive Safari or a Hill Rally of National status or above must hold a valid ASN C of C Licence . For details of retention and upgrading see Chapter 5.

2. Official Recovery

2.1. Except Challenge Events and Team and Winch Recovery Events all recovery operations must be under the control of the Clerk of the Course .

2.2. All equipment to be used by the Official Recovery Teams must be inspected prior to the start of an Event and the Clerk of the Course must be satisfied that it is in good condition and adequate for the purpose intended.

2.3. All Official Recovery Teams should be sited by the Clerk of the Course and the method used in recovering stranded Competitors must be specified in the Official Documents.

2.4. It is recommended that all vehicles used for Official Recovery should have any front or rear windows whether glazed or not covered with a metal mesh expanded metal or gauze. This is particularly important where ‘snatch’ recovery is to be employed.

3. Fire Extinguishers

3.1. At each section Organisers should provide fire extinguishant of a minimum 9kg total capacity in units of not less than 6kg each suitable for extinguishing vehicle fires.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 1 - Organisers Regulations – All Events 700

3.2. This extinguisher can be carried by a Section Marshal escorting Competitors around the various sections. 3.3. Where Sections are closely grouped one extinguisher located at a clearly visible central point is permitted.

4. Footpaths Bridleways and Restricted Byways

4.1. The Organisers of any Cross Country Events (competitive or recreational) crossing or using a Footpath Bridleway or Restricted Byway whether competitively or not must appoint a Liaison Officer to verify the status of any track or path along the route ensure compliance with Section 33 of The Road Traffic Act 1988 and:

Obtain permission from the Landowner and any occupiers and authorisation from the Highway Authority in accordance with Section 33 of The Road Traffic Act 1988 (unless the route is already a way of higher status). Any conditions laid down must be adhered to.

b. Notify the Police (clarifying the nature of the event). c. Notify the National Parks (if appropriate). d. Notify the Parish Council. 4.2. All locations must be adequately marshalled by Officials who are well briefed and properly identified.

4.3. One Official must be appointed for each section to ensure that the Event does not unduly inconvenience other users e.g. horse-riders walkers cyclists.

4.4. The Liaison Officer must have a good working knowledge of the Rights of Way affecting the Competition.

4.5. Alternative routes for other users of the Rights of Way must be signposted. Warning Notices as appropriate and the Safety Code should also be on display in all areas.

4.6. Instructions to Competitors in Official Documents for Events affecting Footpaths or Bridleways should include the following warning:

“This Event is routed along and / or across Rights of Way. Competitors must exercise caution and reduce their speed accordingly near other users. Be especially careful near horses. Slow down stop and switch off your engine if necessary.”

5. Judges 5.1. Judges may be appointed to adjudicate on any infringements of the Regulations including:

a. Touching markers. b. Conforming with the course. c. Remaining seated in accordance with the Regulations. d. Stopping forward motion. e. Noise. f. Baulking. g. Entitlement to a re-run.

6. Spill Kits

6.1. At each section Organisers must provide at least one Medium Spill Kit. 6.2. This Spill Kit can be carried by a Section Marshal escorting Competitors around the various sections. 6.3. Where sections are closely grouped one spill kit located at a clearly visible central point is permitted.

6.4. For all Hill Rallies, Competitive Safaris, Point to Point Challenge Events and Orienteering a Medium Spill Kit must be located at the start of the Course, each Special Stage or Section.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 1 - Organisers Regulations – All Events 701

CHAPTER 20 CROSS COUNTRY Appendix 2 - Organisers Regulations – All Events using the Highway

1. General

1.1. These Regulations are supplemented by Apps.1 and 3–5 inclusive as appropriate to the type of Event and Appendix 12 in respect of necessary Public Relations.

1.2. The Official Documents must specify the time at which Competitors must report at the Start and whether public roads are used to link sections of the Competition.

1.3. Any Competition traversing a Highway in England Wales or Scotland is subject to the provisions of the Motor Vehicles (Competitions and Trials) Regulations.

1.4. Application for authorisation of an Event must be made to the Competition Authorisation Office (CAO) at ASN or for Scotland to the Royal Scottish Automobile Club (RSAC). Details of the Authorisation Procedures are available from ASN and RSAC as appropriate.

1.5. Application for an ASN Permit must be made in accordance with Chapter 3 prior to the CAO Authorisation being granted. The Permit itself is only validated after Authorisation has been granted.

1.6. In the case of road courses route selection is subject to ASN approval. Applications must include a detailed itinerary giving the exact distances to be covered.

1.7. The Organisers of all Events using the Highway must undertake effective Public Relations work in accordance with Appendix 12 .

1.8. Except Hill Rallies Competitors must not be required to travel more than 100 miles in a Highway or to perform any task or solve any problem that is likely to inconvenience or offend other road users or the public.

1.9. Except Hill Rallies Competitors must not be required to arrive at any point other than the Finish at or by a specific time.

1.10. Except Hill Rallies if an overall time limit is set for an Event it must be possible to win without exceeding an average speed of 10mph from Start to Finish.

1.11. Organisers (except Hill Rallies ) must familiarise themselves with the medical and ambulance facilities along the route.

1.12. In the case of a Treasure Hunt no merit must attach to being the first to arrive at the Finish or any other point.

1.13. Vehicles should be checked for Noise by qualified Driving Standards Observers before the Start and along the route and noisy cars stopped if necessary.

1.14. Any Holding Controls should be located to avoid public nuisance. Sensitive areas along the route should be drawn to Competitors’ attention. Marshals should be well briefed and readily identified.

1.15. Except for Hill Rallies the location of all ‘ Give Way’ junctions on the route must be issued to Competitors with clear instructions as how to deal with them (i.e ‘must stop’ or ‘per Highway Code’).

1.16. Instructions on sensible use of the roads should be issued including the following:

a. Closing of gates etc. b. Clearing of roads at Section ends. c. Following the ‘Country Code’ failure of which can lead to disciplinary action.

2. Duties and Responsibilities of the Clerk of the Course 2.1. In addition to the duties detailed in Chapter 5 the Clerk of the Course should ensure:

The Organisation and Regulations for the Event meet the requirements of the relevant Statutory Instruments.

Reasonable precautions are taken in the selection of route time of day control of spectators etc to avoid inconvenience to the general public.

Where the farming community may be affected details of the Event are sent to the County Secretary of the local National Farmers’ Union and any other relevant National bodies.

The appointed CAO Route Liaison Officer for each of the Counties and National Parks through which the route passes is consulted about the draft route at least three months before the Event and before submission to the CAO particularly where special Public Relations work is required in sensitive areas. The Route Liaison Officer may:

i. Ask to see all paperwork relating to the Event including PR sheets. ii.

Request the CAO to suspend Authorisation or the ASN to suspend the Permit until satisfied with the route and the effectiveness of the PR work. iii. Require the Clerk of the Course to order re-routes to avoid areas of particular concern. e.

Private property whether on the Event route or a link section is not to be used without written permission from the landowner or authorised agent.

Wherever possible the route should be checked for possible damage immediately before and after an Event.

When the ASN medical and safety radio frequency (81.575Mhz FM and 81.5375Mhz FM) is to be used it must be operated in accordance with Ofcom and ASN licensing requirements available on request from the ASN .

3. Time Schedule

3.1. Competitors on a Public Highway must be controlled by a predetermined speed schedule unless they are allowed to complete the Event in their own time.

3.2. The Event time schedule must not lead Drivers to exceed any statutory speed limits or involve speeds which might be considered dangerous or unreasonable in the light of prevailing traffic conditions and the nature of the route.

3.3. No time or speed schedule should be imposed which requires or encourages Competitors using a road open to the public to achieve an average speed between any two points which exceeds the following limits:

30 mph for all roads other than motorways

a. b.

60 mph for motorways c. 25 mph for vehicles subject to a speed limit (such as vans) d. 20 mph for neutral sections (except on M A or B class roads).

3.4. There must be no bonus for exceeding the specified average. Competitors must be given in advance all the information necessary to enable them to calculate the speed which they are being asked to average.

3.5. For those portions of the route being navigated by map references the direction of approach to controls should be specified and penalties imposed for approaching from any other direction whenever the country being traversed makes this possible without destroying the need for competitive skill.

3.6. The use of gated roads should be avoided if possible.

3.7. If Competitors are to traverse a gated road then adequate arrangements must be made to ensure that all gateways are manned by Marshals to ensure that no Competitor is required to open a gate and that all gates are closed after the Competition.

3.8. Occupiers of land adjacent to the road must be advised in advance of the Competition .

3.9. The use of single-track roads should be avoided if possible during daylight but if used the speed set must be lowered as appropriate.

3.10. Those sections of an Event involving difficult navigation by map references or a detailed route card must be scheduled so that no Competitor is traversing minor roads during the morning or evening hours when normal farm traffic may be expected unless the required average speed is not more than 20mph.

3.11. No Competitor is allowed to drive more than 200 miles continuously without a break and there must be a rest period of at least one hour for each Driver at intervals of not more than 200 miles.

3.12. Any Event which runs for more than 14 hours must include a rest halt of at least two hours unless previously agreed with the ASN .

4. Controls

4.1. Controls must be sited at locations with adequate space for Officials’ and Competitors’ cars to stop without affecting non-Event traffic.

4.2. Controls must be sited at least 500m from occupied houses except where written approval has been obtained from the occupants.

4.3. All controls must be clearly identified at the roadside.

4.4. Controls at which Competitors are required to stop to record a time and which are on the Public Highway must not be less than two miles from any adjacent control.

4.5. Competitors must be provided with all necessary regulatory information at or before their starting time.

4.6. Competitors must be started on the road sections of an Event at intervals of one minute and leave the start in numerical order unless the Official Documents specify a longer time interval or a different order.

5. Official Documents 5.1. In addition to Chapter 3 the Official Documents must clearly state:

The type of Event that is being organised and whether or not there will be standard sections, special stages, regularity sections, trials sections or other types of test.

When details of the route or any section or stage will be issued and

b. c.

Any maps (and their scale) required and any modification of App.9 Art.6.9 In any dispute concerning mileages these shall be calculated in accordance with 1:50000 OS maps (or equivalent local maps).

The type of timing to be used.

A reminder of which provisions of the Technical Regulations apply.

Whether or not Vehicles are required to be taxed and insured for use on the Highway.

Whether Competitors are required to carry Competition Numbers.

Whether servicing is permitted and if so then how the service vehicles will be identified.

If competing cars or Service Vehicles are required to carry any identification markings then the name of the Organising Club must be incorporated on the identification.

Any information which is required in order to comply with Competitors Regulations regarding the order and location of Controls in the Route Book or Card and verification of conformity.

5.2. All Official bulletins, Permits and Authorisations times and results unless issued within 2 hours of the last Vehicle finishing the Competition must be published on an Official Notice Board the location of which must be notified to Competitors

5.3. Stewards (or Observers for the upgrading of an Event ) should be supplied with a complete marked map of the route prior to the date of the Event and a set of all instructions and documents and Route Cards that are issued to Competitors and Officials as soon as they are available.

5.4. The Road Book Route Card or Time Card shall clearly:

a. Indicate the description of each section ( Standard Neutral Transport Regularity Trial etc). b.

Specify the time allowed to traverse the route between each Time Control and all the information necessary to enable Competitors to comply with the applicable Event Regulations .

Indicate what information the Organisers require to be recorded and the places at which these records will be made except in relation to Driving Standards Observers.

Indicate which checks will be manned by Officials except checks established in except in relation to Driving Standards Observers.

e. Specify which portions of the route shall be timed to less than one minute. f. Indicate any ‘out of bounds’ areas to be respected. g.

Indicate the position of all Stop signs along the route any other junctions at which Competitors are required to stop and any areas where they are required to observe special restrictions (ie Quiet Zones etc).

h. Specify the order in which Controls and Checks must be visited.

6. Noise Testing

6.1. Prior to the Start all Vehicles including those of Officials who are expected to follow a substantial part of the route must pass a Noise test conducted by an Environmental Scrutineer using a Noise meter as prescribed by the Technical Regulations.

6.2. This test will prohibit any vehicle with a reading over 100dB(A) from starting unless the Official Documents specify lower levels.

6.3. All measurements refer to the 0.5m test mandated by Chapter 7.

6.4. Organisers must make arrangements for a suitable site to be available for testing and ensure that adequate personnel are appointed.

6.5. A further Noise test for Competitors and Course Cars must be made on the road sections. These must be manned by a Driving Standards Observer or experienced Judges or by Judges using a Noise meter. They have the authority to penalise Competitors on the spot and their findings must be recorded in the results of the Event whether or not any Competitor has been Disqualified .

6.6. The Noise test Official may also act as a Driving Standards Observer.

7. Eligibility Checks

7.1. At Events involving different Classes of Vehicle arrangements to undertake eligibility checks should be available prior to the Competition or on conclusion.

7.2. All Vehicles including Course Cars must comply with the relevant Technical and Safety Regulations . 7.3. Checks may be carried out both before and during an Event .

7.4. The Chief Scrutineer must be available throughout the Event to ensure that the Technical Regulations are complied with.

8. Timekeeping

8.1. An ASN-approved Rally Timekeeper should be appointed as a Chief Timekeeper for any Event where timing is to less than one minute.

8.2. The Chief Timekeeper appointed for the event is responsible for the issuing of timing equipment and ensuring that the Timekeepers who will be using the equipment are competent in its use.

8.3. The Chief Timekeeper must be able to deal with operational problems affecting timing equipment and be capable of dealing with queries arising from the Time Cards.

8.4. Any section of an Event which has timing to less than one minute must be timed by certified equipment digital clocks to ASN specification R or E/B recording clocks printing to seconds or automatic apparatus.

8.5. All official clocks or watches must be set to GMT / BST time.

8.6. Any official timepiece timing to the minute which is not within 15 seconds of GMT / BST or any official timepiece timing to the second which is not within five seconds of GMT / BST will be disregarded.

8.7. Times will be recorded to whole minutes unless the Official Documents state otherwise.

8.8. Any portions of an Event to be timed to seconds will be clearly indicated in the Road Book Route or Time Car.

CHAPTER 20 CROSS COUNTRY Appendix 3 - Organisers Regulations - Definitions of Event Sections using the Highway

The following definitions and restrictions are common in all categories of Cross Country Event.

1. Standard Sections 1.1. If timed to the second Standard Sections should not:

Pass through any area with over 20 occupied dwellings within a 300m radius of the route unless with written agreement from all the householders and ASN permission.

b. Start before 23.59 or finish more than one hour after sunrise. c.

Include any point where Competitors are required to observe special restrictions on their driving behaviour except for observing signs warning of natural hazards (which may be erected by Organisers ). ‘Quiet Zones’ or other restrictions are specifically forbidden.

Join or cross any A-class road except where there is a manned control at which Competitors must stop.

e. Start on or use an A-class road continuously for more than 200m.

1.2. When timed to less than one minute Competitors must not use any private property other than footpaths and bridleways for which approval has been granted.

1.3. Organisers must not:

Offer any award for Competitors who equal or improve upon the time schedules for individual Sections nor have any awards for the fastest times or least penalties on any Sections

b. c.

Operate a Flying Finish time control Include any road with a 30 or 40mph limit without the express permission of the RLO

d. Require Competitors to average in excess of 30mph.

2. Neutral Sections

2.1. Neutral Sections are used to take Competitors through PR-sensitive or densely populated areas and must comply with Art.1.3 above.

2.2. Neutral Sections be completed by Competitors without the use of auxiliary lighting except as legally required in fog or falling snow. Organisers must remind Competitors of this requirement in the Official Documents .

2.3. Neutral Sections should not:

a. Be timed to less than one minute. b. Allow Competitors to make up time on the public road. c. Have any lateness penalty applied except maximum lateness. d. Have an average speed of more than 20mph except on M A or B class roads.

3. Regularity Sections

3.1. Competitors must be informed in advance of the locations of the Start and Finish of any Regularity Sections .

3.2. Each Section must contain at least one Intermediate Time Control the location of which must not be given to Competitors in advance.

3.3. Competitors must however be advised in writing before entering such a Section whether they are required to stop at Intermediate Time Controls which must be identified by a Control Board.

3.4. Adherence to the time schedule in a Regularity Section is assessed by comparing the time of arrival at any Intermediate Time Control (or the Finish Time Control ) with the time of arrival at the preceding Time Control. Timing whether or not the Vehicle is required to stop is based on the moment a car enters the Time Control area.

3.5. Penalties which must be specified in the Official Documents are imposed for stopping within sight of but outside the area of any Intermediate Time Control (or the Finish Time Control ).

4. Transport Sections

4.1. Transport Sections are used to move Competitors between other types of Section where the route is not PR sensitive or densely populated.

4.2. Transport Sections must also comply with Art.1.3 above. and 2.2 above.

4.3. If using roads with 30mph or 40mph limits in force Organisers must impose a lower average speed commensurate with the proportion of restricted roads in the Section .

4.4. Transport Sections must not:

a. Be timed to less than one minute. b. Be less than four miles in length. c. Have any lateness penalty applied other than for maximum lateness.

5. Road Sections

5.1. Road Sections comprise any Sections of a route on a Hill Rally (excluding control and service areas) whether on the Public Highway or not and which link Special Stages.

5.2. When on the Public Highway these Sections must comply with Art.1.3–4.4 above (except & Art.1.3a ).

6. Trials Sections

6.1. A Trials Section is a Test laid out over undulating ground designed to bring Competitors to an involuntary stop.

6.2. The Course comprises a series of ‘gates’ defined by marker canes where Competitors ’ performance is measured according to the number of gates ‘cleared’ without stopping leaving the Course or touching a Course marker.

7. Special Stages

7.1. Special Stages are timed Sections run on roads or land for which the Event has exclusive vehicle access or on public roads officially closed for motor sporting purposes.

7.2. If run partly or wholly on unsealed surfaces they should be organised so that no Competitor achieves an average speed in excess of 50mph.

7.3. Special Stages should be over a distance of not less than a half mile. 7.4. No stage exceeding 20 miles may be run without written permission from ASN. 7.5. Special Stages should not:

Include any Checks or Controls or other requirements which might require or encourage Competitors to stop.

Use any Sections of a Venue in opposite directions at the same time unless there is at least a 15m separation between the two routes with a continuous barrier. Cross-roads used twice must preserve this separation. The barrier must consist of one or more of the following: tyres banded in threes straw bales earthbanks or similar immovable objects. Motorway cones or blocking tape are not suitable.

Use any currently or previously licensed Race Speed or Kart Circuit or any airfield (disused or

otherwise) unless ASN has specifically approved the stage layouts and safety precautions. d.

Be routed closer than 75 metres to any parked aircraft unless there is a solid physical barrier at the edge of the course protecting the aircraft and a gap of 45 metres from the barrier to the aircraft.

CHAPTER 20 CROSS COUNTRY Appendix 4 - Organisers Regulations – Trials and Un-timed Events

1. Cross Country Vehicle Trials

1.1. These trials must be organised in accordance with App.1 and App.2 and App.3 and App.12 and App.13 as appropriate and the use of road sections should be avoided.

1.2. The Official Documents must clearly state if the highway is to be used (see App.2 Arts.1 ).

1.3. Where applicable Competitors should be split into equal groups which should start at different observed sections simultaneously.

1.4. The Start and Finish of observed sections must be marked by signs and the Starts should be reasonably flat and wide so that all Competitors can at least enter the Section.

1.5. The layout of sections should take account of the location of possible failure points and particularly for Tyro Trials safe exit routes.

1.6. The layout should facilitate marshalling by the minimum possible number of Officials.

1.7. Sections should be as wide as possible to allow a choice of route and as winding as possible to place a premium on driving skill (although the radius of all corners must be adequate for all vehicles entered).

1.8. Course markers should not be placed against trees. 1.9. The use of trees or natural hazards as course boundaries should be avoided. 1.10. If possible alternative routes should be planned in case of changes of weather condition.

1.11. It is recommended that Sections be laid out using a minimum of 10 pairs of marker stakes (see Appendix 11 Chart 1 ) of a minimum height of 1m and with colour coding to clearly identify each side of the route.

1.12. Metal rod markers should not be used.

1.13. Markers should be placed to avoid the likelihood of Competitors putting all wheels out between markers or where they are likely to be moved by bushes or branches.

1.14. Clearly visible sub-section numbers should have a minimum figure height of 50mm.

1.15. If sub-section numbers are not placed on both sides of the route they should be on the right-hand side with corresponding guide markers on the left.

1.16. Sub-section numbers should be closely grouped in areas of expected failure.

1.17. A minor proportion of the sections can be timed but any time penalties must be related using a published formula to points lost on a section.

1.18. Timed sections must be a maximum of 200m long and the maximum time allowed for the section shall be stated.

1.19. Approaches to and exits from sections must not present any unreasonable hazard or difficulty.

1.20. There should be sufficient Marshals at each observed section to ensure safety procedures are followed and adequate Judges in attendance (see App.1 Art.5 ).

1.21. Organisers may at any convenient time after the start of a Competition require any Competitor to increase or decrease their minimum permitted tyre pressure by a maximum of 5lbs/sq.in. This decision must be advised to Competitors in writing and sufficient time allowed for them to comply.

2. Junior Trials

2.1. Junior Trials must be organised in accordance with Art.1 above and at all times during these Events Vehicles may only be driven under the instruction of an Official .

2.2. Where a Junior Trial is held concurrently with another Events at the same Venue the area for the Junior

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 4 - Organisers Regulations – Trials and Un-timed Events 710

Trial must be adequately separated and clearly defined.

2.3. Special consideration must be given to the terrain chosen particularly regarding side slopes and drops and water should generally be avoided.

2.4. Where present the maximum depth of any water must be 0.2m. 2.5. There are three Classes of Junior Trial : Novice, Intermediate and Expert . 2.6. The maximum permitted gradients for each is as follows:

Novice Intermediate Expert Longitudinal gradient 50% 60% N/A Transverse gradient 25% 35% N/A

2.7. An ASN Observer may be appointed at Junior Trial Events.

3. Tyro Trials 3.1. These must be organised in accordance with Art.1 above of this Chapter and the following:

The terrain chosen should ensure that vehicles do not catch any bodywork on approach ramp breakover or departure angles and consideration should be given to the Vehicles entered when laying out sections.

b. Any longitudinal gradient must be 50% maximum. c. Any transverse gradient must be 25% maximum. d. The depth of any water must be 0.3m maximum.

3.2. Vehicles must be capable of traversing sections without making contact with any trees bushes or other natural features.

3.3. No features may be included within sections which are likely to cause damage to the underside of competing Vehicles.

3.4. It is recommended that a non-competitive section is provided in the itinerary so that unlicensed and less experienced drivers are afforded the opportunity to familiarise themselves with their Vehicle and its controls without penalty and to be observed by the Clerk of the Course before the Competition starts.

4. Winch Recovery

4.1. The aim of these Events is to safely and precisely winch an object between two points via gates and different routes as defined in the written instructions. They must be organised in accordance with App.1 Arts.1 –4.6 and the following:

The Course can be laid out over any type of terrain but must be on private ground in an area prohibited to spectators. It must be taped or roped off to indicate the boundary to Competitors and spectators.

Natural anchorages may be used at the discretion of the Clerk of the Course but must be protected from damage.

All objects to be recovered must have a good quality chain attached to the satisfaction of the Clerk of the Course . If the object is a Vehicle then all glass must be removed where appropriate. The steered wheels may be locked in any position and one or more wheels may be removed.

The Clerk of the Course may stop a team if their mode of recovery is considered likely to be dangerous to Officials , Competitors, spectators or the natural terrain.

Penalty points will be awarded if any gate or previously specified object is touched by either the object or team.

The Organisers will allocate Competition Numbers at random and Teams will start in numerical order.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 4 - Organisers Regulations – Trials and Un-timed Events 711

5. Promotional Events

5.1. These are non-competitive Events designed to enable participants to experience driving their Vehicles off- road and to introduce them to organised off-roading. They must be run in accordance with Chapter 3 App.7 and the following:

They must consist primarily of a liaison route or routes wholly off the Public Highway which may also include optional simple and non-damaging trials type sections.

b. The liaison routes and any special sections should be clearly marked and adequately marshalled. c. Clubs may not organise more than three Promotional Events per year.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 4 - Organisers Regulations – Trials and Un-timed Events 712

Cross Country Vehicle Timed Trials

1.1.

These Trials must be organised in accordance with Appendix 4 Art.1 and the following:

The instructions must state the maximum time and the target time allowed to complete each section.

The target time must be set at no more than 22mph (10m/s) average.

The maximum length of any Timed Trial section must not exceed 320m.

Events must be timed using equipment as specified in Art.3.5 below.

Each section must be clearly identified (in accordance with Chapter 3 Appendix 3 ) and must be a prohibited area for all persons except Officials and those Competitors attempting the section.

f. The Chief Scrutineer at a Timed Trial must be appointed from the list of ASN Technical Officials. 2. Competitive Safaris

2.1. Competitive Safaris must be organised in accordance with Appendix 1 and the following:

a. All Courses must be on private ground and should be laid out at one venue only. b.

Timed Sections must run over roads or tracks from which all Vehicle and animal traffic has been excluded. These need not be marked on definitive maps.

c. The route should be made as safe as possible and unmistakable for Competitors and spectators. d.

Means of access both to the section and to the site should be closed by barriers and signs to prevent any non- competing Vehicle gaining access.

Warning notices as detailed in Chapter 3 Appendix 3 should be displayed and areas of particular danger (eg escape routes) should be marked with signs as specified.

It should be impossible for anyone on foot to get on to any Stage through normal access roads or tracks without:

The Course can involve trials type sections the surmounting of natural obstacles or hazards or points at which the Crew may be required to dismount to perform a set task.

Wherever possible the Course should be not less than one mile long and where the terrain makes this impossible at least a quarter mile long.

2.2. Classes in Competitive Safaris are free but must be stated in the Official Documents .

3. Timing

3.1. The average speed must not exceed 30mph unless run in accordance with minimum safety requirements of a Hill Rally Special Stage when the average speed must not exceed 50mph. Competitive Safaris timed in excess of 30mph shall be referred to as Safari Plus .

3.2. No Competitor exceeding the specified average speed should gain any advantage nor be penalised.

3.3. Competitors must not be offered any award for equalling or improving upon the target time or achieving the fastest times or least penalties for such sections.

3.4. The Final Results must include a statement of the Course length.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 5 - Organisers Regulations – Timed Events 713

3.5. For Clubmans Events the following is strongly recommended. Interclub and higher Events must be timed by:

a. Certified equipment. b. Digital clocks to ASN Specification R or E/B. c.

Recording clocks printing to seconds or

OR d. Automatic apparatus. 3.6. All times recorded must be to the previous whole second only.

3.7. Where timing is actuated by a light beam then Vehicles must be positioned at the Start with the part which will break the beam 1 to 2 metres behind the beam.

3.8. Where an Event is timed manually and the Start Marshal has instructed a Competitor that they are next to start the starting procedure shall be either of the following:

a. The Marshal will give a loud verbal indication of 30 seconds to go 15 seconds 10 seconds and 5 seconds and then count down verbally each second 5-4-3-2-1-GO. Upon the Signal GO a visual starting Signal must be given which will normally be the raising of a flag from the bonnet (not the windscreen). Any other visual Signal to be used must be described in the Event Official Documents . False starts will be penalised in accordance with Appendix 11 Charts 3.h or 4.h. b.

Before the illumination of the green light indicating that a Competitor may start a red light is illuminated warning that their countdown is imminent. The Official Documents must specify the countdown method. Timing will start from the green light whether or not the Competitor starts immediately on its illumination.

3.9. Courses and Stages where Competitors are required to start at intervals of less than one minute may dispense with the ‘30 seconds to go’ advance warning. This procedure must be advised in the Official Documents .

4. Course Organisation 4.1. There must be adequate communication between Start Finish and intermediate points.

4.2. Adequate Marshals must be posted along the Course particularly at any potentially dangerous points at any observed section and where recovery operations may be required.

4.3. Rescue Vehicles must be positioned at predetermined locations to transport any injured Crew or Officials to the medical or first aid facilities.

4.4. Motorised reconnaissance of the Course is forbidden unless specifically allowed by the Official Documents and then only if run to the requirements of a Promotional Event and in a controlled convoy with lead and tail official Course Vehicles .

5. Course Marking

5.1. The Course should have a clearly marked route so that no navigation is required and all Course markings should comply with Special Stage requirements.

5.2. The correct route should be indicated to Competitors by arrows and signs and by physical blockage of all but the correct road.

5.3. These indications must wherever possible be consistent with the illustrations at Appendix 11 Chart 1 and with the following:

a. Arrowing should be reduced to a minimum and placed only at junctions.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 5 - Organisers Regulations – Timed Events 714

Really acute bends or hazards where a drastic reduction in speed is required should be marked by a Caution Board. Caution Boards comprising red exclamation Marks on a white background 51cm x 38cm will be displayed on each side of the Stage between 40 to 50 metres before the hazard. At the hazard a pair of diamond shaped orange markers at least 150mm x 150mm will be placed each side of the Stage . These will be repeated in pairs on each hazard if there is more than one hazard to which the warning refers (see Appendix 11 Chart 1 ).

All signs should be placed approximately 1.2m from the ground. Wherever possible arrows and signs should be Dayglo red or orange and should be easily visible. To avoid confusion multiple signs on one post should be avoided.

Advance warning signs for junctions should be between 50m and 100m before the junction. Two arrows should be visible on the junction fixed to form a ‘gate’ through which the Competitor will pass. Arrows may be angled to show the severity of the junction indicated by one of four basic positions either vertical horizontal raised or lowered by 45°.

e. An example of the method used must be shown to Competitors before the Event . f.

Consistency with the distance of the advance warning signs from their respective junctions is important throughout the Event and an explanation should be included within the Drivers briefing.

A vertical arrow should confirm the correct route immediately after a junction where the Course is not laid out on clearly defined tracks unless the next junction is clearly visible. Where the Course is laid out using clearly defined tracks a confirmation arrow is not required.

A wrong direction should be indicated by a standard No Entry sign (a red disc with a white bar) and all but the correct road should be visibly blocked by means of tree trunks.

5.4. The location of all danger spots on the route must be clearly marked in the Road Book or Stage Tulip Diagrams.

5.5. Special warning signs a minimum of 51cm x 38cm and fixed on a stake must be erected in a clearly visible position.

5.6. The sign must show two exclamation marks and be preceded at 50m and 100m by similar exclamation marks.

5.7. Both signs must be marshalled throughout the Event .

5.8. Other hazards should be indicated by single exclamation signs 50m and 100m before the hazard (an ASN list is available to Organisers on request).

5.9. If a section of road is used twice on Stages where the route divides or where two roads merge the junction itself should be clearly marked by a white board at least 76cm x 61cm illustrating the nature of the junction. Figures on this board should be at least 16cm high.

5.10. The junction should be preceded by similar signs at 100m and 200m showing Motorway-type count down diagonal bands.

5.11. Judges of Fact should be placed at the split junction to record penalties on Competitors overshooting and reversing back against the route of competitive traffic.

5.12. Where Competition routes merge on a lapping Course the angle between the two roads (prior to the common route) should be no more than 45º to each other and on joining should run separately but in parallel for at least 100m before merging.

5.13. Signs of a minimum size of 76cm x 51cm must be shown to Competitors as detailed in Appendix 11 Chart 2.

5.14. Arrows must have a bright preferably Dayglo finish facing the Competitor .

5.15. Where the Course changes direction repeatedly without any natural features arrows must have a contrasting colour on the reverse side (preferably matt black or white) with tape staked at reasonable intervals to further define the Course .

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 5 - Organisers Regulations – Timed Events 715

5.16. The Flying Finish Line must be located a sufficient distance from the Stop Line to allow Competitors to decelerate in a controlled manner especially where they proceed directly into a Service Area.

5.17. Bad weather slippery conditions and the speed potential of Vehicles crossing the Flying Finish Line will require a greater distance.

5.18. The area between the Flying Finish and the Stop Line should be free from bends sharp or deceptive corners or hazards such as gates or ditches. This area is prohibited to spectators.

6. Flags Signals

6.1. During a run it may be necessary to communicate to Competitors the need to proceed with caution or to cease Competition immediately. This will be achieved by the display of a flag to oncoming Competitors .

6.2. Proceed with Caution

A requirement to proceed with caution shall be indicated by a Marshal wearing a high visibility tabard or vest displaying a held yellow Signal .

On displaying the yellow Signal the Marshal must radio the deployment to the Event Control detailing the cause and Competitor involved and must radio to Event Control when the yellow Signal is withdrawn.

c. Yellow Signals shall measure a minimum of 60cm x 70cm. d.

Time lost whilst proceeding under caution will be regarded as force majeure unless a re-run is authorised by the Clerk of the Course in accordance with the provisions of the Official Documents and / or any Decision by a Judge of Fact when such Judges have been appointed.

e. Failure to comply as instructed will incur a penalty of Disqualification. f. Where Live Recovery is in operation the process is further detailed in Art.8 below.

6.3. Cease Competition

Where extreme circumstances make it necessary to neutralise the Competition e.g. where spectator safety is compromised or to authorise the movement of non- competing or rescue Vehicles the system of Red Signals must be used.

These Red Signals should be located at all locations where a rescue / emergency vehicle may reenter the Course following a shortcut and at each Radio Point .

Red Signals will be displayed at all Radio Points preceding the incident only on the specific instruction of the Clerk of the Course .

Red Signals must be prominently displayed (held out steady not waved) by a designated Marshal who MUST wear a high visibility tabard or vest.

e. Red Signals shall measure a minimum of 60cm x 70cm. f. Competitors who have been shown a Red Signal will be given a notional time for the run or a re-run. g. The time of the deployment of the Red Signal will be recorded and notified to the Clerk of the Course . h. Under no circumstances will any Vehicle be allowed to drive in the reverse direction of the Stage.

i. The priorities in dealing with an incident are to deal first with those who are injured (whether Competitor, Official or spectator) by removing them in a suitable Vehicle if it appears prudent to do so and then to deal with the Vehicles if they constitute a hazard to the continued running of the Stage or to property.

j. Failure to comply as instructed will incur a penalty of Disqualification.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 5 - Organisers Regulations – Timed Events 716

7. Senior Officials

7.1. The Clerk of the Course at a National or International Competitive Safari must be licensed as in Appendix 1 Art.1.13.

7.2. The Chief Scrutineer at a Competitive Safari must be appointed from the list of ASN Technical Officials.

7.3. An Event Safety Officer should be appointed experienced in the operation of current Competitive Safaris who appreciates the potential problems of Vehicles competing in differing conditions. The same Officer may also assume the duties of Chief Marshal and can be responsible for ensuring effective arrangements are in place to supplement the general marshalling strength organised by the Clerk of the Course as follows:

7.4. There should be pre-determined arrangements available for summoning appropriate emergency services via rendezvous points if necessary to the scene of an incident.

7.5. Unless the complete route is visible from the Start or Finish areas there should be an effective radio communications network (excluding CB radios) operated through a nominated Controller under the direction of the Clerk of the Course linking Officials at the Start Finish and intermediate Radio Points with rescue and medical services.

7.6. Radio Point signs as follows should be displayed at and before all designated Radio Points:

Approximately 100m Yellow before Radio Point background

At Radio Point Blue Background

7.7. The Chief Medical Officer or Chief Paramedic being a Doctor or ASN Registered Paramedic is responsible – in consultation with the Clerk of the Course and the Event Safety Officer – for ensuring that the required level of medical and rescue cover is provided.

8. Live Recovery

8.1. At Competitive Safaris and Hill Rallies Live Recovery (the recovery of stranded Competitors whilst the Course or Stage is still live) may only be undertaken in accordance with the following:

8.2. The Official Documents must state whether Live Recovery will be operating at an Event and the Clerk of the Course must brief Drivers on the procedures.

8.3. Live Recovery can only be undertaken by dedicated Specialist Recovery Vehicles ( SRVs ) deployed by the Clerk of the Course at potentially difficult locations.

8.4. Live Recovery must not be used for accidents which must be dealt with by the appropriate medical and rescue services deployed by the Clerk of the Course .

8.5. The SRV must comply with Appendix 10 Art.14 and be equipped with appropriate tyres substantial towing points a suitable tow rope a Yellow Signal a roof mounted amber warning beacon and a radio (either on the ASN medical and safety frequency ( Appendix 2 Art.2.1.h ) or on a PMR frequency licensed for the Event : CB Radio is not acceptable).

8.6. The Crew will comprise a minimum of two people who must always wear high-visibility jackets. The first will operate the SRV and radio communications the second will warn other Competitors that Live Recovery is in progress by displaying a Yellow Signal at a suitable distance ahead of the recovery location.

8.7. It is the Competitor ’s responsibility to attach and detach the tow rope from the SRV Vehicle during Live Recovery. Exceptionally where available a third Crew member can attach and detach the tow rope and supervise the operation. Three-person Crews are strongly recommended for National Events.

8.8. Procedures must be identical for each SRV deployed at an Event . 8.9. The procedure for a Live Recovery operation must be as follows:

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 5 - Organisers Regulations – Timed Events 717

8.10. The SRV must report the number of the stranded Vehicle by radio and should not commence operations without permission.

8.11. The second Crew member then proceeds on foot to a safe distance ahead of the stranded Vehicle and displays a Yellow Signal to warn other Competitors that a Live Recovery is taking place.

8.12. The SRV must display a flashing amber beacon and flashing hazard lights at all times during Live Recovery.

8.13. In reaching a stranded Vehicle it must avoid travelling across or along the Course except in positioning itself to approach the recovery from a down-course direction and place the stranded Vehicle between it and approaching Competitors .

8.14. Course Marshals may assist the SRV Crew and must ensure all spectators are kept clear.

8.15. Wherever practicable the stranded Competitor must be pulled through or over any obstruction in the direction of travel along the Course .

8.16. When the SRV is in position the first Crew member should instruct either the Passenger or Navigator of the stranded Vehicle (or the third Crew member) to attach the tow rope between the Vehicles . Once attached they must stand clear and indicate to the first Crew member that it is safe to commence recovery.

8.17. On completion of the recovery the first Crew member will indicate to the Passenger or Navigator (or third Crew member) that it is safe to detach the tow rope between the Vehicles ensure that the tow rope is properly stowed and then indicate to the first Crew member that it is safe to move the SRV clear.

8.18. Once the first Crew member reports that the SRV is clear the second Crew member can allow Competitors to proceed past the recovery location.

9. Hill Rallies

9.1. These must be organised in accordance with Arts.1–8.18 above and Appendix 1 and 2 to this Chapter and the following:

Competitors must be seeded in order of anticipated performance with the first Competitor having the best performance potential unless the ASN has given prior approval to the contrary.

All Special Stages must not be less than a quarter mile long in demanding terrain or 1 mile in other instances.

c. Trials-type sections or tests may be incorporated within Special Stages. 10. Duties and Responsibilities of the Clerk of the Course

10.1. In addition to the responsibilities detailed in Art.14 below the Clerk of the Course should ensure the following Arts 10.2 - 10.20.

10.2. The use of the public forest estates managed by Natural Resources Wales, Forestry and Land Scotland and Forestry England has been approved by the ASN . Permission must be applied for by an annually specified date prior to the relevant Forestry Year. No contact should be made with the Forestry Commission prior to receiving approval from the ASN or an appointed Forestry Liaison Officer.

10.3. Other motor sport users of Venues to be included in Special Stages must be notified of arrangements. 10.4. The Chief Scrutineer must be appointed from the list of ASN Technical Officials.

10.5. A Stage Commander should be appointed for every Stage with the responsibility for ensuring that the Stage complies with the Regulations.

10.6. An Event Safety Officer should be appointed. The Officer should be experienced in the operation of current Hill Rally Stages and have an appreciation of the performance of Hill Rally Vehicles in differing weather conditions.

10.7. The Event Safety Officer should be assisted by a Spectator Safety Officer who is responsible for specific arrangements to accommodate spectators in suitable areas to prevent them accessing unsuitable areas and to make suitable access facilities for spectators’ use.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 5 - Organisers Regulations – Timed Events 718

10.8. The Event Safety Officer is responsible for ensuring effective arrangements to supplement the general Marshalling strength organised by the Stage Commander as follows:

Ensure arrangements are available to every Stage Commander for summoning appropriate emergency services via rendezvous points if necessary to the scene of any incident

Unless the complete route is visible from the Start or Finish areas provide an effective radio network operated through a nominated Controller under the direction of the Stage Commander linking Officials at Start Finish and intermediate points with rescue and medical services. The frequency must be secure and either the ASN Safety Frequency or a privately-licensed frequency to Ofcom Regulations.

The Controller must be experienced in the use of radios and in controlling a network and must ensure the disciplined use of the radios. Where the ASN Safety Frequency is used the Radio Controller must hold a valid ASN Controller ’s Licence (Notes on radio procedure are available from the ASN ).

10.9. Written instructions on the operation of the Stages must be made available to all Officials and Marshals . These must clearly establish:

That the number of Vehicles to be sent through any Stage prior to the Competition is to be kept to a minimum; that the Crew of each Course car has specific duties allocated by the Clerk of the Course on which they must report to the Stage Commander (or Deputy ) immediately on completing each Special Stage ; and that no Stage can start until the Zero car Crew have confirmed that the Stage is ready for Competitors and Marshals have any spectators on the Stage under their control (see Art.12.

That there must be no movement of any Vehicle or of the rescue services once the Stage has opened without the specific approval of the Stage Commander and then only after suspending the Stage and being satisfied that it is cleared of competing Vehicles .

10.10. On Special Stages where it may be necessary to authorise the movement of non-competing Vehicles prior to the Stage being cleared a system of Red Signals must be in place (see Art.6.1 )

10.11. These Signals can only be located at radio points and only displayed on the specific instruction of the Clerk of the Course or the Stage Commander.

10.12. Red Signals must be used when there is a possibility of non-competing Vehicles and rescue services moving on a Stage ahead of competing Vehicles.

10.13. There must always be a Red Signal displayed at the Point where rescue or emergency Vehicles join the route of a Stage.

10.14. Competitors must be advised in writing which Stages are operating this system and the procedure which they must adopt (See Appendix 9 Arts.6 re Special Stages).

a. That under no circumstances will any car be allowed to drive in the reverse direction of the Stage. b.

That detailed emergency procedures and equipment have been made available by the Event Safety Officer

That the priorities in dealing with an incident are first to deal first with the injured by removing them in a suitable Vehicle if it is safe to do so and then to deal with the Vehicles if they constitute a hazard to the continued running of the Stage or to property

d. That no Competitor will be permitted a re-run of a Special Stage . e.

That the system of ensuring Competitors are positively monitored and checked through a Stage is explained. Organisers may either use numbered Stage timecards or note the previous Competitor ’s Competition number with the next Competitor to leave the start

That all non-competing Vehicles are parked in a safe place or at least 30m from a road or track used as a Special Stage between a point in advance of the Start control and a point 100m beyond the Finish stop Control. Non-competing Vehicles required solely for purposes of safety may be parked at any place designated by the Stage Commander as suitable

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 5 - Organisers Regulations – Timed Events 719

That any road or track which can form an escape road between the start and stop controls should be kept clear and unobstructed for a distance of at least 100m bearing in mind the potential approaching speed of a Competitor

That the location of any competing car that fails to complete the Stage is reported to the Stage Commander.

That the information required by the Clerk of the Course to consider Art.10.19 below is available if the Stage is interrupted or stopped for any period of time

That reasonable precautions are taken to protect private property located adjacent to any Stage against damage.

10.15. If the normal running of a Special Stage is stopped for any reasons after the passage of one or more Competitors and it proves impossible to allow other Competitors to cover the Stage competitively the Clerk of the Course can give each Crew that has not covered the Stage a notional time corresponding to the slowest time set up before the interruption.

10.16. If the slowest time represents a complete anomaly the next slowest time should be retained (and so on until the 5th slowest time).

10.17. However no Crew which is totally or partially responsible for stopping a Stage can benefit from this measure.

10.18. If they finish the Stage they will be given the time which they actually set even if this is greater than the time awarded to other Crews by application of Appendix 7 Art.2.7 .

10.19. In any Event seeding Competitors in reverse order of anticipated performance the Clerk of the Course can give to Competitors a notional time corresponding to the fastest time set at the moment of any interruption or apply the next fastest time (up to the 5th fastest time) if the fastest time represents a complete anomaly.

10.20. The Clerk of the Course has the right to:

Impose a Penalty of Disqualification pursuant to a Judicial Hearing in accordance with Chapter 2 on any Competitor who causes or is part of a serious blockage on a Special Stage whether intentionally or otherwise if their actions prevent any other Competitor from completing the Stage competitively.

b. Impose further penalties under Chapter 2 as appropriate. c.

Appoint Officials to search Competitors and their Vehicle for unauthorised Pace Notes. There should be two such Officials one male to check male Competitors and one female to check female Competitors .

11. Special Stages

11.1. The route of a Special Stage may not be defined by grid references or any other method requiring Competitors to choose their own route.

11.2. Every effort should be made to site the Flying Finish at a point where Vehicles can be expected to be travelling slowly as a result of a preceding bend or hazard.

11.3. No practicing or testing is permitted on any Special Stage before any Event unless specifically authorised by the ASN .

11.4. The Flying Finish line must be at least 200m before the stop line which should be at least 100m before any Public Highway.

11.5. Bad weather slippery conditions and the speed potential of Vehicles crossing the Flying Finish line will require these distances to be extended.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 5 - Organisers Regulations – Timed Events 720

11.6. The area between the Flying Finish and the Stop Line should be free from bends sharp or deceptive corners or hazards such as gates etc.

11.7. This area must be prohibited to spectators. 11.8. All Officials should be clearly identifiable and wherever possible:

a. Be in visual contact throughout the length of the Stage . b. Be in sight of all signs and arrows and at prohibited areas. c. Be placed where the public are expected to arrive to watch the Stage . d. Have some pre-arranged system for warning spectators of the approach of Vehicles . e. Be under the control of a Sector Marshal if appropriate.

11.9. Where a Special Stage forms a continuous circuit Competitors must not be required to complete more than two laps.

Organisers should allow at least 100m separation from the start of the Stage before Competitors join other Vehicles already on the Stage.

No individual Stage on a multi-venue Hill Rally may use any particular section of road or track more than four times.

11.10. Throughout the Event Stage Timing will be to the preceding second using specified equipment.

11.11. The timing of any section should be recorded so that Competitors can ascertain its correctness. This prohibits the ‘setting back’ of the section finish watch.

11.12. Timing must be from a Standing Start to the Flying Finish line. 11.13. No Competitor should be allowed to gain an advantage by exceeding the specified average speed. 11.14. The time based on this average is referred to as the Stage Bogey Time.

11.15. No award can be made to Drivers who improve upon or equal the Bogey Time or for the fastest time or least penalties on such a Stage.

11.16. Competitors must not be started from any Stage start at intervals of less than one minute unless in accordance with the following procedures:

Starts of between 30 second- and one-minute interval are permitted provided no undue difficulties are foreseen and:

The Stage has no split route and does not exceed a total length of four miles if on an unsealed or mixed surface or eight miles if completely on a sealed surface.

The Stage is neither a currently nor previously licensed Race Speed or Kart Venue or an airfield (disused or otherwise).

No part of any Stage traverses the same section of route during the running of that Stage or as part of another Stage running concurrently. If the Stage constitutes a continuous Circuit it must be less than one lap.

Competitors have been seeded by the Organisers by performance in accordance with Art.9.1.a above without dispensation.

f. That suitable timing arrangements have been made at the Finish Line.

11.17. Authorisation for Stages not covered in Arts.11.16 above must be obtained in writing from the ASN and will only be considered when the following information has been submitted:

a. The individual Stage name number and location. b. The length of the Stage and the type of surface (forest tarmac etc).

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 5 - Organisers Regulations – Timed Events 721

c. The average width of the road or Track. d. Diagram(s) of Venues showing Stage routes and safety provisions. e. The number of times Competitors are attempting the Stage. f.

If Competitors are attempting the Stage more than once the time interval between a Competitor ’s first and second run and the possibility of catching previous Competitors .

Whether Competitors attempting their second run will be interposed with Competitors still attempting their first run.

Whether the Stage has a split route and if so how far this is into the Stage . On unsealed surfaces the Stage must not consist of more than 2.5 miles of common route.

i. Whether extreme weather conditions will adversely affect a fair Competition . j. Confirmation that suitable timing arrangements have been made at the Finish Line .

11.18. Any access to any part of a Stage whether from a car park or through entrances should be protected by warning notices as specified in Chapter 3 Appendix 3 Warning Notices: Art.1.2 Notice A and Art.1.6 Notice B and is subject to the requirements of visibility provided at Chapter 3 Appendix 3 Art.1.8 .

11.19. A copy of the Safety Code should be displayed at all entrances where the public are likely to enter and in areas considered to be hazardous (including escape routes and prohibited areas).

11.20. On Stages or Events where it is intended to charge for admission whether directly or by programme sales specific ASN approval must be obtained prior to any publicity material (which must include the Safety Code) being circulated.

11.21. The ASN will not authorise any admission charge for spectators unless adequate safety precautions for them appropriate to speed Events are in place.

11.22. Where the nature of a Venue means it is impractical to apply such precautions or access by the public cannot reasonably be controlled then only a car park charge may be made for which no ASN approval is required.

11.23. For Events with a published programme or where information is published which gives details of the location of Special Stages a copy of the Safety Code should be included for the guidance of spectators.

11.24. The organisation of Special Stages should seek to ensure the route is made as safe as possible and unmistakable to Competitors and spectators alike.

11.25. Means of access onto the Stage should be closed by sufficient barriers and signs to prevent any noncompeting Vehicle gaining access.

11.26. It should also be impossible for anyone on foot to get on to any Stage through normal access roads or tracks without:

a. Being aware of it. b. Having been seen by an Official. c. Having seen a warning notice. d. Having seen the Safety Code .

11.27. Fire extinguishers of a minimum 9kg total capacity in units of not less than 6kg each (20lb / 9kg dry powder type) must be available in any area defined as ‘ Service Area’ or ‘ Paddock ’ and any area in which competing Vehicles are assembled awaiting their attempt at the Stage(s) and at Stage finishes.

12. Course Vehicles

12.1. The only category of Course Car that may be driven through a Stage at near competitive speeds will be a Zero car identified by carrying markings of 0 00 or 000 as appropriate.

12.2. No other Official car can carry such markings.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 5 - Organisers Regulations – Timed Events 722

12.3. Zero Vehicles must be the last Vehicles to traverse a Stage before the first Competitor unless the Clerk of the Course authorises otherwise.

12.4. Zero Vehicles must only stop on the Course in the case of emergency and must be fitted with an effective method of communicating with the start control Officials.

12.5. With the exception of Class eligibility all Zero Vehicles must pass the same pre-Event scrutiny as Competitors .

12.6. There must only be two Crew member in each Vehicle and they must wear helmets and seat belts and have fire extinguishers fitted as is mandatory for Competitors .

12.7. Both Crew members must be signed-on Officials . It is recommended that the Driver is a Competition Licence holder and that one of them has been involved in pre-Event planning.

12.8. No Driver who is barred from holding a Competition Licence may drive an Official Course or Zero car over a competitive safari Course .

13. Special Stages: Arrows and Signs (see also App.9 Art.6)

13.1. The Course for those parts of Hill Rally Special Stages which are run on defined tracks must be defined in accordance with Arts.5.1 - 5.3 . Where the route does not follow defined tracks the Special Stage shall be marked as follows:

Pairs of arrows must be erected to form a gate; sufficient stakes should be used to ensure each arrow remains standing and indicating the correct direction.

b. The arrows must point in the direction that the Stage continues after the gate. c.

Consecutive gates must be approximately 100 metres apart or in sight of each other allowing for the lower seating position of Crews in non-production Vehicles . They should be approximately 6 metres wide but in soft ground where a choice of route may be given they can be approximately 20 metres wide.

A single warning arrow must be positioned approximately 25 metres ahead of numbered locations (rather than intermediate gates) and changes of direction of over 45° indicating the direction to be followed at the location.

If there is any doubt about route direction tape should be used to form a funnel in the correct direction or to define the outside of a corner.

Where the Course repeatedly changes direction without any natural features tape staked at reasonable intervals should be used to define the Course .

g. All roads and tracks used must appear on the Competitors ’ maps or any tulip diagram supplied. These should show junction or hazard numbers or letters indicate the intermediate mileages between junctions any danger spots and hazards and the direction to be taken. This diagram must be approved by the ASN prior to the Event .

h. Location numbers must be placed on the single warning arrow as required by a. – f. above. i. Each digit must be black and measure 76.3mm high and 12.7mm thick. j.

They must be in a sans serif font on a white background a minimum of 147mm tall x 104mm wide (ie if there are two digits the background will be 208mm wide).

14. Multi-Use Hill Rallies

14.1. The Official Documents for Multi-Use Hill Rallies must state whether the Public Highway is being used or not.

14.2. No Stage route may be used more than twice.

14.3. For a Stage route to be recognised as different it must vary by at least 20% if run in the same direction or for it to be reversed.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 5 - Organisers Regulations – Timed Events 723

14.4. No part of a Stage may be used in any one direction more than 12 times during any Event .

14.5. Venues where spectators are encouraged to attend should have a resident Spectator Control Car equipped with a PA system and a radio on the frequency to be used at the Event .

14.6. A Co-Driver who has signed-on must be carried in each competing car and no practising is allowed.

14.7. Fire extinguishers must be available in any area defined as a service area or paddock and any area in which competing Vehicles are assembled waiting their attempt at a Stage .

14.8. The ASN may appoint a Steward for any Event and will do so where an Event is confined to one venue.

14.9. Written ASN permission must be obtained in advance in respect of any other activity being held at the time of the Event at the venue to ensure whether suitable insurance can be arranged.

14.10. PR work in accordance with Appendix 12 must be undertaken irrespective of whether or not the public highway is used on the Event .

14.11. The Clerk of the Course at a National or International Hill Rally must be licensed as required by Appendix 1 Art.1.13 .

15. Service Areas

15.1. All Service Areas should be under the supervision of a Safety Officer with suitable means of contacting the Emergency Services.

15.2. Special care must be taken to ensure that the areas are kept secure from spectators and that all aspects of Health and Safety Regulations are observed.

15.3. Adequate fire extinguishers must be available at the site.

16. Medical Supervision

16.1. The Chief Medical Officer or Chief Paramedic being a Doctor or ASN Registered Paramedic is responsible – in consultation with the Clerk of the Course and the Event Safety Officer – for ensuring that the required level of medical and rescue cover is provided.

16.2. Their responsibilities should include the detailed organisation of doctors and paramedics, their planning and deployment within Stages , the organisation of ambulance meeting points and the notification of hospitals in relation to the Stages .

16.3. The Chief Medical Officer or Chief Paramedic and Event Safety Officer in liaison with Stage Commanders should be aware of the evacuation routes from all Stages and rendezvous points.

16.4. Following consultation with the Clerk of the Course, the Chief Medical Officer or Chief Paramedic may appoint a suitable deputy to take over the Chief Medical Officer ’s or Chief Paramedic’s duties in an emergency.

16.5. Doctors and Paramedics should carry sufficient equipment as they feel necessary for the performance of their duties in accordance with the provisions of the Emergency and Medical Services Guidance Document ( Chapter 11 )

16.6. All accidents and incidents involving injury must be reported in writing by both the Medical Officer and Stage Commander to the Clerk of the Course . A completed ASN report form signed by the Doctor should be sent to the Medical Consultant at the ASN .

16.7. For International and National Hill Rallies It is recommended that:

The Chief Medical Officer is appointed from the ASN Register and approved for the grade of Event being run.

A senior Medical Officer should also be appointed for each Stage and be positioned at the Stage start to work under the instructions of the Stage Commander

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 5 - Organisers Regulations – Timed Events 724

17. Emergency Vehicles 17.1. The equipment and licensing criteria for Emergency Vehicles are listed in Chapter 11. 17.2. These Vehicles comprise Recovery Units , Rescue Units and Stage Safety Units ( SSUs ).

17.3. When selecting Emergency Vehicles the ability for the vehicle to maintain traction over the terrain being used is required

17.4. To maintain safety cover unless sufficient suitable licensed Rescue Units are available SSUs should be positioned to be able to provide rescue first aid and firefighting to incidents within 15 minutes (ie starting from the beginning of a Stage and proceeding in the direction of the Stage ). It is recommended that an SSU is stationed at each Stage start.

17.5. It is recommended that an

a. SSU is stationed at each stage start. b.

ASN-licensed Recovery Unit or a commercially operated Recovery Unit is placed at or near those Stage start locations where a Rescue Unit is positioned

18. Safety Cover Requirements 18.1. At each Venue on a Multi-Use Hill Rally or at each Stage on a Multi-Venue Hill Rally there must be:

a. A Doctor or ASN Registered Paramedic . b. An ASN-licensed Rally (or Dual ) Rescue Unit . c. A Recovery Unit .

18.2. For Clubman , Interclub and National Multi-Venue Hill Rallies the services listed at Art.18.1 may be located to cover a group of up to three Stages in close proximity. In addition those Stages without an ASN approved Rescue Unit may position an ASN Licensed SSU at the start.

18.3. For Clubman , Interclub and National Hill Rallies every stage in excess of nine miles in length, in addition to the services listed at Art.18.1 , there must be at a suitable mid-point:

a. A Doctor or ASN Registered Paramedic . b. An ASN-licensed Rally Rescue Unit or an ASN-licensed SSU .

18.4. For International Hill Rallies (other than FIA Championships ) the services listed at Art.18.1 must be

At every Stage start

a. b.

For every Stage in excess of nine miles in length in addition to the services listed at Art.18.1 there must be a further set of these services positioned at a suitable mid-point.

19. Cross Country Orienteering 19.1. These Events must be organised in accordance with App.1 Arts.1– 4.6 and the following:

19.2. There should be no merit attached to being the first to arrive at any point nor should it be necessary to arrive at any point other than the Finish by a specified time.

19.3. If an overall speed limit is set for an Event it must be possible to win without exceeding an average speed of 10mph from Start to Finish. Participants must not be required to travel more than 50 miles nor to perform any task or solve any problem that is likely to offend anybody not taking part in the Event .

19.4. When running an Orienteering Event at night careful consideration should be given to restricting auxiliary lights. Such restrictions must be specified in the Official Documents for the Event.

20. Team Recovery 20.1. Any Team Recovery Event must be organised in accordance with App.1 Arts.1– 4.6 and the following:

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 5 - Organisers Regulations – Timed Events 725

20.2. The Event must be on private ground. 20.3. The use of the Public Highway including Rights of Way is forbidden. 20.4. Only Vehicles within the same team may be on any observed section at the same time.

20.5. At each observed section Official Recovery Teams must be on duty in the location specified by the Clerk of the Course .

20.6. Rescue Vehicles must be positioned at predetermined locations to evacuate any injured party.

21. Point to Point 21.1. Point to Point Events must be organised in accordance with App.1 Arts.1– 4.6 and the following:

21.2. They must be on private property at one venue only. They can incorporate open ground tracks or roads and can include arduous or demanding areas water Courses and other natural obstacles or hazards

21.3. The ground should be an open area and positive steps (including the closure of tracks) should be taken to prevent Vehicles meeting at blind points

21.4. Only Vehicles from the same team may be in any point at the same time 21.5. The Event must be timed in accordance with the requirements of Art.5.6 above. 21.6. Rescue Vehicles must be positioned at predetermined locations to evacuate any injured party.

21.7. Adequate Marshals must be positioned at each point to be visited and at locations overlooking the areas that Competitors will cross.

22. Challenge Events 22.1. Challenge Events must be organised in accordance with Appendix 1 and Appendix 2 and the following;

22.2. The aim of the Event is to drive tow and or winch a Vehicle(s) to the various identified points within the Competition site the location of which will be indicated in the Official Documents .

22.3. At each location will be a means to prove that the Vehicle has reached the location this will be identified by a number to verify it is the desired objective and will be attached to a fixed point by a cable. A score card (or other device) (attached by the Scrutineer in a consistent point on all Vehicles ) must be marked as proof that the location has been visited. The Vehicle must negotiate close enough to mark the scorecard without detaching either component.

22.4. The Official Documents will specify:

a. whether the Event is for single Vehicles or teams of Vehicles . b. whether there is a class structure and specify the eligibility requirements for classes. c. The start time finish time and any penalty which will be applied for late finishing. d. any start order and the method arrived at for employing it.

e. the values of each point visited or any formula which is used to calculate the value of each point visited. In addition there may also be Special Tasks at certain locations which are worth extra points. These may take the form of driving mental or physical tasks these may involve the use of the competing Vehicle or alternatively a Vehicle may be provided for the task. Each task will be overseen by a Marshal who will issue instructions and record the score.

f. the number of Special Tasks available on the day and their maximum scoring potential. 22.5. Special Tasks may be timed to an accuracy of one second.

22.6. Where a winch cable or rope may be deployed the area of that section shall be no less than the length of the outstretched winch cable of rope and only Competitors attempting the section and the observing official may be present in the Section . Where Official Documents require all Competitors to use synthetic winch rope the width of this area may be reduced.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 5 - Organisers Regulations – Timed Events 726

22.7. Winch cable and rope must be presented in a serviceable condition.

23. Cross Country Driving Tests 23.1. These Events must be organised in accordance with App.4 Arts.3 and the following:

24. Driving Test Layouts

24.1. Vehicles must not be allowed to travel more than 25m (between manoeuvres) without having to stop astride a penalty line reverse or drive clear of the line or manoeuvre in a garage or box.

24.2. Competitors must either stop astride a penalty line or make a change of direction of at least 90° at a distance of not more than 20m before the Finish Line .

24.3. The route must be made available to all Drivers before any Test. 24.4. The Start and Finish of all Tests must be in a forward direction.

24.5. All Tests must be arranged so that the whole of the Course is visible to the Driver from the Start Line unless Competitors are given the opportunity to walk the Course beforehand.

24.6. There must be no optional direction of travel except as specified in App.9 Art.12.8 .

24.7. Clarification of where and how a change of direction may be made without incurring a penalty must be available on request to all Competitors before the start of any Test.

24.8. Spin turns are not permitted. 24.9. Practising for tests is not permitted.

24.10. Markers should be not less than 1m in height unless the Supplementary Regulations ( Official Documents ) or test instructions specify otherwise.

24.11. Lines and gates must have a minimum width of 3.5m. 24.12. Any ‘garage’ must have a minimum length of 6m and a minimum width of 3.5m.

24.13. When Competitors are required to perform a 180° turn in a box the size of the box must be sufficient to contain a circle of 16m diameter.

24.14. Each test should be designed so that a Competitor is not expected to engage reverse gear more than four times (ignoring manoeuvres to correct mistakes).

24.15. Each test must be run at least twice.

24.16. Each Competitor ’s worst performance at each test will be discarded in arriving at total penalties for the Event .

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 5 - Organisers Regulations – Timed Events 727

CHAPTER 20 CROSS COUNTRY Appendix 6 - Competitors Regulations – All Events

1. General

1.1. Any Competition Licence holder who permits the unauthorised presence at any time of any Vehicle on a known or former Cross Country Course , a Special Stage or on private property including land owned or managed by the Defence Infrastructure Organisation, Natural Resources Wales, Forestry and Land Scotland, the Forestry England or DAERA Forest Service NI will be Disqualified from any related Event and may be referred to the ASN National Court.

1.2. No verbal instruction to Competitors regarding routes time schedules layouts or performance in a Stage or Test or section issued during an Event will be valid.

1.3. Any instruction relating to these matters must be displayed as an official notice at least 30 minutes before the first Vehicle is due to start a Competition or issued in writing to each Competitor who must acknowledge receipt by signing an appropriate form provided by the Organiser.

1.4. At the start each Competitor, Passenger and Vehicle will be checked for eligibility. 1.5. Any Competitor not reporting as instructed may be fined Disqualified or may forfeit their starting position.

1.6. Drivers and Passengers must produce a valid Club Membership Card and Competition Licence as detailed in Chapter 6 .

1.7. For any Cross Country Event where crash helmets are required and irrespective of licence grade Drivers, Navigators and Passengers who have any notifiable condition referred to in Chapter 6 may not apply for their Competition Licence on the day and should allow a calendar month for their application to be assessed and processed by the ASN.

1.8. Drivers at Hill Rallies, Competitive Safaris, Team Recovery, Point to Point, Challenge Events and all Events crossing a Public Highway must hold a current valid RTA Licence appropriate to the Vehicle .

1.9. Drivers at Trials, Winch Recovery, Gymkhanas, Treasure Hunts and Orienteering must also hold a current valid RTA Licence appropriate to the Vehicle but the Official Documents can permit entries from

Drivers who are 16 or over but who do not have a current valid RTA Licence for the Vehicle provided their Passenger holds such a licence and is experienced in Cross Country Trials.

b. Drivers aged 15 or over where: i. ii.

The Competitor has finished four Tyro Trials and the Vehicle is road legal, or Where the driver has finished a further four Cross Country Trials in a road legal vehicle and the Vehicle is a special Vehicle as defined by Appendix 8 Art.5.5.

c. Proof of finishing may be recorded on the Licence Upgrade Card or other suitable means.

1.10. Drivers at Timed Trials must hold a current valid RTA Licence appropriate to the Vehicle exceptionally the Official Documents may permit Drivers aged 16 or over who do not hold a current valid RTA Licence appropriate to the Vehicle where the Competitor has finished four Cross Country Trials.

1.11. The Vehicle may only be driven between observed sections by a Crew member holding a valid full RTA Licence . For Tyro and Junior Trials see Arts.2.14 - 2.16 and Appendix 8 ( Tyro Trials and Junior Trials ).

1.12. At Hill Rallies both the Driver and Co-Driver or Navigator must produce a valid Competition Licence for those Rallies specified in the current chart of Minimum Acceptable Licences as requiring a Competition Licence .

1.13. Upgrading of Competition Licences is provided in Chapter 6 .

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 6 - Competitors Regulations – All Events 728

1.14. Vehicles competing in Cross Country Events must comply with Technical Regulations Appendix 10 and Chapter 7 as appropriate.

1.15. Vehicles may be divided into Classes as specified by the Official Documents.

2. The Crew

2.1. For Hill Rallies and Competitive Safaris all Competitors must wear approved crash helmets in accordance with Chapter 9 and FIA approved FHRs and clothing which covers the arms legs and torso up to the neck and unless a laminated glass windscreen or minimum thickness 4mm plastic windscreen is fitted the Crew must wear goggles or visors to protect the eyes.

2.2. For Timed Trials Team Recoveries and Point to Point all Competitors must wear approved crash helmets in accordance with Chapter 9 and clothing which covers the arms legs and torso up to the neck and unless a unless a laminated glass windscreen or minimum thickness 4mm plastic windscreen is fitted the Crew must wear goggles or visors to protect the eyes.

2.3. In addition Competitors in Sports Utility Task Vehicles must wear an FIA approved FHR device fitted in accordance with FIA regulations.

2.4. Wearing of flame-resistant clothing and gloves is strongly recommended for all Events including untimed Events.

2.5. The Official Documents may require crash helmets to be worn in untimed Events.

2.6. Seat belts must be worn on all timed Events except Team and Winch Recovery and are strongly recommended at all Events.

2.7. Any means of identification fixed for the Competition must be removed when a Competitor retires or is Disqualified from or completes the Event.

2.8. Vehicle Competition Numbers must be displayed as required by these Regulations.

2.9. The same Driver must drive throughout a Competition and except with official approval the people carried at the start of an Event must not change during the Event.

2.10. Only the nominated Driver and / or Co-Driver listed on the Entry form can drive during a Competition unless the Official Documents specify otherwise.

2.11. No person under 16 years of age can be carried in an open Vehicle during an Event and no one is permitted to ride other than in a proper seat.

2.12. No Driver may drive for more than 200 miles without rest or relief either by halting the Vehicles for at least one hour or by a change of Drivers.

2.13. No competing Vehicle may carry more than one physically disabled person whose participation must be authorised in accordance with Chapter 6

2.14. The minimum age for taking part in a Junior Trial is 8 years. 2.15. Competitors are not eligible for Junior Trials on or after their 18th birthday.

2.16. All Competitors must comply with Chapter 6 in respect of the counter-signatory of Parent or Guardian in respect of Entries and a minor Competitor shall not take time off from school to compete.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 6 - Competitors Regulations – All Events 729

CHAPTER 20 CROSS COUNTRY Appendix 7 - Competitors Regulations - All Events using the Highway and Hill Rallies

1. Route Details Note: the limitation on maximum distances to be driven by Competitors Note: Penalties are provided in Appendix 11. Note: *indicate matters that should be notified in the Official Documents.

1.1. The onus of following the correct route rests with the Competitor who must visit controls in the order set out in the Road Book or Route Card unless otherwise specified.

1.2. A Control is considered to extend for 50m around the actual point at which Officials are located unless clearly visible signs are displayed to define a different area.

1.3. The direction of approach to or departure from a Control can be specified.

1.4. Non-compliance with Art.1.3 above requirement by passing a Control travelling in the wrong direction or visiting a Control or check more than once may involve a Penalty.

1.5. No private road track can be used by Competitors unless specific permission is given in the Road Book or Route Card .

1.6. Officials must be on duty at all Controls where it has been indicated in the Official Documents that they will be manned. If Officials are not present at a Control during the whole period when Competitors are due to report all performances at that control point will be ignored in compiling the Results.

1.7. All performances will also be ignored if a control is not sited at the location specified in Official Documents.

1.8. The onus of ensuring all the information required by the Organisers in the Official Documents is clearly and legibly recorded at the appropriate time and place rests with the Competitor.

1.9. Should any entry on a Time Card not be legible or not appear authentic it may be ignored. 1.10. Organisers can refer to Marshals’ check sheets in case of doubt.

1.11. If there is a discrepancy between the time allowance shown by Organisers on the Time Cards and that shown on any other document the Time Card will be taken to be correct unless previously amended in an Official Bulletin.

1.12. It is an offence for any Competitor to proceed or continue in an Event until the information required by App.2 Art.4.1 is provided.

2. Rights and Duties of the Organisers (see also Chapter 3 )

2.1. Judges may be appointed to adjudicate on: a. Failure to stop at Stop or Give Way signs. b. Failure to comply with the Regulations in respect of Special Stages. c. False starts on Stage, Test or standard sections. d. Unauthorised use of auxiliary lights. e. Unauthorised possession of recorded notes or unlicensed radio equipment or intercoms or frequencies. f. Unauthorised servicing. g. Unauthorised smoking. h. Excessive Noise (measured by meter) (see Chapter 7 ). i. Violation of out of bounds areas. j. Violation of crash helmet or seat belt regulations.

2.2. Driving Standards Observers ( DSOs ) may be appointed to adjudicate on:

a. Excessive vehicle Noise (observed during the Event). b. Excessive speed. c. Driving in a manner likely to bring motor sport into disrepute.

2.3. Any Competitor driving at an excessive speed in a reckless manner or in a manner likely to bring motor sport into disrepute or convicted of any driving offence committed during an Event may be Disqualified.

2.4. Checks manned by Judges of Fact or DSOs need not be manned for the whole period during which Competitors may report and may operate on a random basis.

2.5. The Official in charge of any control or check may mark or withhold a Competitor ’s Road Book , Route Card or Time Card if the Vehicle concerned has suffered damage to its exhaust system.

2.6. *The Organisers may establish a Control at any point for the purpose of observing maintenance of a set speed time schedule or route provided that the intention to do so is stated in the Official Documents and Competitors are given all the necessary information for them to comply with the requirements which are to be observed.

2.7. After a Competition has started Organisers will not accept any claim from Competitors in respect of Force Majeure or baulking. Despite this the Clerk of the Course has the right to Disqualify any Competitor proven to have unreasonably baulked another.

2.8. All Timekeepers will be Judges of Fact in respect of time recorded.

3. Finish – Events Using the Public Highway

3.1. To be classified as a finisher a Competitor must report to at least two-thirds of the controls listed in the Road Book or Route Card and report to the final control within the maximum lateness specified with the car in which they started unless otherwise stated in the Official Documents.

3.2. Competitors at the conclusion of their Competition shall sign a declaration form to the effect that they have not been involved in any incident that may have caused damage to persons or property or alternatively give details of such incident. Failure to comply will be penalised by Disqualification pursuant to a Judicial Hearing in accordance with Chapter 2 and may be reported the ASN for further disciplinary action.

3.3. Competitors who retire will be required to submit this form to the Event Secretary within 72 hours of the Event.

3.4. Failure to return this form may be penalised by a fine in accordance with Chapter 1 App.2.

4. Results – Events Using the Public Highway

4.1. Competitors start with zero marks and classification is based on Competitors who have incurred the least number of marks. Competitors who have incurred an equal number of marks will be classified by reference to total marks lost in accordance with the provisions for target timing or schedules timing as applicable in this Appendix.

4.2. In the event of a tie the Competitor who has completed the greater portion of the Competition from the Start (including any tests) without Penalty will win.

4.3. If both incurred a Penalty at the same point the Competitor with the lesser Penalty will be the winner unless another method of resolving ties is specified in the Official Documents.

4.4. Damage in relation to Chart 3.r or Chart 4.t as provided by Appendix 11. will be considered as being any tear or any indentation exceeding two inches in depth occurring to the external surfaces of the coachwork or accessories (excluding wind-screen windows lamps and bumpers) above the horizontal plane of the road Wheel centre.

5. Timing – Events Using the Public Highway

5.1. A Competition must be timed by one of the following methods which must be stated in the Official Documents:

a. Target Timing ( Art.5 and Appendix 11 Chart 3 ) b. Schedule Timing ( Art.6 and Appendix 11 Chart 4 )

*Target Timing Definitions Additional information must be provided in the Official Documents.

5.2. Target Time is the time specified to cover the distance between two consecutive controls.

5.3. A Competitor can calculate their Due Time of Arrival at any Time Control by adding the Target Time for the section to their actual time of departure from the preceding Time Control.

5.4. When Target Time is used each period of time must be treated individually and no penalties incurred will apply to any subsequent section.

5.5. Lateness taken over Target Time on Road Sections and Special Stages is cumulative and cannot be reduced.

5.6. Bogey Time is the time specified for a Competitor to complete a Special Stage without incurring Penalty and must comply with the requirement for Special Stages at Appendix 3 and the average speed requirements of Timed Events at Appendix 5 Art.3.1 .

5.7. Stage Maximum Time is the maximum time penalty that can be applied on a Special Stage and will be the Target Time for the Special Stage . It must be stated on the Time Card.

5.8. Cumulative Lateness is the sum of times in excess of Target Time taken over each section and once lost cannot be regained.

5.9. Maximum Permitted Lateness is the amount of cumulative lateness which if exceeded from the previous Main Control will result in the Competitor being deemed to have retired.

5.10. This amount will be 30 minutes (unless the Official Documents specify a different period).

5.11. Penalty-Free Cumulative Lateness : the Official Documents must specify the amount of cumulative lateness allowed free of Penalty before a Competitor is penalised.

5.12. Dead Time is that authorised between booking in at the end of one Target Timed section and the commencement of the next section where that time is spent entirely within a control zone.

5.13. Dead time has no effect on penalties or cumulative lateness incurred elsewhere.

5.14. Delay Allowance is a Penalty-free allowance granted by an authorised Official to specific Competitors following a delay and extends the Target Time for those Competitors on that section only.

5.15. Any delay allowance must be recorded in writing on a Competitor ’s Time Card by the Official.

5.16. A Main Control is situated at the Start and Finish of a Rally immediately before and after any Rest Halt and at any other specified point.

5.17. At a Main Control after a Rest Halt Competitors will (unless the Official Documents specify otherwise) restart at one-minute intervals.

5.18. They do so by one of the following methods which must be specified in an Official Instruction:

In number order In the order of their arrival at the Main Control preceding the Rest Halt In the order of their arrival at some other preceding Control or d. In the order of General Classification at a specified point if interim results are available. 5.19. Each Competitor must be given a due starting time from any Main Control (Out) and any difference

a. b. c.

between this time and the Competitor ’s actual starting time will be counted towards cumulative lateness and a Time Penalty applied (unless the Official Documents specify otherwise).

5.20. Re-grouping Controls : the Road Book or Route Card can specify any controls that relate to Competitors who are considered to have retired through having accumulated more than the maximum permitted lateness at a Control.

5.21. These Competitors commence the next section with zero lateness towards Disqualification .

5.22. In a Special Stage Arrival Control a Competitor proceeds to the Special Stage Start immediately after checking in to the Special Stage Arrival Control . The area between the Special Stage Arrival Control and the Stage Start must be Parc Fermé.

5.23. Similarly in a Special Stage Finish Control a Competitor receives a Special Stage Finish Time in hours minutes and seconds at the Special Stage Finish Control. This time (in hours and minutes) is used as the start time for the next section (unless the Official Documents specify otherwise).

5.24. Competitors will receive penalties on Special Stages as follows (unless the Official Documents specify otherwise):

Under Bogey = Bogey Time Over Bogey under Target = Actual Time taken c. Over Target = Target Time. 6. Scheduled Timing Definitions

a. b.

6.1. Standard Time is the time of day a notional Competitor number zero would be due at any Control or check.

6.2. Scheduled Time is the actual time each Competitor is required to be at any specific point and can be calculated for any point by adding that Competitor ’s Competition Number multiplied by the time interval between Competitors at the Start to the standard time at that point.

6.3. Delay Allowance is a Penalty-free allowance granted by an authorised Official to specific Competitors following a delay and it must be recorded in writing on the Competitor ’s Time Card by the Official.

6.4. Due Time is the time a Competitor is due at any control or check inclusive of any previous lateness. 6.5. Penalised Time is the difference between Due Time and an earlier or later arrival time.

6.6. Penalty Free Lateness allows a Competitor late at one Control to be an equivalent amount late at the next control without incurring further Penalty.

6.7. Maximum Time is the latest time a Competitor can arrive at a control or check without incurring further Penalty.

6.8. Outside Total Lateness (OTL) is the point where a Competitor is considered not to have visited the Control or check by virtue of the fact that they are more than 30 minutes past their Scheduled Time (including any delay allowance). It is permitted for the Official Documents to specify a different period.

6.9. Organisers may require any Competitor who is late to reduce their lateness by either foregoing or reducing any period provided for remaining at a Control or official Halt.

6.10. Competitors may themselves reduce lateness without Penalty in the following ways (providing the Section is not defined as Neutral and unless forbidden to do so by the Official Documents or by breaching Art.6.17 below:

When Target Times are used by traversing the distance between any two or more points in a time less than the Target Time so long as they do not report at a control or check before the original Scheduled Time.

By reporting at any Control or check following one at which a Penalty was applied for lateness at any time not earlier than Scheduled Time.

c. A Competitor on any Rally without Special Stages who wishes may miss a Control or Controls.

They will be penalised in accordance with Appendix 11 Chart 3.a or 4.a for every Control missed. If they rejoin the route at a control at the end of Standard Section they will be permitted to restart without further Penalty at any time between their original Scheduled Time and their Maximum Permitted Lateness in relation to their original Scheduled Time . If rejoining Control at the end of a Neutral Section they will only be permitted to restart without further Penalty at their official Corrected Time based on the time of arrival at the last Control at which they reported.

6.11. If the need arises for an Organiser to extend Maximum Permitted Lateness this can only be done at a point on the route at which Competitors are required to report to avoid Disqualification .

6.12. Maximum Permitted Lateness can then only be extended for the following part of the route and cannot be applied retrospectively for earlier sections.

6.13. These provisions are subject to Standard Condition 4 of the Motor Vehicles (Competitions and Trials) Regulations where they apply.

6.14. No Penalty free lateness or official delay allowance which has been either reduced or foregone as permitted by Arts.6.10–6.11 above can be reclaimed.

6.15. This does not exclude fresh claims based on new circumstances.

6.16. A Competitor found to have traversed a distance greater than four miles between two consecutive time Controls in less than three-quarters of the time specified by the official time schedule will be penalised in accordance with Art.6.10 below unless competing on a Special Stage . In calculating such a penalty any fraction of a minute will be ignored. Thus:

In a nine minute section a penalty is imposed if a Competitor completes the section in less than six minutes.

b. In a 10 minute section – seven minutes. c. In an 11 minute section – eight minutes. d. In a 12 minute section – nine minutes.

6.17. Any timing to less than one minute will be recorded on equipment as detailed in the Timekeeping Regulations at Appendix 2 to this Chapter.

6.18. Competitors will be timed by the official timepieces in the charge of Officials unless the Official Documents state that watches carried by the Competitors can be used.

6.19. *If Competitor ’s own watches are used they must be of a size and type to enable the dial to be read and must be sealed.

6.20. The requirements for sealing watches must be stated in the Official Documents.

6.21. The promoters may reject any watch which cannot be satisfactorily sealed or read. If any sealed watch varies from official time by more than one minute the Competitor concerned will be timed by official clocks from then unless the Official Documents make provision for the replacement or re-setting of the watch concerned.

7. Controls – All Events using the Public Highway and Hill Rallies

7.1. Controls, checks and test sites must open 30 minutes before the due time of arrival of the first Vehicle and close 30 minutes after the due time of arrival of the last Vehicle unless the Official Documents specify otherwise.

7.2. The time of arrival at or departure from a Control other than intermediate and final controls of Regularity Sections (where Arts.6.10–6.11 apply ) will be the time at which the Road Book or Time Card is presented by the Competitor concerned providing all Crew members and the Vehicle are within the Control area.

7.3. Exceptions to this are:

In the Event of a competing car obstructing other Competitors through being halted or unduly slow

near a control Officials may instruct the Driver to proceed and may then record the time as the time when this instruction is given. b.

In the Event of a Competitor presenting a Time Card to Officials at a time when the car is outside the control area the Officials may or may not make a record on the Time Card at their discretion.

At Special Stage Arrival Controls no penalty will be incurred if the car enters the control area as follows:

On a Target Timed Event the Vehicle may enter during the sixty seconds immediately preceding the target check-in minute or during the check-in minute. (For example: a Vehicle has left the previous Stage Finish at 11.04.40 on a section for which the Target Time is nine minutes. It is therefore due at the next Time Control at 11.13. The Vehicle arrives at the yellow advance Control Board at 11.08 stopping before the yellow board. The Vehicle is permitted to enter the control zone at any time after 11.12.00. The Time Card may be handed in at any time between 11.13.00 and 11.13.59 and a time of 11.13 will be recorded. This procedure will incur no Penalty.) On a Scheduled Time Event the Vehicle may enter the Control zone during the sixty seconds immediately preceding the due time minute or during the due time minute. The procedure to be followed is identical to that for a Target Timed Event from the point of arrival at the yellow control board to the actual check in time.

ii.

7.4. The responsibility of establishing the correct Due Time rests solely with the Competitor as does the onus of presenting the Time Card.

7.5. The time of reporting at Controls will be recorded to the preceding whole minute when penalties are imposed per minute (eg 09 minutes 59 seconds will be recorded as 09 minutes).

7.6. When a Penalty is imposed for a timekeeping error of less than one minute the time will be recorded to the preceding second.

7.7. Where a Control at the end of a section timed to the second also forms the start of a section timed to the minute the time of departure will be considered as being the same as arrival but ignoring any seconds.

8. All Events except Hill Rallies Using the Public Highway

8.1. Competitors must not carry any form of Intercom (ie any method of voice amplification) or any radio transmitting device. Penalties are specified in App.11 Chart 3.s or 4.s.

8.2. Exceptionally mobile telephones are permitted if the Official Documents specifically allow them. 8.3. No regular assistance organised in advance may be used by Competitors .

8.4. Competitors must stop before entering any road protected by a Stop or Give Way sign. Failure to do so will be penalised by Disqualification following a Judicial Hearing in accordance with Chapter 2 .

8.5. Exceptionally with the specific permission of the RLO Give Way signs in Quiet Zones may be negotiated in accordance with the Highway Code.

8.6. Any such junctions must be advised to Competitors in advance.

8.7. Only 1:50000 scale OS maps may be used. The only information which can be added to these maps as sold is:

a. Highlighting numbers words and legends printed on the map within the outer printed grid numbers. b.

Highlighting and repeating grid lines and numbers and marking adjacent map numbers outside the area defined above.

c. Including information provided by the Event Organisers.

8.8. If required by the Organisers Rally plates must be displayed at the rear of the Vehicle and on or just below the rear side window.

8.9. Competitors are strongly recommended to carry a First Aid Kit.

9. Regularity Sections 9.1. Timing will be at the moment of entering the control area. The Official Documents will specify:

a. Whether Competitors need to stop and present Time Cards at intermediate controls. b. *The penalties for stopping within sight of any Control. c. *The penalties for early or late arrival at any Control on a Regularity Section.

10. Route Checks

10.1. These unmanned checks prove a Competitor ’s stays on the correct route.

10.2. Proof of passage will involves recording the symbols from a Code Board which must be placed facing oncoming Rally Vehicles.

10.3. The Code Board will at least 315 sq cm and show a maximum five black numbers or letters (or a combination of both up to a maximum of seven) on a contrasting background.

10.4. The letters/numbers must be at least three inches high (7.63 cm) with a minimum of 1/2 inch (1.27 cm) stroke width.

11. Passage Controls 11.1. Manned Passage Controls also prove a Competitor ’s adherence to the correct route. 11.2. Passage Controls cannot be located less than 500m from any other manned Control. 11.3. The only requirement for a Competitor is to have the Marshal’s signature recorded.

12. Time Controls

12.1. Time Controls are manned points established to record the time of a Competitor who must come to a stop for the purpose.

12.2. It can additionally record the direction of the Competitor ’s approach and departure.

12.3. The only other information permitted to be recorded by the Marshal is the authentication of the records held by the Competitor .

12.4. These records to be valid must be signed by the Marshal with the Competitor not being required to make any entry on the Time Card.

12.5. An example of all official boards must be on display at documentation for the Event.

CHAPTER 20 CROSS COUNTRY Appendix 8 - Competitors Regulations – Trials and Un-timed Events

Note: * indicated matters to be included in the Official Documents.

1. Cross Country Vehicle Trial 1.1. These Events must be organised in accordance with Appendix 6 and Appendix 7 as appropriate.

1.2. *The Official Documents may allow the Vehicle Crew to be varied during the Event and may specify the minimum tyre pressure permitted for the Competition.

1.3. Only one Passenger aged 16 or over may be carried on a Vehicle during Observed Sections.

1.4. Exceptionally the Official Documents may reduce this minimum age to 14 providing the Vehicle is fitted with seat belts and either a manufacturer ’s hard top, a truck cab, or a rollbar, or where the Vehicle is a road legal, mass produced, production Vehicle retaining the original hardtop or truck cab and where the seat belts comply with Chapter 7 the Official Documents may further reduce the minimum age of the Passenger to 12.

1.5. The Passenger must remain properly seated alongside the Driver throughout all Observed Sections.

1.6. ‘Bouncing’ will be permitted only within the confines of the seating compartment, and then only so long as no portion of either the Driver ’s or Passenger ’s body (other than arms and hands) is placed outside the sides of the Vehicle or behind the seat they are occupying.

2. Numbers 2.1. Numbers will be allotted by ballot. 2.2. Numbered Results Cards will be issued at the Start and must be presented by the Crew to Officials.

2.3. Competition Numbers must be displayed on both sides of all competing Vehicles , except for Trials when the Official Documents may relax this requirement.

2.4. Competitors will start in numerical order and the Organisers shall determine the order of running at each Observed Section.

2.5. Competition Numbers or Number Cards must be removed at the Finish or if a Competitor retires.

3. Observed Sections and Route 3.1. The onus of following the correct route rests with the Competitor .

3.2. Any signs displayed other than in an Observed Section are designed to assist Competitors and have no mandatory authority unless the Official Documents specify otherwise.

3.3. Competitors will drive from point to point with as little delay as possible and any Competitor suspected of loitering can be ordered to proceed by an Official.

3.4. Competitors arriving at an Observed Section more than 20 minutes after the preceding Competitor may be refused permission to attempt that section.

3.5. * Competitors should attempt to negotiate Observed Sections without stopping.

3.6. Organisers may, however, allow certain Vehicles by virtue of their size to take a specified number of changes of direction on any particular section.

3.7. The permission to change direction and the eligibility of Vehicles to do so must be specified in the Official Documents or Final Instructions (see Appendix 11 Chart 5 ).

3.8. Failure of a Vehicle to maintain unassisted forward motion in the direction of the Course will be regarded as failure to comply with the requirements to proceed non-stop unless the Judges are satisfied that a permitted change of direction is intended or the Organisers have ruled that more than one attempt may be made.

3.9. The point of failure will be at a vertical line from the centre of the hub of the front Wheel which is the farther from the start of the section.

3.10. The beginning of any Observed Section will be marked by signs and its boundaries by markers or natural obstacles.

3.11. Natural obstacles must not be used as penalty markers.

3.12. Before attempting an Observed Section a Vehicle must be brought to rest with a leading Wheel hub centre vertically over the Start Line as indicated by Officials.

3.13. The Driver must not proceed until instructed to do so. 3.14. If an Observed Section is divided into 3.15. Sub-Sections signs must indicate the beginning and end of each Sub-Section.

3.16. A Vehicle will be considered to have entered an Observed Section or Sub-Section when the leading wheel hub centre has passed the marker(s) indicating the beginning of the section.

3.17. A Vehicle will be considered to have left an Observed Section or Sub-Section when the leading Wheel hub centre is past the marker(s) indicating the end of the section, provided that no prior penalties have been incurred.

3.18. *Failure in a lower or earlier Sub-Section will constitute failure in all succeeding Sub-Sections.

3.19. The Start Line will indicate the greatest penalty and the Finish Line the zero Penalty . The Official Documents will specify the methods of scoring and application of penalties.

3.20. A Competitor will be deemed to have failed to negotiate an Observed Section non-stop if:

Any part of the Vehicle touches a penalty marker, and / or b. All Wheels cross the boundary of the Course as defined by the Clerk of the Course.

3.21. The point of failure will be deemed to be that at which the first penalty marker is touched or the point at which the Course boundary is first crossed by all Wheels of the Competition Vehicle .

3.22. Should this point of failure coincide with the division between two Sub- Sections the marks lost will be those on the Sub-Section recording the greater penalty.

3.23. Performances on any Observed Section may be ignored at the Organisers’ discretion even though there have been successful attempts to negotiate the section.

3.24. If this discretion is exercised no performance on the section in question must be taken into account when compiling the results.

3.25. No unauthorised assistance is allowed and Vehicles must complete the Course under their own power. No case of Force Majeure will be taken into consideration.

3.26. At the Organisers’ discretion a minority of the Observed Sections may be timed if provided for in the Official Documents . The following conditions will apply:

3.27. Only those sections which the Organisers anticipate will be completed without penalty by the majority of Competitors may be timed.

a. Any such timed section must be less that 200m long. b. No Sub-Sections of an arduous or demanding nature can be used. c.

The maximum time allowed for each timed section must be stated in the Official Instructions prior to the commencement of the test.

The maximum time allowed for each timed section must not require any Competitor to exceed 15mph or 30 seconds per 200m.

4. Results – Trials

4.1. Any penalties incurred on a timed section must be calculated by reference to the following formulae unless the Official Documents specify otherwise.

For failing to proceed non-stop. Where the failure will decrease in proportion to the number of Sub- Sections negotiated non-stop = 12*.

i. *Plus the highest penalty incurred by any Competitor making an attempt correctly. b. For successfully negotiating the section within the time allowed = 0.

c. For negotiating the section non-stop in excess of the time allowed the following formula is used: Time taken x 100

( )

- 100

Time allowed

Penalty points

Penalty points 0.0 – 8.3 1 1 50.1 – 58.3 7 8.4 – 16.6 2 58.4 – 66.6 8 16.7 – 25.0 3 66.7 – 75.0 9 25.1 – 33.2 4 75.1 – 83.3 10 33.3 – 41.6 5 83.4 – 91.6 11 41.7 – 50.0 6 91.7 – 100.0 12

100.0 & above 12

4.2. Competitors will start with zero marks. To be classified as a finisher, a Competitor must have attempted at least three quarters of the total number of Observed Sections and arrive at the Finish within 20 minutes of the preceding Vehicle .

4.3. The Competitor incurring the lowest marks will be the winner, and so on. 4.4. Ties will be resolved at the Organisers ’ discretion, unless the Official Documents state otherwise.

4.5. Each Competitor will be provided with a Results Card which must be produced on demand for Officials to mark at each section unless the Official Documents specify an alternative method.

4.6. Penalty marks will be incurred as follows unless the Marks Lost indicated below are modified by the Official Documents :

Penalty

Marks Lost Each minute late reporting at the Start or a re-Start 5 Failure in an Observed Section (where an Observed Section is divided into Sub- Sections the Penalty for failure will decrease in proportion to the number of Sub- Sections negotiated non-stop). Not attempting or being ready to attempt an Observed Section or Sub-Section when instructed to do so Not complying with a reasonable instruction by an Official for which a Penalty is not otherwise stipulated and provided warning of Penalty is given Driver and / or Passenger not seated in accordance with Regulations 12 Running with tyre pressures lower than that required by the Official Documents 50 * Plus the lowest total penalty incurred by any Competitor making an attempt correctly.

12*

5. Tyro Trial

5.1. Tyro Trial Drivers must hold a valid RTA licence (not provisional) for Vehicles with more than three wheels and produce a valid Club membership card.

5.2. The Official Documents may permit entries from Drivers who are 13 or over without a full RTA Licence ,

provided that their Passenger has experience of Cross Country Trials and holds a full RTA Licence for the Vehicle entered.

5.3. The Vehicle may only be driven between observed sections by a Crew member who holds a valid full RTA Licence .

5.4. Vehicles not complying with Appendix 10 Art.22 must be fitted with a standard manufacturer ’s hardtop, truck cab or a roll bar to Chapter 7 Appendix 13 Diagram 10 , Chapter 7 App.7 Art.6 (three point harness), Chapter 7 App.5 Art.5 (external circuit breaker) and the Official Documents may permit entries to be accepted in respect of Drivers who are 13 or over without a full RTA licence provided that the Passenger holds a full RTA licence valid for the Vehicle concerned and is a person who has experience of Cross Country Trials. Where the Driver holds a full RTA licence the minimum age of the front seat Passenger is 12 years of age.

5.5. More than one Passenger may be carried where the Driver holds a valid full RTA Licence . 5.6. Passengers under the age of 18 will not be considered as Competitors for the purpose of Club membership. 5.7. Passengers aged between 2 and 12 years old will be signed on by their parent or guardian.

5.8. All Passengers must be properly seated with their seat back in an upright position and the seat adequately fixed.

5.9. All occupants must wear an approved seat belt at all times and all Passengers must be seated in forward facing seats. Their seat back must be upright and they must face forwards.

5.10. The Passenger sitting alongside the Driver during sections must be at least 12 years.

5.11. Passengers who occupy the rear seats of the Vehicle must not be less than 2 years of age any child under 12 years of age or 135cm in height must be seated using an approved ‘child restraint’.

6. Junior Trial

6.1. Junior Trials must be organised in accordance with Appendix 6, Appendix 7 Arts 1–6.21 and Arts.3.1– 4.10 of this Appendix .

6.2. At all times during a Junior Trials Event Vehicles may only be driven under the instruction of an Official. 6.3. There are three Classes of Trial: Novice, Intermediate and Expert.

6.4. Competitors must finish four Novice Junior Trials before being eligible for Intermediate Junior Trials , and four Intermediate Junior Trials before entering Expert Junior Trials .

6.5. Proof of finishing a Junior Trial will be by the signing of a Competitor ’s Competition Licence by the Clerk of the Course.

6.6. Sections for the different Classes may either be set out separately or so that a section increases in severity with separate finishing points for the respective Classes.

6.7. Fiddle brakes may only be used by Competitors in the Expert Class . If fitted to Vehicles entered in Novice or Intermediate Classes they must be rendered inoperative.

7. Winch Recovery

7.1. The following regulations are additional to and take precedence over Appendix 6 , and Appendix 7 Arts.1- 6.21.

7.2. Details of the Course , the manner of recovery, the maximum time for completion and the method of starting will be given at the Start.

7.3. Competitors will be allowed to examine the Course prior to the Start. 7.4. *The Official Documents will specify the number of Vehicles and members in a team.

7.5. No more than three members will be allowed in each team which must nominate a Captain to be responsible for keeping any score-card issued and represent the team to the Clerk of the Course.

7.6. *At the Start and Finish , all team members must be correctly seated in their Vehicle and all equipment must be in or on the Vehicle .

7.7. Each team will be allowed a minimum of two attempts at the Course.

7.8. The team completing the course with the least penalties as stated in the Official Documents will be the winner.

7.9. The Clerk of the Course may penalise or stop a team if it is considered their mode of recovery is likely to be dangerous to Officials , Competitors , spectators or natural terrain.

7.10. The Clerk can also award penalties for touching gates.

7.11. Once a winch Vehicle and anchor Vehicle have been manoeuvred into position they must remain stationary whilst winching.

7.12. Natural anchorage points may be used but must be protected from damage.

7.13. It is strongly recommended that all members of the team wear protective clothing during winching operations, ie overalls, gloves, eye protectors.

7.14. It is strongly recommended that Competitors other than the winch operator should also wear a crash helmet to ASN specification.

7.15. All equipment, including cables, ropes, straps or webbing, shackles, blocks, hooks, ground anchors, winches, etc and Vehicles must be presented to and approved by the Scrutineer prior to an Event.

7.16. The Organisers may supply certain equipment.

8. Promotional Events

8.1. Drivers must hold a valid RTA Licence (not provisional) in respect of Vehicles having more than three Wheels.

8.2. The Official Documents may permit entries from Drivers who are at least 16 without a full RTA Licence , provided the Passenger holds a valid full RTA Licence and has experience in Cross Country Trials.

8.3. The Vehicle may only be driven between Observed Sections by a Crew member who holds a valid full RTA Licence.

8.4. All Drivers must produce a valid Club membership card. 8.5. More than one Passenger may be carried where the Driver holds a valid full RTA Licence. 8.6. Passengers under the age of 18 will not be considered Competitors for the purpose of Club membership. 8.7. Passengers aged between 2 and 12 years old will be signed on by their Parent or Guardian.

8.8. All Passengers must be properly seated with the seat back in the upright position and with the seat adequately fixed.

8.9. All occupants must wear an approved seat belt at all times. 8.10. The Passenger sitting alongside the Driver in sections must be at least 14 years of age.

8.11. Passengers who occupy the rear seats of the Vehicle must not be less than 2 years of age, any child under 12 years of age or 135cm in height must be seated using an approved ‘child restraint’.

8.12. Passengers may not be carried for hire or reward.

CHAPTER 20 CROSS COUNTRY Appendix 9 - Competitors Regulations - All Timed Events

1. Cross Country Vehicle Timed Trials

1.1. The following regulations are additional to and take precedence over Appendix 6 , and Appendix 7 Arts .1 – 7.7 and Appendix 8 Arts.1 –4.10:

1.2. Penalties will be in accordance with the following:

a. For each second over the Target Time: 1 mark per second. b.

For failing to satisfactorily negotiate an Observed Section within the maximum time allowed: 1 mark per second of maximum time allowed.

1.3. The Official Documents may specify additional penalties based on a specified number of marks per second.

1.4. Failure of a Vehicle to maintain unassisted forward motion in the direction of the Course will not be regarded as failure to comply with the requirements to proceed non-stop.

1.5. Further attempts to regain forward motion will be permitted until the maximum time allowed for the section has elapsed.

2. Competitive Safaris

2.1. These regulations are additional to and take precedence over Appendix 6 , and Appendix 7 Arts .1 –7.7 and Appendix 8 Arts.1 –4.10:

2.2. *The Official Documents may permit two separate Drivers to drive one Vehicle under one Entry. In such cases their total combined penalties will be added together as if they were one Competitor.

2.3. Vehicles may carry one Passenger, minimum age 16, in addition to the Driver who must be seated in accordance with the provisions of Appendix 8 Art.1.5.

2.4. It is recommended that Crew are identified by suitable means, eg a rubber stamp or a plastic wrist identity tag which must be issued at signing-on.

a. This must not be re-usable and must not cause discomfort. b. For safety reasons it must be worn under clothing. c. Each Competitor must be allowed to choose to which limb the identity mark is applied. d.

Competitors will be required to show the identity marking to Officials in the assembly area prior to the Start Line.

2.5. Competition numbers as required by these Regulations including Chapter 7 must be displayed on both sides of each Vehicle either on the front doors or behind them above the Vehicle waistline and parallel to the Vehicle sides.

2.6. Where the Official Documents require numbers to be displayed at the front or rear of a Vehicle they must be a minimum 100mm in height.

2.7. Competitors will be advised of the minimum and maximum time allowed for the Course , before the Start.

2.8. The Course should have a clearly marked route so that no navigation is required and all Course markings should comply with the Course marking provisions of Appendix 5.

2.9. Practice will not be allowed over the Course unless the Official Documents state otherwise. If permitted the Official Documents must specify the number of Practice runs and the times of any Practice periods – see Appendix 5 Art.4 (Course Organisation).

2.10. The Official Documents must also specify:

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 9 - Competitors Regulations - All Timed Events 742

a. *The number of competitive runs. b.

*The time interval between Vehicles leaving the Start Line , and whether the Organisers may hold Competitors en route in the event of the Course becoming blocked. In such instances allowance will be made for the time Competitors are delayed.

c. *The method by which Competitors are signalled to stop and whether re-runs will be permitted. d. The starting Signal and method of timing to be used. 2.11. *Competitors will be required to proceed over the Course in the shortest possible time.

2.12. The Official Documents will specify whether Live Recovery will be operated by Specialist Recovery Vehicles (SRVs) at the Event.

2.13. These should be positioned at points where Competitors are likely to make involuntary stops.

2.14. The Official Documents will specify the maximum time allowed to Competitors for self-recovery, after which they must take official recovery.

2.15. No recovery operations organised by the Competitor in advance may be used.

2.16. At Events where Live Recovery is operated the Clerk of the Course must advise Competitors of the procedures at the Drivers Briefing.

2.17. The Clerk of the Course must specify whether the SRVs will be manned by a third Crew member responsible for attaching the tow rope or whether this will be carried out by the Passenger or Navigator. In the former case, Competitors must remain in the Vehicle and follow the instructions from the SRV Crew . In the latter case, the Passenger or navigator must alight from the stranded Vehicle and follow the following procedure:

They must stand clear and await instruction from the first Crew SRV member before attaching the tow rope between the Vehicles.

When properly attached to the towing points they must stand clear and indicate to the first SRV Crew member that Live Recovery may start.

Once the stranded Vehicle has been recovered, and only after the first SRV Crew member has indicated that it is safe to do they can detach the tow rope and stow it safely. They should then inform the first SRV Crew member that the Course or Stage can be cleared

The Driver of the recovered Vehicle must not proceed until the Passenger or Navigator involved is properly seated and belted in. Failure to comply will be penalised by Disqualification.

2.18. When arriving at a point on the Course or Stage where a Yellow Signal is being displayed the Competitor must not pass the Yellow Signal unless instructed to do so by a Marshal and will proceed with caution until clear of the incident, obstruction or stranded Vehicle .

2.19. Failure to comply will be penalised by Disqualification. 2.20. Time lost whilst Live Recovery of another Competitor is in progress will be regarded as Force Majeure. 2.21. Unless the Official Documents specify otherwise penalties will be awarded as follows:

a. For each second to complete the Course over minimum time allowed: 1 mark per second. b. For exceeding the maximum time allowed: Disqualification. c. For taking official recovery: 100 marks.

2.22. Competitors must carry an A4-size white board with a red SOS on one side and black OK on the other (letters to be a minimum of 12cm high with a minimum stroke width of 1.5cm), with means to secure them on display for oncoming Competitors .

2.23. In the case of an accident where urgent medical attention is required the red SOS sign should be displayed as quickly as possible to alert following Vehicles and aid any helicopter attempting to assist.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 9 - Competitors Regulations - All Timed Events 743

2.24. Any Crew that sees a red SOS sign displayed on a Vehicle or sees a major accident where both Crew members are inside the Vehicle but not displaying the SOS sign, must immediately and without exception stop to give assistance.

2.25. All following Vehicles must also stop and the second Vehicle arriving at the scene must inform the next radio point.

2.26. Subsequent Vehicles must leave a clear route for emergency Vehicles . 2.27. The Clerk of the Course may award a discretionary time to any Competitor delayed in such circumstances.

2.28. Any Crew which is able to but fails to comply with the rule will be reported to the Clerk of the Course who may impose penalties.

2.29. In the case of an accident where medical intervention is not required the OK sign must be clearly shown to following Vehicles and to any helicopter attempting to assist.

2.30. If the Crew leave the Vehicle the OK sign must be left clearly visible to other Competitors . 2.31. Any Crew failing to comply will be subject to a penalty at the Clerk of the Course ’s discretion.

2.32. Competitors who misuse the SOS or OK signs will be penalised and may be reported to the ASN for further action.

2.33. Any Crew retiring from an Event must report to the Organisers as soon as possible except in cases of Force Majeure.

3. Compliance with Flags Signals

3.1. On passing a Yellow Signal displayed by Marshal wearing a high visibility tabard or vest the Driver MUST immediately and significantly reduce speed as well as being prepared to stop at any time; at no time must they overtake any Vehicle they encounter on the Course .

A Competitor shown the Yellow Signal may proceed with caution following any instructions given by the Marshals until clear of the cause of the caution.

b. Failure to comply with this rule will incur a penalty of Disqualification.

3.2. On passing a Red Signal displayed by a Marshal wearing a Marshals’ tabard the Driver MUST immediately and significantly reduce speed as well as being prepared to stop at any time; at no time must they overtake any safety vehicle they encounter on the Course.

The Driver must then follow the instructions of any Marshals and / or safety personnel and maintain this reduced speed until leaving the Course.

b. Failure to comply with this rule will incur a penalty of Disqualification.

4. Hill Rallies

4.1. The following regulations are additional to and take precedence over Appendix 5 Arts.2.1 –3 and Appendix 6 and 7 and 8 and Arts.1 –3.2 above.

4.2. Trials-type sections or Tests may be incorporated in Special Stages and should be marked in accordance with the standard procedures for CCV Trials or Autotests.

4.3. Competitors must be advised of the average speed which will be applied on Special Stages. At no time will Competitors be required to average in excess of 50mph.

4.4. Each Vehicle must carry at least one Passenger (Navigator / Co-Driver ) as well as the Driver. 4.5. Servicing issues are covered in Arts.5.12 –5.24 below.

4.6. No assistance may be expected from the Organisers even though they may give advice as to the source of supplies. Competitors are responsible for their own fuel, oil, water etc.

4.7. No Vehicle may be moved other than by its own power except:

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 9 - Competitors Regulations - All Timed Events 744

By a ferry By outside means for a minimum distance necessary to extricate it from difficulty By gravity d. By its Crew .

a. b. c.

4.8. During the course of an Event Competitors are not permitted to use or be directly or indirectly concerned in the use of helicopters or fixed wing aircraft in the vicinity of the Event (whether in connection with servicing, aerial surveillance or for any other reason) without previous ASN authorisation in writing and in compliance with CAA regulations – see Chapter 10.

4.9. Before considering any such authorisation the ASN must be satisfied that the liabilities of all those involved in the Event have been covered.

4.10. Any such application must be made at least 14 days prior to an Event.

4.11. In accordance with CAA regulations no aircraft is allowed within 500ft of the route or within 3,000ft of any large crowd.

5. Competitors

5.1. Competitors and their service personnel may only use radio transceiver equipment (and frequencies) that are licensed in accordance with Ofcom Regulations.

5.2. Competitors must not use or carry any radio transmitting device which operates on or interferes with the ASN Licensed Frequencies .

5.3. Contravention of these Regulations will be penalised by Disqualification in accordance with Appendix 11 Chart 3t and 4t.

5.4. All Drivers’ and Co-Drivers’ crash helmets and overalls must be produced for approval during scrutiny of a Vehicle .

5.5. All Crew members must wear a crash helmet bearing an ASN approval sticker (see Chapter 9 ) and a safety belt throughout any Special Stage.

5.6. Crew members must not smoke during any Special Stage or Test. 5.7. Drivers must conform to the relevant Medical Requirements specified in Chapter 6. 5.8. No person under 16 years of age may be carried during a Rally with Special Stages.

5.9. Competitors must comply with any instructions in the Road Book concerning stopping at road junctions. Failure to do so will incur penalties in accordance with Appendix 11 Chart 3t and 4t. as applicable.

5.10. Competition numbers must be displayed on both sides of the Vehicle behind the front doors and above the Vehicle waistline and parallel to Vehicle sides.

5.11. Rally plates at the front and rear will display Competition numbers with a minimum 100mm height. On Multi-Use Hill Rallies these will be at the Organiser ’s option.

5.12. *Organised assistance (service) may be allowed on Hill Rallies if provided for in the Official Documents and providing the Organisers have made available suitable service areas and a specific time allowance for servicing.

5.13. *Organised assistance anywhere other than in permitted areas is forbidden.

5.14. Service vehicles may be required by the Official Documents or the Official Instructions to follow a prescribed route to and from service areas. In such cases all other areas are Out of Bounds for service Vehicles and their Crews .

5.15. In any area where service is not allowed the presence of a service vehicle (or any vehicle from which equipment or parts are obtained) or the collection of equipment previously deposited will be considered as servicing.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 9 - Competitors Regulations - All Timed Events 745

5.16. These Regulations do not prohibit Organisers advising Competitors of any garages en route where facilities are available.

5.17. The above regulations do not prevent Competitors from personally making their own Vehicle safe to drive. Crews may work unassisted on their own Vehicle using equipment carried in their Vehicle in ‘No Service Areas’ except:

a. Within 100m of any Control. b. Between a Special Stage Arrival Control and the Special Stage Start Control. c. In any Parc Fermé.

5.18. The only work permitted in these areas (and it must be unassisted) is:

a. Replacing a flat tyre with a wheel and tyre carried in the competing Vehicle. b.

Cleaning lamp glasses, windscreens, windows, identification markings and Vehicle registration numbers.

5.19. Except in the areas listed above Competitors may work on their Vehicle with the assistance from other Competitors from any nationally recognised breakdown service and from any commercial garage not associated with the Entrant and not organised in advance.

5.20. Breakdown service and commercial garage vehicles will not be allowed to enter official service areas.

5.21. Competitors are responsible for ensuring that their service Crews understand and comply with these regulations and if official Service Plates are issued that the service vehicles at all times bear the Official Service Plate.

5.22. A Competitor may be fined or otherwise penalised by the Clerk of the Course if the Crew of any service vehicle associated with their Entry contravenes any regulation or Official Instruction or acts in a manner contrary to the interests of the Event.

5.23. Competitors may be fined, but not otherwise penalised for any breach of Road Traffic Laws by their service Crews .

5.24. Competitors are strongly recommended to carry a First Aid Kit.

6. Special Stages

6.1. During any Special Stage or Test the prescribed route must be followed and any direction signs displayed are mandatory.

6.2. Competitors overshooting the stop line at the end of any Special Stage or Test are not allowed to reverse back to the Control.

6.3. Competitors are also not allowed to cross any part of a Special Stage in the opposite direction to Rally traffic.

6.4. Competitors must not voluntarily leave the prescribed route without the express permission of the Stage Commander .

6.5. Any Competitor who is shown a Red Signal on a stage where they have been notified in advance of a Red Signal system must cease Competition immediately and come to a standstill at the side of the Course as soon as possible.

6.6. They must not proceed until advised to do so by an Official. 6.7. Competitors may only attempt a Special Stage once. Re-runs are not permitted.

6.8. *Following instruction from a Stage Start Marshal that they are next to start on a Special Stage , Competitors abide by the following procedure:

The Marshal should give a loud verbal indication 30 seconds, 15 seconds, 10 seconds and 5 seconds before the actual start, and then countdown verbally each second 5-4-3-2- 1-GO.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 9 - Competitors Regulations - All Timed Events 746

Upon the Signal GO a visual starting Signal must be given which will normally be the raising of a flag from the bonnet (not the windscreen).

c. Any other visual Signal to be used must be described in the Official Documents . d. Making a false start will be penalised in accordance with Appendix 11 Chart 3.h and 4.h as applicable. e.

Stages where Competitors are required to start at intervals of less than one minute may dispense with the 30 seconds advance warning. This revised procedure must be advised in the Official Documents .

6.9. Unless the Official Documents state otherwise the use or possession of Pace Notes or any other means of giving a Competitor advice relating to the traversing of a Special Stage which has not been provided by the Organisers is forbidden.

6.10. This does not preclude the use of Ordnance Survey maps of 1:25,000 or 1:50,000 scale in addition to others that are specified in the Official Documents .

6.11. The only supplementary information which may be shown on the maps is information given by the Organisers of the Event (including route details).

6.12. Contravention of Arts.6.9–6.11 above will be penalised by Disqualification in accordance with Appendix 11 Charts 3.t and 4.t.

7. Team Recovery

7.1. The following regulations are additional to and take precedence over Appendix 5 Arts.2.1 and 3 and Appendix 6 and 7 and 9 and Arts.1 –3.2 above.

7.2. *The Official Documents will specify the number of Vehicles comprising a team.

7.3. Teams will start in numerical order and the Organisers will determine the order of running at each Observed Section.

7.4. Details of Observed Sections must be given at the Start and unless the Official Documents specify otherwise, teams will have the opportunity of inspecting the Course before attempting each Observed Section.

7.5. Team Members may start in any order.

7.6. Each Team will nominate a captain who will be responsible for carrying the official score card for the team and who will produce it on demand to Officials.

7.7. Team Vehicles must not be harnessed together before the Start. 7.8. The onus of following the correct route will rest with the Team Captain. 7.9. No Passengers can be carried in any team Vehicle when it leaves the Start.

7.10. This does not preclude other members of the Team from being carried through Observed Sections provided that they are properly seated and are only carried for as far as is necessary and that the Vehicle is stationary when they mount or dismount.

7.11. Seat belts need not be worn.

7.12. Any Team Vehicle that cannot maintain unassisted forward motion in the direction of the Course must be recovered by other members of the team by pushing, towing or winching.

7.13. *All equipment to be used by Team Vehicles as means of self-recovery, including harness ropes and shackles, must be presented to, and cleared by, the Scrutineer prior to the Start.

7.14. This equipment must be carried on Team Vehicles throughout the Competition.

7.15. Before attempting any Observed Section, Team Vehicles will be brought to rest behind the Start Line by Officials and will not proceed until instructed to do so.

7.16. *The starting Signal will be stated in the Official Documents . 7.17. A Team will be considered to have left an Observed Section when all team Vehicles have crossed the

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 9 - Competitors Regulations - All Timed Events 747

finishing line.

7.18. Where a Competition involves self-recovery failure of all Team Vehicles to proceed whether involuntary or otherwise from the Start Line into an Observed Section when instructed to do so will be regarded as a failure in that Section.

7.19. Any Team which fails to complete a section in the stated time will have three minutes added for each Vehicle that has not successfully completed the section.

7.20. Unless the Official Documents state otherwise a Penalty of one minute will be added to the team time for each penalty marker touched.

7.21. The Official Instructions will state the maximum time allowed for each Team to complete each Observed Section.

7.22. Results will be determined with reference to the time taken including penalties for the Team to complete each Observed Section.

7.23. Further penalties may be applied if the Official Documents allow.

8. Point to Point

8.1. The following regulations are additional to and take precedence over Appendix 5 Arts.2.1 and 3 and Appendix 6 and Appendix 7 Arts.1 –7.7and Appendix 8 Arts.1 –2 .

8.2. *The Official Documents will specify whether the Event will comprise a set number of points to be visited in the shortest time or a set amount of time during which the maximum number of points are to be visited. In either case all the team must cross a Finish Line.

8.3. * Competitors will be expected to seek and visit points which may be hidden by the natural topography. 8.4. The Official Documents will specify:

a. If the points are to be visited at random or in a set order. b.

*If a point comprises a single marker pole with minimum height of 1m, or a gate of poles through which the direction of entry will be marked. Each point visited shall be recorded either by collecting a token or by an official marking a score card. Tokens and score cards used will be provided by the Organisers.

c. *The starting Signal to be used. d. *The method of timing to be used. e. *The maximum time allowed. f. *The number of Vehicles in a Team.

8.5. Each Team must nominate a Captain who will be responsible for carrying the official score card or tokens for the Team and who will produce them to Officials on demand.

8.6. In addition to the Driver, Vehicles may carry one Passenger or Navigator who must be seated in accordance with the provisions of Appendix 8 Art.1.5 .

8.7. Competitors may be required to dismount at each point visited to record their visit and must fasten safety belts prior to the Vehicle moving off again.

8.8. No recovery assistance outside that given by a Team member is allowed. 8.9. Practice is not permitted.

9. Cross Country Orienteering

9.1. The following regulations are additional to and take precedence over Appendix 5 Arts.2.1 and 3 and Appendix 6 and Appendix 8 Arts.1 –4.10.

9.2. Competitors are expected to drive and navigate to specific objectives. 9.3. Official Documents will specify equipment required to meet navigational and route restrictions.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 9 - Competitors Regulations - All Timed Events 748

9.4. Competitors will be issued with instructions before their due start time.

9.5. No time schedule will be maintained during the Event but the maximum time allowed will be stated in the Official Documents .

9.6. The method of scoring must be specified in the Official Documents . 9.7. Objectives must be attempted without the use of winches or other means of assistance.

10. Challenge Events 10.1. Each Vehicle must carry a Driver and either a Co-Driver or Navigator ( together the ‘ Crew ’)

10.2. Driver and Co-Driver must hold a valid RTA Licence appropriate to the Vehicle and either may drive the Vehicle during the Event. Navigators minimum age 16, do not need to hold a valid RTA Licence and may not drive during the Competition .

10.3. Crew members must be accommodated in securely fixed seats and wearing approved seatbelts or harnesses while the Vehicle is moving.

10.4. There is no compulsion to attempt to reach any point which has been set out.

10.5. There is no compulsion to attempt any Special Task . The Official Documents will specify any Penalty which may be applied during the Competition including a maximum speed limit for competing Vehicles.

10.6. The winner will be the Vehicle or Team which has attained the highest points score at the end of the Competition.

10.7. Vehicles must comply with the Challenge Events Technical Regulations. 10.8. Winches may be required primarily for the purpose of self-recovery.

10.9. All equipment to be used by the Crew as means of self-recovery including ropes, strops and shackles, must be presented to and passed by the Scrutineer prior to the Start.

10.10. The use of winch sails (minimum 1kg dry weight) and gloves is compulsory when winching.

10.11. When using winch cable or rope suitable gloves should be worn. Rubber and woollen gloves are not suitable.

11. Cross Country Driving Tests

11.1. Drivers must hold a valid full RTA licence (not provisional ) for Vehicles with more than three wheels and produce a valid Club membership card.

11.2. The Official Documents may permit entries from Drivers who are 16 or over without a full RTA Licence provided that their Passenger has experience of Cross Country Trials and holds a full RTA Licence for the Vehicle type entered.

11.3. The Vehicle may only be driven between Driving Tests by a Crew member who holds a valid full RTA Licence.

11.4. A Passenger may be carried to assist by giving directions when the driver holds a valid full RTA Licence .

11.5. The Passenger must occupy the seat alongside the Driver and wear a properly fastened and approved seat belt at all times during the Test.

11.6. No other Passenger is allowed. 11.7. If the Driver holds a valid, full RTA Licence , a Passenger , if carried, must be 12 years or over.

11.8. Vehicles must comply with Appendix 10 Art.23 and where either Crew member is under 16 years of age the Vehicle must retain the original hardtop or truck cab and the seat belts comply with the relevant provisions of Chapter 7.

11.9. Classes are free but the Class structure must be stated in the Official Documents .

12. Driving Test Procedures

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 9 - Competitors Regulations - All Timed Events 749

12.1. Drivers will be considered under Starter ’s orders when instructed by an Official to proceed to the Start Line.

12.2. Drivers then failing to proceed may forfeit their run or may be penalised in accordance with Appendix 11 Chart 7 .

12.3. A Start will only be valid if made under the Vehicle’s own power.

12.4. When a Vehicle is required to stop astride a line, the line must be between its front and back axles and all the area of the tyres in contact with the ground must be seen to have crossed the full width of the line.

12.5. Similarly if a Vehicle is required to cross a line with all four Wheels all tyre contact area must be seen to be clear of the line.

12.6. Timing at completion of a Test must be based on the leading Wheel (on the same axle) crossing the Finish Line.

12.7. Penalties will be applied for failure to cross the Finish Line.

12.8. In any diagram illustrating a Test the dimensions should be approximate and for guidance only. Indications of the direction of travel of the competing Vehicle when crossing a line or passing between markers must be shown unless specified otherwise (ignoring ‘shunts’ to avoid markers).

12.9. A maximum Penalty (see Appendix 11 Chart 7c ) shall be applied if a Competitor crosses with both leading wheels a marked test line in the wrong direction out of the prescribed sequence or too many / few times, otherwise Competitors may correct their mistakes by returning to the point where they deviated from the test diagram unless otherwise stated in the Official Documents .

12.10. In changes of direction either lock can be used (unless the Test diagram specifically states otherwise).

12.11. Clerks of the Course wishing to define direction of travel between markers should include any necessary marked line(s).

12.12. In the event of re-run caused by a timing failure, the greater number of penalties incurred in either run will be added to the time taken in assessing the performance on that Test.

13. Marking 13.1. Judges must be appointed to each test to adjudicate on:

False starts Crossing / failing to cross marker lines c. Touching markers and not following correct route.

a. b.

13.2. Competitors will be provided with a score card for the Organisers to record times and penalties at the completion of each Test run.

13.3. Marks will be lost for time taken (if applicable) and for any infringements of the test instructions such as striking a marker or crossing a boundary line.

14. Results

14.1. To be classified as a finisher Competitors must complete not less than half of the tests and must hand in their score card to Officials within 15 minutes of all other Competitors completing the final Test.

14.2. Competitors will start with zero marks.

14.3. All Class awards must be calculated on the basis of Penalty marks lost with the Competitor incurring the least penalty points being judged the winner.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 9 - Competitors Regulations - All Timed Events 750

14.4. In the event of a tie the Competitor who was first to have the lesser penalty from the start will be adjudged the winner unless another method of resolving ties is stated in the Official Documents .

14.5. Performance will be assessed as in Appendix 11 Chart 7 unless the ‘Marks Lost’ stated are modified by the Official Documents .

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 9 - Competitors Regulations - All Timed Events 751

CHAPTER 20 CROSS COUNTRY Appendix 10 - Technical Regulations (not Junior Trials)

General

1. Chassis 1.1. The Vehicle must have a minimum wheelbase of 127cm (50in).

2. Body (including Aerodynamics)

2.1. Unless rear-engined Vehicles must have a bonnet or metal casing of solid flame retardant material covering or surrounding the engine which is secured by fasteners of adequate strength and with a positive locking action.

2.2. Windscreens must be erected unless the Event takes place wholly on private property or the Official Documents state otherwise.

2.3. Tailgates may be removed.

2.4. Be equipped with mudguards for all Wheels which present no sharp edges and cover the complete Wheel (flange+rim+tyre) around an arc of 120 degrees. This minimum coverage must:

a. be achieved with a continuous surface of rigid material within which ventilation louvres may be fitted. The tyre must not be visible when viewed from above b. extend forward ahead of the axle line

c. extend downward behind the Wheel.

3. Seating

3.1. Vehicles must be equipped with two fixed seats for the Driver and Passenger unless the Official Documents state otherwise.

3.2. The rearmost part of these seats must not be behind the rear wheel axis.

3.3. In the case of non-production Vehicles the rearmost part of any additional seat must not be more than 38cm behind the rear wheel axis.

4. Engine

4.1. If forced induction is used the coefficient will be 1.7:1 unless the Official Documents or specific Technical Regulations state otherwise.

4.2. Must have positive throttle closure by external springs so that the throttle automatically closes in the event of any failure of the linkage.

4.3. Article 4.2 above does not apply to Vehicles fitted as standard with original manufacturer fitted electronic throttle control for that Vehicle.

5. Suspension

5.1. Vehicles must be fitted with sprung suspension between Wheels and Chassis unless originally manufactured otherwise.

5.2. Where the top mounting of the shock absorber whether or not it is fitted with a coilspring is mounted directly to a main member of the roll-cage a brace must be fitted between the mounting point and the chassis or those members of the Vehicle frame acting as the Chassis.

5.3. It is prohibited to mount the shock absorber by drilling and / or welding a stud or bolt directly to the roll cage.

5.4. All mountings must be made with reinforcements in material at least the same thickness as the roll cage wall thickness.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 10 - Technical Regulations 752

5.5. The recommended mounting is shown in Appendix 11 to this Chapter , Chart 6 .

6. Wheels 6.1. Vehicles may not be fitted with duplicated driving Wheels unless permitted by the Official Documents .

6.2. The Official Documents may permit the use of TUV Approved hub adapters / Wheel spacers up to a maximum of 30mm in depth.

7. Tyres

7.1. Tyres must be compatible with the Wheels and be acceptable to the Organiser unless a particular type and size of tyre is specified in the Official Documents .

7.2. Vehicles should carry a securely fastened spare wheel and tyre capable of replacing any one of the Wheels in use on the Vehicle unless stated otherwise in the Official Documents .

7.3. Vehicles can have more than four Wheels and tyres but they must be compatible. 7.4. All tyres must have at least the minimum legal tread depth on all tyres.

7.5. Competitive Safaris and Hill Rallies must specify tyre eligibility in the Official Documents . Tyres will be classified as All Terrain Mud Terrain or Extreme and will be judged against the AT and MT patterns leading manufacturers including BFG and General Tire.

8. Transmission

8.1. Vehicles must be equipped with an operable reverse gear and a non-torque biasing differential in full and free operation between the driving wheels unless:

a. A differential was not fitted by the manufacturer. b. The Official Documents specify otherwise.

8.2. Vehicles may use all wheel drive (unless the Official Documents specify otherwise) and may have traction afforded by Wheels, track, marine propellers or any combination of these.

9. Electrical Systems

9.1. Vehicles must not be equipped with more than two auxiliary lights which must be located in accordance with legal requirements except where the Event takes place wholly on private property.

10. Silencing

10.1. Vehicles must comply with the Noise levels in Chapter 7 Appendix 8 but the following parts of that Chapter remain unmodified by this section: Brakes, Steering, Cooling, Oil Systems, Fuel Systems, Weight / Ballast, Exhausts.

Technical Regulations - Safety

11. Competitive Safari Point to Point and Hill Rally

11.1. There are three classifications of Vehicle design which whilst requiring the same principles of roll-cage design may employ different mounting methods.

11.2. Monocoque Vehicles : These are of unitary construction employing an integral Chassis structure.

They must mount their roll-cages in accordance with Chapter 7 Appendix 3 Arts.7.1.a - c and fit a diagonal as provided by Chapter 7 Appendix 13 Diagrams 53 and 54 and must fit longitudinal door bars complying with Chapter 7 Appendix 3 Art.12 ( side sections per Chapter 7 Appendix 13 Diagram 18).

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 10 - Technical Regulations 753

A centre roof bar must be installed either diagonally or evenly spaced in line with the exterior longitudinal bars as shown in Chapter 7 Appendix 13 Diagram 56 . If more than one centre bar is fitted the bars must be evenly spaced. Double crossed roof bars to the minimum specification for optional members are strongly recommended as shown in Chapter 7 Appendix 13 Diagram 19 .

It is recommended that a horizontal bar be incorporated in the front hoop located approximately in line with the base of the windscreen which may be bolted or welded to the front hoop members and shall comply with the specifications for an optional member at Arts.12.1 –12.7 below.

11.3. Vehicles with Chassis : These employ a separate Chassis structure from the body or superstructure.

a. They must mount their roll-cage directly to the Chassis in accordance with Chapter 7 Appendix 13 Diagram 41 following the principles of Chapter 7 Appendix 3 Arts7.1.a –c. b.

Exceptionally where the body contains a superstructure of internal steel pressings including the floor and the roll-cage is ASN / FIA certified it is permitted to install the roll-cage in accordance with Arts.12.2.a–c. above.

Where it is necessary to weld additional Chassis outriggers on which to mount the roll-cage these must be of at least 75x50mm box section steel and not less than 3mm thick.

Alternatively the main hoop may be constructed as in Chapter 7 Appendix 13 Diagram 40 allowing mounting to the main Chassis rails or as in Chapter 7 Appendix 13 Diagrams 53 and 54 where a beam is welded across the Chassis rails. This beam must comply with Art.12.3.c above.

Where the roll-cage passes through the superstructure’s floor panels two alternative methods may be employed:

Either oversize holes allowing uninterrupted passage of the tubes to the chassis placed so as to allow for the movement of the superstructure where this is rubber mounted to the chassis or Or spreader plates complying with Chapter 7 Appendix 3 Arts. 3.2–3.5 may be used to sandwich the floor where the cage structure is continued through the floor pan to the chassis and mounted as in Chapter 7 Appendix 13 Diagram 41 . f.

ii.

The backstays in short wheelbase Vehicles may have to be mounted aft of the rear suspension mountings to the Chassis in order to comply with Chapter 7 Appendix 3 Arts.7.1.a - c

Chapter 7 Appendix 13 Diagrams 55 , 56 and 60 show the installation for an external front cage to an internally mounted rear roll bar and backstays showing the method for attachment through the Vehicle ’s roof skin. This installation may only be used where the body is rigidly mounted to the Chassis.

The backstays where mounted directly to the Chassis must be angled to the main roll hoop as shown in Chapter 7 Appendix 13 Diagrams 56 and 60 Vehicles configured with the backstays mounted in line with the main Chassis members built before 2014 are permitted.

The longitudinal bars connecting the front to rear roll bars should be straight or where a manufacturer’s truck cab or hard top is fitted the bars may follow the contours of the roof.

A centre bar must be installed either diagonally or if evenly spaced in line with the exterior longitudinal bars as shown in Chapter 7 Appendix 13 Diagrams 56 If more than one centre bar is fitted the bars must be evenly spaced. Double crossed roof bars to the minimum specification for optional members are strongly recommended as shown in Chapter 7 Appendix 13 Diagram 19 .

Where the roll-cage is mounted directly to the Chassis the front hoop may be mounted as shown in Chapter 7 Appendix 13 Diagram 57 .

Alternatively the front hoop may be mounted directly to a fabricated chassis extension as shown in Chapter 7 Appendix 13 Diagram 58 The Chassis extension must be constructed as shown in Chapter 7 Appendix 13 Diagram 59 .

External front hoops must be fitted with a horizontal bar approximately in line with the base of the windscreen of the same material and dimensions as specified for the main members of the ROPS and

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 10 - Technical Regulations 754

which may be bolted or welded to the front hoop. Recommended for Vehicles with an internal front hoop where installation is practical. n.

Must be fitted with sill bars of the same material and specification as the main ROPS or primary chassis members or box section steel being a minimum of 40mm x 40mm x 3mm or 50mm x 25mm x 3mm. These may be welded or bolted to the main longitudinal Chassis members.

11.4. Spaceframe Vehicles : These are constructed entirely from a framework including an integral roll-cage made of tubes and/or box sections. For Safari Plus and all Hill Rallies those elements comprising the primary chassis components must be of at least the same material and dimensions as the primary ROPS members or equivalent box section steel.

All these Vehicles must comply with Safety Criteria Chapter 7 Appendix 3 Arts.20 –21 and Chapter 7 Appendix 13 Diagrams 39 or 44 and have roll- cages incorporated into the frame of the Vehicle .

b. The roll-cage must be welded and integral to the design. c.

Where there may be difficulty with rear-engined Vehicles in respect of fitting a diagonal brace braces to Chapter 7 Appendix 13 Diagrams 42 or 43 may be used.

A centre roof bar being of the same material and dimensions as the main ROPS members must be installed either diagonally or evenly spaced in line with the exterior longitudinal bars as shown in Chapter 7 Appendix 13 Diagram 56 . If more than one centre bar is fitted the bars must be evenly spaced. Double crossed roof bars are strongly recommended to the minimum specification for optional members as shown in Chapter 7 Appendix 13 Diagram 19 .

It is recommended that a horizontal bar be incorporated in the front hoop located approximately in line with the base of the windscreen being of the same material and dimensions as the main ROPS members and which may be bolted or welded to the front hoop members. For Safari Plus and all Hill Rallies this horizontal bar is mandatory.

A sill bar or single longitudinal door bar as shown in Chapter 7 Appendix 13 Diagram 18 of the same material and dimensions must be fitted.

12. All Vehicle Types

12.1. Materials and dimensions must comply with Chapter 7 Appendix 3 Art.18 or be to EN10255 (BS1387) medium weight blue band: i.e. 42.30x3.2mm for Vehicles up to 1000kg and 48.00x3.2mm for Vehicles exceeding 1000kg.

12.2. Optional tubular members may be added as at Art.11.4 above medium weight. 30.00mm x 3.2mm. Materials may not be mixed.

12.3. All diameters are outside diameters. 12.4. All weights are deemed to be un-laden.

12.5. New Vehicles which do not comply with the above must be approved in accordance with Chapter 7 Appendix 3 Art.19 .

12.6. A Vehicle Passport is required for any existing Vehicle fitted with diagonal members forming a high cross as shown in Chapter 7 Appendix 13 Diagram 70 . Vehicle Passports for these Vehicles must have been obtained by 1st January 2022 after which date no further Vehicles with such a design will be approved.

12.7. Sport UTV’s must be fitted with a Homologated ROPS.

12.8. All Vehicles must comply with Chapter 7 Appendix 3 and be fitted with 4 (min) point safety harness and hend-held fire extinguisher and red rear warning light and tank fillers / vents / caps and external circuit breaker.

12.9. If a windscreen is fitted it must be of either laminated glass or plastic of a minimum thickness of 4mm. 12.10. If a plastic windscreen is perforated for viewing purposes approved goggles or visors must be worn. 12.11. Two red warning lights must be fitted to the specification mandated by Chapter 7 Appendix 3 . These must

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 10 - Technical Regulations 755

be rearward facing and mounted as high as is practicable within the bodywork confines. 12.12. Red warning lights must be switched on in poor visibility or as instructed by the Clerk of the Course.

12.13. A Passenger grab rail / handle or strap must be fitted in front of the Passenger and must be constructed and installed so as not to compromise the safety of the Crew.

12.14. The fitting of mud flaps of a flexible material not less than 5mm thick behind each road wheel extending to a minimum of 4cm each side of the tyre tread and a maximum of 10cm above the ground when the Vehicle is stationary is mandatory.

12.15. All Vehicles must carry a Small Spill Kit complying with Chapter 7 Appendix 2 Article 22.15.

12.16. Steering provided by hydraulic operation (i.e. not by direct mechanical link) is permitted in Competitive Safari (Inc. Competitive Safari Plus ) Events only. Vehicles with hydraulic systems must comply with the Vehicle Technical Requirements published by the ASN and Vehicles must be issued with a Vehicle Passport which must be obtained by application to the ASN .

13. Point to Point 13.1. Additional to Arts.1– 12.16 above. 13.2. The requirement to comply with Art.12.14 above may be relaxed by Official Documents . 13.3. Official Documents may permit Vehicles complying with Arts.6 and 18 of this Appendix .

14. Team Recovery

14.1. All open or soft top Vehicles must comply with Safety Criteria Chapter 7 Appendix 13 Drawing 1 or with rear stays to Chapter 7 Appendix 3 Arts.20 –21 per Chapter 7 Appendix 13 Diagrams 58 , 53 or 40.

14.2. All Vehicles with manufacturer ’s hard top or truck cab are recommended to adopt Safety Criteria Chapter 7 Appendix 13 Diagram 10 .

14.3. All Vehicles must comply with Chapter 7 Appendix 3 in respect of hand-held fire extinguishers and fuel fillers / vents and caps. A 3 (min) point safety harness and external circuit breaker in each case conforming with Chapter 7 Appendix 3 are recommended.

14.4. If a windscreen is fitted it must be of either laminated glass or plastic of a minimum thickness of 4mm. 14.5. If a plastic windscreen is perforated for viewing purposes goggles or visors must be worn. 14.6. Wire mesh is recommended to the front and rear of the cab windscreen and rear window.

15. Timed Trial 15.1. Vehicles must be equipped with ROPS as follows;

a. Monocoque Vehicles. Must comply with Arts.12.2.a –c. and Arts.12.1 –12.5 of this Appendix . b.

Vehicles with Chassis. Must comply with Arts.11.2.a–g. and 11.3.k –m of this Appendix . The backstays where mounted directly to the Chassis must be angled to the main roll hoop as shown in Chapter 7 Appendix 13 Diagram 60 . Existing Vehicles configured with the backstays mounted in line with the main chassis members are permitted.

c. Spaceframe Vehicles. Must comply with Arts.11.4.a–f above. 15.2. All ROPS must comply with Arts.12.1–12.6 above .

15.3. All Vehicles must have hand-held fire extinguisher complying with Chapter 7 and tanks, fillers, vents and caps mut confirm with Chapter 7.

15.4. All Vehicles must have a minimum of 4-point safety belt in accordance with Chapter 7. 15.5. Fitment of an external circuit breaker in accordance with Chapter 7 is recommended. 15.6. If a windscreen is fitted it must be of either laminated glass or plastic of a minimum thickness of 4mm.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 10 - Technical Regulations 756

15.7. If a plastic windscreen is perforated for viewing purposes goggles or visors must be worn.

15.8. A Passenger grab rail / handle or strap should be fitted in front of the Passenger and where fitted must be constructed and installed so as not to compromise the safety of the Crew.

16. Challenge Events

16.1. All open or soft top Vehicles must comply with Safety Criteria Chapter 7 Appendix 13 Diagram 10 or with rear stays to Chapter 7 Appendix 3 Arts.20 –21 per Chapter 7 Appendix 13 Drawings 53 , 50 or 38 .

16.2. All Vehicles with manufacturer ’s hard top or truck cab are recommended to adopt Safety Criteria in Chapter 7 relating to Series Production or Touring or Sports Cars and to have minimum rollover hoop with rearward stays perChapter 7 Appendix 13 Diagram 10 .

16.3. All Vehicles must have a hand-held fire extinguisher complying with Chapter 7 and tanks, fillers, vents and caps must conform with Chapter 7.

16.4. All Vehicles must have a minimum 3-point safety belt in conformity with Chapter 7. 16.5. If a windscreen is fitted it must be of either laminated glass or plastic of a minimum thickness of 4mm. 16.6. If a plastic windscreen is perforated for viewing purposes goggles or visors must be worn.

16.7. Where a windscreen and / or rear window is not fitted to Art.12.9 above a full width wire mesh is mandatory of a 2in maximum square aperture and a minimum 10g weld-mesh and must be securely fitted.

16.8. All Vehicles must carry a Small Spill Kit capable of absorbing minor spillages up to 1.25 litres of all Vehicle fluids. Used Spill Kits are to be disposed of in accordance with local or National guidelines.

17. Road Legal Challenge Vehicle

17.1. Road Legal Challenge Vehicles must fully comply with C&U Regulations in all respects. Official Documents may not relax this requirement.

17.2. Vehicles must comply with Art.2.4 of this Appendix (mudguards). 17.3. Vehicles must not be fitted with “Tree Wires” nor carry equipment on the front bumper nor front bodywork. 17.4. Any Vehicle not complying with the above shall be deemed a Challenge Special.

18. Challenge Special

18.1. All Vehicles must be fitted with a circuit breaker(s) which isolates the battery from all electrical circuits which simultaneously stops the engine and which is operable by the driver whilst correctly seated. An external circuit breaker in compliance with the provisions of Chapter 7 is recommended. Vehicles fitted with electric winches may use a second isolator operated by the primary circuit breaker either by means of a mechanical linkage or via a control circuit to ensure that all winches and their control solenoids are isolated on operation of the primary circuit breaker.

18.2. Rear and four wheel steering is permitted unless prohibited by Official Documents .

18.3. Steering provided by hydraulic or other method of operation (i.e. not by a direct mechanical link) is permitted. Hydraulic systems may not exceed an operating pressure of 150bar.

18.4. Independently operated front and / or rear brakes are permitted

19. Challenge Winching and Recovery Equipment: All Vehicles

19.1. The following equipment safety ratings are minima based upon a single line load. Multiple line rigging and the actual mass of the Vehicle may require equipment with a higher safety rating. The following minimum equipment must be carried:

a. A polyester towing rope or a tow strap rated to 2 tonnes minimum SWL. b. Two shackles stamped with a minimum WLL of 3.25 tonnes and be CE marked.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 10 - Technical Regulations 757

c. Two tree protecting strops labelled with a minimum WLL of 2 tonnes and be CE marked. d. Winch cable / rope must be rated in excess of the maximum rating of the winch. e.

Any loop at the end of a steel cable must be swaged. Any loop at the end of a synthetic rope must be spliced.

20. Trials and Orienteering 20.1. The following are recommended;

a. A roll-over hoop and rearward stays in accordance with Chapter 7 Appendix 13 Diagram 10 . b. A 3-point safety harness in accordance with Chapter 7 c. A hand-held fire extinguisher in accordance with Chapter 7.

20.2. For Orienteering Events all Vehicles must carry a Small Spill Kit capable of absorbing minor spillages up to 1.25 litres of all Vehicle fluids. Used Spill Kits are to be disposed of in accordance with local or National guidelines.

21. Tyro Trials

21.1. Tyro Trials allow all standard production 4x4 Vehicles with petrol or diesel engines (including military variants of civilian models) mass-produced by a motor manufacturer and generally available for normal retail sale or available via a network of dealers whether designed principally for the transportation of Passengers commercial use or dual purpose.

21.2. Saloon Vehicles and car derived commercial Vehicles are prohibited. 21.3. Vehicles must be currently registered and taxed. 21.4. Where appropriate the Vehicle must have a valid MOT Certificate where appropriate.

21.5. Seats may be replaced but the number of rear seats fitted must comply with those fitted to the Vehicle model by the manufacturer.

21.6. Bumpers must be retained in their original position. 21.7. Safety improvements may be added to the Vehicle .

22. Miscellaneous – All Events

22.1. The following parts of Chapter 7 remain unmodified by this section: Brakes, Steering, Cooling, Oil Systems, Fuel Systems, Weight / Ballast, Exhausts.

22.2. Vehicles must be currently registered and taxed.

22.3. With the exception of Promotional Events the Official Documents may relax the requirement for a Vehicle to be currently taxed if the Event takes place wholly on private property.

22.4. The Official Documents may permit the Competition Vehicle to be of a commercial type such as a van or pick up originally intended for commercial use or the carrying of goods.

22.5. Vehicles must also comply with all Statutory Regulations as to Construction and Use particularly with regard to brakes, lighting, tyres, warning devices, rear view mirrors, silencers, speedometers, wings and windscreen unless the Official Documents specify otherwise.

22.6. Vehicles must be fitted with a substantial towing point front and rear painted in a contrasting colour unless the Official Documents state otherwise.

22.7. Vehicles may be modified from manufacturer ’s original specifications providing that the modifications meet the ASN Vehicle regulations and the Official Documents.

22.8. Independently operated rear brakes are permitted. 22.9. The use of nylon ropes for recovery purposes is recommended.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 10 - Technical Regulations 758

22.10. Non-stretch ropes are acceptable. 22.11. Cables or chains are not recommended. 22.12. Where Vehicles are fitted with a compressed air tank the pressure shall not exceed 21bar.

22.13. The engine must not produce visible smoke or exhaust emissions during the Event however reasonable emissions such as an occasional “puff” are tolerated. Any named Official of the Event is empowered to Judge this. If the Competitor is unable to affect a solution during the Event they shall be Disqualified from the Competition.

22.14. Sports Utility Task Vehicle . A Sport UTV is a two-seater all-terrain Vehicle on general catalogued sale of which 100 Vehicles are produced in a 12 consecutive month period of less than 1800cc corrected capacity and weighing less than 700 kg.

22.15. Rearward vision whilst properly seated within the confines of the Vehicle’s bodywork or ROPS must be possible. Vehicles with solid rear bulkheads or an obstructed view along the centreline of the longitudinal axis must be fitted with either external rear view mirrors or a reversing camera. Mirrors and / or cameras must be operational during Competition.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 10 - Technical Regulations 759

CHAPTER 20 CROSS COUNTRY

Appendix 11 - Charts and Diagrams

Chart 1

No warning or Confirmation Arrows if junctions are VERY close

If possible ‘box’ area

Block & No Entry sign AWAY from junction

WARNING ARROW & LOCATION BOARD on the side of the road where it is MOST VISIBLE

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 11 - Charts and Diagrams 760

Chart 2

DISTANCE FROM PREVIOUS SIGN

CONTROL TYPE

POSITION COLOUR BOARD Black Symbols n/a Beginning of Control Area Yellow background

PASSAGE CONTROL

25 metres At Control Stop Red background

50 metres End of Control Area Yellow background

n/a Beginning of Control Area Yellow background

TIME CONTROL

25 metres At Control Stop Red background

50 metres End of Control Area Yellow background

Beginning of Control Area ( Stage Arrival)

Yellow background

START OF SPECIAL STAGE n/a

25 metres Stage Arrival Control Red background

50 - 200 metres Stage Start Red background

Warning of Stage Finish (both sides of track)

n/a

Yellow background

Flying Finish Line (both sides of track)

100 metres

Red background

FINISH OF SPECIAL STAGE

Countdown boards (evenly spaced between Flying Finish & Stop Line)

Black on white background

100 - 300 metres Stop Line Red background

50 metres End of Control Area Yellow

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 11 - Charts and Diagrams 761

Chart 3 ASSESSMENT OF PERFORMANCE – TARGET TIMED CROSS COUNTRY EVENTS Performance will be assessed as follows, unless modified by the Official Documents

Special Stages

Road Sections

(a) Not reporting at a control Retired (b) Not reporting at or providing proof of visiting a Check 30 mins

visiting a Control more than once

30 mins

Stage Target

(d)

(e)

Not attempting or being ready to attempt a Stage when instructed to do so

Stage Target Stage Target

Not completing a Stage

(f)

(m)

Breach of a Statutory requirement concerning the driving of a motor vehicle

30 mins 30 mins

Contravening Appendix 7 Art.6.16

(n) (o)

Breach of Technical Regulations concerning the use of lights and breaches of the Construction and Use or Lighting of Vehicles Regulations

30 mins

Excessive Vehicle Noise , excessive speed or driving likely to bring motor sport into disrepute ( Appendix 2 Art.6.1 and App.7 Art.2.21 )

(p)

30 mins 30 mins

Damaged or ineffective silencing system

(q)

(r) Damage to car ( Appendix 7 Art.3.2 ) 10 mins

(s) Receiving assistance contrary to Appendix 9 Arts.4.1 –4.7 or Arts.5.12–5.16 or contravening Appendix 7 Art.8.1 **(t) Breach of Regulations 25, Appendix 7 Art.8.4 , Appendix 7 Art.3.2 , Appendix 9 Arts.5.1–5.3 Appendix 9 Arts.5.5 –5.9 Appendix 9 Arts.6.1 –6.8

30 mins Stage Target

Disqualification

Stage Target plus 30 mins

†(u) Breach of Regulation Appendix 9 Art.4.8

(v) Second offence (m), (n), (o), (p), (q), (s) Disqualification

(w) Breach of Regulation Appendix 9 Art.4.8 , Appendix 7 Art.2.7 , Appendix 9 Arts.2.22–2.32

Disqualification

**These penalties may not be decreased by the Supplementary Regulations. The decision on causing excessive noise during an event is left to the discretion of the Judge , Environmental Scrutineer ( Chapter 5 App.6 ), or Driving Standards Observer ( Chapter 5 App.8 ) who may refuse permission to proceed at any time. Driving

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 11 - Charts and Diagrams 762

Standards Observers’ decisions on imposing a penalty for excessive speed or bringing the sport into disrepute will be penalised according to the Official Statements . Note also powers contained in Appendix 7 Arts.2.4 –2.8

†Any road section penalties thus incurred will be applied up to and including Disqualification.

Chart 4 ASSESSMENT OF PERFORMANCE – CROSS COUNTRY EVENTS USING SCHEDULED TIMING

Performance will be assessed in one of the methods listed. The ‘Marks Lost’ penalties as shown below will apply, unless modified by the Official Documents or the Official Documents specify the Fails system

Marks Lost or Fails (a) Not reporting at a control 30 mins 1 (b) Not reporting at or providing proof of visiting a check 30 mins 1

visiting a control more than once

15 mins

(d)

(e)

Not attempting or being ready to attempt a Stage when instructed to do so

Stage Target

Not completing a Stage

Stage Target (g) Not performing a Stage correctly including taking the incorrect route Stage Target (h) Making a false start at a Stage 1 min (i) Every second taken to complete a Stage (subject to Appendix 7 Art.5.24 ) 1/60 min

(f)

(j) Arriving at a control or check, other than at the end of a non- competitive section before Scheduled time per minute

2 mins Max. penalty not to exceed that for (a) missing a control

*(k)

1 min or fraction

Arriving at a control or check after due time – per minute, where timing is to whole minutes –per fraction of a minute, where timing is to a fraction of a minute

**(l)

Early arrival at the end of a non-competitive section 30 mins 1

**(m) Breach of a Statutory requirement concerning the driving of a motor vehicle

30 mins 1 (n) Contravening Appendix 7 Art.6.16 30 mins 1 (o)

(p)

Damaged or ineffective silencing system 30 mins 1

(q)

(r) Damage to car ( Appendix 7 Art.3.2 ) 10 mins 1

(s) Receiving assistance contrary to Appendix 9 Arts.4.1 –4.7 or Arts.5.12–5.16 or contravening Appendix 7 Art.8.1

30 mins 1

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 11 - Charts and Diagrams 763

**(t) Breach of Regulations App.6 Art.2.1–2.6,, App.7 Art.3.2 , App.9 Arts.5.1–5.3, App. 9 Arts.6.1 –6.8

Disqualification

Appendix 7 Art.8.4 , Appendix 7 Art.3.2 , Appendix 9 Arts.5.1 –5.3 Appendix 9 Arts.6.1–6.8

†(u) Breach of Regulation App.9 Art.4.8 Stage max. plus 30 mins (v) Second offence (o), (p), (q), (r), (s) Disqualification (w) Breach of Regulation App.9 Art.4.8, App.7 Art.2.7, App.9 Arts.2.22 - 2.32 Disqualification

*Except in ‘neutral’ sections where only a maximum lateness Penalty equal to (a) shall be applied.

**These penalties may not be decreased by the Official Documents . The decision on causing excessive noise during an event is left to the discretion of the Judge, Environmental Scrutineer ( Chapter 5 App.6 ), or Driving Standards Observer who may refuse permission to proceed at any time. Driving Standards Observers’ decisions on imposing a penalty for excessive speed or bringing the sport into disrepute will be penalised according to the Official Documents. Note also powers contained in Appendix 7 Arts.2.4 –2.8

†Any road section penalties thus incurred will be applied up to and including Disqualification.

Chart 5

Diagram illustrating the application of 204 to 212. The lower figures preceded by F indicate the correct penalties for a car stopping in the position show .

Chart 6 Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 11 - Charts and Diagrams 764

Chart 7 CROSS COUNTRY DRIVING TEST PENALTIES

Marks Lost (a) Each minute late in reporting at the start or a restart 5* (b) Not attempting or being ready to attempt a test when instructed to do so 40 * (c) Not performing a test correctly, other than in (d) or (e) or not completing the test or making a false start (d) Striking any barrier, wall or marker or crossing the boundary of a test (per mistake) 5 (e) Failing to cross or stop at any line or specified position as required in a test (per mistake) 5 (f) Every second (and fraction) taken to complete test 1 fraction (g) Every second (ignoring fractions) to complete test 1 no fractions

40 *

Chart 8

CODE

PR REQUIREMENTS A Personal visit to an adult member of household within 100m. B Letter to each householder within 100m. C Public notice.

Personally visit and obtain signature from an adult member of any household within 500m of any point where competitors are required to stop (i.e. any control or clue point).

Consult RLO. F Personal visit to an adult member of household within 150m. G

Letter to each householder within 100m, unless the RLO agrees to a lesser requirement.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 11 - Charts and Diagrams 765

Chart 9 ALL EVENTS TRAVERSING THE PUBLIC HIGHWAY

PR Requirement

Permit Section Road Type Time STANDARD (timed to second) inc.

23.59 to

All Classes (see 10.2)

1 hour after sunrise A(G) D

STANDARD

(time to minute) All Classes 24 hour B D

A & B

22.00 to 07.00

Yellow/White

UCR/Private

ROAD RALLY (inc. HISTORIC)

REGULARITY

A & B

07.00 to 22.00

White/UCR/

Private

24 hour Yellow 22.00 to 07.00 E D Habitation

TRANSPORT & NEUTRAL

A, B & (Yellow 07.00 to 22.00) A & B

24 hour C D

STANDARD & REGULARITY

ECONOMY,

NAVIGATIONAL & 12 CAR RALLIES

(All types) VINTAGE (22.00 to 07.00)

TRANSPORT &

NEUTRAL A, B, Habitation & (Yellow 07.00 to 22.00)

24 hour E D

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 11 - Charts and Diagrams 766

VINTAGE (07.00 to 22.00)

ALL ALL 07.00 to 22.00 C D

VETERAN ALL ALL 24 hour C D

NAV. SCATTERS ALL ALL 24 hour E D

TREASURE HUNTS

ALL ALL 24 hour E D

TOURING ASSMS.

A & B, Habitation 22.00 to 07.00 C D

Yellow

22.00 to 07.00

White/UCR/ Private

24 hour

ROAD

A, B, Yellow Habitation

07.00 to 22.00

SPECIAL STAGE

RALLIES including SINGLE VENUE STAGE RALLIES

ACCESS/EGRESS

ALL

24 hour

To/From STAGE To PUBLIC HIGHWAY

Private or

Roads Closed by appropriate Legislation

24 hour F

SPECIAL STAGE

White/UCR/ Private 24 hour B D

CLASSIC TRIALS

and ALL OTHER EVENTS USING THE PUBLIC HIGHWAY

Yellow

22.00 to 07.00 B D

A, B, Habitation & (Yellow 07.00 to 22.00)

24 hour C D

For Codes see above in Table 8

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 11 - Charts and Diagrams 767

CHAPTER 20 CROSS COUNTRY Appendix 12 - Public Relations Guidance

1. Public Relations

1.1. Effective Public Relations (PR) work must be undertaken by Organisers of all Events using the Highway . The following advice will be useful:

1.2. Prior consultation with Route Liaison Officers who might require additional PR work in sensitive areas is essential. The work should be completed to allow enough time to undertake a re-route should this prove necessary.

1.3. Be diplomatic positive and clear about the legal aspects of route authorisation. If the Event is run in England or Wales do not intimate that it is authorised by the Police.

1.4. Avoid asking for ‘authorisation’ or ‘permission’ from householders as this can invite unnecessary difficulties. 1.5. Special consideration should be given to householders with pets or livestock.

1.6. All PR must be carried out by responsible members of the Organising Club or of a Local Club . All PR letters should be vetted and checked by the RLO and must indicate who the Organiser is (with a contact address and phone number) the date of the Event in which direction it is travelling and the approximate time of passing.

1.7. Where Organisers publish a guide to the route or specific locations for spectators they should ensure that:

Householders within 500m of any specifically advised location have been effectively contacted without difficulty and that these areas are properly marshalled

The information contains warnings of locations that spectators should avoid (blackspots sensitive areas etc).

1.8. Ensure that each PR crew prepares a report on each visit and that these are available to the RLO on request and to the Clerk of the Course and Stewards at the Event. Special note should be made of problem areas and reports must passed to RLOs for the benefit of future Events.

1.9. Contact should be made with local Police stations before and immediately after all Events. 1.10. See App.11 Charts 8 and 9 for detailed requirements.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 12 - Public Relations Guidance 768

CHAPTER 20 CROSS COUNTRY Appendix 13 - Technical Regulations for Junior Trials Vehicles

1. Chassis and Body

1.1. The Chassis and bodywork in Junior Trials Vehicles must be standard except where modified to comply with these Regulations and must be that from a proprietary machine.

1.2. Chapter 7 Appendix 7 Art.1.4 does not apply in respect of the seat cushion being 15.25cm below the adjacent body.

1.3. App.10 Art.1.1 does not apply.

2. Engine

2.1. Vehicles must be fitted with a four-stroke petrol or diesel vertical crankshaft engine of the industrial and commercial restricted type and designed for use on a Ride on Mower or Lawn / Garden Tractor.

2.2. The engine must be fitted in its original location and retain its governor or restrictor which may not be modified or removed.

2.3. The engine must be fitted with an air filter the type and location of which is free.

2.4. The engine must be fitted with an effective silencer such that the Vehicle complies with the Noise limits provided by Chapter 7 App.8.

2.5. The silencer and exhaust manifold are free as to type and location but must be fitted with shields when located outside of the bodywork or Chassis.

3. Transmission 3.1. A manual constant mesh transmission must be fitted of the type originally fitted to the Vehicle. 3.2. Transmissions of an alternative make or model may be fitted. 3.3. The Driver must be protected from all drive belts / chains. 3.4. Vehicles must not be fitted with a locked locking or torque-biasing differential.

4. Wheels and Tyres 4.1. Wheels and tyres are free.

5. Brakes

5.1. Vehicles must have brake systems operating on both rear wheels simultaneously by a single foot pedal which may activate the brakes either mechanically or hydraulically.

5.2. The brakes must be capable of locking the Wheels when applied at maximum speed.

5.3. A mechanical handbrake must be fitted which operates directly on both rear wheels and can hold the Vehicle on a 45° longitudinal gradient.

6. Steering 6.1. The steering system must retain its original location and operation and must be un-assisted. 6.2. Steering system components are free and may be strengthened. 6.3. A steering damper may be fitted.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 13 - Technical Regulations for Junior Trials Vehicles 769

7. Front Axle

7.1. The location and mounting of the front axle must be standard to the Vehicle and no alteration may be made to the Chassis or bodywork to increase articulation.

7.2. The front axle may be modified or replaced.

7.3. Movement of the front axle may be controlled by the addition of springs and / or dampers or friction materials between the axle and the Chassis.

8. Safety

8.1. A roll-cage (see Chapter 7 Appendix 13 Diagram 61 ) must be fitted comprising a front and rear hoop which extend the full width of the bodywork and which maintain the minimum clearance above the Competitor ’s helmet when properly seated ( Chapter 7 Appendix 13 Diagram 47 )

8.2. Sidebars must be fitted which prevent the Driver ’s feet from involuntarily leaving the confines of the Vehicle. 8.3. A rear brace must be fitted to the rear hoop to guide and locate the shoulder straps of the seat belt.

8.4. The roll-cage comprising the front and rear hoops lateral bars side bars and rear brace must comply with Chapter 7 Appendix 3 Art.18 or be to BS1387 medium weight blue band (ie a minimum 42.30x3.2mm external diameter and wall thickness).

8.5. The roll-cage must be:

Bolted to the chassis with 3mm thick spreader plates and a minimum of two 10mm high tensile bolts at 25mm between centres per mounting ( Chapter 7 Appendix 13 Diagram 22 ) or

Bolted to outriggers of 3mm wall thickness bolted / welded to the chassis using 3mm thick saddles and two 10mm high tensile bolts at 25mm between centres per mounting per Chapter 7 Appendix 13 Diagram 62) or

8.6. Welded to outriggers of 3mm wall thickness bolted / welded to the Chassis as Chapter 7 Appendix 13 Diagram 54 .

8.7. Suitable head protection is strongly recommended. 8.8. A 4-point seat belt must be fitted ( Chapter 7 Appendix 7 Art.7 ).

8.9. A circuit breaker conforming to Chapter 7 Appendix 5 Art.5 which is operable by the Driver when properly seated and which is clearly marked must be fitted.

8.10. The battery must be securely mounted and fitted in a sealed container or under the bonnet. 8.11. A strong and clearly marked recovery point must be fitted to the rear of the vehicle.

8.12. The seat must be rigidly located and designed to securely locate the Driver up to and including the shoulders.

8.13. A head restraint must be fitted where not integral to the seat complying with Chapter 7 Appendix 7 Art.4. 8.14. The fuel tank must be located under the bonnet and comply with Chapter 7 Appendix 4 Arts.1.2 – 1.9.

9. Miscellaneous

9.1. A front bumper or bush guard must be fitted to protect the chassis and bodywork. This may provide location for under Chassis protection and must provide a suitable towing point.

9.2. Under-Vehicle protection skid plates / guards may be fitted to protect the steering engine and transmission. 9.3. Ballast may be added to the Vehicle provided it is securely attached to the Chassis or skid plates. 9.4. Ballast must be located below the floor line.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 20 Appendix 13 - Technical Regulations for Junior Trials Vehicles 770

Chapter 21 Land Speed Records

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 21 - Land Speed Records 771

CHAPTER 21 LAND SPEED RECORDS

1.1. This Chapter must be read in conjunction with Chapters 1 – 11 .

1.2. The following Appendices comprise this Chapter: App . 1 App . 2

General Provisions FIA World, International and National Records

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 21 - Land Speed Records 772

CHAPTER 21 LAND SPEED RECORDS Appendix 1 - General Provisions

1. Jurisdiction

1.1. The FIA will adjudicate upon all claims to International Class and World Records . Claims to such Records following attempts within the territory of ASN will be submitted to the FIA by ASN . ASN will adjudicate upon all other claims to Records made within its territory. At all times these Regulations should be read in conjunction with the FIA ’s Appendix “ D ”.

2. Records Recognised

2.1. The only Records which may be recognised are Local Records , National Records , International Records and World Records . No distinction is drawn between Records made on a track and Records made on a road

2.2. Local Record – recognised by the ASN within its jurisdiction as the result achieved on an approved Course whatever the nationality of the Driver . A Record made during a Race is not recognised.

2.3. National Record – established in conformity with the rules of ASN and deemed to be a Class record on its territory or the territory of another ASN with their prior authority. Irrespective of Class it may also be recognised as an absolute National Record .

2.4. International Record – recognised by the FIA as the best result achieved in one of the Categories, groups, cylinder – capacity Classes or other sub-divisions prescribed in the International Sporting Code and Appendix D .

2.5. World Record – recognised by the FIA as the best result achieved irrespective of Category , group or Class prescribed in the International Sporting Code and Appendix D .

2.6. Records restricted to their own Class. A Vehicle having established or beaten a Record in its own Class may beat a World Record but cannot beat the same Record in any other Class.

3. Vehicles Eligible to Establish Records 3.1. FIA World and International – App.2 . 3.2. National – App.2

4. Times & Distances Recognised 4.1. International – refer to Appendix D 4.2. National

Miles – Standing Start 1⁄4 – 1 – 5 – 10 – 50 – 100 – 200 – 500 – 1000 – 2000 – 5000 – 10000 Flying Start – 1⁄4 – 1 – 5 – 10 Kilometres – Standing Start – 500m 1 – 5 – 10 – 50 – 100 – 200 – 500 – 1000 – 2000 – 5000 – 10000 Flying Start – 500m – 1 – 5 – 10 Hours – Standing Start – 1 – 3 – 6 – 12 – 24

5. Record Attempts

5.1. All attempts shall be subject to the prescriptions of the FIA International Sporting Code and the ASN National Competition Rules in so far as they can be applied.

5.2. For all Record Attempts reference should be made to FIA Appendix D .

5.3. An International or National record attempt or the organisation of a group of Record attempts are a sporting Event .

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 21 Appendix 1 - General Provisions 773

5.4. National Attempts are a National Event independent of the nationality of the Competitors . 5.5. Record attempts can be made on a Track or Road .

5.6. The Attempt Permit may be issued to the Competitor ’s Entrant attempting the Record or an ASN Registered Club .

5.7. The successful Competitor (s) will be the Record holder subject to ratification by ASN . 5.8. A successful attempt must represent an increase of 1% of the average speed of the current Record .

5.9. The Competitor may not publish or have published by any person or distribute or have distributed by any person the result of an Attempt before written ratification by the ASN unless prior written permission is given by the ASN and the proposed publicity is first approved by the ASN . Where such permission has been given by the ASN then the results may be circulated and must include the statement “Subject to ASN Ratification ” in clearly visible printed letters. The ASN has the right to reject or approve the proposed publicity.

6. Application for a Record Attempt

6.1. The Entrant or Organisation must submit a completed Application for Authorisation to the ASN ’s Head of Speed , at least 6 weeks prior to the date of the Attempt together with the appropriate Fee as published from time to time by the ASN ( see Chapter 1 App.2 ).

6.2. An Organising Permit known as an Attempt Permit is issued as the ASN authorisation. 6.3. Mandatory requirements by way of Declaration as set out below at a – n are required for all Authorisations :

a. Proof of landowners’ permission. b. Local Police Authorities to be informed. c. Fully licensed Speed Event Rescue Unit and Crew required. d.

For any Venue or Course without a valid Track Licence a plan and surveyors report must be submitted.

e. A valid Track Licence is required for all Attempts on a Track . f. g. h.

Details of all proposed Officials Details of proposed Scrutineering facilities and arrangements

Technical details of the Vehicle attempting the Record (to be passed to the ASN Technical Department for review (note: the ASN will review and may reject the Vehicle or require modifications on safety grounds)

Provide a serious incident management plan respecting the ASN Serious Incident Protocol j. Provide an Event Schedule . k. Liability for all ASN costs. l.

Liability for all Officials costs m. Details of any Noise or environmental restrictions. n.

Necessary Insurance

Officials

7.1.

The ASN will appoint a Steward who will be responsible for the supervision of the Attempt and who :

has the authority to stop, suspend or modify the Event Schedule ;

will maintain a detailed log of all stops and operations at a Control Station ;

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 21 Appendix 1 - General Provisions 774

c. must after the Attempt , send to the ASN a detailed report and the relevant reports of the Timekeeper and the Scrutineer no later than 48 hours following the conclusion of the Event subject always to Art.10.6 below (technical verification). Where the Steward ’s Report is delayed by virtue of Art.10.6 below , then the Steward must notify the ASN accordingly.

7.2. Other Officials as required to supervise operations at Control Stations and observation along the Course .

7.3. The Entrant is responsible for nominating an Attempt Co-ordinator and meeting the costs of an ASN licensed Timekeeper , Eligibility Scrutineer and Rescue Unit in each case approved by the ASN for Record Attempts .

7.4. An Attempt Co-ordinator may not necessarily be the Entrant and is the person responsible for the coordination of the Attempt which includes the liaison with the Officials and represented organisations.

8. Licences

8.1. The Competitor (s) must hold a valid International Competition Licence for an International Record Attempt ; for a National Record Attempt an International or National or a licence endorsed “ Record Attempts Only ” is required

9. Course

9.1. The Course may be either a permanent or temporary Track or a Circuit and have a valid Track Licence relevant to the Attempt .

9.2. The Course may be of an ‘ Open ’ type with a Control Line at each end of the measured distance or of the ‘ Closed ’ type with a single Control Line (see Arts. 31, 38 and 39 below).

9.3. A a Closed Course is section of Track covered without stopping with reversal of the direction of running after crossing the Control Line at each end of a measured distance ..

9.4. During an Attempt of up to 24 hours only the Vehicle attempting the record and the nominated Officials , Rescue and service Vehicles are permitted to use the Track .

9.5. For Records up to 1 mile the Course will be of the open type with a maximum gradient of 1%; for flying starts this will apply to the two extensions at the beginning and end of the measured distance even if they are not straight and are used as part of the Course for the flying start.

9.6. The measured distance must be covered in both directions. 9.7. Consecutive runs must not exceed 60 minutes.

9.8. Should a Competitor make an unsatisfactory start and providing the Vehicle has not crossed the Control Line a re-start is permitted.

9.9. For Records up to 10 miles or 10 kilometres the Course may be of the Open or Closed type.

9.10. Open Course – the measured distance must be covered in both directions and including the return run must not exceed 1 hour.

9.11. Closed Course – the car crossing the single Control Line lap after lap. The direction of running is free as appropriate to the track licence.

9.12. For Records over 10 miles and Time Records the course must be of the Closed type. The direction of running is free.

9.13. For Records over 5000km and 24 hours on a Circuit where all curves are in the same direction, the direction of running may be reversed every 5000km by crossing the Control Line and turning back and passing over it again in the opposite direction without stopping.

10. Scrutineering

10.1. Prior to the start the Scrutineer will verify that the Vehicle conforms to the Category , group and Class , and the relevant Vehicle regulations and safety requirements of the Code and or the NCR as the case may be as well as any requirements of the ASN ( see Art.6.3.h above ).

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 21 Appendix 1 - General Provisions 775

10.2. Particular attention must be paid to the Competitor respecting applicable Seat and Harness and Personal Safety Equipment obligations and, in any case where the vehicle is to use a parachute retardation system, then the requirements of the current FIA Code Appendix must be verified by the Scrutineer .

10.3. Using approved measuring instruments the Scrutineer must measure the cubic capacity of the engine. Alternately the Scrutineer may affix ASN approved seals to the relevant components for examination at the conclusion of the Attempt . Seals may only be broken by the person affixing the seal or with their written permission by a person designated by the ASN to make the examination.

10.4. The Vehicle must remain under the control of the Scrutineer if transported to another place for verification.

10.5. At the end of the Attempt the Scrutineer will make the final verification of the Vehicle and give a written report to the ASN Steward .

10.6. Where the technical verification of the Vehicle is not concluded by the Scrutineer on the day of the Event then it should occur as soon as reasonably practicable and in any event within 14 calendar days.

11. Timekeeping 11.1. A Speed Timekeeper of the appropriate grade and as nominated by the ASN is required.

11.2. On an Open Course time is recorded as the Vehicle crosses the start and finish lines in both directions with a break at the end of each run.

11.3. On a Closed Course times must be recorded lap after lap as the Vehicle crosses the single start-finish line.

11.4. At the end of the Attempt the Timekeeper must give to the ASN Steward a written report together with the original record of times and relevant calculations.

12. Control Stations 12.1. Stations may be located along the course at designated areas. 12.2. Authorised Stations :

Open Course – One next to the Start Line and Finish Line . The station near the Start Line will be the main station where any operation allowed will be carried out.

b. Closed Course – One next to the single Control Line . c. Intermediate stations at a maximum interval of 5km (2.5km in the case of simultaneous attempts). d. A Vehicle shall not be out of sight for more than one minute during its travel.

12.3. At all Stations the Vehicle must be stationary with or without engine running. Pushing the Vehicle within the limits of the Station by the Competitors ’ assistants is permitted.

12.4. Starting the engine by a push start is permitted or by its normal designated starting method. 12.5. If the Vehicle stops during an Attempt it may restart by its own means and continue.

12.6. Should the Vehicle stop along the Course the Driver may push the Vehicle without any outside assistance to the nearest Station for authorised replenishment or repairs to enable the Vehicle to resume the Attempt .

13. Authorised Operations

13.1. Before the Attempt except for replenishment materials, all spare parts, auxiliary materials and tools that are to be carried on the Vehicle or held at a Main Station shall be listed with their total weight and that list must be given to the ASN Steward .

13.2. Only the items listed at Art.13.1 above are permitted to be used during the Attempt . Body panels, window glass and exhaust systems (including turbocharger) shall be considered as replenishment materials and need not be listed.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 21 Appendix 1 - General Provisions 776

13.3. Competitors ’ assistants using the authorised spare parts, auxiliary materials and tools located at the Station may carry out operations at main and intermediate Stations . The Vehicle must be stationary during such operations.

13.4. The Station may have tools, materials and equipment similar to that of a normal road service station.

13.5. All operations concerning refuelling, cleaning, tuning, fitting, replacement of wheels, tyres, spark plugs, injectors, electrical components, repairs and welding are authorised.

13.6. Welding of the fuel tank, its lines and attachments is prohibited at any Station but may be permitted at a designated place purely for the repair and under the supervision of an appointed Official and with suitable fire-fighting equipment at hand.

13.7. Replenishment materials are deemed to be: wheels, tyres, spark plugs, injectors, electrical components, water, oil, fuel, hydraulic fluids, hoses, fastening devices and items normally found at a normal road service station. Coachwork, body panels, window glass and exhaust systems (including turbocharger) shall be considered as replenishment materials.

13.8. Replenishment is permitted at the intermediate Stations .

13.9. Operations not permitted at Stations , may only be made by the Driver alone using the parts, tools and materials authorised for the Record Attempt .

13.10. Operations permitted outside of a Station or along the Course shall be those made by the Driver alone using the parts, materials and tools authorised for the Attempt and without any outside assistance.

13.11. Spare parts, auxiliary materials, tools and ballast carried on the Vehicle must be property positioned and firmly secured.

14. Records Over 10 Miles and Time Records

14.1. Except for replenishment materials, all spare parts and auxiliary materials not carried by the Vehicle shall be at the Main Station .

14.2. The equivalent total weight shall be carried by the Vehicle as ballast; the safety roll-over bar or cage (‘ROPS’) shall be considered as ballast.

14.3. The total weight of the spare parts, auxiliary materials, tools and ballast carried by the Vehicle shall not exceed 5% of the homologated or declared weight of the Vehicle , plus 20kg. The weight of the replenishment material is free.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 21 Appendix 1 - General Provisions 777

CHAPTER 21 LAND SPEED RECORDS Appendix 2 - FIA World, International and National Records

1. FIA World and International Records 1.1. Details are available on the FIA website.

National Records 2. Vehicles Eligible to Establish Records

2.1. Special Vehicles: Vehicles on at least four wheels not aligned, which are propelled otherwise than through their wheels.

2.2. Special Automobiles: A land Vehicle propelled by its own means, running on at least four wheels not aligned, which must always be in contact with the ground; the steering must be ensured by at least two of the wheels, and the propulsion by at least two of the wheels.

3. Groups, Classes & Cylinder Capacity 3.1. Group I: Reciprocating 2 or 4 stroke engine with forced induction 3.2. Group II: Reciprocating 2 or 4 stroke engine without forced induction 3.3. Group III: Diesel cycle engine with forced induction 3.4. Group IV: Diesel cycle engine without forced induction 3.5. Group V: Rotary engine with forced induction 3.6. Group VI: Rotary engine without forced induction 3.7. Group XV: Hydrogen reciprocating engine 3.8. Groups I & II: combined – with or without forced induction including Hybrid Vehicles 3.9. Groups III and IV: combined – with or without forced induction. 3.10. Class A: over 8000cc 3.11. Class B: over 5000cc up to 8000cc 3.12. Class C: over 3000cc up to 5000cc 3.13. Class D: over 2000cc up to 3000cc 3.14. Class E: over 1500cc up to 2000cc 3.15. Class F: over 1100cc up to 1500cc 3.16. Class G: over 750cc up to 1100cc 3.17. Class H: over 500cc up to 750cc 3.18. Class I: over 350cc up to 500cc 3.19. Class J: over 250c up to 350cc 3.20. Class K: up to 250cc 3.21. Group VIII: Electric Propulsion 3.22. Class 1: unloaded weight up to 500kg 3.23. Class 2: over 500kg up to 1000kg 3.24. Class 3: over 1000kg

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 21 Appendix 2 - FIA World, International and National Records 778

Car Rental

Airport Parking

AVIS

APH

Web: www.avis.co.uk

Tel: 01342 859536 Web: www.aph.com

Avis believe that car rental is about more than getting from A to B. It’s about the journey itself; the experiences you have along the way and the cars you can explore in. Rent a car with Avis and enjoy quality service anywhere you go.

Motorsport UK members receive great discounts off APH prices at all participating airport car parks throughout the UK .

Whether you want to visit the main attractions or find those hidden gems only accessible by car, with more than 5,000 car rental locations across the UK, Europe and worldwide, with Avis you truly can choose a more inspiring journey.

Automotive Destination

Bicester Heritage

The Station Armoury, Building 123, Buckingham Road, Bicester OX26 5HA

Charities

BRDC Motor Sport Charity

Tel: 01869 327 928 Email: hq@bicesterheritage.co.uk Web: www.bicesterheritage.co.uk

Web: www.brdc.co.uk / BRDC-Motor-Sport-Charity

Founded in 2000, the charity exists to support Members and people involved in the motor sport industry in times of need.

Based at the beautiful former RAF Bicester Bomber Station, Bicester Heritage is home to over forty specialist automotive businesses and represents the UK’s only Centre of Excellence for historic motoring enterprise. Operating as a business campus, it hosts regular events, offers film and photography location use and test track facilities.

The charity supports competitors, marshals, officers, employees at motorsport venues and those involved in the design, construction, testing, repair and supply of parts for vehicles intended for competition use.

Brakes

British Motorsport Trust

PROBITE

Web: https:// britishmotorsporttrust.org

Email: help@probite.co.uk Web: https://probite.co.uk

Creating a safer sport, empowering our people to perform at the highest level and providing them with the equipment and tools to succeed. Established in July 1977, The British Motorsport Trust was first registered as a UK Charity and has continued to serve the British motorsport ever since through a variety of safety and training related initiatives by means of a series of grant aid programmes.

Probite is a new British brand created from over 60 years of experience in braking and friction manufacture and run by a team of motorsport and vehicle enthusiasts right here in the UK. We specialise in the precision machining and rapid supply of performance brake discs, pads and accessories.

As official partners of the British Rally Championship, we will be working alongside Motorsport UK and BRC crews in a continued development of our braking products ensuring we can continue to offer the very best enhancements and innovations from professional motorsport to the thousands of fans and enthusiasts driving on Britain’s roads.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Directory 781

Control Fuels

We proudly supply control fuels to prestigious championships, including the BTCC, British F4, Porsche Carrera Cup, British Rally Championship, and British Kart Championship. Additionally, we support governing bodies and series managers with on-site fuel dispensing and analysis services, ensuring seamless operations and optimal performance.

Anglo American Oil Company

58 Holton Road, Holton Heath Trading Park, Poole, Dorset BH16 6LT

Control Systems

Tel: 01929 551557 Email: info@aaoil.co.uk Web: www.aaoil.co.uk

Moog

Ashchurch, Tewkesbury, Gloucestershire GL20 8TU

Anglo American Oil Company Ltd provides an excellent combination of service, quality and price of control fuels to championships.

Sunoco is the largest supplier of racing fuels to championships in the world, of which the most famous are NASCAR, NHRA and British GT. We have been supplying major championships in Europe since 2001 and can support small accounts, as well as large championships, with a personalised service of any type of high-performance fuel (unleaded and leaded petrol, GTL diesel and various blends of ethanol). We work closely with various championships to maximise each series marketing potential at the same time as we offer a comprehensive fuel testing service to assist technical scrutineers.

Tel: 01684 858000 Email: mjones@moog.com or browlinson@moog.com Web: www.moog.com/motorsport

Moog is an established actuation supplier to high end motor racing teams including Formula 1. In addition, high performance car manufacturers can also benefit from Moog technology to precisely control drive-train, chassis, braking, steering and advanced aerodynamic systems. Moog also supplies automotive test systems, and Level-D racing driver training simulators.

We also supply Driven Racing Oil and R racing brake fluids as well as PJ1 drag strip compound in Europe.

Dash Cams

Carless Racing Fuels

Nextbase

Grove House, Guildford Road, Leatherhead, Surrey KT22 9DF

Web : http://www.nextbase.co.uk

Nextbase is leading the way in innovation. Designed in the UK, its range of award-winning Dash Cams provides customers with the latest technology at their fingertips.

Email: mjardine@h-c-s-group.com Web: www.carlessracinfuels.com

Carless Racing fuels offer a comprehensive range of advanced racing and control fuels engineered for ultra-consistent, high performance. Our fuels meet the stringent regulations set by Motorsport UK, FIA, FIM, and CIK, ensuring reliability and compliance for motorsport competitors.

As a leader in sustainable fuel technology, Haltermann Carless has the capability to produce fuels that are up to 100% sustainable, showcasing our commitment to driving innovation in motorsport.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Directory 782

Data Logging

Driver Coaching

RACELOGIC - VBOX Motorsport

iZone

2255 Silverstone Technology Park, Silverstone Circuit, Silverstone, NN12 8GX

Unit 10, Swan Business Centre, Osier Way, Buckingham, MK18 1TB

Tel: 01327 856872 Web: https://www.izoneperformance.com/

Tel: 01280 823 803 Email: support@racelogic.co.uk Web: https://www.vboxmotorsport.co.uk/ index.php/en/motorsport-uk

iZone is Europe’s leading driver training facility, developed by triple World Touring Car Champion Andy Priaulx. We are an Elite Performance Centre, focused on the development of world class drivers, motorsport athletes and mentally-resilient competitors.

Racelogic make the VBOX Motorsport range of industry standard video data loggers used by thousands of drivers and coaches looking for improvement in performance; and race series organisers for making accurate and timely stewards’ decisions. Designed to be used by anyone – without needing to be a race engineer.

Our state-of-the-art facility features:

• 3 x High-tech simulators - used for coaching

• 3 x Training simulators - used for race craft, training and drills

• Motorsport gym – For driver specific fitness training

MyRaceLab

• Studio – for Yoga, boxing and circuit training

• Sports lab – for Fitness assessments

• Drivers room – for Personal study and relaxation

• Boardroom – for Group training seminars

Web: https://www.myracelab.com/

MyRaceLab offers cutting-edge data analytics tools and personalised insights, empowering drivers and karters to optimise their performance on the track, through accessing their own ‘pocket pit crew’ via the MyRaceLab app.

Motorsport Biomechanics

Email: michael@ motorsportbiomechanics.com Web: www.motorsportbiomechanics.com/

Users can break down their laps into sectors, turns and straights, allowing for measurements and comparisons during sessions, while also comparing results against previous sessions. The innovative software enables drivers to explore different ways to improve their overall racing performance.

Motorsport Biomechanics is a unique business, they are the first to offer biomechanical data to assess muscle activity, to improve driver performance and technique in any form of Motorsport whilst racing on the track. Motorsport Biomechanics collects valuable muscle activity data and this data will help drivers and teams to improve performance.

Your Data Driven

Web: https://www.yourdatadriven.com

Learn to drive faster and set-up your car with confidence. Motorsports is complicated enough. YourDataDriven explains it in plain English. Get raceproven insights, insider secrets and practical tutorials to improve your performance. Podcasts, how-to articles, courses, spreadsheets, and the latest from the Your Data Driven Academy.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Directory 783

Electronics

Apex Racing League

Web: http://www.apexracingleague.com

CARTEK

Cartek Automotive Electronics Ltd, Unit 25 Mitchell Point, Ensign Way, Southampton, SO31 4RF

Baseline Driver Training

Web: http://www. baselinedrivertraining.com

Email: info@cartekmotorsport.com Web: cartekmotorsport.com

Coach Dave Academy

Web: https://www. coachdaveacademy.com/

CARTEK has been manufacturing electronic equipment for the motorsport industry since 2002. Our first innovation was the development of a fully electronic battery master switch for use in race and rally cars. CARTEK is now a recognised brand and major supplier of specialised equipment with a constantly expanding product range.

iRacing is one of the most competitive online experiences in the world. It goes beyond sim racing. It’s the most realistic, the most competitive, the biggest races.

With thousands of players competing every day, gaining the competitive edge is difficult. Sure, you can download a setup from one of the popular shops, but when everyone is using the same setup, how do you differentiate? How do you find that extra tenth of a second?

Engine Control Units

Link ECU

Link Engine Management (UK) Limited Liverpool Science Park Innovation Centre One 131 Mount Pleasant Liverpool, L3 5TF

At Coach Dave Academy we take a different approach with setups. We don’t just seek out the best drivers with the highest iRatings but go the extra mile by pairing our drivers with qualified race engineers who work with their driver to develop setups that are not only good for one lap but also entire race stints.

Email: ukorders@linkecu.com Web: linkecu.com

Link Engine Management is a global leader in motorsport electronics and performance technology. We specialise in the development, manufacture and marketing of engine control units (ECUs) built to manage motorsport and powersport vehicles

iRacing

Web: www.iracing.com

Motorsport UK Esports has partnered with iRacing and can now offer all paying esports members an exclusive 12-Month subscription to iRacing PLUS the FIA F4 car for free.

Esports

The membership comes with 19 unique vehicles and 25 tracks, including Oulton Park. PLUS the FIA F4 car that is not usually included.

Apex Racing Academy

Web: https://apexracingac.com

IMB RACEWEAR

Apex Racing Academy isn’t just a setup shop. We are dedicated to making you better at iRacing with services, access to drivers and features not found on other driving schools and academies. Working with us will see you connecting with Pros like never before. We are the only development team that can boast about producing over 10 iRacing World Championship Series drivers from our Academy.

Web: http://www.imbracewear.com

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Directory 784

SimGrid

Z1 RaceTech

Web: https://www.z1racetech.com/

Web: http://www.thesimgrid.com

SimGrid is a place for amateur and professional sim racers to compete against fellow drivers in leagues and endurance events. Founded by Blancpain GT World Champion and Ferrari GT Customer Racing Driver David Perel, it serves drivers on ACC, iRacing, rFactor 2, Gran Turismo 7 and F1 22.

Sim Rig Support

Web: https://simrigsupport.com/

Experiences

PRO SIMRIG

Silverstone Interactive Museum

Web: https://www.prosimrig.com

Silverstone Circuit, Towcester, Northamptonshire, NN12 8TN

SDK Gaming

Web: http://www.sdkgaming .co.uk

Tel: 03339 999886 Web: www.silverstone-experience.co.uk

The most accurate live timing software available for iRacing taps into the power of the SDK. Display a detailed timing screen on a second screen, integrate an overlay into your race screen or display an overlay on your Twitch stream all displaying live information!

The Silverstone Interactive Museum is an immersive visitor attraction that celebrates the past, present and future of Silverstone and British motor racing. Over 60 hands-on exhibits give visitors the opportunity to try out a variety of activities – from operating a wind tunnel, taking part in a pit stop and climbing into a replica Grand Prix car.

UK Sim Racing

Web: http://www. uksimracing.co.uk

Ferry Travel

Venym

DFDS

Web: https://www.venym.com

Email: Travel.sales@ dfds.com Web: www.dfds.com/ en-gb/passenger-ferries

Venym was born on the Nevers-Magny-Cours circuit, heart of motorsport in France, by an enthusiasts team supported by Mygale and its 30 years of experience in automobile competition. Venym is the assurance of high performance equipment, tested and approved by the greatest drivers and designed by automotive engineers specialized in competition. Our Venym pedals (aluminum and carbon) dedicated to sim racing are the first pedals designed in France inspired by the design and technologies used in F1 cockpits.

DFDS is a World Leading ferry operator, providing ferry travel across Europe to destinations including France and Holland.

NUTT Travel in partnership with Stena Line

F33L

Tel: 028 7035 1199 Web: www.nutttravel.com

Web: https://www.f33l.gg/

Based in Northern Ireland, Nutt Travel pride themselves on providing a fast and friendly service at very competitive

Abruzzi

prices. They provide a personal service where clients can talk to experienced staff who will tailor their package to best meet their requirements. Motorsport UK is pleased to offer members exclusive deals on ferry crossings and

Web: https://abruzzi-official. co.uk/

accommodation.

FHR Systems

PD Extinguishers

Revidge Fold, Revidge Road, Blackburn, Lancashire, BB1 8DJ

Schroth Racing

Email: germany@ eu.schroth.com Web: www.schroth.com

Tel: 01254 954954 Email: chris@pdextinguishers.co.uk Web: www.pdexitnguishers.co.uk

SCHROTH Racing is a leading supplier of lightweight harnesses, FHR devices and related safety equipment worldwide! SCHROTH supplies to all levels of racing, including F1, DTM, IndyCar Series, WRC, NASCAR, WTCC, Dakar Rally, FIA GT and other racing series around the world as well as supplying OEMs such as Porsche, Audi, Lamborghini, Lotus, Bugatti and Mercedes AMG.

PD Extinguishers was started by regular rally competitor, organiser and scrutineer, Chris Woodcock concerned that a 10 year life on Extinguishers was another cost barrier to competitors. All PD Extinguishers Stainless Steel systems have a 16 year life due to their high tensile strength and corrosion resistance. After an 18 month program of development testing and certification, he has now attained FIA homologation on 2 systems using aerospace grade AFFF and 3M Novec1230 both available with mechanical and electronic activation, along with a range of hand helds to meet all requirements.

Visit www.schroth.com/racing to see why SCHROTH is the fastest growing manufacturer in high quality racing and performance restraints! FIA and/or ECE approvals on all models.

Fire Extinguishers

FEV Fire Supression

Food

Unit B3 Ford Airfield Industrial Estate, Ford Nr Arundel, West Sussex BN18 0HY

tastecard

Web: https://www. tastecard.co.uk/

Tel: 0044 (0)1243 555566 Email: sales@f-e-v.co.uk Web: www.f-e-v.co.uk

tastecard, enjoy more for less!

Tuck into 2 for 1 meals or 25% off food and drink at big name chains such as Beefeater, Prezzo, Burger King, Krispy Kreme and more plus 1000s of local independent restaurants. You can also now save on cinema tickets at 350+ venues nationwide and discounted days out at the UK’s top attractions.

Established 30 years ago, FEV Fire Suppression manufacture high quality fire suppression systems and products for the motorsport industry. Using the very best advancements and developments in technology, our comprehensive range of systems are all homologated to FIA Technical Lists 16, 52 or 97. All systems and handheld extinguishers are designed and developed ensuring performance, weight and space requirements are exceeded. We are chosen suppliers to top level motorsport including F1, F2, FIA GT, Rally and WEC and we take pride in supporting racers and teams with an extensive product range to help them perform at their best and with unparalleled safety in every situation.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Directory 786

Fuel Analysis

Anglo American Oil Company Ltd provides an excellent combination of service, quality and price of control fuels to championships. Sunoco is the largest supplier of racing fuels to championships in the world, of which the most famous are NASCAR, NHRA and British GT. We have been supplying major championships in Europe since 2001 and can support small accounts, as well as large championships, with a personalised service of any type of high-performance fuel (unleaded and leaded petrol, GTL diesel and various blends of ethanol). We work closely with various championships to maximise each series marketing potential at the same time as we offer a comprehensive

Carless Racing Fuels

Grove House, Guildford Road, Leatherhead, Surrey KT22 9DF

fuel testing service to assist technical scrutineers. We also supply Driven Racing Oil and R racing brake fluids as well as PJ1 drag strip compound in Europe

Carless Racing Fuels

Tel: 07900 743329 Email: astuart@h-c-s-group.com Web: www.carlessracinfuels.com

Grove House, Guildford Road, Leatherhead, Surrey KT22 9DF

Tel: 07900 743329 Email: astuart@h-c-s-group.com Web: www.carlessracinfuels.com

As a leader in sustainable fuel technology, Haltermann Carless has the capability to produce fuels that are up to 100% sustainable, showcasing our commitment to driving innovation in motorsport.

Fuels

Anglo American Oil Company

58 Holton Road, Holton Heath Trading Park, Poole, Dorset, BH16 6LT

WEX

Tel: 01929 551557 Email: info@aaoil.co.uk Web: www.aaoil.co.uk

Web: www. wexeuropeservices .com/ en-gb

A fuel card is a convenient way to pay for petrol, diesel, and other fuels at filling stations. Rather than paying with cash, credit card or cheque, the driver hands over the fuel card instead.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Directory 787

Garage Equipment Hotels

Lista

Bicester Hotel Golf & Spa

14 Warren Yard Warren Farm Office Village Wolverton Mill, Milton Keynes MK12 5NW

Green Lane, Chesterton, Bicester, Oxfordshire OX26 1TH

Tel: 01908 222 333 Email: david.kendall@lista.com Web: www.lista.com

Tel: 01869 241204 Web: www.bicesterhotelgolfandspa.com

Bicester Hotel, Golf and Spa is a stunning 4-star resort set in the rural countryside of Oxfordshire, the resort offers 2 state-of-the-art gyms, an indoor swimming pool, a hydro spa, Elemis Spa, floodlit tennis courts, outdoor swimming lake, outdoor assault course and over 65 fitness classes every week.

Lista are the leaders for drawer cabinets, workbenches and general storage in the global motorsport market. From race bays to a simple tool box, we can accommodate every requirement. We offer a complete design, supply and installation solution. Please contact us for a quotation to suit every budget.

Insurance

Helmets

Adrian Flux

Zamp

East Winch Hall, East Winch, Kings Lynn, PE32 1HN

Tel: 01625 586660 Web: http://www. zamphelmets.eu

Zamp Helmets are the fastest growing brand in motorsport. Born out of a demand for high quality yet reasonably priced motorsport equipment. Zamp combines cutting edge designs and leading safety standards to provide the ultimate driving experience.

Tel: 0800 085 6186 Email: contact-us@adrianflux.co.uk Web: www.adrianflux.co.uk/motorsport

As the UK’s largest specialist insurance broker, Adrian Flux have policies to suit all areas of Motorsport including track day, trailer, race and rally vehicle, transporter and motorcycle. We also offer discounts for club membership of up to 15% so get in contact today for all of your insurance requirements.

Zamp offers a range of motorsport and karting helmets that boast incredible quality at a hugely competitive price. FIA, SNELL and CMR helmets available with a range of fantastic accessories and visors.

Howden

Web: www. howdeninsurance.co.uk

Howden is the new name for A-Plan. We do insurance differently. We’re not about off-the-shelf, one-sizefits-all insurance. We do people-first insurance, understanding the specifics of your insurance needs and match them with the insurer that’s best placed to provide that cover, at the right price. Personal, tailored, great value cover.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Directory 788

Grove & Dean

Reis Motorsport Insurance

96 Market Place Romford, Essex, RM1 3ER

Unit 4 Wheatcroft Business Park, Landmere Lane, Edwalton, Nottingham NG12 4DG

Tel: +44 (0)1708 606768 Web: www.grove-dean-motorsport.com

One of Europe’s premier on-track insurers for GT, Sports and Single Seater motorsport. Covering individuals and teams in the UK, Europe and Internationally, our tailor-made products include On-Track/Track Day Cover, Personal Accident, Team Commercial insurance, Storage & Transit and Liability Cover for motor racing events and meetings. Discounts available for multiple events and annual policies, and our dedicated team guarantee a personal service. With 40 years’ experience and extensive knowledge of motorsport, we understand what makes a great motorsport policy. Add to this our competitive premiums and first-class Claims Service and you’ll appreciate why so many customers use our service.

Tel: 0115 965 1040 Email: contact@reis.co.uk Web: www.reis.co.uk

At Reis, motorsport is not only our business, it’s also our passion. As a specialist insurance broker, our knowledgeable team can arrange tailored policies for competitors, teams and enthusiasts at all levels. We can cover competition, classic, kit and sports cars, as well as commercial schemes for business and event organisers.

Ryan Motorsport Insurance

150 Minories, Suite 609, London, EC3N 1LS

Marsh Sport

Marsh Sport, The Paragon, 32-36 Victoria Street, Bristol, BS1 6BX

Tel: +44 (0)1799 524202 Web: www.ryanmi.com

Ryan Motorsport Insurance provides a comprehensive solution for all your motorsport insurance needs. Our website enables you to complete an online quote request form based on the cover you require, and to pay online at a time convenient for you. Our products include – Cover for race and rally cars whilst competing at UK/worldwide events, Personal Accident for drivers and teams, track day cover, liability coverage for events and meetings, storage and transit insurance for vehicles and equipment. Single events quoted. Discounts available for multiple event/ annual policies. With more than 25 years of experience within the motorsport insurance business and having competed in various race and rally championships, managing director Ryan Mone has an extensive knowledge and understanding of the insurance requirements for individuals, companies and teams alike. With the assistance

Tel:0345 872 5060 Web: marshsport.co.uk

Marsh Sport is a specialist division of Marsh Ltd with dedicated teams across the UK offering insurance broking and risk management advice to the world of sport. Dealing with a specialist insurance adviser helps to ensure that your specific risks and exposures are covered.

As the appointed broker to Motorsport UK we can provide a range of products and services to suit your needs including, on track accident damage, motor trade, personal accident , property, event liabilities, storage & transit, event cancellation and contractual bonus.

of a dedicated and knowledgeable team of staff we endeavour to provide you with the highest possible levels of service, combined with competitive premiums.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Directory 789

Karting

Lubricants

Anglo American Oil Company

KartSim

Web: https://www.kartsim .com/

58 Holton Road, Holton Heath Trading Park, Poole, Dorset BH16 6LT

KartSim manufacturer the most realistic professional karting simulators available on the market, along with market leading karting simulation and training software. We use our hardware and software platforms to host elite-level esports events, offer professional coaching at our state-of-the-art facility in Silverstone, and travel to events in our Mobile Sim Centre. More recently we have began offering on-track coaching days, allowing for customer ’s to smoothly transition what they have learnt on our simulators into the real world of kart racing. Contact us today to purchase one of our hardware or software packages, or to book a coaching session with us!

Tel: 01929 551557 Email: info@aaoil.co.uk Web: www.aaoil.co.uk

Anglo American Oil Company Ltd was founded in 1999 to supply high performance quality oils and racing fuels to the racing industry. Our modern blending plant and warehouse facilities are ideally situated to quickly dispatch specialist lubricants on a next day service. We represent Driven Racing Oil and R racing brake fluids in Europe. Our wide range of products and excellent technical knowledge mean that we can cater for any oil related query. We also distribute on an exclusive basis Sunoco and R racing fuels in Europe and the Middle East and are the official fuel of many UK and European championships. In addition to the racing oils and fuels we are the exclusive distributor of PJ1 track compound in Europe. PJ1 (formerly VHT) is a must for all drag racing strips for ultimate grip off the start line.

TeamSport

Web: https://www.teamsport .co.uk/

TeamSport are the UK’s largest indoor karting company and provider for the British Indoor Karting Championship (BIKC). Their mission is to provide customers with the ultimate indoor karting experience; racing the best karts on exciting multi-level tracks. It all started for TeamSport back in 1992 in Guildford, Surrey when they opened their first track. They now have 36 centres across the UK including Birmingham, London, Brighton, Cardiff, Leeds, Newcastle and Manchester.

Motorhomes

Signature Motorhomes

Signature Motorhomes LTD, Cannock Road, Westcroft, Wolverhampton, WV10 8QU

Tel: 01902 725 394 Web: https://www.signaturemotorhomes.com/

We are the go-to American Motorhome dealer in the whole of Europe. Serving the Motorsport industry for over 30 years, offering Service, Sales & RV Management to any American RV. If you’re after a motorhome 25ft or 39ft we have you covered, contact us today for more details.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Directory 790

Motorsport Race Circuits

Silverstone Circuit

Silverstone Circuit, Towcester, NN12 8TN

Castle Combe

Castle Combe Circuit, Chipenham, Wiltshire, SN14 7EY

Tel: 0844 3750740 Web: www.silverstone.co.uk

The home of British motor racing.

Tel: 01249 782417 Web: www.castlecombecircuit.co.uk

Motosport Merchandise

Castle Combe Circuit is The West Country’s home of motorsport that’s been welcoming fans of racing, car shows and events for over 65 years.

Grandstand Merchandise

Unit 4, Chalker Way, Banbury, Oxfordshire, OX16 4XD

Knockhill Racing Circuit

Dunfirmline, Fife, KY12 9TF

Tel: 01869 337554 Web: www.grandstandmerchandise.com

Tel: 01383 723337 Web: www.knockhill.co.uk

Grandstand are the premier motorsport merchandise destination for authentic team replica clothing and accessories for Formula One, WEC, WRC and sports cars.

Knockhill Racing Circuit, Scotland’s National Motorsport Centre, are pleased to offer Motorsport UK members discounts on race tickets, driving experiences and more.

Motosport Products

Llandow

ACES

Llandow, Cowbridge, Vale of Glamorgan, CF71 7PB

26 Gainsborough Drive, Lawford, Manningtree, Essex, CO11 2JU

Tel: 01446 796460 Email: info@llandow.com Web: www.llandow.com

Tel: 01206 395324 Email: sales@aceserve.co.uk Web: www.aceserve.co.uk

Situated just 20 minutes west of Cardiff, Llandow Circuit is a privately owned and family run venue with a flexible approach and a ‘can do’ attitude. This makes it the perfect venue for all types of motor related events including car and bike testing, track dates, sprints and exclusive hire. Llandow is a technically challenging tarmac circuit 1450m long and 9m wide with smooth tarmac surface and a good selection of corners. It has a Motorsport UK National B Sprint Licence. It is the perfect venue for corporate hospitality events with a neighbouring Motorsport UK Karting centre together with a caravan and camp site.

Designers and manufacturers of high-quality innovative products aimed at the motor sport driver and enthusiast, which includes the SureShift2, a fully featured, high-precision multistage shiftlight with intelligent max rpm tell-tale.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Directory 791

Oil

AiM Shop

Unit 8 Riverside, Campbell Road, Stoke-On-Trent, Staffordshire, ST4 4RJ

Carless Racing Fuels

Grove House, Guildford Road, Leatherhead, Surrey, KT22 9DF

Tel: +44 01782 393843 Web: https://www.aimshop.com/

AiM Shop provides racers with GPS lap timers, data loggers, dash displays, onboard cameras, sensors and more. Our products are used by motorsport pros and hobbyists across the globe to improve driving and engine performance to gain an edge over their competition to win more races.

Tel: 07966 437566 Email: astuart@h-c-s-group.com Web: www.carlessracinfuels.com

Grand Prix Racewear

Unit 1, Silverstone Park, Silverstone Circuit, Northamptonshire, NN12 8TN

As a leader in sustainable fuel technology, Haltermann Carless has the capability to produce fuels that are up to 100% sustainable, showcasing our commitment to driving innovation in motorsport.

Tel: 01327 855585 Web: www.grandprixracewear.com

Grand Prix Racewear have been selling the best of race and kartwear for over 30 years. Founded in 1987 and based at Silverstone Circuit, the home of British motor racing, the company, having recently been acquired, is embarking on an exciting new phase in its development.

Precision Engineering

Venture Engineering

Unit 7 Tungsten Park, Colletts Way, Witney, OX29 0AX

Tel: 01451 810621 Email: info@ventureengineering.co.uk Web: ventureengineering.co.uk

At Venture, we provide cutting-edge engineering skills and expertise to our clients globally. Realisation of any project from fabrication of parts for the latest Formula One car, to designing and manufacturing prototype components for a green energy storage system – and anything in between.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Directory 792

Rally Plates/Signs

Halfords are pleased to offer Motorsport UK members a discount off anything in store. Halfords has over 460 stores nationwide offering more than 15,000 different product lines, from car parts and cycles through to the latest in-car technology, child seats, roof boxes and outdoor leisure and camping equipment, Halfords has it all! kit, tried and tested by passionate outdoor experts so you can make the most of every moment spent out there. So, whatever your next adventure looks like, Cotswold Outdoor ’s experts are on hand to make sure it’s your greatest yet.

Eventsigns Ltd.

Unit 6, Poplar Drive, Witton, Birmingham B6 7AD

OGIO

Tel: 0800 026 4653 Web: https://eu.ogio.com

Tel: 0121 344 3141 Email: vaughan@eventsigns.co.uk Web: www.eventsigns.co.uk

OGIO has a long-standing history in motorsport creating products that provide both great functionality, innovative designs and technology to support any motorsport fan on the go. As a brand specialising in creating high performance luggage and travel gear it is ideally placed to support the general race goer for a day trip out to the hardened racing fan that takes in every race meeting.

We have over 30 years experience supplying signage to motorsport events. Eventsigns can supply all the signage and promotional material you may require for your next event: Rallyplates/Hi viz Correx arrows/ stage boards/safety signs and numbers/ stickers. Eventsigns can also supply signage for exhibitions and promotional events: portable pop up banner systems/printed wallpaper/graphics/PVC banners/ pull up banners/Start and Finish gantries. Vaughan is also a Motorsport UK international rally and national speed timekeeper. We can supply all the timekeeping equipment required for your rally or sprint event. Please contact Vaughan to discuss any requirements you may need.

Runners Need

Web: https://www. runnersneed.com/

The Running Specialists.

Runners Need believe that every run should be a great one. Whatever your goals, they are here to help you reach them with great products from the best running brands and friendly, expert in-store service. Every great run begins with the right shoe, which is why Runners Need offer free gait analysis and expert shoe fitting in every store.

Retail

Halfords

Web: www.halfords.com

But Runners Need is about more than just the shoes. They are passionate about providing the latest innovations in performance fabrics, high-tech gadgets and accessories, training and nutrition science, all tailored to your fitness goals. Whenever and however you run, their range is versatile to suit your lifestyle, be it on the road, in the gym or at home. So, whatever gets you moving, Runners Need are here to help you every step of the way.

Cotswold Outdoor

Web: https://www. cotswoldoutdoor.com/

The UK’s Widest Range of Outdoor Clothing and Equipment

Cotswold Outdoor have been preparing people to discover the great outdoors for over 40 years, offering clothing, equipment and accessories from the very best outdoor brands. Anyone can find you the best kit, but only Cotswold Outdoor can find you the right

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Directory 793

Safety Devices International Ltd.

Snow+Rock

Web: https://www. snowandrock.com/

Cambridge House, Holborn Avenue, Mildenhall, Suffolk IP28 7AN

United by Attitude.

Founded by a small team of crazy snow sport enthusiasts, Snow+Rock are all about pushing boundaries, breaking rules, never compromising. Pioneers from the beginning, Snow+Rock champion the very best popular and up-and-coming ski brands to bring customers unrivalled premium products, guaranteed to perform every time.

Tel: 01638 713606 Email: motorsport@safetydevices.com

With the latest CAD, CMM and laser scanning technology in house, Safety Devices continue to lead the rollover protection industry after almost 50 years. From historic marques through to latest generation vehicles, Safety Devices produce Europe’s largest range of roll cages with over 500 current designs and a back-catalogue of 2000+. Reputed for exceptional design standards, you can be confident your cage will be made from quality materials and be an excellent fit. Most designs meet Motorsport UK/FIA regulations. Find your cage using our website’s roll cage selector and buy through our dealer network. For bespoke work, contact us direct.

Back in 1985, Snow+Rock introduced the UK’s first Boot Fit Clinic and have been delivering nothing but top-drawer service ever since. Ski boot fitting, custom insole fabrication and expert advice born from experience – find it all at Snow+Rock. See you out there.

Roll Bars/Cages

Caged Laser Engineering (SW) Ltd.

Seatbelts

Unit 12, Ash Farm Business Park, Radstock. BA3 5EX

Schroth Racing

Email: germany@ eu.schroth.com Web: www.schroth.com

Tel: 01761 239133 Email: Alvin@cagedlaser.co.uk Web: www.cagedlaser.co.uk

SCHROTH Racing is a leading supplier of lightweight harnesses, head and neck devices and related safety equipment worldwide! SCHROTH supplies to all levels of racing, including F1, DTM, IRL, WRC, NASCAR, WTCC, Dakar Rally, FIA GT and racing series around the world as well as supplying to OEMs such as Porsche, Audi, Lamborghini, Lotus, Bugatti, AMG, and Radical! Patented technology includes our lightweight rotary buckle, SlipStop System for head and neck devices and our Hybrid harnesses design.

Caged Laser Engineering (SW) Ltd is an automotive supply chain manufacturer capable of supporting one-off bespoke applications through to large scale production runs. Based in the southwest of England near Bath, we specialise in end to end fabrication of tubular, sheet metal and various steel sections, with vast experience in aluminium, mild steel, stainless steel and titanium. Supported by an in-house CAD design service, a suite of CNC machines (laser, press brake, tube bender, mill and lathe), a team of experience TIG and MIG welders and a powder coating painting facility, we can help.

Visit www.schroth.com/racing to see why SCHROTH is the fastest growing manufacturer in high quality racing and performance restraints! FIA and/or ECE approvals on all models.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Directory 794

Seats

Schroth Profi Seat

Web: www.schroth. com

Corbeau Seats Ltd.

With our worldwide name already established in motor racing safety the SCHROTH Racing Profi Seat brings extra benefits to every racing driver in any car. Our reputation is built on quality and unrivaled experience, which we are proud to say extends to our SCHROTH Racing Profi Seat. The SCHROTH Racing Profi Seat is racing´s best individual seat solution. Make your own customized seat insert!

17 Wainwright Close, East Sussex, TN38 9PP

Tel: 01424 854499 Email: sales@corbeau-seats.com Web: www.corbeau-seats.com

Established 60 years ago making us the first ever manufacturer in the world to produce competition racing seats. Corbeau today is still at the cutting edge of technical development where Safety, style and comfort are key attributes. Corbeau has a full range of FIA 8855-1999 and FIA 8862-2009 seats to suit most disciplines in motorsport all manufactured in our UK facility. The full range are all FHR compatible and are available in either GRP, Kevlar and Carbon. Our FIA 8862-2009 Predator SV 4 Point and 6-point GT are produced in Pre-preg Carbon and come with a 10-year FIA homologation. Check out our full range of Corbeau FIA 8853-2016 harnesses LAUNCHING in January 2022 the latest FIA 8855-2021 specification seat, will be available in four sizes.

Subscriptions

Autocourse Annual

Web: https://www. iconpublishinglimited. com/collections/ autocourse

AUTOCOURSE provides the most comprehensive record of the year ’s sporting action, complete with results, published anywhere in a single volume. It is required reading for motorsport fans the world over.

Motordrive Seats

Haynes Manuals

Unit 30, Tomlinson Road Business Park, Leyland, Lancashire, PR25 2DY

Haynes Publishing, Sparkford, Yeovil, Somerset, BA22 7JJ, United Kingdom

Tel: +44 (0) 1206 256101 Web: https://haynes.com/en-gb/

Tel: 01772 624024 Email: info@motordrive.com Web: www.motordrive.com

The creator of the world-famous Owner ’s Workshop Manual offers a huge range of car and motorcycle repair manuals, with step-by-step guidance to complete each job. Most titles are now available in online formats, including video tutorials, colour pictures and interactive fault-finding tools.

Motordrive design and manufacture award winning, world class FIA motorsport seats. The UK based motordrive team are themselves competitors and can share their expertise to help you choose a motorsport seat that is right for you. The motordrive brand promises exceptional quality, safety and service. Whether in person, by phone or email you can access advice before choosing a seat or you can visit the showroom for a custom fitting so that your seat is tailored to you for safety, comfort and improved performance behind the wheel. Choose from classic seats to buy on line or get in touch directly for a conversation.

Aside from hands-on guides, Haynes publishes an extensive selection of books on motorsport, military, aviation, maritime, history, food, Star Wars and more. This includes Haynes Explains, a range of parody books on the eponymous manual format, and Bluffers Guides - the fastest way to learn quickly and sound like an expert on any subject.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Directory 795

Suspension

Octane

Web: www.subscribe. octane-magazine.com

Proflex

Welcome to the wonderful world of classic cars. Octane is the premium monthly magazine celebrating over 100 years of automotive design, from classic Bentleys to the latest BMW.

Revidge Fold Garage, Revidge Road, Blackburn, Lancashire, BB1 8DJ

Email: sales@proflexuk.com Web: www.proflexuk.com

Motorsport Magazine

Renowned for quality and performance, we are the number one choice of some of the best drivers and teams in the world across all disciplines of the sport. Our shock absorbers are beautifully engineered and manufactured to the highest of standards, being designed to reliably perform again and again under the most extreme rallying and race conditions.

18-20 Rosemont Road, London NW3 6NE

Tel: 02073 498484 Web: www.motorsportmagazine.com

The voice of authority on Formula 1, MotoGP, sports cars, historic motor sport and all other forms of racing.

Tools

Readly

Wera Tools

Web: www.gb.readly. com/motorsport

Web: www.wera-tools. co.uk

Readly is the UK’s largest digital newsstand, with more than 7,500 magazines and newspapers all available for unlimited reading!

Wera Tools is a global tools’ specialist that firmly believes its tools make life simpler, safer and ‘full of joy’ for users.

Read more of what you love, with the latest issues of What Car?, Top Gear Magazine, Auto Express, and many more. Or delve into the archive and find out more about classic sports cars, the cars of the Eastern Bloc, or the world’s greatest ever motorbikes

Track Days

Opentrack Events Ltd.

The Intercooler

45 Jeavons Lane, Great Cambourne, Cambridge CB23 6AF, UK

Web: http://www. the-intercooler.com/ subscribe/

The Intercooler (Ti) is a groundbreaking ad-free digital car magazine offering subscribers the best motoring journalism from the world’s greatest team of automotive writers, designers and engineers. Ti delivers beautifully written, timeless stories every day of the working week in the most modern and convenient form possible.

Tel: 01954 710 911 Web: www.opentrack.co.uk

Established in 2008, Opentrack considers itself as one of the most passionate track day companies in the UK and is offering Motorsport UK members 10% off their events. Run by Dave Woodall, who states his sole aim is making sure drivers have a great time on his events with safe, high quality track time, be it a evening at Brands Hatch or a full day at Spa.

Subscribers can access a library of over 1000 stories about cars and driving, reviews of the most important new models and stories that deliver unique insight into the car industry and motor racing world.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Directory 796

Tyres

Trusted suppliers of Michelin, Pirelli, Hoosier, Kuhmo V70A and Yokohama A048 motorsport tyres.

Sole UK Supplier of Hoosier Rally Tyres and Michelin Competition Tyres.

Nankang Tyre UK

1 SGC Business Park, Oldbury Road, West Bromwich, West Midlands, B70 9DP

Specialist rates for affiliates.

Largest stock of Ultra High Performance and Rally tyres in UK.

Fully equipped mobile workshop for track day tyre fittings.

Tel: 0121 5005010 Email: jamie@nankangtyre.co.uk Web: www.nankangtyre.co.uk

Contact: Shaun Chetwyn, Protyre Motorsport Manager

Nankang motorsport tyres have race proven track performance. The AR-1 and NS-2R have been selected by multiple championships as control tyres and by numerous open tyre series.

Kumho Tyre

Suite 6 Hilton House, Corporation St, Rugby, CV21 2DN

Pirelli Tyres Ltd.

Derby Road, Burton-on-Trent, DE13 0BH

Tel: 01788 820200 Email: mark.hamnett@kumhotire.com Web: https://www.kumhotire.com/uk/

Tel: 01283 525252 Web: www.pirelli.co.uk

Kumho Tyre has a long and successful history of supplying tyres for circuit racing, rallying, hill climbing, rallycross and track days. Please contact us for further information on our current range and stocklists.

Motorsport UK have formed a new partnership with Pirelli Tyres, meaning all members can now benefit from an exclusive offer from Pirelli. Pirelli’s recognised link to motorsport has seen the introduction of many motorsport innovations into its consumer products, always ensuring high levels of performance and safety.

Tyre Warmers

M.A. Horne Ltd.

For more information, log-on to the Motorsport UK member portal, or visit Pirelli.co.uk/msuk

Unit 9, Enterprise Park, Ebblake Industrial Estate, Verwood, Dorset, BH31 6YS

Protyre

Govan Road, Fenton Industrial Estate, Stoke-on-Trent ST4 2RS

Tel: 01202 822770 Email: mark@m-a-horne.co.uk Web: www.m-a-horne.co.uk

Tel: 01782 411 001 Web: http://www.protyre.co.uk/motorsport

Supplier to Formula 1 champions since 1985. Formula 1: Williams, Ferrari, Renault F1, McLaren, Red Bull Racing, Mercedes F1, Force India F1, BMW F1, Super Aguri. Sole supplier to Indy Racing League, Earls Indy, Rally Worldwide. Touring: German Super Tourers, Touring Cars Worldwide, A1 GP. Motorcycles: Suzuki GP, Suzuki British Superbikes, Sert Suzuki Endurance Team, Honda, K Roberts, Team Rainey, Kawasaki, Marlboro-Yamaha, Ducati Superbikes.

Whether you are a top championship contender or a track day star we’ve got the best choice, best price and best availability of tyres to suit your racing needs.

Official race championship tyre service providers for The Protyre Motorsport UK Asphalt Rally Championship, MSV British F3, British GT, Porsche, Renault and Ginetta.

Principle suppliers of Pirelli Trofero R; Toyo R888R.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Directory 797

Wheels

Speedline Corse

SL Corse Ltd, Haybrook Industrial Estate, Telford TF7 4QW UK

Tel: 01952 582825 Email: info@speedlinecorse.co.uk Web: www.speedlinecorse.net

The Strength of Experience. The specialist motorsport division of one of the World’s premier wheel manufacturers, Speedline Corse’s advanced production processes, including our unique flow forming technology, have enabled us to supply premium racing and rally wheels for leading motorsport teams and car manufacturers since 1975. Speedline Corse customers have won 83 FIA sanctioned world championship titles to date as well as countless national and regional championships across the globe.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Directory 798

Motorsport UK NCR 2026 #11 | LISTA STORAGE SOLUTIONS FOR MOTORSPORT

LISTA STORAGE SOLUTIONS FOR MOTORSPORT

CHAPTER 13 RALLY Appendix 23 - Rally Drawings

10 Metre Minimum

100m

10 Metre Minimum

100m

100m

10 Metre Minimum

Minimum 2.13m

100m

100m

100m

ARROW ANGLES & POSITIONS

Block ~ 200m

20m

10m 10m

10m

Block >20m

CHAPTER 13 RALLY Appendix 24 - Class Requirements

1. Stage Rally Class Structures

1.1. All Stage Rallies must use the Class structure detailed in Chart 50 . Events may choose to utilise all, or some, or amalgamate the Classes but must not deviate from the list.

Chart 50

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 24 - Class Requirements 529

SUGGESTED AMALGAMATIONS (Lowest class number takes precedence when outlining Classes)

Classes 1, 2 & 4 Classes 5, 6 & 7 Classes 8 & 9 Classes 10, 11, 12 & 13 Classes 3, 14, 15 and 16 are not to be amalgamated if used

Classes H1 (a) & H1 Classes H2, H3 & H4 Classes H5, H6 & H7 Classes H9, H10, H11 Classes H14, H15 & H16

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 13 Appendix 24 - Class Requirements 530

E

CHAPTER 18 KART RACING Appendix 9 - Kart Race Technical Drawings with Dimensions

CHAPTER 19 AUTOTEST Appendix 8 - Summary of Requirements

A Summary of Key Requirements

Note: Chapter 7 Technical Regulations applies in addition to App 3 of this Chapter. * Unlimited when Driver holds a Full RTA Licence.

Motorsport UK 2025 National Competition Rules Chapter 19 Appendix 8 - Summary of Requirements 696

CHAPTER 20 CROSS COUNTRY

Appendix 11 - Charts and Diagrams

Car Rental

Airport Parking

Automotive Destination

Charities

Brakes

Control Fuels

Control Systems

Dash Cams

Data Logging

Driver Coaching

Electronics

Engine Control Units

Esports

Experiences

Ferry Travel

FHR Systems

Fire Extinguishers

Food

Fuel Analysis

Fuels

Garage Equipment Hotels

Insurance

Helmets

Karting

Lubricants

Motorhomes

Motorsport Race Circuits

Motosport Merchandise

Motosport Products

Oil

Precision Engineering

Rally Plates/Signs

Retail

Roll Bars/Cages

Seatbelts

Seats

Subscriptions

Suspension

Tools

Track Days

Tyres

Tyre Warmers

Wheels